ca cai - = ae! ye ora SOs Oe te ie ens <¢
eee Peck et Por at PE or A a hale ont PR a aad TEASE
SS FE AEP CE tin tL Ae Oe gre
hark act Sept ten peD ORE LER BELA L AALS AY
a gh Bes ah hash ameepcrel-
Lah np poets 8
Se aee
aidasd - tind
=e ey
a ie: agai
eae NAL FON
ps ate ANE ae RL PERE at ti
ae KOR :
z ete me
Bg
ee ees WS
Doph RIAL
- EA ah as pos NANT Sail TOS
‘G5 1924
9 nD,
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2022 with funding from
Princeton Theological Seminary Library
https://archive.org/details/progressofworldwO00glov_0
THE PROGRESS OF
WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
BY
Rey ROBERT. H. CLOVER, wp, eRe
Missionary in China for Eighteen Years; Foreign Missions
Secretary for Eight Years; Now Director of Missionary
Course in the Moody Bible Institute of Chicago
INTRODUCTION BY
DELAVAN L. PIERSON
EDITOR OF [I'he Missionary Review of the World
WITH MAPS
NEw SBP york
GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY
COPYRIGHT, 1924, |
BY GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY
* ee
OF WORLD-WIDE
Ve
To
MY WIFE
Truest helpmate through many years of united
missionary life and labor, and through trying
periods of separation entailed by my long
journeys afield in China and my later visits to
other distant mission lands,
This book is affectionately dedicated,
“The night lies dark upon the earth, and ewe have light;
So many have to grope their way, and we have sight;
One path is theirs and ours—of sin and care,
But we are borne along, and ¢hey their burden bear;
Footsore, heart-weary, faint ¢Aey on the way,
Mute in their sorrow, while we kneel and pray;
Glad are they of a stone on which to rest,
While we lie pillowed on the Father’s breast.
“Father, why is it that these millions roam,
And guess that that is Home, and urge their way?
Is it enough to keep the door ajar,
In hope that some may see the gleam afar,
And guess that that is Home, and urge their way
To reach it, haply, somehow and some day?
May not J go, and lend them of my light?
May not mine eyes be unto them for sight?
May not the brother-love T'’Zy love portray?
And news of Home make Home less far away?”
—Rev. R. Wricut Hay
BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION
The story of the world-wide progress of Christian mis-
sions is more wonderful than are tales of Oriental magic.
It is almost unbelievable that a little group of obscure men
and women, belonging to a small and subject people in an
insignificant land on the shore of the Mediterranean, could,
without military forces, prestige, money or elaborate or-
ganization, grow until they have enlisted in their ranks
one-third of the earth’s population. It is still more won-
derful that this little band were the followers of a despised,
rejected and condemned Leader, who left’ with them only
the inspiration of His life and teachings, the command to
go and to preach His message and the promise of His power
and presence.
The story of the carrying out of this commission includes
the exploration of unknown and hostile territory, the mas-
tery of thousands of strange languages and dialects, the
conversion of many primitive and savage peoples, the build-
ing of hospitals for the ministry of healing for both body
and soul, the establishment of thousands of schools in all
quarters of the globe for the education of mind and heart,
and the development of natural resources and of industries
for the temporal welfare of men. This is the story of a
victorious conflict against slavery, superstition, idolatry,
drunkenness and all forms of personal and social sins; the
story of the marvelous metamorphosis of individuals from
savagery to sainthood, and the transformation of whole
communities from a menace into a blessing to mankind.
All material and human forces have been commandeered
and made to contribute to these results, but the work has
been accomplished, not through physical might or human
intelligence and energy, but by the spiritual power given to
the messengers of the crucified and risen Redeemer. It is
no wonder, therefore, that even a brief study of “The
Progress of World-wide Missions” should be full of fas-
vii
viii BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION
cination as a record of God’s work in the world. This
study suggests many inviting by-paths for further investi-
gation.
Few men are better qualified to record this history of
Christian missions than is the author of the present volume.
Dr. Glover has an international background. He was born
and educated in Canada; has lived much of his life in the
United States; was, for eighteen years, a missionary in
China; traveled over one hundred thousand miles in foreign
lands visiting missions in Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Indo-
China, India, Africa, the Near East and Latin America.
He has had experience both as a home and a foreign mis-
sionary, as a missionary executive, teacher and lecturer, so
that he has obtained both a theoretical and practical under-
standing of missions and their problems. His medical and
theological training have combined to give him a compre-
hensive knowledge of God as revealed in nature, in history
and in the Bible.
As might be expected, Dr. Glover has given us a valuable
compendium of Christian missions, packed full of interest-
ing and important information which might have been
expanded into a series of volumes. But there is here much
more than a skeleton of dry bones. There is human flesh
and blood and the Divine Spirit that gives life and power.
The book reveals an intelligent and confident faith in the
authority of the Scriptures and in the efficacy of the salva-
tion provided by Jesus Christ, the Eternal Son of God.
Those who read and study this volume will find here
missionary history recorded and interpreted as “His Story,”
and will be inspired with a desire to have a larger part in
helping to carry out the program of God for the redemp-
tion of mankind.
DELAVAN L. Pierson.
PREDAGH
The author did not set out to write a book. The present
volume has grown out of outline studies prepared for his
own classes in Missions. He has yielded to the repeated
requests of his students, and of others who shared the
studies in pamphlet form, that they might be made more
widely available in permanent book form.
The volume makes no pretense of furnishing a complete
account of Christian Missions. It merely attempts to sketch
in simple outline the development and extension of the mis-
sionary enterprise from apostolic times to the present day,
with emphasis upon some of the events and characters of
outstanding importance and inspiration. It is designed pri-
marily as a textbook for use in institutions and mission
study groups, where the object sought is some familiarity
with the missionary enterprise in general, without particular
reference to any one section of the Church. But it has been
the author’s aim to give to the book a popular rather than
a technical tone, as to its subject matter and style, and thus
to make it adaptable and interesting to the individual reader
as well. |
Book references at the foot of the page and a condensed
Bibliography at the end of the book are given to facilitate
further research. Questions for review are appended to
each chapter, and outline maps are inserted to aid the
student in following the geographical expansion of Missions
as traced in the successive chapters.
The question of the place statistics should occupy has
caused some perplexity, because of the desire on the one
hand to satisfy those who seek concrete and detailed in-
formation, and the fear on the other hand of making the
book heavy with a lot of dry figures and tables. The aim
has been to strike a happy medium in this matter,
A uniform summary of mission statistics at the end of
each chapter was at first planned, but this was later felt to
1x
x PREFACE
be unsatisfactory because of the fact that the statistics avail-
able for the different fields are far from uniform, whether
-in their classification, their date or their interpretation. The
latest complete figures, contained in World Statistics of
Christian Missions, published in 1916, are already in many
instances far from accurate because of the marked develop-
ment of the work as well as the drastic world changes which
have taken place since they were compiled.
In the case of such fields as India, China and Japan,
which publish Year Books of their own, brief up-to-date
statistical summaries have been given, but in other cases,
like Africa and Latin America, where many separate fields
are involved, this has been found impracticable.
General figures such as areas, populations, etc., are based
upon the latest edition of the Statesman’s Year Book
(1923), except where data from more direct sources may
have been available. Round numbers have frequently been
substituted for exact ones as being easier to remember.
As regards the geographical scope of the book, obviously
some limits have had to be imposed. No attempt, therefore,
has been made to deal with the great field for evangelical
missions in European countries to-day, nor yet with the
work among Indians, immigrants and other special classes
in the United States and Canada. The Arctic regions, com-
prising Alaska, Hudson Bay, Labrador and Greenland, have
been omitted because these areas have been already largely
evangelized, and the task which remains within them is in
the hands of the home churches of America and Denmark.
For the same reason Australia and New Zealand have not
been included in the chapter on Oceania, since the evangeli-
zation of the diminishing remnants of the aborigines of
Australia and the Maoris of New Zealand is now being
cared for by the various churches of those lands. All the
above areas and constituencies fall more properly under the
head of Home Missions, and together they furnish ample
material for a separate volume.
It is hardly necessary to state that much of the material
incorporated in the present volume has been drawn from
other books, of which the number consulted must have been
well over a hundred. Wherever quotations have been made
acknowledgment is given in footnotes.
PREFACE xi
The author’s heartfelt thanks are due in particular, and
are here tendered, to two esteemed friends—to Mr. Delavan
L. Pierson, Editor of The Missionary Review of the W orld,
who has painstakingly read through the manuscript, made
corrections and given valuable counsel, and to Rev. J. E.
Jaderquist of New York, who by his sympathy, suggestions
and practical help in a number of ways has contributed no
little to the task of preparing the volume for publication.
If the Lord may be pleased to use this book in some
measure to deepen missionary conviction and quicken the
pulse of missionary effort, in this strategic hour of unprece-
dented missionary opportunity combined with vast mission-
ary need still existing, the author will be profoundly grateful.
Rospert H, GLOVER.
Chicago, February, 1924.
sade
tel)
7 *~
oa
ee
>
|
he
'
¥
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION BY DELAVAN L. PIERSON j y
AUTHOR’S PREFACE . j ; f ; s : A
PERIODS OF CHRISTIAN MISSIONS .
PART I: Rise and Development
CHAPTER
I: INTRODUCTORY
I]:
III:
IV:
Vis
Christian Missions De nnedie wie ianaey Motivese or he ‘Mis-
sionary Idea in the Old Testament.
PERIOD OF APOSTOLIC MISSIONS
Apostolic Missionary Principles—Apostolic Missionary Meth-
ods—Apostolic Missionary Progress.
PERIOD OR BARLY CHURCH / MISSIONS
Extension—Missionary Centers—Growth and Influence—Per-
secutions.
PERIOD OF EARLY EUROPEAN MISSIONS .
The Church at Home and Missionary Effort Abroad—Ulfilas
—Martin of Tours—Patrick—Columba—Augustine—Colum-
banus—Willibrord—Boniface—The Rise and Spread of Mo-
hammedanism.,
;: PERIOD.OF THE MIDDLE AGES...
Direct Missionary Dea eae oN Geaauee en earns
Lief the Lucky—Otto, Bishop of Bamberg—Cyril and Me-
thodius—Conversion of the Russians—The Crusades—Ray-
mond Lull—The Monastic Orders—Benedictines—Franciscans
—Dominicans—Jesuits.
PERIOD OF THE REFORMATION
Relation of Reformation to Missions—Attitude of Berea
tion Leaders—Translation and Circulation of the Bible—Active
Missionary Efforts—Separation of Protestant and Romanist
Efforts—Francis Xavier—Colonial Interests and Missions—
Huguenot Expedition to Brazil.
xill
PAGE
Vil
ix
+ XVili
2I
30
AI
48
58
XiV
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
VII: PERIOD OF THE EARLY MISSIONARY SOCIETIES
Influence of Revival of Apostolic Faith upon Missions—Von
Welz, the Missionary Agitator—The Pietist Leaders and
Training School—The Danish-Halle Mission to India—
Ziegenbalg, Plutschau, Schwartz—Hans Egede, the Apostle to
Greenland—Zinzendorf*and the Moravians—Missions to North
American Indians—Roger Williams—John Eliot—The May-
hews—David Brainerd—Roman Catholic Efforts.
PART IT: World-wide Extension
Milter RLODI OK MODERN MISSIONS gyn tes icin.
IX
i
XI:
Preparatory Forces—Discovery and Commerce—Invention—
The Renaissance—Religious Movements—Prayer—“The Fa-
ther of Modern Missions.”
: INDIA
General Features—The Land—Climate—Resources—The Peo-
ple—Racial and Religious Divisions—Historical Résumé—Mo-
gul Empire—East India Companies—Assumption by English
Crown—Missionary Work—Early Efforts—Carey, Marshman,
Ward—Martyn—Duff—Heber—Early British Societies—Gen-
esis of American Missions—Judson—Scudder—Later Societies
—Mass Movements—Policies and Methods—Medical Missions
—Mission to Lepers—Special Work for Women—Prominent
Converts—Opposing Forces—Caste—Heathen Religion—Mod-
ern Cults—The Unfinished Task—A New Political Situation—
India’s Appeal—Statistical Summary.
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA .
AssaM—BurMA—Area and Divisions—The People—Karen
Tradition—Missions—S1amM—The Land—The People—Ad-
vanced Conditions—Missions—Southern Field—Northern Field
—Neglected Eastern Siam—The Tai Race—MALAy PENIN-
SULA—Missions—FRENCH INpDo-CHINA—The Land—-The Peo-
ple—French Influence—Missions.
CEE ING lt Rib) Syne ce Pa ysis
General Features—Area and Divisions—Physical Features—
Resources—Population—Antiquity—Qualities and Achieve-
ments — Religions — Confucianism —Taoism—Buddhism—Mo-
hammedanism—Missionary Work—The Nestorians—Early
Romanist Efforts—Later Romanist Activities—Protestant Mis-
sions—First Period—Morrison, Milne, Medhurst—Gutzlaff—
American Pioneers—Bridgman, Abeel, Wells Williams, Dr.
Peter Parker—Second Period—Opium War—Influx of Socie-
ties—Legege, Lockhart, Hobson, Kerr, Ashmore, Burns—Third
Period—Arrow War—Anti-foreign Riots—Tai Ping Rebellion
—The Great Famine—Griffth John—W. A, P. Martin—Gil-
PAGE
74
93
I20
130
CONTENTS XV
CHAPTER van PAGE
XI: CHINA (Continued)
mour—Neyius, Faber, Hill, Moule, Smith, Allen, Richards,
Gibson, Baller—China Inland Mission—Hudson Taylor—D. Ke
Hoste—Christian and Missionary Alliance—Fourth Period—
Chino-Japanese War—Boxer Uprising—Fifth Period—Chinese
Revolution—Changed Conditions—Christian Progress—Begin-
ning of New Epoch—Outstanding Chinese Leaders—Unoccu-
pied Territory.
XII: JAPAN . ° * e ° e = 152
General Peatireseeerion and Gre phosical Pose!
Climate—Resources and Industries—Population—The People
—Traits of Character—Historical Résumé—Religions—Shinto-
ism, Buddhism, Confucianism—Missionary Work—Early Ro-
manist Efforts—Xavier—Persecution of Christians—Period of
Exclusion—The Door Reopened—Commodore Perry—The
Protestant Vanguard—Noble Pioneers—Hepburn, Brown,
Verbeck—Early Difficulties—‘Kumamoto Band’—Neesima—
Growth and Development—Loyalty of Christians—Forms of
Mission Work—Newspaper Evangelism—New Christian Lead-
ers—Evangelistic Need—The New Industrial Maelstrom—
Japan’s Influence over Asia—America’s Responsibility—For-
mosa—General Features—Missionary Work—Dr. George L.
Mackay—Statistical Summary.
POLL SWAPS UATE oa slice iit Sho eM eer mnaNmete a Lae
General PE neecnee | aeiicn ba Size—The Country—
The People—The Language—Religions—Shamanism, Bud-
dhism, Confucianism—Historical Résumé—The First Treaties
—Japan’s Ascendancy—Missionary Work—Roman Catholic
Missions—Protestant Beginnings—Ross, Heron, Allen, Under-
wood, Appenzeller, Scranton—Policies and Methods—Bible
Classes—School Work—Growth and Expansion—A Sample
Station—Testimony of Visitors—The Great Revival—Korean
Christians—A High Conception of Discipleship—Love for
God’s Word—Self-propagation and Self-support—Sacrificial
Giving—Foreign Missionary Efforts—The Independence Move-
ment—Changed Japanese Administration—The Missionary
Outlook—Statistical Summary.
eee tea COUN DN SEEM Gre Chet | 6 aia ty \teh Sots 199
General Features—Area and Population—Past ved Piceent
Interest—Strategic Importance—Trade—Religion—Politics—
The Different Races—Turks—Kurds—Arabs—Syrians—Jews
—Persians—Egyptians—Turkey’s Career—The War in the
Near East—Turkish War Atrocities—Missionary Work—The
Vanguard—Fiske, Parsons—Pioneer Problems—The Religious
Situation—Occupation of the Field—Advance and Develop-
ment—Mission Schools and Colleges—Mission Presses and
Literature—Peculiar Difficulties—Neglected Areas—Present
Situation and Outlook, Political and Missionary—The Call of
the Near East.
XVi CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
XV: AFRICA SAVER LAH ancy goa PR TRL ae eh hereon
General Features—Names—Size—Physical Features—Climate
—Natural Resources—The People—Racial Groups—Religions
—Fetishism—Early History—Discovery and Exploration—Fa-
mous Explorers—Missionary Work—Early Roman Catholic
Efforts—The Protestant Vanguard—George Schmidt—NorTH
ArricAa—Egypt—Egyptian Sudan—Barbary States—Abyssinia
—SoutH Arrica—Moffat—Livingstone—Mackenzie, Shaw,
Coillard, Stewart, Tyler, Andfew Murray, Spencer Walton—
Societies—East AND CENTRAL AFRIcCA—Krapf and Rebmann—
The Advance Inland—Mackay of Uganda—A Wonderful Mis-
sion—Hannington—A Group of Great Missions—Africa Inland
Mission—West ArricA—The Slave Trade—Christian Coloniz-
ing Experiments—Distribution of Missions—Some Worthy
Pioneers—Cox, Comber, Grenfell, Richards, Good, Mary
Slessor—Adaptive Methods of Work—Prominent Christian
Converts—Neglected Areas—Roman Catholic Opposition—Op-
posing Forces from Without—The Moslem, Menace—The
White Peril—Challenge to Christianity—-Mapacascar—Loca-
tion and Size—The People—Area—Missions—Persecution—
Ranavalona I—Turning of the Tide—Ranavalona II—Mission-
ary Reénforcements—Results of French Subjugation.
XVI: LATIN AMERICA a Gk weh Pig Mane a rr
The Americas—“Latin Americans’”—Racial Classification—
Political Divisions—SoutH AMERICA—Names—Size—Physical
Features—Climate—Resources and JIndustries—The Early
Races—European Discovery and Conquest—Three Centuries of
Iberian Rule—Revolutionary Leaders—The Republics—Social
Features—Moral Conditions—Romanism on Trial—Missionary
Work—Early Roman Catholic Missions—First Protestant Ef-
forts—The Lancasterian Schools—Allen Gardiner—Early Trail
Blazers—Kidder, Kalley, Simonton, Trumbull, Pratt—The
Bible Societies—Present Missionary Occupation—The Indians
—CeEnTRAL AMeErICA—Divisions—Area and Population—Spirit-
ual Neglect and Need—Inadequate Missionary Forces—Strate-
gic Centers—Mexico—Area and Population—Resources and
Features—Evangelistic Opportunity—Inadequate Missionary
Occupation—Neglected Indians—New Cooperative Plans—
Latin West Inpigs—Extent and Population—Resources—So-
cial, Moral and Religious Conditions—Missionary Work—
OtHER West INpIrs—French Islands—British Islands—Latin
AMERICA’S SUPREME NEED,
AVITOCHANTA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS] (0a oueane
General Features—Divisions—Wide Distribution—Population
—Physical Features—The Island Races—Social Conditions—
Religion—Contact with Civilization—Political Aggression—So-
ciety Istanps—London Missionary Society Pioneers—Early
Hardships—Opposing Forces—Turning of the Tide—French
Occupation—Frj1 IsLanps—Population—The People—Mission-
ary Beginnings—Strongholds of Satan—Wonderful Trans-
formation—New Hesripes—Extent and Population—Three
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
XVII: OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS (Continued)
Great Missionaries—Williams, Geddie, Paton—MErELANESIA—
Bishop Patteson—James Chalmers—Hawaman IsLanps—Dis-
covery—Size and Population—Physical Features—Early Con-
ditions—How the Gospel Entered—Idolatry Banished—Royal
Converts—Kapiolani—The Great Awakening—The Pentecost
at Hilo—Growth and Extension—Micronesia—Annexation to
U. S. A—PuuitipPpIne IstAnps—Location, Area and Popula-
tion—Physical Features and Resources—The People—His-
torical Résumé—Old and New Régimes—The Roman Catholic
Friars—Evangelical Missions—Rapidity of Results—Accessory
Methods—Unreached Sections—America’s Stewardship—Ma-
LAYs1A—Location—Population and Races—The Missionary
Problem—Mohammedans—Chinese—Native Heathen Tribes—
Occupation—Unevangelized Territory—CoNcLUSION.
XVII: THE JEWS
Nimber and Dakihnor eb encuieeoproptees ed rept
inence—Religious Conditions—Orthodox and Reform Jews—
Jewish Missions—London Jews’ Society—Methods of Work—
Results Achieved—Honored Converts—The Task Remaining—
The Call to Advance.
xix: UNOCCUPIED FIELDS
The Regions Beyond—A Moral Obieation “nuerold Rien
—The Heart of Asia—Mongolia—Chinese Turkistan—Tibet
—Nepal and Bhutan—Afghanistan—Siberia—Baluchistan—
Russian Central Asia—The Heart of Africa—The Heart of
South America—Causes of Non-occupation—Facing the Prob-
lem—Corrective Measures.
XX: THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK
Salient Features at the Field End—Favorable Features—Un-
favorable Features—Vital Factors at the Home End.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
INDEX
MAPS
I: ROMAN EMPIRE: to illustrate First and Second Periods
of Missions (Chapters I] and III)...
II: OLD WORLD: to illustrate Third and Fourth ue Ne
Missions (Chapters TV and V).. . . ,
TIT: ASIA
Rivest Le A. :
V: LATIN AMERICA . Ee a SCR aT AN Hh UE
LOE LN eat EP Ppt ood Sat Eo ice 10 tay dr 9 ee aha i Airey nner ht. @
XVil
PAGE
337
353
373
381
31
49
97
2290
265
299
PERIODS OF CHRISTIAN MISSIONS
For convenience of study the history of Christian Missions
may be divided into the following periods :—
qe
181
Til.
WIT.
Period of Apostolic Missions. Ist Century.
From the Ascension of Christ to the Death of John (33-
100).
Period of Early Church Missions. 2nd and 3rd Cen-
Lures,
From the Death of John to Constantine (100-313).
Period of Early European Missions. 4th to 8th Cen-
turies.
From Constantine to Charlemagne (313-800).
Period of the Middle Ages. 9th to 15th Centuries.
From Charlemagne to Luther (800-1517).
Period of the Reformation. 16th and 17th Centuries.
From Luther to the Halle Missionaries (1517-1650).
. Period of the Early Missionary Societies. 18th Century.
From the Halle Missionaries to Carey (1650-1792).
Period of Modern Missions. 19th and 2oth Centuries.
From Carey to the Present Day (1792- ys
Xviii
PART I: Rise and Development
THE PROGRESS OF
WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTORY
Christian Missions Defined.
To the question ‘“‘What is meant by ‘Christian Missions’ ?”
various answers might be given. The following definition
is quoted as being at once simple and clear:
“Christian Missions’ is the Proclamation of the Gospel
to the Unconverted Everywhere According to the Command
of Christ.
“Missions” comes from the Latin mitto—“I send.”
ARABIA
MAP I: ROMAN EMPIRE: To illustrate missionary extension during the Periods of Apostolic Missions and Early Church
Missions (Chapters II and III)
32. THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
permanent, and we venture to affirm that the actual lines
pursued by Christ and the apostles will be found, with rea-
sonable adaptation, still to be the best and most effective
to-day.
Let us first take note of some missionary principles and
methods taught or illustrated in the New Testament, and
then outline briefly missionary progress during this Period.
Apostolic Missionary Principles.
1. The AIM of Missions is to make Jesus Christ known
to all men as the only Saviour from sin. :
(a) Itis a distinctive aim—and that spiritual. Nothing
is more apparent in Christ’s and His apostles’ ministry than
this, but it needs strong emphasis to-day. Our work, like
theirs, is neither commercial, political, nor even philan-
thropic. Our aim is not the reconstruction of the state or
of society, even though our message may exert powerful in-
fluence along these lines. Let such accessory results follow
as they may; it is for us to hold faithfully to our distinctive
aim of preaching Jesus Christ.
(b) It is an unique aim. It claims that all men are
in a condition of desperate need, for which Christ is the
only remedy; that all religions, even at their best, fail
utterly of providing salvation from sin; that Christ is indis-
pensable; that outside of Him there is no salvation either
here or hereafter. Missionary effort that is not rooted in
strong conviction on this point can never be what it ought
to be. Neither habitual contact with heathen life, nor yet
the admission of helpful teaching and even fragments of
spiritual truth in certain of the ethnic religions, should ever
be allowed to dim the missionary’s realization of this solemn
fact.
(c) It is a determining aim. It should rule our spirits
and control our methods as with a hand of iron. There
should be no slipping into vague conceptions of duty or
drifting into promiscuous projects. All methods employed
should be held insistently to the one supreme end. Alas for
too many instances of the miscarriage and failure of mis-
sionary enterprises through their becoming absorbed in the
method to the losing sight of the original aim and their ulti-
mate substitution of the means for the end!
PERIOD OF APOSTOLIC MISSIONS 33
2. The POLICY of Missions 1s the wndest diffusion, mn
contrast to any narrower delimitation.
This is everywhere apparent in our Lord’s ministry, both
in precept and in practice. “The field is the world,” “Go ye
into all the world,” “to all nations,’ “to every creature,”
“unto the uttermost part of the earth’—such are His own
words. His personal example was no less emphatic. Wit-
ness His constant movements from place to place, His jour-
neys from one extreme of Palestine to the other, His three
distinct circuits throughout Galilee, His visits to Samaria
and the coasts of Tyre and Sidon. When a Sabbath’s
strenuous work in Capernaum had created for Him an
unique opportunity, His deliberate words to His disciples are,
“Let us go into the next towns that I may preach there also,
for therefore came I forth.’’ He sends out first the twelve
and later the seventy, two by two, “into every city and place,
whither he himself would come.” In despised Samaria He
bids His exclusive Jewish disciples lift up their eyes and
behold their spiritual harvest field. In the parable of the
Good Samaritan He strikes a blow at provincialism by inter-
preting the term “neighbor” to mean the man who needs
help, whoever or wherever he be. He makes the miracle of
feeding the five thousand a missionary parable in itself,
directing an equal and impartial distribution of bread to
near and far alike, until “they were all filled.”
The same policy is repeatedly illustrated in the Acts. The
first Pentecost after Christ’s death sees representatives of a
dozen or more countries gathered providentially at Jerusalem
to hear “every man in his own tongue” the new gospel mes-
sage. A little later God uses persecution to scatter
abroad the tardy church so that they “went -every-
where preaching the Word.” Philip is divinely called away
from the Samaria revival to minister to the Ethiopian
eunuch and thus extend the witness of the gospel into
Africa. Bigoted Peter is despatched to Gentile Cornelius at
Cesarea, with results as vital to himself and the other apos-
tles as to Cornelius. Antioch displaces Jerusalem as the
Christian center because of its more liberal spirit and wider
outreach. The conservative Jewish leaders give place to
Paul, the apostle to the Gentiles, and the real foreign mis-
sionary movement is launched. Even after this, God has
34 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
to correct the persistent tendency to narrower vision and
effort by halting Paul in his second missionary tour of Asia
Minor. A man of Macedonia beckons him to regions yet
untouched, and God turns the tide of evangelization west-
ward into Europe, the cradle of modern civilization. Paul
himself, in a career that knows no parallel in missionary
annals, eventually reaches Italy and even Spain.
Is it not incumbent upon the church at home and mission-
aries abroad to examine their policy of work as to whether
it squares with the New Testament in insisting on giving
precedence to direct and aggressive evangelism and pressing
ever onward and outward to “the regions beyond” so long
as there remain anywhere areas and populations still wholly
unevangelized? There will always be the excuse of much
to do nearer home and apparently too few to do it. Yet this
cannot alter the fact of the irreparable loss to those left
wholly destitute, nor yet the fact that an impartial and unde-
layed offer of salvation to all men is the Divine command.
The terms of our Lord’s commission make the first great
task of the church to be the evangelization of all men rather
than the conversion of any one favored section or the educa-
tion of any one preferred class.
3. The RESPONSIBILITY of Missions rests upon
every member of Christ.
The command “GO YE”’ did not exhaust itself upon the
little group that first heard it from the lips of their risen
Lord, but is authoritatively repeated whenever and wherever
a new company of believers is formed.
The Apostolic Age furnishes a fine example on this point.
We read of the Christians in Jerusalem that ‘‘they were
ALL scattered abroad, except the Apostles; therefore they
went everywhere preaching the Word.’ Of the Thessa-
lonian converts it is said that “from them sounded forth the
Word of God not only in Macedonia and Achaia, but also
in every place,” so that the Apostles “needed not to speak
anything.’ As to missionary giving, the Macedonian
churches in deep poverty “abounded unto the riches of their
liberality.” With such conditions, little wonder that the
work moved forward and results were what they were.
It is quite true that the leadership was invested then, as
now, in a distinctive class, divinely called and qualified by
PERIOD OF APOSTOLIC MISSIONS 35
special spiritual gifts. But these official workers exercised
their true function not by monopolizing the work, but by
leading and “perfecting the saints (the entire church) unto
the work of ministering” (Eph. 4:11, 12 rR. v.). It wasa
time preéminently of individual effort, of general consecra-
tion to the task of proclaiming the gospel. Some one aptly
terms it the “LLaymen’s Missionary Movement of the First
Century.” “Of missionaries in the modern sense of the
term there were few; of those who devoted their full time
and strength to the work of preaching there were few; but
of those who made their trade, their profession, their every-
day occupation, of whatever sort, the means of extending
their faith, there was a multitude.” *
No principle is of more vital importance to-day, whether
to the church at home or on the mission field. The success
or failure of world evangelization is wrapped up in it, for
as long as the spread of the gospel in any land depends solely
upon a corps of official workers, however efficient and
earnest, the outlook is hopeless. The only hope les in
response to the truth—“‘every Christian a missionary.”
Apostolic Missionary Methods.
Principles are fundamental ; methods grow out of them by
a natural process. If we have been guided to a right selec-
tion of principles these will be productive of fruitful sug-
gestion as to proper methods. Space forbids more than the
briefest mention of methods employed in New Testament
times. The student can readily and profitably develop for
himself the points cited.
I. Oval Preaching—the supreme method for all time.
“He ordained twelve . . . that he might send them forth
to preach” (Mk. 3:14). “They went forth and preached
everywhere’ (Mk. 16:20). “It pleased God by the foolish-
ness of preaching to save them which believed’? (1 Cor.
1:21). Is there not a significance in the fact that the Holy
Spirit at Pentecost assumed the form of tongues, as be-
tokening the part that preaching was to play in the Church
Age? The direct and immediate result of Spirit-indited
preaching was 3,000 souls saved that day and 5,000 more
1“The Missionary Enterprise,” p. 14.
36 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
a little ‘later... (See ,also Acts 5: 42; 8:4) 5335,040,
13553 20:81 3.0) Lim. 2275.2) Cin bc eee ee
LE
cee is need for a revival of the preaching idea, and for
a deeper sense of the glory and dignity of simple gospel
preaching. Would that God would give to every mission
field, from among her own sons, preachers like Wesley, and
Whitefield, and Spurgeon and Moody—great-souled, im-
passioned, convincing—and through them show forth the
true power of preaching!
Where shall we preach? From Christ’s day to ours this
question has given little difficulty wherever and whenever
the true evangelistic spirit has been present. Jesus Himself
preached in the Jewish synagogue, on the mountain side,
by the Lake of Galilee, at Samaria’s well. The apostles
preached in the temple and synagogue, in house, market-
place, amphitheater, the courts of prisons and the audience
hall of a Roman governor. Later evangelists and mission-
aries have preached in English barns and meadows, in Welsh
mines and workshops, in American theaters and city slums,
in Chinese teashops and temple squares, in Indian bazaars
and at Tibetan fairs, in accustomed and unaccustomed places
—in a word, everywhere.
Especially would we emphasize open-air preaching, a
method adopted by Jesus and valuable not only for His own
time and conditions, but for every age and land. It is a
bad sign when any church abandons it, no matter how good
its chapel equipment may be.
2. Strategic Centers. Such centers as Jerusalem, Caper-
naum, Antioch, Ephesus, Corinth and Rome stand out far
too plainly in New Testament Missions for us to escape the
lesson of the importance of similar centers to-day, with their
vast populations and powerful radiating influences.
3. Iteration. Witness Jesus’ successive Galilean cir-
cuits and Paul’s missionary tours. Such work still demands
its full share of attention along with the centers, and must
be systematic and sustained to yield the full results. It has
two ends in view: (a) the proclaiming of the gospel to the
unsaved, and (b) the visitation of groups of converts for
fea and oversight (Cf. Acts 8:14, 25; 11: 22-26;
15420)8 :
PERIOD OF APOSTOLIC MISSIONS 37
4. Personal Work and Social Intercourse. Looking
again at the Master’s ministry, one has only to think of
Nicodemus, the woman at Sychar’s well, Zacchzeus, the rich
young ruler, the wedding feast at Cana, Simon the Pharisee’s
dinner, and the home at Bethany, to be impressed with the
prominent place these methods hold in missions. (See also
PCS LO ec eLO nT 3-15 STs 2) ea eo eet 220) 20,123.)
Nowhere do conditions and customs lend themselves more
happily to such measures than on the mission fields to-day.
But these social opportunities need to be seized and held
faithfully to the spiritual ends in view, or they may easily
become profitless and even a snare.
5. Literature and Letter-Writing. What are the four
Gospels but written accounts of the gospel message designed
to supplement verbal preaching when the wide extension of
the field of missionary operations required such added
means? What were the New Testament Epistles originally
but letters from missionaries to mission churches and indi-
vidual converts at a distance? These records took perma-
nent form as the New Testament Scriptures and led the way
to the vast output of printed Scriptures, and later on of
tracts and other literature as well, which constitute so effec-
tive and indispensable a factor in the missionary enterprise
to-day. Nor would it be easy to estimate the value of the
ministry of personal letter-writing on the part of the mis-
sionary as a means of help and blessing, both to believers
and unbelievers.
6. Training of Native Workers. John the Baptist
began such work. Our Lord made it His own greatest
ministry, as we have already seen. Paul selected and trained
younger men, notably Timothy and Titus, and urged them
in turn to do the same (2 Tim. 2:2). This is to be regarded
as the crowning missionary method, inasmuch as the mis-
Sionary’s true aim should not be to make himself indispens-
able, but rather the very reverse, by raising up native agents
to take his place. The missionary who successfully does this
may be said to work by multiplication instead of mere addi-
tion. It should be noted, too, that our Lord’s method as a
trainer was to maintain the closest connection between class
studies and the actual work. Didactic instruction should
always be interspersed liberally with practice in chapel
38 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
preaching, personal work and itineration, and preferably
under the leadership of the teacher himself.
Apostolic Missionary Progress.
The authentic record:of missionary progress during this
Period is to be found in the New Testament itself, to which
record secular history adds its corroborative testimony.
1. Extent of Propagation. The countries mentioned in
Acts as represented by the company assembled in Jerusalem
on the occasion of the first Pentecost after Christ’s ascension
indicate something of the extensity of gospel witness-bear-
ing even thus early in the Period. We read of “Parthians
and Medes, and Elamites, and the dwellers in Mesopotamia,
and in Judzea, and Cappadocia, in Pontus, and Asia, Phrygia,
and Pamphylia, in Egypt, and in the parts of Libya about
Cyrene, and strangers of Rome, Jews and proselytes, Cretes
and Arabians” (Acts 2:9-11). A glance at the map shows
the territory here mentioned to include the entire area now
known as the Near East, from Persia on the east to the
Mediterranean on the west and Arabia and Egypt on the
south, with the addition of Rome far to the west in Europe.
Other passages attest the extension of the field of mission-
ary operations still farther, for we read of Barnabas of
Cyprus (Acts 4:36), Nicolas of Antioch (Acts 6:5), the
Ethiopian eunuch (Acts 8:27), and Ananias of Damascus
(NCES O72 7 50))4
Then we have the record in Acts of the missionary activi-
ties of Peter in Judea and Philip in Samaria, and the much
more extensive journeys of the Apostle Paul. These jour-
neys are summed up by Paul himself in Romans 15: 19
in one comprehensive statement—‘‘from Jerusalem, and
round about unto Illyricum,”’ which makes them cover Pales-
tine, Syria, Asia Minor, Greece, Macedonia and the terri-
tory on the eastern shore of the Adriatic Sea. Subsequently
this great missionary’s career extended to Italy, and there
is good reason to believe that he even lived to see the ful-
fillment of his desire to visit Spain, at the western confines
of Europe (Rom. 15:24). Some authorities take 1 Peter
5:13 as evidence that the Apostle Peter labored at Babylon
in Mesopotamia. .
So wonderfully effective was the missionary propaganda
eS ee
PERIOD OF APOSTOLIC MISSIONS 39
of this brief Period that before the death of the Apostles
churches had been planted in all influential centers of Asia
Minor and Greece, and in Rome itself, and few parts of
the vast Roman Empire had not at least heard of the new
faith. “By the end of the first century Christ had been
preached from Babylon to Spain (3,000 miles), from Alex-
andria to Rome, by a Greek-speaking Church. It was a
witnessing church. The word ‘witness’ occurs in the New
Testament 175 times.”
The great centers of missionary propagation during this
Period were, in turn, Jerusalem, Antioch, Ephesus and
Alexandria. The greatest missionary was the Apostle
Paul. The first Christian martyr was Stephen.
2. Number of Converts. Not only the extent of propa-
gation, but also the results achieved must be taken into
account in appraising missionary work. While the New
Testament furnishes no complete numerical summary of
the missionary results of this Period, it bears abundant
testimony to the fruitful character of the work done. Acts
2:41 tells of 3,000 souls being won to Christ on the day of
Pentecost, and Acts 4: 4 tells of 5,000 more very soon after-
wards. The subsequent chapters of Acts make frequent
mention of other conversions, and the repeated use of the
word “multitudes” is evidence of large accessions to the
Crem oto NCS GEA Ore 7: OF OL) TZ TO SAA a As
Peainied 12:24 etal)
The various epistles of the New Testament were written to
organized congregations of Christians scattered over the
wide area above outlined. On the basis of all the data
available it has been estimated that by the close of the
Apostolic Period the total number of Christian disciples
had reached half a million.
3. Quality of Converts. This is another important fea-
ture which enters into the appraisal of missionary results.
The Book of Acts and the New Testament Epistles throw
clear light upon the character of the Christian converts and
churches of the Apostolic Age. On the one hand, they bear
witness to the mighty power of the Holy Spirit upon indi-
viduals and assemblies, to the varied gifts and graces of
the Spirit in exercise among them, to keen discernment of
spiritual truth, to fervent praying, sacrificial giving and
40 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
heroic enduring of persecution for Christ’s sake. On the
other hand, they reveal moral weaknesses and lapses into
sin, doctrinal errors and subtle heresies, painful discord and
schism among the brethren.
All this goes to show. the admixture of true and false pro-
fessors, robust and feeble Christians in the missionary
churches from the very beginning. The Holy Spirit has
given a faithful record of both the bright and the dark
side of the early Church, for the comfort and encourage-
ment of missionaries in later times.
QUESTIONS
1. Divide Christian Missions into seven Periods, giving dates.
2. What missionary features were illustrated in Jesus’ personal
ministry and teaching?
3. What is the true aim of Missions, according to the New
Testament ?
4. What is the true policy of Missions as to breadth of opera-
tions, according to the New Testament?
re ane is this policy illustrated (a) in the Gospeis, (b) in the
cts:
6. Upon whom does missionary responsibility rest?
7. Give instances of how the New Testament Church met this
responsibility.
8. Mention six prominent missionary methods in the New Testa-
ment.
De a six prominent missionary centers during the Apostolic
eriod.
10. Indicate the geographical scope of missionary operations
during this Period.
11. What do we gather from the New Testament record as to
(a) the number, (b) the quality of the Christian converts during
this Period?
:
;
CHAPTER III
PERIOD OF EARLY CHURCH MISSIONS
FROM THE DEATH OF JOHN TO CONSTANTINE (100-313)
While the first century of Missions must ever stand in a
class by itself because of the personal life and ministry of
our blessed Master and His immediate disciples as its very
center and inspiration, yet, when due allowance has been
made for this unique fact, it may be said that the general
lines and features of the work during this earliest period
continued largely unchanged throughout the two centuries
which followed, which we have designated The Period of
the Early Church. Among the features to be noted are :—
Extension.
It would be erroneous to draw the conclusion from the
Acts and other New Testament references to missionary
operations of the time that only the few apostles and others
mentioned had an active share in the extension of the gospel.
Mark tells us that “they went forth and preached every-
where,’ and Luke says that “they that were scattered abroad
went everywhere preaching the word.’ The record of the
Acts serves merely as a sample. We have already noted the
wide scope of the gospel testimony in the Apostolic Period
as indicated by the list of countries represented in Jerusalem
at Pentecost. Persia, Arabia, Mesopotamia, Asia Minor,
Greece, Italy, Egypt and other parts of North Africa all
received the message. Nor should we conclude that this first
Pentecost was the only one from which seeds were scattered
into many distant parts to spring up and bear fruit.
The Period following the death of the apostles was not
one of great leaders so much as of many leaders. The whole
church was imbued with the spirit of witnessing, and in the
course of ordinary social intercourse, travel and commerce,
41
42 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
rather than by any extensive organized movement, the gospel —
spread far and wide, and little companies of believers sprang
up in many lands.
From Ephesus the work extended through Asia Minor,
and the seven Churches mentioned in the Apocalypse were
established and became self-supporting and self-propagat-
ing. The well-known letter of Pliny, Governor of Pontus
in Asia Minor, to the Emperor Trajan bears impressive
testimony to both the number and the character of Chris-
tians in that province. Connected with Syria during this
Period are such famous names as Ignatius, the writer of
epistles and martyr under Trajan, Justin Martyr, the
philosopher, Eusebius, the early Church historian, and a
little later, Jerome, the great scholar who produced the
Latin version of the Scriptures called the Vulgate.
In Egypt and North Africa Christianity became strongly
entrenched in such centers as Alexandria and Carthage, and
there is a touching story of its introduction into the court
of the queen of Abyssinia by two young Tyrian captives,
and the beginning therefrom of the Abyssinian Church
which even Mohammedanism failed to overcome.
Whatever of truth there may be in the tradition that
Thaddeus and Peter became missionaries to Persia, certain
it is that at Edessa, the modern Urfa, there was a strong
Christian community in the middle of the second century,
and that the king, Abgar, himself became a zealous Christian
and is claimed by the Armenians as their first leader in the
faith. There are notices of churches in Arabia in the early
part of the third century. It is authentic history that
Pantenus of Alexandria went to India about A.D. 190, in
response to messengers sent with an appeal for Christian
teachers, and that he found Christians there who possessed
a Hebrew Gospel of St. Matthew. Just after the close of
this Period there existed there about three hundred and fifty
flourishing churches.
Athens and Corinth early became strong Christian centers
in Greece, while Tacitus, the Roman historian, records that
multitudes of Christians abode in Rome. From that city
they spread northward through Italy into Gaul, where such
noted men as Ireneus and Pothinus, friends and disciples of
Polycarp, the disciple of John, introduced Christianity
PERIOD OF EARLY CHURCH MISSIONS 43
among the Franks and founded churches in Lyons, Vienne
and Paris. Others crossed the Rhine to the Germanic tribes,
and some went even to the British Isles.
Clement and Irenzus, in the first and second centuries
respectively, speak of the evangelization of Spain. In the
middle of the third century Cyprian of North Africa ad-
dresses a letter to a church in Spain, and so great was the
advance there that a gathering of nineteen bishops in
A.D. 306 is mentioned.
Missionary Centers.
Jerusalem, Antioch, Ephesus, Alexandria and Carthage
were successively, along with Rome, the great missionary
centers of the first three centuries.
Jerusalem, ever to be remembered as the starting point of
world-wide missions, retained its broad missionary character
only a short time, and then became merely the center of the
Church of the Circumcision, with the Apostle James as its
first Bishop.
Antioch, much more cosmopolitan, soon succeeded Jeru-
salem as the home base of missions, from which Paul started
on his three missionary tours. It became the patriarchate
of all the East till eclipsed by Constantinople, and shed its
light far and wide over Asia. It sent missionaries overland
through Persia to India and even remote China, and prom-
ised to conquer Central and Eastern Asia for Christ till
overwhelmed by Saracen and Tartar. Antioch, once a city
of half a million, is now a mere squalid village.
Ephesus won distinction as a missionary center through
the successive labors of Paul and John. In the fifth century
a council was held there to settle a bitter theological con-
troversy led by rival archbishops, Cyril of Alexandria and
Nestorius of Constantinople, the result of which was that
Nestorius became an exile and founded the Nestorian
church, which for five centuries was notable for its mission-
ary zeal and its devoted and successful efforts throughout
Asia.
Alexandria in turn eclipsed the cities already mentioned,
and became the intellectual center of the world and the most
aggressive and influential center of Christendom, with
Carthage as a second great center in Africa. They pro-
44 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
duced the ablest teachers and writers of this Period, the
best known being Clement, Origen, Tertullian, Cyprian and
Augustine. Specially worthy of mention here is the great
Catechumens’ School of Pantenus in Alexandria, which
served the combined purpose of the defense of the orthodox
faith against current heresy and of a training school for
missionaries—the first of its kind—-who went forth not only
into northwestern and eastern Africa, but also to Arabia,
India and Ceylon. Pantznus himself, its president, as
already noted, went to India about A.D. 180-190.
Growth and Influence.
The following quotations will serve to impress the fact of
the remarkable progress of the gospel during this Period,
and of the widespread and profound influence exerted by
its devoted adherents.
“There is no people, Greek or Barbarian, or any other
race, by whatsoever appellation or manner they may be
distinguished, however ignorant of art and agriculture,
whether they dwell in tents or wander about in covered
wagons, among whom prayers and thanksgivings are not
offered, in the name of the crucified Jesus, to the Father
and creator of all things.”—Justin Martyr (103-165).
“We are but of yesterday, and yet we already fill your
cities, islands, camps, your palace, senate, and forum. We
have left you only your temples.”—Tertullian (160-240).
“Tn all Greece and in all barbarous races within our world,
there are tens of thousands who have left their national laws
and customary gods for the law of Moses and the Word
of Jesus Christ; though to adhere to that Law is to incur
the hatred of idolaters and to have embraced that Word is
to incur the risk of death as well. And considering how, in
a few years and with no great store of teachers, in spite of
the attacks which have cost us life and property, the preach-
ing of that Word has found its way into every part of the
world, so that Greeks and Barbarians, wise and unwise,
adhere to the religion of Jesus—doubtless it is a work
greater than any work of man.’’—Origen (185-251).
“There flourished at that time many successors of the
apostles, who reared the edifice on the foundations which
they laid, continuing the work of preaching the gospel, and
————— eee
PERIOD OF EARLY CHURCH MISSIONS 45
scattering abundantly over the whole earth the wholesome
seed of the heavenly kingdom. For a very large number of
disciples, carried away by fervent love of the truth, which
the divine Word had revealed to them, fulfilled the command
of the Saviour to divide their goods among the poor. Then,
taking leave of their country, they filled the office of evan-
gelists, coveting eagerly to preach Christ and to carry the
glad tidings of God to those who had not heard the word
of faith. And after laying the foundations of the faith in
some remote and barbarous countries, establishing pastors
among them and confiding to them the care of those young
settlements, without stopping longer they hastened on to
other nations, attended by the grace and virtue of God.’—
Eusebius (266-340).
Accurate statements as to the actual number of Christians
at the close of this Period are obviously impossible. Esti-
mates by various authorities range from one-tenth to one-
twentieth of the entire population of the Roman Empire. In
A.D. 240, when Gregory Thaumaturgus went as Bishop to
Neo-Ceesarea, chief town of Pontus, he found there only
seventeen Christians, and when he left in A.D. 265, he left
only seventeen heathen.
About the same time Cornelius, Bishop of Rome, gives
the number of Roman Christians as fifty thousand, or one-
twentieth of the total population of a million.
“By the opening of the fourth century Christian Missions
had so covered the then known world, that when Constantine
came to the throne, he found Christianity if not numerically,
at least intellectually and morally, so potent a factor that it
must be considered and deferred to. It could not be
ignored.” *
Persecutions.
From the time of the first martyr, Stephen, the early
Christian Church was destined to suffer persecution as it
faced the mighty political power of Rome, the whole moral
force of the most immoral and vicious age the world has
known, and the barbarous cruelties of heathen nations to
which it carried the gospel.
Rome, at first inclined to regard the Christians as harm-
1“The Missionary Enterprise,” p. 20.
46 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
less fanatics, soon changed her attitude, and despite their
loyalty and exemplary conduct treated them with suspicion
and dislike. As the new cult grew and spread rapidly the
rulers became alarmed lest it should weaken the imperial
grasp upon great provinces. Prohibition of the faith and
persecution of those who embraced it set in and became
more and more severe. So unpopular were Christians that
for centuries parts of Rome were undermined to form cata-
combs, where Christians held their meetings in days of per-
secution, and where the bodies of the dead were laid away.
Hundreds of thousands of martyrs sealed their testimony
with their blood, among the earlier and most noted of whom
were Paul, Ignatius, Polycarp and Justin Martyr.
Ten distinct persecutions are usually recognized, ranging
at intervals from A.D. 64, under Nero, to A.D. 303, under
Diocletian. The first of these, planned and carried out by
the inhuman monster Nero, serves as a sample of all. To
cover up his own crime of having wantonly set fire to the
city of Rome, and escape the fury of the populace, Nero
deliberately charged the Christians with the crime. The fol-
lowing sentences are taken from a full and vivid description
of the horrible orgy by the historian Tacitus :—
“First those were seized who confessed they were Christians;
next, on their information, a vast multitude were convicted, not so
much on the charge of burning the city as of hating the human
race. And in their deaths they were also made the subject of sport,
for they were covered with the hides of wild beasts, and worried
to death by dogs, or nailed to crosses, or set fire to, and when day
declined, were burned to serve for nocturnal lights. Nero offered
his own gardens for that spectacle, and exhibited a Circensian
game, indiscriminately mingling with the common people in the
habit of a charioteer.”
In the catacombs of St. Sebastian in Rome rest the bodies
of 174,000 martyrs, nor were these by any means all who
loved their Master even unto death. Needless to say, all:
such efforts to quench the vital spark of divine truth, far
from succeeding, only fanned it into a flame and scattered
it the more widely. The blood of the martyrs proved then,
as it has proved ever since, to be the seed of the Church.
PERIOD OF EARLY CHURCH MISSIONS AT,
QUESTIONS
1. Give the name and dates of the Second Period of Christian
Missions.
2. Indicate the extent of the spread of the gospel during this
Period—(a) in Asia, (b) in Europe, (c) in Africa.
3. Name the six most prominent missionary centers of the
Period, in the order of their development as such.
4. What famous theological controversy took place at Ephesus
in the 5th century, and what effect did it exert upon missionary
extension?
5. Give the names of five prominent Christian teachers or
writers of this Period in Africa.
6. Where, and by whom, was the first great missionary training
school founded ?
7. What great writers attest the growth and influence of Chris-
tianity during this Period, and what is the general nature of their
testimony ?
8. How many distinct Roman persecutions against Christians
are usually cited, and over what years did they extend?
9. Name the Roman Emperor who instigated the first great
persecution, and give some idea of its character.
CHAPTER IV
PERIOD OF EARLY EUROPEAN MISSIONS
FROM CONSTANTINE TO CHARLEMAGNE (313-800)
The Church at Home and Missionary Effort Abroad.
Constantine’s professed conversion on the eve of his be-
coming Emperor of Rome was the beginning of a mighty
change in the outward standing of the Christian Church and
also in its inward character. The story is well known of his
seeing a wonderful cross in the sky with the words “In hoc
signo vince!’ (By this sign conquer!). At once adopting
the cross as his standard, he led his armies on to victory and
then, in his famous Edict of 313, proclaimed Christianity
the State religion. Viewed from without this seemed a
glorious triumph for the faith, and it is true that it meant
new safety of profession and liberty to preach. But in
reality it wrought grievous injury to the true cause of Christ
through the influx into the Church of a great mass of
heathenism. The foes which had previously threatened the
Church from without now began to attack it from within.
Purity of faith and simplicity of worship gradually were
lost and spiritual declension set in. Missionary zeal and
activity at once began to wane. The Church leaders were
compelled to divert their energies from propagating the
gospel to defending the faith. “From a purely missionary
point of view, it began the system of compromise with error
—of nationalism instead of individualism in conversion—
which in the East made the Church an easy prey to Moham-
medanism, and in the West produced Jesuit Missions.’’ *
From A.D. 328, when Constantine removed the capital
from Rome to Byzantium (now Constantinople), the his-
tory of the Church, like that of the Empire, was divided into
Eastern and Western. The Eastern Church became en-
grossed in theological controversies, to the sad loss of its
1 “Short History of Christian nee Ds 57:
4s 9
oS A Sa SRS OT AA CN
es
FRANCES Abyss | HUNGARY
°
MAP II: OLD WORLD: To illustrate missionary extension during the Periods of Early SSDS Missions and the Middle. a
(Chapters IV and V) a ae i mcaecmcspaieptin ie ae a
50 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
spiritual life and hence also of its missionary vision. It
fell into a deep sleep from which it was not aroused for
many centuries. The Western Church was less disposed to —
discussion than to action. Moreover, the sweeping down
upon its territory of great hordes of barbarians from North-
ern Europe compelled attention, Alas, that the Church
employed worldly tactics, and sought to attract these pagan
tribes by the glitter of religious paraphernalia and elaborate
ceremonial rather than by the power of the gospel. As a
protest and reaction against this state of affairs many devout
men withdrew into solitude, thus laying the foundations of
monasticism. A few, more discerning of the real need, and
the only way to meet it, heroically gave themselves up to the
task of penetrating these distant wilds with the message of
the cross. The missionary work of the several centuries
which follow, however, stands out in contrast to that of
the early Church in being the effort of a few individuals and
not of the Church as a whole. :
Among the most prominent missionaries of this Period
are the following :—
Ulfilas (311-388), whose name means ‘“‘the little wolf,”
was the apostle to the Goths north of the Danube River.
His parents were among the Christian captives carried off
by a band of warlike Goths on one of their incursions into
Asia Minor. When about twenty years old he was taken
by Alaric, King of the Goths, on an embassy to Constanti-
nople, where he remained ten years and became a Christian
scholar. He then returned as a missionary to the Goths
and labored until the whole nation accepted the new faith.
He was revered and hailed by his converts as a second
Moses.
He added to his work as a missionary by giving the letter- _
less Goths the Bible, to do which he had to invent for them
an alphabet. He translated the whole Bible, except the
books of Samuel and Kings, which he omitted lest their
contents should prove too stirring to these warlike people.
This Bible is of great value because of its being the oldest
form of the Teutonic speech, and more than half of the
Gospels is still preserved in the University of Upsala,
Sweden. It is known as the “silver Bible” because of its
being written in silver letters on a purple ground.
PERIOD OF EARLY EUROPEAN MISSIONS 51
Martin, Bishop of Tours (316-396), was the pioneer. mis-
sionary of Gaul (France) after the Franks and other north-
ern tribes had invaded this region, where Christianity had
earlier been brought by Irenzeus and others. Martin was a
soldier, and adopted military methods which would be
strange and inconsistent in our day. From Tours as a center
he led his army of monks through the land, destroying idol
temples and groves and proclaiming the gospel. He is still
held as the patron saint of France.
Patrick (396-493), the first great missionary to Ireland,
and its immortal patron saint, was, contrary to common
repute, not an Irishman but a Scotchman. As a boy he was
carried captive from his Christian father’s home near the
present Glasgow, and sold as a slave to a chieftain in North
Ireland, who used him to herd his sheep. There he reflected
on his early teaching, and, like the prodigal son, “came to
himself.”’ Later he escaped, was retaken, and again escaped.
He spent some time in one of the monastic schools of
France, and then returning to his father’s home he had a
night vision like Paul, and heard voices from the Irish coast
crying, “We beseech thee, child of God, come and again
walk among us.’ Unheeding the entreaties of his parents
and friends, he set out for Ireland, where he spent more
than a third of a century in widespread and vigorous evan-
gelism. He was undaunted by the opposition of the pagan
chieftains of the Druids. Everywhere he gathered the
people about him in the open field and preached Christ to
them. His burning zeal and deep sincerity, coupled with a
kindly gentleness of manner, completely won the hearts of
the peasants and nobility alike. He planted hundreds of
churches and baptized thousands of converts. He also
founded monastic schools, which became centers of learning
and devotion, and whose influence was felt throughout the
Middle Ages and to distant parts of the world.
Altogether Patrick imparted a stronger impulse than any
other man to Medieval Missions. A mass of grotesque and
unreliable legends clings about his name. It is significant
that despite the claims of the Roman Catholic Church upon
St. Patrick, his message and methods were more distinctly
those of Protestantism than were those of his contempo-
raries. He had no connection with the Pope, his grandfather
52 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
was a married priest, and in the reliable accounts of his
career there is no reference to such Romish practices as
auricular confession, extreme unction, or the worship of
Mary.
G anv (521-596): It was fitting that Ireland, indebted
for her evangelization to a Scotchman, should in return give
to Scotland her apostle. Columba was of royal birth, liberal
gifts and high education. He was distinguished for his
piety and zeal, and like Patrick was a man of constant
prayer. After founding several monastic communities in
Ireland, he crossed the Irish Channel with twelve com-
panions in 563, and on the small Island of Iona, the most
famous center of the Druid superstition, established a center
which became one of the most noted missionary schools in
history. Not only were all North Scotland and the adjacent
Hebrides, Orkney and Shetland Islands evangelized by
Columba and his immediate followers, but “for two cen-
turies or more Iona was the place in all the world whence
the greatest amount of evangelistic influence went forth, and
on which, therefore, the greatest amount of blessing from
on high rested.” ?
Augustine (505°-605) was the great missionary pioneer
to England. Gregory the Great, while an abbot, saw three
Anglo-Saxon youths exposed for sale in the market at
Rome. Attracted by their fair complexion and hair, he
asked of what race they were, and when told they weré
Angles, he wittily replied ““Not ‘Angles’ but ‘angels.’”” He
desired to go to England as a missionary, but was not per-
mitted by the Pope. When later he himself became Pope
he despatched Augustine with forty Benedictine monks.
Hearing tales of the savagery of the Saxons, Augustine at
first, like Jonah, turned back. But sternly ordered forward
by Gregory the company landed at Kent. They were kindly
received by King Ethelbert, who already had some knowl-
edge of the truth through his Frankish wife, Bertha, herself
a Christian. Within a year Ethelbert was baptized, and
soon after, in accord with the times, his parliament adopted
the faith and in a single day ten thousand of his people were
immersed. Canterbury Cathedral was founded and Augus-
tine became its first Archbishop.
2 “Medieval Missions,” pp. 50, 51.
PERIOD OF EARLY EUROPEAN MISSIONS 353
Columbanus (559-615), a scholarly Irish monk, whose
heart became fired with missionary zeal, set out with twelve
companions for Germany. Landing in Burgundy, he won
the disfavor of the king by his simple austerity and fearless
censure of evil living, and pressed onward beyond the Rhine,
even reaching the wild Suevi, ancestors of the modern Swiss.
Like Martin of Tours he waged war against paganism with
fiery zeal, smashing idols and burning temples and estab-
lishing monasteries in their place. His last effort was to
establish work in Italy. He succeeded in founding a monas-
tery across the Alps at Bobbio, where he soon died at an
advanced age.
Willibrord (657-739), an Englishman educated and
deeply influenced by the Irish Church, was the first mission-
ary to Holland and Denmark. He faced great pioneer hard-
ships in a rough land and among wild people, but battled on
courageously against much opposition, and though finally
rejected, he planted the gospel among a people destined cen-
turies later to be among the boldest defenders of the Chris-
tian faith.
Bomface (680-755), the great missionary of Central
Europe, was the apostle especially of Germany. He was of
noble birth and fine scholarship, but roused by the tales of
Willibrord’s sufferings, he turned his back upon attractive
prospects at home and set out for Holland to join that then
aged missionary. Later, declining to succeed Willibrord
as Bishop of Utrecht, he pressed on into Hessia and Saxony.
He found among the Germanic tribes a chaotic condition of
paganism interwoven with some Christian ideas received
from earlier Roman, and perhaps also Irish, missionaries.
With heroic courage he undertook perilous pioneer journeys
in many directions. On one occasion, finding that many of
his converts had returned to their old Thor-worship, he
seized an axe and in the presence of thousands of enraged
heathen and trembling half-Christians cut down a sacred
oak of Thor. When the mighty tree crashed to the ground
and Boniface was not, as they expected, stricken by a bolt
from heaven, the people shouted his praise and came in thou-
sands to be baptized.
During twenty years he\s said actually to have baptized
one hundred thousand converts, though this statement 1s
54 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
likely an exaggeration. He was as great an organizer as an
evangelist, founded monasteries, schools, and even convents,
and welded together these raw heathen into a strong church,
although it must be admitted that his methods were not
above question, judged by present standards. In his old age
Boniface yearned over the land of his first love and re- —
turned to Holland. On the shores of the Zuyder Zee, at
the age of seventy-five, pillowing his head upon a volume of
the Gospels, he received the death stroke at the hands of
the pagan ancestors of the Dutch and became a martyr for
Christ. His disciple, Gregory of Utrecht, founded there the
great missionary college of the time—a fitting memorial of
Boniface.
The Rise and Spread of Mohammedanism.
While the gospel was thus being carried to the countries
of Western Europe, there suddenly arose in the East a new
religion, destined to have a vital bearing upon world evan-
gelization as one of its most powerful antagonists. This
was Mohammedanism. Its founder, Mohammed, was born
in Mecca about A.D. 570. His early life was passed in
obscurity, but his marriage at the age of twenty-eight to a
wealthy widow, Kadijah, freed him from temporal cares
and afforded him leisure for contemplation. He had op-
portunity to observe not only the degraded paganism of
the Arabs, but also Judaism and Christianity, both of which
had entered Arabia and were all too sadly tainted in doctrine
and enervated in spiritual power. When about forty years
of age Mohammed began to have “visions.”’ His own tem-
perament, together with the persuasions of his wife, who
was ambitious for his advancement, led him to interpret
these as revelations from God and a call to take up the task
of a spiritual reformer. He began to preach, his message
being that “there is one God and Mohammed is His
Prophet.” He called his doctrine /slam—meaning resigna-
tion to the divine will.
Believers slowly gathered round him, but his claims for
himself, as well as his bitter opposition to idolatry, aroused
the rulers and townsfolk of Mecca, and in A.D. 622 he was
forced to flee for his life to Medina. From this flight,
known as the Hegira, the Mohammedan calendar is dated,
PERIOD OF EARLY EUROPEAN MISSIONS 55
His career soon changed from that of a mere preacher to
that of a political leader and warrior. At first his aims
seemed to be confined to exterminating idolatry from his
own land of Arabia, but his signal military successes at the
head of a small band of followers whetted his ambition. He
came to aspire to be the leader of a fierce worldwide crusade
against idolatry, and to restore the pure religion which had
been revealed by God to the prophets, of which he claimed
to be the last and greatest. Meeting with opposition from
the Jews, on whose support he had counted, he became fired
with a bitter hatred toward them. There was in him a
‘strange mingling of lofty devotion to the will of God and
of craft and cruelty in carrying out his own ambitions.
His biographers differ widely in their estimates of his
character. Some earlier writers extol him as a virtuous
man, a pure patriot, and a sincere philanthropist. Later
ones swing to the opposite extreme and brand him as a
monster of iniquity. Rejecting both of these extreme views
one author says, “He was an Oriental, and became an
Oriental potentate. He had the Oriental idea that the privi-
lege of a potentate included indulgence in sensuality. He
was not only an Asiatic, but an Arab, an Ishmaelite, nur-
tured in the faith that his hand must be against every man,
strength against strength, stratagem against stratagem, force
and fraud against fraud and force. That he believed
throughout in his own divine commission no judicious
biographer maintains. That he was earnest and honest in
his desire to put a stop to the profanities and corruptions of
Asiatic heathenism I think should be frankly admitted.”’ *
His Arabian armies were possessed by a wild fanaticism
and a thirst for plunder and conquest. The prophet’s in-
junction to them was to exterminate all heathen and
apostates, and to offer to Jews and Christians the choice of
the Koran, tribute or death. The Eastern provinces of the
Roman Empire fell an easy prey before their furious ad-
vance. Syria, Mesopotamia, Persia, Asia Minor, Egypt and
North Africa, with their great cities, all fell into the hands
of the Moslems. They even swept westward through
Europe, and in eight years completed the conquest of Spain.
From there they crossed the Pyrenees into Southern Gaul,
3 “Medieval Missions,” p. 164.
56 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
and the Mohammedan power threatened to encircle Christen-
dom and wipe out the Christian Church. Such a calamity
was averted by the crushing defeat dealt the Moslem army
by Charles Martel and his Frankish soldiers in A.D. 732 at
Tours. The tide was stemmed and Europe saved from
being overrun by the Arab hordes. The terrible blight of
Islam remained, however, and steadily extended over the
Levant, North Africa, and Western Asia including Persia.
The doctrines and rites of Mohammedanism are to be
found in the Koran, which professes to be a divine revela-
tion to the prophet and is accepted by his followers as the
Word of God. Somewhat smaller than the New Testament
in size, it is a strange jumble of facts and fables, laws and
legends, full of historical errors and superstitions, and 1s
unintelligible without a commentary. While the Moslem
doctrine of God is a monotheism, its deity, far from being
the loving and beneficent God of the Christian Bible, is an
unfeeling despot, infinitely removed from His creatures, and
with no mediator between. It depicts a hell of fearful tor-
ments and a heaven of grossest sensual delights. It sanc-
tions slavery, polygamy, and the degradation of woman. Its
only real philosophy is a blind fatalism, which has stamped
itself upon every Moslem country and subject and paralyzed
all progress. Its prayers are merely the “vain repetitions”
of a formula, its fastings are a farce, its almsgivings are
but a pittance. Its pilgrimages to Mecca constitute a strong
bond of union among its widely scattered adherents.
As to the bearing of the religion of Islam upon Christian
Missions, past or present, we cannot do better than quote
the following words written by Sir William Muir, and
which express not only our own personal conviction, but
that also, we believe, of the body of evangelical mission-
aries at large:
“They labor under a miserable delusion who suppose that Mo-
hammedanism paves the way for a purer faith. No system could
have been devised with more consummate skill for shutting out:
the nations over which it has sway from the Christian faith; for
there is in it just so much truth—truth borrowed from previous
Revelations, yet cast in another mold—as to divert attention from
the need of more. Jdolatrous Arabia (judging from the analogy
of other nations) might have been aroused to spiritual life, and the
adoption of the faith of Jesus; while Mohammedan Arabia is, to
PERIOD OF EARLY EUROPEAN MISSIONS 387
the human eye, sealed against the divine influences of the gospel.
Many a flourishing land in Africa and in Asia, which once rejoiced
in the light and liberty of Christianity, is now crushed and over-
spread by darkness gross and barbarous. It is as if their day of
grace had come and gone, and there remained to them ‘No more
sacrifice for sins.’ That a brighter morn will yet dawn on these
countries we may not doubt; but the history of the past, and the
condition of the present, is not the less true and sad. The sword
of Mohammed, and the Koran, are the most stubborn enemies of
Civilization, Liberty, and Truth which the world has yet known.”
QUESTIONS
1. Give the name and dates of the Third Period of Christian
Missions.
2. What Emperor made Christianity the State religion of Rome,
and in what year?
3. How did this action affect the standing and character of the
Church?
4. Compare the character of missionary activity in the Third
Period with that of the First and Second Periods,
5. Name the pioneer missionary to each of the following peoples,
and give a brief description of his work: Goths, Franks, Irish,
Scotch, English, Swiss, Dutch, Germans.
6. Name the founder of the Moslem religion, give the date of
his birth and flight, and briefly describe his career.
7. Indicate the scope of the spread of Mohammedanism during
this Period.
8. Where, when, and by whom was the onsweep of this religion
in Europe checked?
9. How do the doctrines and rites of Islam compare with those
of Christianity ?
10. What has been the prevailing effect of the Moslem propa-
ganda upon the lands which it has dominated, and what is its
bearing upon Christian missionary work?
11. Describe the doctrines and rites of Mohammedanism, and
compare that religion with Christianity in essential points.
CHAPTER V
PERIOD OF THE MIDDLE AGES
FROM CHARLEMAGNE TO LUTHER (800-1517)
The features of this Period to be noted as bearing upon
the course of Missions may be summed up under three
heads: 1. Direct Missionary Operations. 2. The Crusades.
3. The Monastic Orders.
Direct Missionary Operations.
The succession of pioneer efforts to evangelize the coun-
tries of Northern Europe, which we have already noted in
the previous Period extended into the earlier portion of
this Period. Among the leaders and movements deserving
mention were the following :—
Ansgar (800?-865). A monk of Corvey, a French con-
vent, he was sent back to Denmark by the Emperor Louis
the Pious, along with King Harold, who had been con-
verted to Christianity. It was a mission of danger that
called for a heroic spirit. He opened a Christian school in
Denmark, but its success was limited by the unfriendly atti-
tude of the people. Later he made two visits to Sweden,
on the first of which his ship and all his belongings were
seized by pirates. He established his center at Hamburg,
on the border between Denmark and Germany, from which
convenient point he paid visits in turn to Denmark and
Sweden. An attack by heathen Danes, however, completely
destroyed his church, school and library, and his work suf-
fered many vicissitudes. But he was a man of piety, cour-
age and prayer, and finally succeeded in breaking down the
opposition of King Olaf of Sweden, and even of King Horic
of Denmark, the bitterest foe of Christianity. Freedom for
Christian worship and the building of churches followed,
and thus the way of the SyePel ya prepared in both of these
5
PERIOD OF THE MIDDLE AGES 59
northern kingdoms, where Ansgar is now venerated as “‘the
ideal missionary” and the Apostle of the North.
Norway, Iceland and Greenland. Norway received Chris-
tianity from England in the tenth century. Three valiant
and patriotic Norman princes—Hakon and the two Olafs—
tried to introduce it by force, and their zeal and violent
measures for the extermination of the worship of Odin and
Thor were worthy of Mohammed himself. The final tri-
umph came when the sacred image of Thor fell in frag-
ments under the blows of a Christian soldier, and out of
it crept a multitude of mice, snakes and lizards.
Iceland was colonized in the ninth and tenth centuries by
noble families of Norsemen, who took with them their gods
Odin and Thor. An Icelander, having been converted in
Saxony, took home with him a priest who endeavored to
start a mission there in 981, but after seven years he was
banished. ‘The precious seed, however, had been planted.
King Olaf of Norway himself continued to send mission-
_ aries, and finally paganism was completely stamped out and
Iceland won to Christianity.
Greenland was in turn evangelized from Iceland, the main
instrument being Lief the Lucky, son of the Norseman,
Eric the Red, the reputed colonizer of Greenland. On his
voyage Lief is said to have been driven south by storms
and to have landed on the coast of New England four hun-
dred years before Columbus made his voyage of discovery.
Otto, Bishop of Bamberg. Otto carried the gospel in the
twelfth century to the Pomeranians, who had come under
the sway of Poland. In contrast to the first missionaries,
who were men of shabby dress and ascetic habits, he went in
great episcopal pomp, supported by the King of Poland,
and attended by a richly robed retinue whose splendor pro-
foundly impressed this pleasure-loving people. But more
than this, Otto’s many Christ-like deeds and his spirit of
unselfish devotion won their hearts. Thousands accepted
baptism, Slavic idols and temples were destroyed and
finally, after thirty years, their most famous idol of gigantic
size, whose worship was supported by taxes, war spoils and
votive offerings, was dethroned in its temple on the island
of Rugen and committed to the flames.
Cyril and Methodius (815?-885). These two brothers,
60 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
who were Greek priests, were sent from Constantinople to
the Bulgarians in response to a call from a Bulgarian prince
whose sister had been converted while a captive on the
Bosphorus. Cyril was a philosopher and Methodius an
artist. The interesting story is recorded of the conversion
of Bogoris, the savage King of the Bulgarians, by the
drawing by Methodius of the Scene of the Last Judgment
upon the wall of the palace. The king led his subjects in
being baptized and Christianity was established. From Bul-
garia these brother-missionaries extended their labors into
Moravia and Bohemia, and thus their good work became
prophetic of that later brotherhood known by the name
Moravian, which became one of the foremost agencies in
carrying the gospel to the very confines of the heathen world.
In addition to their evangelistic work, Cyril and
Methodius did for the Slavs what Ulfilas had done for the
Goths, by reducing their language to writing and trans-
lating the Bible and Liturgy into Slavonian. The language
of this Bible is to-day to the Russian what Gothic is to the
German. A far-reaching effect of this provision of the
written character has been to bind the Slavic peoples to-
gether, and thus raise an impassable barrier between them
and Latin Christianity.
Conversion of the Russians. A century later the Eastern
Slavs were turned in a body to Christianity, after the fashion
of the early Franks and English, by the baptism of King
Vladimir in 988. 30
penis 6 Gis
{AN
\Y ISy canes! op = = ‘oN & \ Aug H-US
* 7
quigat tte 2 ee el Lb
enouenon |
98 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
We cannot speak of one Indian nation or people, for
there is not such, but rather a conglomeration of different
races presenting every variety of color, physiognomy, lan-
guage, social custom and religion. Some 200 distinct
languages and dialects are spoken, 33 of them each by over
300,000 people. Illiteracy abounds, only one male in ten
and one female in one hundred being able to read, so that
of persons over fifteen years of age only about nine per
cent. of the total, and a little over one per cent. of the
females, are literate.
Racially, the population may be classified in five main
divisions :—(1) Aryans or Hindus proper, the predominat-
ing race; (2) Dravidians (known as Telugus, Tamils, Kana-
rese, etc.), mainly in the south; (3) Aboriginal Hill Tribes,
such as the Santals, Khonds, Bhils, Khols, Karens, etc.;
(4) tribes of Indo-Chinese origin, chiefly on the southern
slopes of the Himalayas and in Assam and Burma; (5) de-
scendants of the early Mohammedan conquerors of Arab,
Afghan, Mongol and Persian origin.
The distribution by religion, according to the Govern-
ment Census of 1921, substituting round numbers for more
exact ones, as easier to memorize, is :—
PTS Le HE I ei cdaite is 12k cal eh apace Keeton en 217,000,000
Moslems eu oC a A bic) ok aR SV 69,000,000
BucdaGhi sts! as. ela me belo hate lst Ate och a leles Rane ee 12,000,000
Wawa eh 51 Ute OMEN I 8D, 1) CICS UA DBMS MPN EE ERI iy Ma oS 10,000,000
Christians (including Protestants, Roman Catholics
ANC AY TIANIS \ SM ete Una) el. teh ct) Ns a eRe nea nee ee 5,000,000 —
SUITS GIS 8 10,0 BM COME RS UEC D2 le On ae Ee 3,200,000
SPAITIS ee vie. 0 CLR I ie ACCRA Lt ets Vie 1,200,000
AZOTOAStIans '( Pansees yi eins elle’ ss sie cee eiels neo ry meee 100,000
a dit EPR LU Hal NG MRAM Pt NS aS lof AP oy 22,000
Unclassified MinoriRelibions 3.06 0a. ae erty ees 18,000
Brey e WN tA Soar nears ria niece (GORE cin AN a Sh 317,540,000
On this basis, out of every 1,000 natives 683 are Hindus, 217 are
Moslems, 38 Buddhists, 31 Animists, 16 Christians, and the remain-
ing 14 are divided among the various minor sects.
Historical Résumé. Only the briefest outline of Indian
history is given here, for the purpose of supplying the con-
nection between India and the outside world. For un-
INDIA 99
_ known centuries before the Christian Era, as well as later,
invasion and conquest have been the lot of almost every
generation. The attacks sometimes came from the sea,
but mostly through the famous Khyber Pass on the north-
west frontier. A long series of assaults by Moslems,
Afghans, and Tartars began in 644 A.D. and continued
through seven or eight centuries, always attended by ruth-
less pillage and slaughter. In the sixteenth century Akbar
founded the great Mogul Empire, whose fatal decline began
a century later.
The first Europeans to reach India were the Portuguese,
in about 1500. Their sole object was trade, and they estab-
lished their center at Goa on the west coast. The Danish
East India Company founded settlements in 1616 at Tran-
quebar and Serampore. The Dutch soon followed, dispos-
sessed the Portuguese of Ceylon in 1651, and opened a fac-
tory above Calcutta on the Hoogly.
England’s first contact with Indian soil began in 1614,
through the British East India Company, which soon after
established trading posts at Madras, Calcutta and Bombay.
Although at first purely a commercial concern, this Company
was destined by a combination of forces gradually to gain
possession of large territories and to assume civil authority.
Ultimately a series of struggles ensued between this power-
ful Company and its Dutch, Portuguese and French rivals,
of whom the French East India Company had become the
most formidable. ‘The last blow was struck in 1761, result-
ing in capitulation by the French and leaving British in-
fluence supreme.
Even more serious was the conflict between the Company
in its politico-commercial capacity and the native Indian
rulers, who with their armies bitterly contended for their
sovereign rights and dealt treacherously with the encroach-
ing foreigner. Little by little the British Government was
drawn into the situation, not at first with any design of con-
quest, but compelled by moral obligations to see treaty rights
respected and defend its subjects from Hindu treachery
_-and barbarities. In revenge for the horrid tragedy of the
Black Hole of Calcutta, in 1757, Britain seized the whole
of Bengal, and thereupon began the building of a new
British Indian Empire. The climax came a century later
100 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
through the memorable Sepoy mutiny of 1857, which
marked the passing of the East India Company and the open
assumption by the English Crown, in 1858, of political con-
trol. Finally, on January Ist, 1877, Queen Victoria was
proclaimed Empress of India. Two-fifths of India’s terri-
tory and more than one-fifth of its population still remains
semi-independent as native states, though subject to Britain’s
oversight and ultimate authority.
The attitude of the East India Company toward missions
was anything but favorable, and its treatment of Carey,
Judson and others was a sore trial to them and a disgrace
to civilization. Yet none the less is it true that uninten-
tionally this enterprise proved of great service to the mission-
ary cause and an important factor in its development. Un-
der British rule all native religions are allowed freedom
of exercise, but Christianity is recognized as the religion
of the Government and its propagation a legitimate enter-
prise.
II. .Missionary Work.
Early Efforts. Mention has already been made of the
earliest recorded efforts by Pantenus (p. 44) of early
Roman Catholic Missions under Francis Xavier (pp. 70-72)
and of the devoted and fruitful labors of Ztegéenbalg, Plit-
schau and Schwartz, all of the Danish-Halle Mission (pp.
76-80), who hold the distinction of being the first Protestant
missionaries to India.
William Carey (1793-1834). This Nestor of Modern
Missions was born of poor parents in a village of North-
amptonshire, England, in 1761. As a boy he evinced a
taste for learning, and was a diligent pupil of the village
school. At the age of fourteen William was apprenticed
to a shoemaker at Hackleton. Brought up as a Churchman,
he early experienced a real change of heart, joined the hum-
ble Baptist Church, and at eighteen began to preach. To
supplement his meager support as a pastor he continued his
work as a cobbler. Resolved to fit himself for higher
service, he utilized every available moment for classical
study and wide reading, and by dogged perseverance, per-
1The dates following names of missionaries, hereafter given, are those
of their missionary service.
INDIA 101
haps even more than by brilliancy of intellect, he mastered
Latin, Greek, Hebrew, French and Dutch, and gained a
good knowledge of Botany and Zoology.
A copy of Cook’s “Voyages around the World,” which
fell into his hands, made a deep impression upon him, lead-
ing his thoughts and sympathies out to distant lands, and
a profound conviction laid hold upon him of the greater
duty and task of the church to carry the gospel to the
heathen world. Before him in his cobbler’s stall hung a
large map of the world, with such statistics and other in-
formation written upon it as he was able to collect respect-
ing every country.
At a ministerial meeting in Nottingham, when invited
by the moderator to suggest a subject for discussion, young
Carey proposed ‘“‘The duty of Christians to attempt the spread
of the gospel among heathen nations.” As revealing somes
thing of the weight of cold indifference and even stubborn
opposition to missions which Carey had to overcome single-
handed, the venerable moderator rose and in an agitated
voice said: “Young man, sit down. When God pleases to
convert the heathen, He will do it without your aid or
mine.” Soon after this Carey published “An Enquiry into
the Obligation of Christians to use means for the Con-
version of the Heathen,” which still holds high rank among
missionary treatises.
But May 31st, 1792, is the date which will always remain
memorable as the birthday of the new world-wide era of .
missions, for on that day Carey preached his famous ser-
mon from Isaiah 54:2, 3, giving out the great missionary
maxims, “Expect great things from God,’ “Attempt great
things for God.’ So profound was the impression made
that soon afterwards, at Kettering, a company of twelve
ministers formed the first Baptist Missionary Society, sub-
scribing for its expenses £13. 2s. 6d. ($65.62). Carey
offered himself as the first missionary, and after overcom-
ing further severe opposition and tests of faith, and being
refused passage in an English ship because of the hostility
- of the East India Company to missionary work, he finally,
with his wife and a companion, sailed in June, 1793, in a
Danish vessel, and five months later landed at Calcutta. His
parting message to the friends at home was terse and im-
102 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
pressive. ‘Yonder in India,” said he, “is a gold mine. I
will descend and dig, but you at home must hold the
ropes.”
Carey’s first years in India were years of severe trial, the
opposition of the civil authorities, the ill health of his
family, and financial need being added to the many formi-
dable difficulties of a pioneer missionary career in that early
period. But with heroic courage and a firm faith in God
he faced and overcame them all. For five years he supported
himself as superintendent of an indigo factory, while mas-
tering several languages, holding daily religious services for
the factory employees, itinerating among the villages and
working at the translation of the Scriptures.
In 1799 he was joined by Marshman and Ward, the
three forming the famous “Serampore Triad.” Together
they laid strong foundations for subsequent missionary
activities by establishing schools, colleges and printing
presses, in addition to their evangelistic and pastoral work.
Later, Carey’s rare linguistic gifts were recognized by the
Governor General, who invited him to accept the post of
teacher of Bengali, Marathi and Sanskrit in the new Fort
William College at Calcutta. With the liberal salary of
£1500 received for this service Carey supported himself
and his two colleagues on a frugal scale, devoting the larger
portion to the promotion of his beloved work.
Carey’s monumental work was that of translator and
author. By himself or under his supervision translations
of the Scriptures, in whole or in part, were made in no
fewer than 35 languages or dialects. In addition to these he
compiled and published grammars in the Sanskrit, Bengali,
Marathi, Telugu and Sikh languages, and dictionaries in
Bengali and Marathi, besides editing numerous works in
both English and the native languages. The magnitude of
his literary accomplishments is truly astonishing, and well
earned for him the title of “The Wycliffe of the East.”
Withal, he believed in preaching, practised his belief un-
compromisingly everywhere, and labored constantly for the
conversion of individuals. He also threw his whole force
and influence into efforts to abolish degrading and inhuman
heathen practices, and was largely the means of securing
the passage, in 1801, of a law prohibiting the throwing of
INDIA | 103
children into the Ganges in sacrifice, and of another law,
in 1829, abolishing the horrid “suttee’ rite of burning
widows on the funeral pyres of their husbands.
It was when Dr. Carey had corrected the last sheet of
the eighth edition of the Bengali New Testament, in 1832,
that he uttered the words: “My work is done. I have
nothing more to do but to wait the will of God.” He did
not relinquish his labors, however, until he was compelled
to take to his couch. On the ninth of June, 1834, the aged
saint and veteran apostle entered into rest, having given to
India forty-one years of priceless service, and leaving the
whole Christian Church and heathen world his permanent
debtors.
Following closely upon Carey and his colleagues we have
several other great missionary pioneers of India, who call
for mention not only on the ground of their personal merits,
but even more because of the representative character of
their work. Each was, so to speak, a mold after which
some one of the various lines of approved missionary policy
and activity for the future was shaped.
Henry Martyn (1806-1812). Born in southern England
in 1781, this “saint and scholar” distinguished himself as
a student at Cambridge, and expected to follow the legal
profession. But out of a deepened spiritual experience,
due in large measure to reading David Brainerd’s life,
he was impelled to dedicate himself to God for missionary
service. He applied to the newly formed Society of the
Church of England to be sent to India, but since, under
the rule of the East India Company, this was impossible,
he accepted a chaplaincy as the only means to his end in
view.
Landing in Calcutta in 1806, he enjoyed a brief season of
fellowship with Dr. Carey and his co-laborers, and this
connection proved a providential link in the chain of God’s
leading, by which Martyn’s rare literary gifts were applied
to the work of translation. While faithfully performing his
chaplain’s duties in several successive military posts, his
spirit reached out to a wider ministry of preaching, holding
discussions and opening schools among Hindus and Moham-
medans; but particularly did he devote himself to the study
of Arabic and Persian, as well as to Hindustani and San-
104 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
skrit. By arrangement with the Serampore missionaries
the Persian translation of the New Testament was com-
mitted to Mr. Martyn. The heat of the Indian plains proved
too severe a test to his delicate constitution, a change be-
came imperative, and an ocean voyage was recommended.
This plan was taken advantage of by this devoted servant
of God to attempt to verify the accuracy and utility of his
Persian version of the New Testament by a visit to Arabia
and Persia for intercourse with learned natives of these
lands.
In January, 1811, he sailed from Calcutta, and touching
at Bombay and Muscat, reached Persia in May, when the
heat was at its height. The remainder of the pathetic but
thrilling story cannot be told in detail—Martyn’s long desert
marches, attended by bitter hardships; his loneliness of
spirit ; the completion and revision of his Persian translation
amid physical weakness and suffering; his work of wit-
nessing to the many Mullahs and students who sought him
out. He prepared two beautiful gift copies of the Persian
New Testament for the Shah of Persia and his son, but
before the volumes could be presented, Martyn’s growing
ill health compelled him to start for Constantinople with the
hope of reaching England. The long and desperately hard
journey overland proved too much for his frail body, and
after enduring the most acute suffering he breathed his last
on October 16th, 1812, at Tocat in Armenia, where his re-
mains still lie buried.
Two days after his arrival in India, Henry Martyn had
written: ““Now let me burn out for God,’ and no words
could more fitly express the spirit and record of that life
“whose devotion, fervid zeal, and deep spirituality have led
as many to become missionaries as David Brainerd’s flam-
ing life.’’ ?
Alexander Duff (1829-1863). This hardy Scotchman
and great missionary was a pioneer in two senses, as being
the first missionary of the Church of Scotland to India, and
as leading the way to higher educational missions in that
land. Dr. Pierson ranks him with Carey and Livingstone
as “one of the great missionary triad of the new age.”
2“TIndia and Christian Opportunity,” p. 167.
INDIA 105
Reaching Calcutta in 1830, at the age of 24, after a
memorable voyage on which he twice suffered shipwreck,
Duff threw himself energetically into his appointed task,
He began a new chapter in Indian missions by introducing
the policy of making English rather than the vernacular the
medium of higher education, and also by insisting upon
giving the Bible an essential place in the daily school cur-
riculum. His plan was novel, and it was greeted with mis-
trust by missionary leaders and with opposition by Indian
Brahmans. But the aged Carey gave him his approval
and sympathy, and the friendship of an educated and en-
lightened Brahman of great influence, Rammohun Roy by
name, proved a timely help.
With unflinching courage the young missionary educator
opened his school, and on the very first day faced the issue
by bidding his pupils repeat after him the Lord’s Prayer in
Bengali, and then putting into the hands of each one a
copy of the Gospels and calling upon a pupil to read. An
ominous silence ensued, after which one of the number
said: “This is the Christian Master. We are not Chris-
tians. How then can we read it?’ Whereupon Rammohun
Roy, who was present, quietly rose and replied: ‘Christians
have read the Hindu Shasters and have not become Hindus.
I have read the whole Bible, and you know that I am not
a Christian. Read the book and judge for yourselves.”’
The day was won, and the school became so popular that in-
creased accommodation was soon necessary and many had
to be turned away. Duff followed up his advantage by ar-
ranging a course of lectures for educated men on natural
and revealed religion. These lectures aroused great excite-
ment and no little antagonism, but a spirit of inquiry
~ was awakened, and Duff was rewarded by seeing a num-
ber of gifted men renounce Hinduism and accept Christ.
Some of these later became prominent in the gospel min-
istry.
Ill health twice compelled Dr. Duff to return home, in
1834 and 1849, but the loss to India was perhaps more than
compensated by the missionary impulse he imparted to the
home churches, not only of Great Britain, but also of the
United States, which he toured in 1854. Dr. A. T. Pierson
106 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
calls him “the most eloquent missionary orator of the cen-
tury,’ and writes: “He made the very pulse of missions to
beat quicker, shaping missionary effort and moving hundreds
to go, as well as tens of thousands to give... and gave
such impetus to work in other lands as no man since has
ever equaled.” ° :
Dr. Duff’s home church conferred upon him high degrees
and honors, and after failing health required his taking
final leave of India he accepted, in 1863, a Missionary
Professorship, in which position he delivered lectures each
winter in the colleges of Aberdeen, Edinburgh and Glasgow.
By this and every other means, until death removed him
in 1878, he labored to strengthen and extend the cause of
missions, on whose altar his own gifts and powers had
been unreservedly laid.
Reginald Heber (1822-1826). This early missionary of
the Church of England became the second Bishop of Cal-
cutta. His career was cut short by death, but his name will
ever be remembered and honored in connection with his
immortal missionary and devotional hymns. The best
known of these are: “From Greenland’s Icy Mountains,”
“The Son of God Goes Forth to War,” and “Holy, Holy,
Holy, Lord God Almighty.”’ He “united the zeal and piety
of the Christian with the accomplishments of the scholar
and the gentleman. Frew men have ever won in equal meas-
ure the general esteem of society in India.”’ *
Early British Societies. In addition to the Societies repre-
sented by the distinguished pioneers already mentioned—the
English Baptist, the Church of Scotland, and the Church
Missionary Society—other British Societies also early en-
tered the field, whose work has played an important part in
Indian missions. The most prominent of these are the
London Missionary Society, which first occupied South
India in 1804, and the Wesleyan Missionary Society, which
opened work in Ceylon in 1813.
Genesis of American Missions. Samuel J. Mills may be
termed the counterpart in America of William Carey in
England, and the now famous “Haystack Prayermeeting”
3 “The New. Acts of the Apostles,” pp. 130, 132.
4Lux!, Christi,? ip. iita6,
INDIA 107
at Williamstown, Mass., was the birthplace of Modern
American Missions, just as the Kettering assembly was of
English Missions.
The story is too familiar to require recounting in detail
of how Mills, in whose soul the missionary passion had
begun to burn from the very hour of his conversion, gath-
ered around him at Williams College a little company of
kindred spirits—James Richards, Francis Robbins, Harvey
Loomis, Gordon Hall, Luther Rice, and Byron Green—now
known as “the Haystack group,” to pray, ponder, and plan
for some mission to the heathen. Later, at Andover Sem-
inary, three others—Adoniram Judson, Samuel Newell and
Samuel Nott—joined the infant Society, and it was directly
due to the prayers and efforts of this consecrated company
that, in 1810, the American Board of Commissioners for -
Foreign Missions came into being as the first Society of its
kind on this side of the Atlantic.
On the toth of February, 1812, Messrs. Judson and
Newell, with their wives, embarked for India, followed only
nine days later by Gordon Hall, Luther Wright and Mr.
and Mrs. Nott, for the same field.
Adomram Judson (1812-1850). In the above list of noble
_ missionary names Judson’s stands to-day by far the most
prominent, and we single him out for particular mention as
a representative of American pioneers to India, but more
_ than this, as the God-chosen apostle of Burma.
During his voyage to India Judson’s views of baptism
were radically changed, and this fact providentially led to
__the formation of the American Baptist Missionary Union,
in 1814. He arrived in Calcutta only to be ordered out by
_ the despotic and gospel-hating East India Company. His
efforts to be allowed to labor at Madras proving in vain, as
the only resort he took passage in a vessel for Burma and
landed at Rangoon in July, 1813. Thus did the opposition
of man but work out God’s higher purpose, as subsequent
events proved. ‘Judson was forbidden by the Spirit to
enter India because God would have him in Burma. There,
among its wild tribes, was a people prepared for the Lord.
The Karens had for centuries nourished the tradition of
white teachers ere long to appear among them, bringing the
108 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Book of God. When such a teacher came, they gave ready
ear to his message.” °
It has been said of the Karen Mission that “in intensity
of interest and measure of success it has scarcely been
equaled by any other in modern times.” ‘When Judson
died, hundreds of baptized Burmans and Karens were sleep-
ing in Jesus, and over 7,000 survived in 63 churches, under
oversight of 163 missionaries, native pastors and helpers.
Judson had finished his Bible translation, compiled a Bur-
mese dictionary, and laid the basis of Christian character
deep down in the Burman heart.” °
But these results were not achieved without the keenest
suffering in addition to arduous toil, When war broke out —
in 1824 between Burma and England, Judson, suspected of
being a spy, was thrown into prison. The story of his con-
finement and the brutal treatment and physical agony he
endured for nearly two years in filthy native jails, and of
the heroic devotion of his gifted and consecrated first wife,
Ann Hasseltine Judson, who labored to support him and
effect his release, is among the most heart-moving of mis-
sionary anecdotes.
It was during the tedious early period of waiting in
vain for permission to begin active preaching work, and
while occupied with language study and translating the
Scriptures, the awful powers of dominant Buddhism among
the Burmans and gross devil-worship among the Karens
meanwhile mockingly challenging his faith, that Judson was
asked as to the outlook, and replied: “It is as bright as the
promises of God.” Such words, under such circumstances,
are a fitting commentary upon this great missionary’s char-
acter and service. Dr. Geo. Smith calls him “the greatest
of all American missionaries,’ and continues: ““Adoniram
Judson is surpassed by no missionary since the apostle Paul
in self-devotion and scholarship, in labors and perils, in
saintliness and humility, in the result of his toils on the —
future of an empire and its multitudinous peoples.” 7
In the Baptist meeting-house at Malden, Mass., is a simple —
memorial tablet with the following inscription:
5“The Holy Spirit in Missions,” p. 92.
6“The New Acts of the Apostles,’ pp. 109, 110.
7 Quoted in “India and Christian Opportunity,” p. 173.
INDIA 109
In Memoriam.
Rev. Adoniram Judson
Born August 9, 1788
Died April 12, 1850
Malden, His Birthplace
The Ocean, His Sepulchre;
Converted Burmans and the Burman Bible
His Monument,
His Record is on High.
John Scudder, M.D. (1819-1855). To this man belongs
the honor of being the first medical missionary to India.
Picking up Gordon Hall’s tract entitled “The Conversion of
the World,” the heart of the young physician of New York
City was stirred, and in 1819 he sailed for India under the
American Board. Later the Reformed Church in America,
of which he was a member, organized its own separate
work on the field. Dr. Scudder labored in Ceylon and
afterwards established a work of great value at Madras.
“No stronger, more versatile, or more successful mission-
ary pioneer ever evangelized a people as healer, preacher,
teacher, and translator, in season and out of season. He
lived in praying and working till, although he knew it not,
‘he realized his ambition even in this world, ‘to be one of the
inner circle around Jesus.’ There was not a town in south-
eastern India which had not heard the gospel from his lips,
while his descendants worked by his side and took up his
_mantle.’* Not only did Dr. and Mrs. Scudder’s whole
family follow their parents’ example of devoting their lives
to missionary service, but also their children’s children after
them, and now the fourth generation of this illustrious
family is in preparation to take up the work.
Later Societies. It is obviously impossible to attempt here
to enumerate the many Societies and agencies which since
the first quarter of last century have entered the India field.
During the second quarter (1826-1850) thirteen Societies
began work, during the third quarter (1851-1875) twenty-
four others, and during the fourth quarter (1876-1900)
some fifty more.
In addition to the earlier Societies already referred to,
others which stand out prominently because of their strong
staff of workers and large native Christian community are
8 “Conversion of India,” pp. 164, 165.
110 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the American Presbyterian, which began work in 1834, and
the American Methodist Episcopal, whose worthy pioneer,
Dr. William Butler, arrived in 1856, and connected with
which are also the well-known names of Bishops Wilham
Taylor and James M. Thoburn. Prominent among several
Societies from Continental Europe are the Basel Mission
(1834), the Evangelical Lutheran (1841), and Gossner’s
Society (1845). The World War struck a sad blow to
these Missions through the necessary withdrawal of their
German missionaries from British territory. Every possible
effort was made by the British and American Societies of
similar church order to care for the mission churches and
activities thus left without oversight. Yet in spite of this
the work has suffered a severe setback.
Among the largest of a number of non-denominational
Societies are the Christian and Missionary Alliance (1889)
and the Ceylon and India General Mission (1893). The
former has a force of about eighty missionaries, occupying
twenty stations in the central part of India. The latter has
its field in South India and Ceylon, with eleven stations and
thirty-three missionaries.
Mass Movements. The work of the Baptist Mission
among the outcaste Telugus of Madras furnishes one of the
most wonderful instances of the miracle-working power of
God in modern missions. The unfruitfulness of that field
during some thirty years of labor had won for it the name
of “The Lone Star Mission,’ and a decision was all but
reached at home to discontinue the work. But the divine
restraint was felt, Dr. and Mrs. Clough were sent out, and
soon there began a mighty revival which swept a multitude
of souls into the kingdom. Ina single day at Ongole, dur-
ing 1878, 2,222 were baptized, and 8,000 within six weeks,
and the church there became the largest in the world. Nor
did this latter-day Pentecost soon pass, but continued on
with no permanent abatement, so that the report of the
Mission for 1891 showed an ingathering of nearly 10,000
Telugu converts into the church.
A similar movement has more recently taken place among |
the Sweeper caste in North India, where many thousands
of converts have been received by the Methodist Episcopal
Church alone. |
INDIA 111
It is recognized that such mass movements are not with-
out their serious resultant problems. Unworthy motives
are usually to be found on the part of some in seasons of
what may be termed “wholesale conversions”; others are
apt to get wrong or superficial ideas of what Christianity
really is; others again mistake Christian liberty for license
and are tempted to lay aside courtesy for their neighbors
and due respect for their superiors. These and other
dangers call for much prayer and watchfulness, and for
careful Bible instruction and discipline. Alas, too often
the missionary staff is painfully insufficient for the added
strain.
Policies and Methods. The early missionaries, following
Carey’s lead, gave themselves to preaching to the masses
in bazaars, temples and fairs, in mission hall and bungalow,
and in systematic village tours, at the same time supple-
menting such evangelistic work with translation, publication
and school work. In general, most Missions adopt the
policy of uniting these various methods.
Some Societies, notably the Scotch, have laid special
emphasis upon higher educational work, and large colleges
are carried on at Calcutta, Madras, Bombay and other main
centers. Others, like the Basel Mission, have emphasized
industrial work, the need and opportunity for which, as well
as for orphanages, grew largely out of successive years of
dire famine and plague, as well as from caste difficulties.
Medical missions have always been given an important
place, although owing to the aid of this kind provided by
the British Government there has not been the same neces-
sity for them as in China and Africa. Yet they have been
much used in opening new fields, and particularly has the
female physician unlocked many a door closed to all others,
and ministered untold relief to the suffering bodies, as well
as salvation to the souls, of multitudes of India’s poor
secluded women. It was America that took the lead in this
form of service, and the first medical woman missionary
was Clara Swain, M.D., sent out by the Methodist Episcopal
Mission in 1869.
One line of medical work deserving of special mention
is that for the unfortunate lepers, of whom India has so
many. Leper asylums were early established by several
112 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Societies, and in 1874 a Mission to Lepers was organized
in England by Mr. Wellesley C. Batley, which is doing a
most worthy work.
Bible, tract and Christian literature work has been
strongly developed by the special Societies existing for that
purpose, and such work is universally recognized as an in-
valuable part of the missionary enterprise.
Since 1889, when the first Y.M.C.A. Secretary went to
Madras, the work of that organization has steadily devel-
oped into a strong and fruitful factor, especially in reaching
the great student body numbering at least 200,000, in 13
universities, 200 colleges and several thousand other high
grade institutions of technical training.
Special Work for Women. Such work is deserving of
separate mention in any mission field, but the more so in
India because of the peculiar seclusion of India’s women
and the peculiarly distressing conditions attending their life
by reason of customs such as child-marriage, the position
of widows, and formerly the suttee. The wives of the
earliest missionaries—Mrs. Marshman, Mrs. Sarah (Board-
man) Judson and others—began direct work for women.
Miss M. A. Cooke, sent out by the Church Missionary
Society in 1820, was the first single woman missionary to
India and opened many schools for girls.
Zenana work, which consists of visiting the secluded in-
mates of Hindu and Mohammedan homes, especially among
the more well-to-do, occupies a large place in evangelism for
women. “In this close, heart-to-heart encounter the Chris-
tian missionary learns the needs and sorrows of India’s
oppressed wives and mothers. Here, in the very deepest
heart of it, absolutely closed to men missionaries, the fam-
ily life in all its multiform misery can be reached with the
healing and purifying touch of Christianity.” °
There are estimated to be 40,000,000 women in zenanas,
and 50,000 zenanas are now open to the visits of mission-
ary women. The number of child-widows, whose lot is
pitiable in the extreme, is 27,000,000, and of these 281,000
are under fifteen years of age. In connection with the vile
rites of Hinduism, 288 in every 10,000 of the population
oiux UChristr’ inion.
INDIA 113
are said to be consigned as dancing-girls or priestesses to a
life of prostitution in the temples.
Educational work of every stage, from kindergarten and
primary school up to college and Bible-training school, now
includes females. The higher education of girls and young
women was brought about only after long struggles against
native prejudices. The first Christian College for Women,
not only in India but in all Asia, was established at Luck-
now, in 1886, by Miss Isabella Thoburn of the Methodist
Episcopal Mission. This was followed in 1890 by another
at Palmacotta, in South India, under the Church Missionary
Society. Government colleges were also opened to women
in 1870, and during the first thirty years over 1,300 women
passed the entrance examination.
A few examples will serve to show something of the
readiness and ability of Indian women to respond to these
higher privileges. Miss Lilavatt Singh, B.A., a young
Hindu lady professor in Lucknow College, made such an
impression by her address at the Ecumenical Conference of
—1go00, in New York, that the late President Harrison re-
marked: “If I had given a million dollars to foreign mis-
sions, I should count it wisely invested if it led only to the
conversion of that one woman.”
Mrs. Sorabj1, the wife of one of the first Christian con-
verts from among the Parsees, together with her daughters,
has justly won distinction by her splendid work of con-
ducting vernacular schools of a high order, and vitalized by
a true Christian tone, for the various native races.
But the best known and most worthy of all is Pandita
_ Ramabai, universally acknowledged to be the most distin-
guished woman in India, native or foreign. Her education
was so thorough and her intellectual ability so great that
the highest title possible for a native woman was conferred
upon her. Forsaking idolatry she turned to Christ, and
then consecrated herself with a love and devotion truly won-
derful to the emancipation of child-wives and child-widows
from their terrible bondage. In the famines and pestilences
of 1897 and later years her ministry expanded far beyond
her original design, as she threw herself into the desperate
situation and rescued thousands of girls and women from |
114 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
death, destitution and the base designs of wicked men.
Never will the writer forget the privilege he enjoyed of
being the guest of this remarkable woman in her great
Christian settlement known as “Mukti” (salvation), and
addressing her ‘‘family’’ of many hundred sweet-faced little
child-widows. Her schools, orphanage and rescue home
have witnessed some wonderful outpourings of the Holy
Spirit and the conversion of great numbers of souls.
After more than thirty years of prodigious labor, this
great “scholar, saint and servant,” as one of her biographers
designates her, fell asleep in Jesus on the 5th of April, 1922.
Her death was noted in both the secular and the religious —
press the world around, and a host of her friends of every
race deeply mourn her loss. But she “being dead yet speak-
eth’ through thousands of lives touched and changed by her
direct ministry, and other thousands inspired by her noble
example.
Opposing Forces. Among the many which could be men-
tioned we must pass over the majority, as being more or less |
common to all heathen lands, and refer only to three which
bear in a peculiar way upon India.
(a) Caste. This hoary system of rigid division of society
into innumerable cliques holds the Hindu nation in a mighty
thraldom and is beyond question the most potent enemy of
missionary work. It permeates every phase of daily life
with its vitiating poison. It promotes physical degeneracy
by restricting the circle in which marriage is permitted,
engenders bitter class hatred, and obstructs intellectual prog- —
ress by its dictum that only the Brahmans are fit to read
or teach. As bearing directly upon missions, it is responsible
for these two grave evils among others: “First, it threatens —
every person inclined to become a Christian with losses and
sufferings of the most grievous character; and secondly, it
segregates the new convert and puts him in a position where
he can have little or no influence over his former friends,” *°
(b) Hinduism. This religion of three-fourths of the
people of India actually boasts 330,000,000 gods and god-
desses. Originating in Brahmanism, it has long since de-—
generated into a huge system of demonology.
After many years of experience in China and some con-
10 “India and Christian Opportunity,” p. 221.
INDIA 115
tact with a number of other mission lands, the writer feels
bound to say that nowhere else has he seen heathen religion
sunken to such unspeakable depths of vileness and impurity.
Krishna, one of the most popular Hindu deities, is reputed
to have had 16,100 wives and is the very incarnation of
sensual lust. The religious rites and temple carvings to be
seen in Benares, the sacred city of the Hindus, are so abom-
inable that any description of them is out of the question.
Hindu religion is utterly divorced from morality. The
Hindu believes that a religious motive justifies every im-
morality, however gross. Indeed, lust has been deliberately
deified, and the whole system of Hindu worship reeks with
the filthiest sensual suggestions and is an active force for the
corruption of morals.
A well-known lecturer who cannot be charged with preju-
dice or pro-missionary sentiment writes on his visit to India:
“India is so much worse than any one can describe it; the
people are so much more vile than can be imagined; the
forms of vice are all so disgusting! If you will consider that
for generations, every power that wicked imaginations can
devise has been used to develop the lowest passions of both
men and women, when the most widely worshiped god is
the mere personification of the most debasing of sins, you
can imagine the condition of things.” **
(c) Modern Cults. Various attempts have been made of
later years by educated Hindus to effect a reform of Hindu-
ism. Recognizing its weakness and corrupt practices, but
unwilling wholly to renounce it and turn to Christianity,
these men have sought to effect an amalgamation of Chris-
- tian ideas with the old Hindu Vedas, and to form a sort
_ of composite or eclectic religion. Thus various Somajes
have sprung up—such as the Brahmo Samaj, Arya Samaj,
and others—which, while progressive in spirit and aiming at
social reform, are strongly rationalistic and pantheistic in
their tendencies. These mere “half-way houses between
Hinduism and Christianity’? cannot be regarded as helpful,
any more than can Islam with its boasted monotheism.
They include no mention of Christ in their creed, refuse
to acknowledge Him as Saviour, and are at heart and in
actual operation foes of the gospel. By their attractive
11 “Lux Christi,” p. 114.
116 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
philosophies and reform propaganda they exercise a power-
ful influence over the student body, and thus must be classed
among the serious opposing forces to missionary work.
Under the heading of anti-Christian education, such a
high authority as the late Dr. S. H. Kellogg writes: “Than
the Arya Samaj, Christianity has no more deadly enemy in
India. In its active and unceasing hostility to all missionary
effort, it can only be compared with Islam.” *
The Unfinished Task. Even after 130 years of continu-
ous missionary work.since Carey’s arrival, India has still
much land to be possessed for Christ. To quote from the
World Missionary Conference Report: “Quite apart from
those fields in which the present missionary staff is insuffi-
cient for the accomplishment of the work begun in them,
there are vast districts which must be described as unoc-
cupied, or not effectively occupied. . . . Large portions of
the United Provinces, Eastern Bengal, Chota Nagpur, the
Central Provinces and the Central Indian Agency, and above
all, the Native States, are absolutely undermanned. In
many of the Native States mission work is carried on under
great difficulties. Two generations have passed away since
Missions began work in some of these sections, yet scarcely
one-third of the population have had the gospel made known
to\thenn iy
A careful survey made as late as 1921 shows that of
the 493 districts into which India may be divided (with an
average area greater than that of Delaware and Rhode
Island combined), 185 districts (37 per cent.) are without
a resident missionary, I13 (23 per cent.) are very inade-
quately occupied, and only 195 (40 per cent.) are fairly
well occupied.**
Statements drawn from articles by leading missionaries
in The Missionary Review of the World are to the effect
that as late as 1906 there were in the United Provinces 17 —
districts containing a population of 16,000,000 without an
ordained foreign missionary; that among the Native States,
Gwalior with 1,000,000 people had only one mission station,
and Bhopal with 1,250,000 people had only two stations.
12 The Missionary Review of the World, December, 1899, p. 885.
13 “Report of World Missionary Conference,” Edinburgh, Vol. I, pp. 159
oO,
14 The Missionary Review of the World, April, 1922.
INDIA 117
In all India there are said to be 710,000 towns and villages
yet unoccupied as stations or outstations. Such facts should
strike home to each Christian conscience with convicting
FORCE!
New Political Situation, Great as have been the claims
of India and grave her missionary problems at any time,
recent political developments have added a new and serious
factor to the situation. ‘The defeat of Turkey by the Allies
and the threatened dismemberment of that foremost Moslem
Power were taken advantage of by shrewd Mohammedan
propagandists to stir up the religious feelings of the great
Moslem population of India, and for a time there were
ominous rumblings which threatened an outbreak of vio-
lence.
But even more serious has been the persistent agitation
of the Indian Nationalist party against British rule. Despite
the liberal attitude of the British Government in adopting
legislation granting an increased measure of self-govern-
ment to its Indian subjects, the radical wing of the National-
ists refused to be satisfied and became loud in their demands
for complete home-rule. Revolutionary mass meetings were
held, inflammatory speeches delivered and literature circu-
lated, and under the name of the ‘‘Non-cooperation Move-
ment’ a boycott of English courts, schools and merchandise
was started.
For a time the situation was very grave, and much anxiety
was felt for the safety of Europeans in India, including the
missionaries. But the Government faced conditions with a
cool head and a firm hand, and at the most critical moment
its prompt action in arresting and imprisoning “Mahatma”
Gandiu, the popular leader of non-cooperation and the idol
of the people, had the salutary effect of putting a stop to
public demonstrations and restoring order. For the present,
Indian affairs have resumed normalcy and the outlook seems
more hopeful.
It is indeed a cause for thanksgiving that throughout this
period of social unrest and political uncertainty mission
work has gone forward without interruption or slackened
pace. On the contrary, missionaries in many parts testify
to increased interest in the gospel, larger sales of Christian
literature and greater numbers of inquirers and converts.
118 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Surely the good hand of God is to be,seen in thus preserving
the open door for missions and prospering .the work of
His servants in troublous times like these.
India’s Appeal. “No country needs the gospel more than
India. With all her antagonistic faiths, her superstitions,
her idolatry and in some quarters her intolerance, India
cannot make real progress or attain to the heights of her
deserved destiny unless she has become unified under Christ.
The political situation makes the need more urgent. Under
the liberal British administration, education has become
widespread and the machinery of modern civilization is to
be found everywhere. One result has been an embryonic
spirit of democracy and a desire for self-government. To
this desire Great Britain is acceding as rapidly as conditions
warrant. Every year sees the Indian in possession of
greater political power. Some day India will be a great self-
governing unit. If the unit be Christian the world will be
the gainer; if not Christian, the world will be the loser.
Missionaries in India render the whole world a glorious
service.” 1°
Statistical Summary. The following figures pertaining
to Protestant Missions in India are taken from reports for
1921, and are the latest accurate statistics available:
Societies; At WOrkaiMacinie wu clays etldiels irae sues eee 146
Roreien Missionary stall ise ees elasis alee eulele cee hay. nee 5,465
Résidenceystattonsigian cio sue aatellabe. se Willy Viste Memnee ieee melee 1,146
Native workele ert e sae Creme ict, (ceo) ia ite, east Ce 42,930
Oittestations | Gey AM eR eMC Merrett igh Ss ra esd eae 10,082
Baptized Christians ars irimuciie ss. cvcalate slits ug cet aetna 849,299
QUESTIONS
1. Give the area and population of India, and describe its
physical features, climate and resources.
2. Divide India’s population into its main constituent groups
(a) racially, (b) religiously, giving approximate numbers.
3. Describe briefly the course of events in India leading up to
complete British control, giving main dates and names involved.
4. Give an account of the birth of Modern Missions (a) in
England, (b) in America, with dates.
15 From article in The Missionary Review of the World, April, 1922.
INDIA 119
5. Name those who composed the “Serampore Triad,” and sketch
the career of the most prominent one.
6. Name the three most prominent India missionaries following -
after Carey, and state the outstanding feature of the work of each.
7, Give an account of the career of the “Apostle of Burma.”
8. Name five of the most prominent British Societies laboring
in India, four American, three Continental, and two non-denomi-
national Societies, and give date when each entered the field.
g. Identify the “Lone Star Mission,’ and give a brief account
of its earlier and later history.
10. What special forms of mission work exist in India for par-
ticularly needy classes.
11. Name and give date of arrival of (a) first male medical
missionary, (b) first female medical missionary, (c) first single
lady missionary.
12, Give names and brief accounts of three prominent Christian
women of India.
13. Cite three of the chief opposing forces to Christian Missions
in India.
14. To what extent is India’s evangelization still incomplete?
15. Describe the latest political situation in India, and the events
leading up to it.
: 16. Give latest statistical summary of Protestant Missions in
ndia.
CHAPTER X
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA
Under this heading may be grouped several countries
which together occupy a large area, peninsular in shape, in
the southeastern corner of Asia, between India and China.
These countries are Farther India (comprising Assam and
Burma), Siam, the Malay Peninsula, and French Indo-
China.
While world events have brought other missionary lands
into prominent notice and discussion, nothing seems to have
occurred in late years to call special attention to this group
of countries. For this reason the story of missionary effort
and achievement within them, although in some respects
of an unique character, is less familiar in general than the
record of work in other fields.
ASSAM
Assam has now the status of a province of India proper,
and forms a connecting link between. that, land,.on its ex-
treme northeastern frontier and Burma.” Its. ‘population
(7,600,000) includes the Assamese people, who have mostly
become Hindus, some of them Mohammedans, and several
wild hill tribes who are still pagan demon-worshipers. Yet
it is among these more primitive people that the gospel has
had its greatest success, and accounts are given of some
wonderful conversions in recent years, and of scenes that
recall the Welsh revival.
The chief missionary agencies at work are the American
Baptists, Welsh Calvinistic Methodists, and the Society for
the Propagation of the Gospel.
BuRMA
Area and Divisions. This northeasternmost part of
Britain’s vast Indian Empire now consists of Lower Burma,
120
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA 121
Upper Burma and the Shan States. Its total area exceeds
230,000 square miles and is thus somewhat smaller than
Texas or about twice the size of the British Isles. Lower
Burma has been British since 1826, but Upper Burma only
since 1885, when the outrageous crimes of the notorious
King Thibaw compelled Britain to intervene, overthrow this
bloody tyrant and establish humane and righteous rule.
The People. The population is over 13,000,000. About
four-fifths are Burmans, who are Mongolian in race and
supposed originally to have migrated from the borders of
Tibet. In character they are indolent, self-satisfied and
fond of pleasure. In religion they are Buddhists. Burma
is called “the land of Buddhism and pagodas.”’ The pagodas
are the shrines of the Buddhists and are found everywhere
and in almost countless numbers. The lofty Shwe Dagon
pagoda at Rangoon, covered with gold plate at a cost of a
million dollars, is one of the most famous shrines in the
world.
The remaining one-fifth of the population is made up of
various tribes—the Karens, Shans, Chins, Kachins and.
others—living mostly in the hills. These tribespeople are
mainly descendants of migrations from western China
many centuries ago. They are lower than the Burmans in
civilization and are demon-worshipers in religion.
In addition to the native races, there are many Chinese
and Fast Indian residents, particularly in Rangoon and the
few other large centers. The Chinese number 350,000 and,
as elsewhere, by their proverbial industry and thrift they
have secured the bulk of the business of the whole coun-
try.
Karen Tradition. Special interest attaches to the Karens |
from the missionary viewpoint. A simple-minded people
numbering about 900,000, they suffered cruel treatment at
the hands of the Burmans prior to the coming of the British.
They cherished certain old traditions which, strangely
enough, seem to point to some earlier knowledge of the
biblical narrative, and which gave them a vague expectancy
of some kind of deliverance and blessing that would come
to them through white teachers from the West. They were
thus remarkably prepared for the coming of the mission-
ary, gave heed to his message, and from the beginning
122 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
evinced a spiritual receptivity which has few parallels in
missionary annals.
Missions. The oldest and largest missionary work in
Burma is that of the Northern Baptists of America, dating
back to 1813. The story of the noble Adoniram Judson,
who laid the foundations of this work amidst great suffering
and trial, has already been outlined in the previous chapter.
Burma was the first, and for considerable time the only,
foreign mission field of this Board. It has been given a
strong staff of workers and liberal support and has yielded
one of the richest harvests of all Baptist Missions.
It has now more than 1,000 churches, with 79,000 mem-
bers, and its schools give instruction to 30,000 pupils.
By far the greatest results have been among the Karens.
The transformation wrought by ,the gospel among these
formerly despised and degraded people is one of the out-
standing miracles of modern missions. Fully eighty per
cent. of the hundreds of Karen churches and schools are
now entirely self-supporting, and they have sent their own
missionaries among other tribes of Burma and the Karens
of Siam.
Next to the Baptists, the Society for the Propagation of
the Gospel and the American Methodist Episcopal Church
are the most important agencies at work in Burma.
Missionary work is carried on along all usual lines.
There are a number of missionary educational institutions
of high grade, and Rangoon has two large colleges and a
Mission Press,
SIAM
Area, 195,000 square miles. Population, 9,200,000.
The Land. Siam lies between Burma on the north and
west, French Indo-China on the east and the Malay States
on the south, with a long coast line on the Gulf of Siam
and the Indian Ocean. In area it is about equal to Spain
or four times the size of New York State. It is moun-
tainous in the north and south, while its central part is an
alluvial plain. It is tropical in climate and products, with
a rich soil and vast and valuable forests.
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA 123
The People. The population of Siam is far from homo-
geneous. The natives belong to the Tai race, who came
originally from China. The Siamese proper are one of three
subdivisions of the Tai. They live in southern Siam and
are the dominating element in the land. The other sub-
divisions are called Eastern and Western Shan (or Tai).
Then come the Laos, of whom there are well over a million
in northern Siam. The Chinese constitute a third important
class, even more numerous than the Laos and are to be found
all over the country. They are the strongest and wealth-
iest element in Siam, and almost completely control the trade
of the kingdom. Their free intermarriage with the Siamese
has had the effect of improving the quality of the latter race.
In addition to these main racial elements the population
includes many natives of the adjacent countries—Malays,
Cambodians, Annamese, Karens, etc.
Advanced Conditions. Although the Siamese, like the
Burmans, are inclined to be indolent and easy-going, Siam
is next to Japan the most advanced country in Asia. It
possesses excellent roads, modern postal, telegraph and police
systems, well-equipped schools and many other features of
Western civilization. Bangkok, the capital, has its trolley
cars, electric lighting system, automobiles and up-to-date
manufacturing plants.
Such advancement is to be traced to the enlightenment
which came to the late monarch, King Chulalongkorn, while
still the Crown Prince, through the influence of the early
missionaries and his subsequent travels in Europe. When
later he became king he introduced a program of reforms
which revolutionized material conditions and government
affairs. Yet the morals of the country have not been cor-
respondingly affected; polygamy and concubinage with
their train of social evils are commonly practised, and other
imported vices have taken strong hold upon the land.
Missions. Attention was first drawn to Siam by visits
from early missionaries to the Chinese, nearly a century ago,
in the hope of securing an entrance to China from that
quarter. The American Congregationalists and Baptists
responded to an earnest appeal sent home by these workers
to occupy Siam. Both these Societies began work, but a
series of misfortunes compelled them to withdraw before
124 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
any assured results had been achieved. The American Pres-
byterians (North) soon followed and by 1847 had com-
menced permanent work.
The early years were filled with hardship and trial, owing
mainly to the bitter opposition of the anti-foreign king and
Buddhist priests. The missionaries were prevented from
renting or buying property, were on one occasion ordered
out of their premises to find shelter as best they could, their
few native converts were fiercely persecuted and their
helpers imprisoned. But when the prospect seemed hope-
less the hostile king suddenly died, the enlightened and
friendly prince succeeded to the throne and all was changed.
Since then the missionaries have enjoyed the marked favor
of the government and their work has had unhindered
course. Some of them were placed in charge of royal hos-
pitals and given official position. Several lady missionaries
were invited to teach the women of the royal household.
The Southern Field. Mission work was for some years
confined to southern Siam, where in spite of the friendliness
which developed on the part of the people of all ranks the
results in actual converts have not been large. Languid in-
difference due to physical and mental sloth, the influence of
strongly entrenched Buddhism and the prejudicial example
of Roman Catholicism, which entered from the adjacent
French territory, have all been serious hindrances. Never-
theless there have been some true and notable conversions
among both Siamese and Chinese, and the social results of
missionary effort in this field have been unusually great.
The Northern Field. Work in northern Siam among the
Laos began only in 1867. In this region results came more
quickly and have been much larger than in the south. At
the very beginning an able and influential Buddhist scholar
was wonderfully converted. Others followed, the work at-
tracted attention, persecution broke out, and two noble —
Christians were cruelly murdered. But God overruled this
sad event for good, the hostile governor died, a “Procla-
mation of Religious Liberty to the Laos” was issued and
persecution ceased. Since then the work has steadily de-—
veloped and has extended even beyond the borders of Siam
into French and Chinese territory.
Apart from the publication and circulation of the Scrip-
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA 125
tures through the American Bible Society, missionary work
in Siam is wholly in the hands of the Presbyterian Mission,
which now has ten stations, a staff of about 100 foreign
and 400 native workers, and a native church of nearly 8,000
communicants. The work includes several hospitals and
schools of higher grade and a large Mission Press.
Neglected Eastern Siam. The present missionary force
is far too small for the task of evangelizing this country.
Its entire eastern section, with one-half the whole population,
has no missionary and is still practically untouched by the
gospel.
Larger Region of the Tai Race. Mention has already
been made of the Tai race as the original stock from which
most of the people of Siam have come, but the present distri-
bution of this great race extends over a wide region 400,000
square miles in area, comprising not only northern Siam,
but also the Shan States of Burma, the Laos frontier of
French Indo-China and a section of the southwestern
provinces of China.
The Tai are a primitive race, as ancient as the Chinese
and resembling them a good deal in appearance. Most
authorities seem to regard them as of Mongolian origin,
although some think them more akin to the Aryans of India.
Known in general as the Tai (meaning “‘free’) race, they
are in certain sections also called the Shan and the Lao
people. Until touched by missionaries in northern Siam
they were almost lost to the knowledge of the world. Yet
recent and reliable estimates place their total number at
between sixteen and twenty millions. To Dr. W. Clifton
_ Dodd of the North Siam Presbyterian Mission, who labored
for these people with a consuming zeal until his death in
1919, belongs largely the credit of establishing missionary
contact with the Tai in their remote interior habitat. The
beginnings of work among them have been signally blessed
and some thousands have already turned from their
“demons’’ to the Lord. But the vast field as a whole has
barely been touched, and the present handful of mission-
aries needs to be multiplied many times over if this long
neglected but promising race is ever to be adds evan-
gelized.
126 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
MaLay PENINSULA
This long, finger-like peninsula, extending southward
almost to the equator, forms the extreme southeastern tip
of the continent of Asia. It comprises the British crown
colony known as the Straits Settlements at the southern end,
the Federated Malay States under British protection, and |
five other States adjoining Siam in the north, four of which
were formerly tributaries of Siam, but were ceded to Britain
in 1909.
The total population of the peninsula is about 3,300,000,
divided among Malays, Chinese (native born and immi-
grants), Tamils from India, and aboriginal tribes, besides
a rapidly increasing number of Europeans and Americans.
‘The diversity of races and languages constitutes a serious
difficulty in the way of missionary work.
In the Straits Settlements several Societies are at work.
The American Methodist Episcopal Mission has large
schools at Singapore and Penang, where thousands have
received Christian education. It has also an extensive pub-
lishing plant at Singapore. Its church members number
2,000. The Society for the Propagation of the Gospel has
another thousand converts, and the English Presbyterians
and the Brethren have a few hundred each. Missionary
effort even in this most accessible area is far from adequate,
and is mostly confined to the Chinese and Tamil immigrants. —
Almost nothing is attempted in behalf of the Malays, who —
are the most numerous and are almost all Mohammedans.
As to the other sections of the peninsula, comprising
almost three-fourths of the total population, the situation is
even worse, for missionary effort is feeble and straggling.
On the east coast are many diverse tribes of degraded —
aborigines, living away in the jungles, who have scarcely ©
been touched, while the northern states adjacent to Siam are ©
devoid of missionaries.
It is a shameful fact that within this peninsula, every part —
of it under the control, directly or indirectly, of a so-called ©
Christian nation, there are at least 2,000,000 souls for
whose spiritual enlightenment and conversion absolutely
nothing has yet been done. Meanwhile the soul-blighting
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA 127
religion of Islam is becoming a more and more pervasive
force throughout the peninsula.
FRENCH INDO-CHINA
Area, 250,000 square miles. Population, 20,000,000.
The Land. This last section of Southeastern Asia lies to
the east of Siam, bordering on the China Sea and touching
China on the north. In size one-fourth larger than France,
this territory came piece by piece into the possession of that
_ Power, and in 1898 was united under the name of French
Indo-China. Politically, it consists of five States: the
Colony of Cochin China and the Protectorates of Annam,
Tonking, Cambodia and Laos.
Physically, it consists of two parts: vast alluvial plains
in the east and south, drained by two large rivers; and
heavily wooded mountains in the interior to the north and
west. The soil of the plains is rich and produces one of the
world’s greatest rice crops, besides other grains, cereals,
fruits and spices. The mountains yield valuable minerals.
The climate is hot and trying to Europeans.
The People, The inhabitants, aside from some 24,000
Europeans, are mainly Annamese, who occupy the fertile
plains; Cambodians, who are more akin to the people of
India; and aboriginal tribes known as Mois, Thais, Tchams,
etc., who have been driven back for the most part into the
mountainous interior.
The Annamese are an extremely ancient people, descended
from a tribe belonging to the Mongolian race, which be-
tween 2,000 and 3,000 years before the Christian era occu-
pied the southern part of China as well as the territory now
_known as Tonking. For more than 1,000 years (B.C. I11I-
A.D. 968) they were ruled by a Chinese dynasty, and thus
became strongly influenced by Chinese civilization. The lit-
-erary and moral code of Confucius gave definite shape to
Annamese thought and religion, with results distinctly seen
even at this late date, for the prevailing religion of the Anna-
mese is a Chinese mixture of Confucianism, Buddhism and
Taoism, with the worship of ancestors and genii as the
dominant feature.
128 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Besides the native races, there is a large Chinese popula-
tion in the main cities and towns. As in all adjacent lands,
the Chinese merchants with their keen business sense and
enterprise have captured most of the big business of the
country, including the large export trade in rice. They are
amongst the most well-to-do and highly respected citizens.
French Influence.~ The French Government has given
much attention to its Far Eastern possession, and the visitor
from the West is surprised to find such cities as Saigon,
Haiphong and Hanoi thoroughly Europeanized, with broad,
well-paved streets, beautiful parks and boulevards and hand-
some buildings. Over 1,200 miles of railroad and three
times that length of automobile roads provide excellent
transportation throughout a large portion of the country.
In sad contrast to these material improvements are the
spiritual and moral conditions, for Indo-China is still a be-
nighted heathen land. It is true that Roman Catholicism
has been disseminated to some extent and boasts not a few
churches and converts. But, as the writer can testify from
a personal visit, investigation finds it to be a superficial thing
of form, tolerating all the old superstitions and vices and
giving no new spiritual possession to its converts. And it
is painful to add that the morals of the natives have been
made worse, rather than better, through contact with civil-
ization, because of the shocking example and enticement of
many European residents and visitors of the baser sort.
Missions. Owing to the historic attitude of France, as a
Roman Catholic Power, toward Protestantism, this exten-
sive country with its vast population has had to be classed,
up to a few years ago, among the totally unoccupied fields.
With the exception of two Swiss Brethren missionaries in
the remote interior of Laos, near the Siam border, and one
colporteur of the British and Foreign Bible Society, Protes-
tant missionaries were barred from Indo-China.
Only in to11, following the severance of Church-State
relations in France, was the Christian and Missionary Alli-
ance able to effect an entrance from its adjacent field in
South China. The first foothold was secured in Tourane, —
on the coast of Annam. From that beginning the work has —
gradually extended, not without difficulties, and even yet
with some hampering restrictions, until it has pressed its
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA 129
way into four of the five States of Indo-China, Laos being
the State excepted. Eight stations are now occupied by
twenty-five missionaries. Much blessing has attended the
work in this new and neglected field, and already there is a
native church of 500 members, largely self-supporting and
showing evidence of measuring up to its responsibility for
the evangelization of the whole land.
The recent occupation of Pnompenh, the capital of Cam-
bodia, registers an encouraging advance into unoccupied
territory. Yet the fact remains that French Indo-China is
still one of the least evangelized and most needy mission
fields in the whole world.
QUESTIONS
1. Name the countries comprising Southeastern Asia, and give
the location, size, population, different racial elements and dominant
religions of each.
2. Name the main missionary agencies at work in each of these
countries.
3. Give some account of the work of the largest Mission in
(a) Burma, (b) Siam, (c) French Indo-China.
4. Among what section of the population has missionary suc-
cess been greatest in (a) Burma, (b) Siam?
5. Describe present material, political and moral conditions in
Siam, and their bearing upon mission work.
6. (a) Locate and describe the Tai people. (b) How numerous
are they? (c) What mission work has been done among them?
_ 7. Give the political divisions of French Indo-China, and sketch
briefly its history.
8. Indicate the sections of Southeastern Asia wholly or largely
unoccupied by Missions, and the approximate number of people
unreached.
CHAPTER XI
CHINA
AREA, 4,275,000 SQUARE MILES. POPULATION, 440,000,000
I. General Features.
Area and Divisions. The Chinese Republic, formerly the
Chinese Empire, comprises China proper, or the Eighteen
Provinces, and the vast dependencies of Manchuria (3 prov-
inces), Mongolia, Chinese Turkistan and Tibet to the north
and west. The area of China proper is about 1,500,000
square miles, and that of the whole Republic about 4,275,-
000 square miles. Its total size is thus greater than the
United States or the entire continent of Europe. Its largest
province, Szechuan, is the size of France or the combined
size of New England, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania
and Ohio; its smallest, Chekiang, is slightly larger than
Ireland or about equal to Maine; while Manchuria is three
times the size of the British Isles or almost that of the com-
bined Atlantic seaboard States from Maine to Florida.
Physical Features. Covering the full extent, in latitude,
of the north temperate zone, China presents a wide variety
of altitude, soil and climate. It has 2,000 miles of coast-
line, abounds in mountain ranges, and is traversed by many
great rivers and a perfect network of smaller streams and
artificial canals. The Yangtse River is 60 miles wide at its
mouth, and is navigable by large ocean steamers for 700
miles, and by smaller vessels, designed to overcome the
rapids, for 1,100 miles farther. China offers every variety
of landscape—broad, level plains, rolling hills, loess deposits,
lofty mountains, and the sublime Yangtse gorges.
Resources. China’s resources of every kind are practi-
cally inexhaustible. There are said to be 600,000,000 acres
of arable soil. In minerals probably no other country in
the world can compare with China. Coal areas alone are
estimated at 200,000 square miles—twenty-five times the
130
CHINA 131
size of Wales, and rich deposits of iron alongside of the coal
make a combination well known to be the basis of modern
industry and material wealth.
Population. The lack of any reliable census has made
computations largely a matter of guesswork. Published
estimates have ranged all the way from 250,000,000 to 446,-
000,000. The more recent estimates, based upon fuller data,
favor the higher figures. That of the Chinese Maritime
Customs in 1921 put the population at 443,382,000. The
Chinese Post Office estimate of the same year was 436,094,-
953, not including Mongolia, Tibet and the Manchurian
province of Fengtien.
It is a solemn fact to reflect upon that fully one-fourth of
the entire human family live in China. The density of
population varies greatly in the different provinces, from
872 to the square mile in Kiangsu to 48 in Kansu. The
Fighteen Provinces and Manchuria together comprise much
less than one-half the total area of the Republic, and yet
contain more than thirty-nine-fortieths of the population.
Antiquity. China, otherwise called the Middle Kingdom,
the Flowery Kingdom, the Celestial Empire, and the land of
Sinim (Isa. 49:12), is the oldest of existing nations. Its
legendary history goes back to about thirty centuries before
the Christian era, and its true historical period is conceded
by Western scholars to date from 2000 or 2200 B.C.—in
other words, 1,500 years before the founding of Rome, 700
years before the Exodus, 300 years before the call of Abra-
ham. Think of a people that can boast a national history of
forty centuries, during which their language, institutions,
arts, government and religion have all continued on lines
clearly formulated at that remote period! Think of a nation
which has seen the rise and wane and final extinction of the
greatest world empires of history—Assyria, Babylon, Greece
and Rome—and yet lives on, the same compact race, unim-
paired in vitality and even increasing steadily in numbers!
Qualities and Achievements. Among the indisputable
marks of a worthy and venerable civilization of which the
Chinese can boast are their elaborate system of patriarchal
government; their remarkable written language and litera-
ture; their world-famed discoveries, such as the mariner’s
compass, gunpowder, and the art of block-printing; their
132 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
unique manufactures of silks, porcelain, lacquerware, etc. ;
and their vast store of valuable empirical knowledge along
every line. The present Chinese are physically strong, pos-
sess great powers of endurance and adaptability, are prover-
bially industrious, patient, frugal, and, as a rule, peace-
loving. Their great*drawback has been that, as true disci-
ples of their illustrious sage, Confucius, their faces have
been turned backward in a worship of the immeasurable
past. For long centuries this characteristic effectively
blocked the way to alladvancement. With a spirit of intense
conservatism they stubbornly resisted any change and fought
the importation of foreign ideas, until a series of startling
events and providences within the past twenty-five years has
wrought undreamed-of changes, forced the nation from her
age-long seclusion, and launched a new China upon the stage
of international affairs.
Religions. It is usually stated that there are three chief
religions in China—Confucianism, Taoism, and Buddhism. ©
This does not mean, however, as might be inferred, that the
people are divided into three different sects each with its
separate faith. Most of the Chinese profess all three re-
ligions, and practise one or other as occasion prompts them, |
Confucianism, derived from the teachings of the great
Chinese philosopher, Confucius, who lived in the 6th century
B.C., is, strictly speaking, not so much a religion as a sys-
tem of political and social ethics. The instructions of Con-_
fucius are confined to the duties and relations of society and
the State. While he mentioned the Supreme Ruler, under —
the term “heaven,” he gave no clear account of such a being,
did not define man’s duties toward him, and was silent re-
garding a future life. Yet the system embodies the worship
of nature and of departed spirits, ancestors in particular.
“Thus sanctioned by the sage, ancestral worship has re-
mained the heart and soul of Chinese religion.” * :
Confucius himself is an object of special worship, all
cities being provided with temples in his honor. The Man-
darins perform official worship to the sage twice a year. No
images or priests are connected with this worship, and Con-
fucianism in theory is opposed to idolatry. Yet in popular
practice the worship of idols, as well as nature worship (the
be Che \Uplift of China, .92)
CHINA 133
deities of the hills, the rivers, the wind, the rain, etc.), goes
on along with ancestral worship, all enjoying together the
official sanction of the State.
Taoism claims as its founder Lao-tse, a great philosopher
born fifty years before Confucius, but the system has long
since departed from the theories of its reputed founder, and
is to-day grossly materialistic and full of all kinds of gro-
tesque superstition. It has brought the Chinese into bondage
to innumerable demons and evil spirits, and is responsible
for a great variety of absurd beliefs and harmful practices.
Buddiism was imported into China from India in 67 A.D.
by the Emperor Ming Ti, who was dissatisfied with the
materialistic trend of Confucianism and Taoism, and wel-
comed a religion which by its doctrines of the transmigra-
tion of souls and future punishment professed to shed some
light upon the fate of the dead. It met with much opposi-
tion, and even to-day “its position is that of an officially
proscribed, though actually tolerated, heresy.” ? Yet it has
gained general recognition and a multitude of followers,
and has filled China with its temples and shrines.
Both the Taoist and Buddhist priests are for the most
part lazy, ignorant, vicious parasites on society, actuated
only by mercenary motives and despised by the people, who
regard them as indispensable evils.
There are also scattered through China, mainly in the
western provinces, Mohammedans, estimated at from five
to ten millions in number. They are much less zealous in
their religious practices than the Moslems of India and the
Near East, but maintain their forms of faith, abstain rigidly
from eating pork, and do not intermarry with the Chinese.
They are, as a rule, stronger in their resistance of Chris-
tianity than any other of the religious sects, and thus far
very few have become Christians,
II. Missionary Work.
The Nestorians. The earliest known introduction of the
Christian faith into China was by the Nestorians, who early
in the sixth century came overland from the west, reso-
lutely pushing their way across vast deserts and lofty moun-
tains. These Syrian priests appear to have been kindly re-
~» 2“The Uplift of China,” p. 105.
134 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
ceived by the Emperor, and to have made a large number of
disciples. Strange indeed is it that after being propagated
for some eight centuries the Nestorian faith lost its influ-
ence to the extent that every trace of the movement disap-
peared and its very existence in the Empire was forgotten.
Only in 1625 was a buried marble tablet discovered by acci-
dent in Sian Fu, province of Shensi, bearing the date 781
A.D., and recording in Chinese and Syriac characters the
arrival of the missionaries and the success of their work.
This famous Nestorian Tablet is still on exhibit in the city
of Sian.
Early Romamst Efforts. An Italian monk, John de
Monte Corvino, reached China by the overland route from
India about 1294. Like the Nestorians, he was well re-
ceived by the Mongol Emperor, the great Kublai Khan, and
his work was at least outwardly very successful. A church
was built and an orphan asylum conducted at Peking, thou-
sands were baptized, and the New Testament and Psalms
were translated into Chinese. But in 1368 the Mongol
dynasty gave place to the Ming dynasty, and the new rulers
viewed the “foreign religion” with disfavor. A period of
bitter persecution broke out, and a blank of nearly 200 years
followed in the history of Christianity in China.
Later Romanist Activities. Next came the effort of the
great Jesuit missionary, Francis Xavier, to enter China—
an effort cut short by his death in 1552. The actual en-
trance was effected by the distinguished monk, Matteo Ricct,
and a companion, who were sent from Macao in 1580 and
traveled through the country disguised as Buddhist priests.
After encountering many trials and difficulties, the labors of
these men and their successors met with pronounced success,
churches were built and Christian communities formed. The
priests’ scientific knowledge won for them no little prestige
and favor at Peking. But then the inherent proclivity of
Romanism to internal dissension and political intrigue as-
serted itself. Bitter disputes arose among the various orders
—Jesuits, Franciscans and Dominicans—with respect to the
consistency of Christians practising Confucian rites. Their
persistent meddling in political affairs, moreover, was
strongly resented by the Chinese authorities. The result was
a growing disfavor, and in the early eighteenth century out-
CHINA 135
breaks of violent persecution all but annihilated the Roman
Catholic Church in China. At last, in 1724, Christianity
was proscribed by edict and the missionaries were banished
from the Empire.
Protestant Missions, Protestant missionary work began
with, Morrison’s.artival in 1807, and may be divided into
the following periods:
(1) 1807-1842—to the Opium War.
(2) 1842-1860—to the Treaty of Tientsin.
(3) 1860-1895—to the Chino-Japanese War.
(4) 1895-1911—to the Chinese Revolution.
(5) I9gII- —to the present.
First Preriop (1807-1842)
Robert Morrison (1807-1834 ),° the noble Protestant mis-
sionary pioneer to the Chinese nation, was sent out by the
London Missionary Society in 1807. Like Carey, he was of
humble parentage and occupation—a shoe-last maker—and
acquired a good education and several languages by dint of
persevering application. Like Carey, too, he was refused
passage by the East India Company, so reached Canton via
the United States in an American ship. His famous retort
to a sneering question put to him by a shipowner in New
York reveals something of the Christian character of the
young pioneer. “So then, Mr. Morrison, you really expect
to make an impression on the idolatry of the great Chinese
Empire?” asked the skeptic. Quickly and with emphasis
came the reply, “No, sir, but I expect God will.”
None but a man prepared by God would have been equal .~
to the task Morrison faced. He was unwelcome alike to the
Chinese, the East India Company, and the Jesuit mission-
aries at Macao. Trials and discouragements thickly beset
him; he met with opposition at every turn. At first he
dwelt in a room of an American warehouse in Canton,
_ dressed in Chinese garb, and was obliged to conceal him-
self indoors while pressing his task of Chinese language
study. Soon he was compelled to withdraw to Macao, a
coast port 90 miles south, which had been in the possession
3 The dates after names of missionaries are those of their missionary
service.
136 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
of Portugal since 1557. At the end of two years his linguis-
tic attainments won for him the position of translator for
the East India Company. God’s hand was unmistakably in
this, for it not only provided Morrison with a liberal salary,
but, what was far more, it secured him the safest and per-
haps the only means_of remaining in China.
In addition to his official duties he applied himself assidu-
ously to the task of thoroughly mastering the language and
translating the Scriptures, while also embracing the limited
opportunities presented to him for evangelistic work. In
1812 the translation of the New Testament was completed,
and that of the entire Bible in 1818, with some help from
Dr. Milne. Besides the Bible, Morrison ultimately published
more than a score of different works, including a Chinese
grammar and his monumental dictionary of six volumes and
4,500 pages. In 1814, after seven long years of patient
toil, he baptized in Macao Tsai A-ko, the first known Chi-
nese Christian convert. In 1824 Morrison visited England
and was received with honor by the churches and also by
the King. He returned to China in 1826 and died there
in 1834.
“The missionary life of Dr. Morrison covered but twen-
ty-seven years, yet in view of the circumstances and the
difficulties of the time, his achievements are almost incredi-
ble. Although his actual converts were less than a dozen, —
and although he was excluded from all but a corner of the
land to which he devoted his life, yet by his literary labors
he laid the foundations for all future work, and by giving
the Chinese the Christian Scriptures in their own language ©
he captured a commanding position in the very heart of ©
the land to be possessed. ‘By the Chinese Bible,’ he said
himself, ‘when dead, I shall yet speak.’ ”’ 4 |
William Milne, Morrison’s first associate, arrived in 1813.
He attempted to join him in Macao, but was compelled to —
withdraw, and finally settled at Malacca. There he estab-
lished an Anglo-Chinese college and a printing press. He
was joined in 1816 by Walter Medhurst, and together these ©
two pioneers, undaunted by the fact of being denied resi- —
dence in China, carried on in Malacca, Batavia and other ©
points in Malaysia and the Dutch East Indies, to which many —
4“The Uplift of China,” p. 141.
CHINA 137
Chinese had emigrated, a vigorous work of preaching, teach-
ing, translation and publication, the influence of which was
mightily felt within the Empire itself, despite the best efforts
of her rulers to counteract it.
Dr. Karl Gutzlaff, of the Netherlands Missionary Society,
deserves mention along with the above named trio of the
London Missionary Society as an able and effective pioneer
of this early period. Despite the rigid prohibitions of the
Chinese Government against missionaries and Christian lit-
erature, Gutzlaff contrived, as surgeon or interpreter, to
make several voyages in trading vessels up and down the
coast. Stoned by angry mobs, hounded by the police, haled
before the mandarins, he yet succeeded in distributing large
quantities of Scripture portions and tracts, and the accounts
of his adventures stirred up new interest at home in Chinese
missions.
American Pioneers. The earliest American missionaries
to China were Rev. E. C. Bridgman and Rev. David Abeel,
sent out by the American Board in 1829. Bridgman’s most
valuable contribution to Chinese missions was his literary
works. His name ranks high among Bible translators and
revisers. He began the publication of the Chinese Reposi-
tory, a storehouse of valuable information about China,
which continued to be issued for twenty years.
In 1833 Dr. S. Wells Williams joined the little group as
missionary printer, but was destined to distinction later on
as sinologue, historian and diplomat. His “Middle King-
dom” is still the standard authority on the Chinese Empire.
Dr. Peter Parker was the first medical missionary to
China, sent out by the American Board in 1834. He estab-
lished a hospital at Canton, which lays just claim to being
the first institution in heathen lands with distinctive aims of
its kind. It has had a marvelous career under the direction
of a long line of distinguished missionary physicians, and
still continues its beneficent work of healing to many thou-
sands annually. Dr. Parker was singularly successful in
overcoming by his skill the animosity of the Chinese, and
has been said to have ‘‘opened China at the point of the lan-
cet.” Inno mission field has medical work met with a more
imperative call of need, or found a vaster field of service; in
none has such work been more signally used in disarming
138 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
bitter prejudice, in opening the door for the gospel, and thus
in ministering healing to sinful souls as well as to diseased
bodies.
SECOND PERIOD (1842-1860)
This period dates from the end of the Opium War in 1842
to the ratification of the Treaty of Tientsin in 1860, at the
close of what is known as the “Arrow War.” Some knowl-
edge of the course of development of political and commer-
cial relations between China and other nations during these
early years is essential to a proper appreciation of the condi-
tions attending the efforts of pioneers in introducing mis-
sionary work.
The immediate occasion of the Opium War was the at-
tempt of British vessels to import a consignment of Indian
opium at Canton. ‘This act of forcing upon China a de-
structive drug which has proved her greatest national curse
and the ruin of countless millions of her people, body and
soul, can never in itself be justly defended, but must be re-
garded as an indelible blot upon the fair name of Britain.
Yet it must be recognized that opium was not the real cause,
but only the occasion of the war. The true cause lay in the
conceited arrogance of the Chinese Government, its utter
contempt for treaty obligations entered into, the,outrageous
restrictions placed upon commerce, and the insulting and
intolerable treatment of foreigners. The war clearly had
to come, but it is ever to be regretted that an unrighteous
and indefensible incident was the occasion of it.
God, however, turned the unhappy event to China’s spirit-
ual blessing, for by the Treaty of Nanking the five ports of
Canton, Amoy, Fuchow, Ningpo and Shanghai were opened
to foreign residence and trade, and Hongkong was ceded to
Great Britain. At once there followed an inrush of mission-
ary forces and activities such as has probably never been —
paralleled in any other land in the same time. In addition
to the London Missionary Society (1807), the American —
Board (1830), and the Protestant Episcopal Church of ©
America (1835), which were already on the ground, or,
more properly speaking, waiting at the doors, other Socie-
ties entered the field in the following order :-—
CHINA "189
1842. American Baptist Missionary Union
American Presbyterian Mission
American Reformed Church Mission
1843. American Southern Baptist Mission
1844. Church Missionary Society
1846. Basel Missionary Society
1847. American Methodist Episcopal Mission
English Presbyterian Mission
Rhenish Mission
1848. American Southern Methodist Mission
1852. English Wesleyan Missionary Society
1859. English Baptist Missionary Society
Not a few memorable names occur in the list of the mis-
sionaries of this period. Among the best known are Dr.
Legge, whose translation of the Chinese Classics, and com-
mentary thereupon, have become famous; Drs. Lockhart,
Hobson and Kerr, medical pioneers; Dr. Wm. Ashmore,
best remembered as a staunch champion of the principle of
a self-supporting and self-propagating native church; Rev.
Wm. C. Burns, translator of Bunyan’s “Pilgrim’s Progress”
and many helpful hymns, whose saintly character as well as
distinctive methods of getting close to the Chinese exerted
a powerful influence.
A few sentences may well be quoted from Dr. A. H.
Smith’s general summary of the above two periods of Prot-
estant Missions in China. Referring to the missionary
movement in military terms, he writes: “To this Christian
invasion there was almost everywhere opposed on the part
of the Chinese a steady and a powerful resistance. . . . The
missionaries were everywhere watched, suspected, despised,
insulted, and, as opportunity offered, plundered. They
were denied a spot for the sole of their foot to rest upon,
were repeatedly driven out only to return again, and when
at last a habitation or a chapel had been laboriously secured,
it was perhaps torn down, and the weary process had to be
begun anew. It is not strange that amid insanitary sur-
roundings, with unwholesome food, and incessant anxieties
and toils, many men and women utterly broke down. Out
of a total of 214 male missionaries previous to 1860, 44 had
died. . . . The foundations of all the subsequent mission
140 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
work in China were by them laid deep, and strong, and well.
The average missionary life of this handful of men was but
seven years, and but one attained to forty years. But in
view of the Bible translations and repeated revisions, ‘com-
mentaries on the Scripture written, grammars and diction-
aries of the language~prepared, tracts printed, converts
made, churches formed, native preachers employed, Chris-
tian schools organized,’ the way hewn out of obstinate rock,
and China in spite of the Chinese themselves opened, it was
impossible for those then living not to exclaim in devout
thanksgiving and praise, ‘What hath God wrought?’ ...
Let us learn from the records of the past how vast are the
results which God can accomplish with but a handful of
human laborers, and from a contemplation of the yet
greater task remaining, what a trumpet-call is sounding for
men and women of like spirit with those who have gone
before to enter into and complete their labors.”’ °
Tuirp PrErtop (1860-1895 )
The Opium War had not after all settled the matters at
issue between China and foreign nations, and the ground
had all to be wearily gone over again. Another war broke
out in 1856, known as the “Arrow War.’ Canton was
captured by the British and French, treaties were made at
Tientsin in 1858, only to be set at nought by China, and it
was only in 1860, when Peking was taken by a foreign
force, that the treaties were finally ratified. The Treaty
of Tientsin stipulated that ten more cities should be opened
to trade and the whole Empire opened to missionaries, and
that Christian converts should be free from persecution.
As a result of this second “opening of China’ there was
at once an exodus of missionaries from the few centers
already occupied to the new treaty ports, and efforts soon
followed to penetrate the interior. But despite all treaties
signed, and promises made, by China’s rulers, the actual
opening up of China, whether to missionary work or to
foreign intercourse, was destined to be in the teeth of bitter
opposition from the authorities and frequent anti-foreign
uprisings of the people, throughout this entire period and
5“The Uplift of China,” pp. 151-153.
CHINA 141
even beyond it. Missionary progress up to the very end
of the nineteenth century was punctuated by insult, riot and
bloodshed.
Serious outbreaks occurred in 1870 at Tientsin and Han-
kow, when over a score of foreigners were brutally killed
and much property was destroyed. Another virulent anti-
foreign demonstration took the form of vile anti-Christian
placards and pamphlets issued from the capital of Hunan
province in 1890. These were followed by riots in the
Yangtse valley and the murder of missionaries in Hupeh
province in 1891 and 1893. In 1895 took place the memo-
rable Kucheng massacre in Fukien province, when ten mem-
bers of the Church Missionary Society were murdered. In
all, 26 Protestant martyrs are recorded previous to the
Boxer massacre of 1900, while many Roman Catholics and
other foreigners suffered a like fate.
Tai Ping Rebellion (1850-1865). This great event calls
for notice both on account of its tremendous effect in shak-
ing the Empire to its very foundations, and because of the
relation it bore to the missionary propaganda in its origin.
Its leader was a southern Chinese named Hung Siu Ch’uan,
who was given some Christian tracts by Liang A-fa, a con-
vert of Morrison. Professing to have adopted Christianity,
he entered upon a vigorous crusade against the three evils of
idolatry, opium, and the Manchu dynasty. At first the
movement was a religious one, with commendable and hope-
ful features. But success turned the leader’s head, and he
became a political aspirant, at the same time making for
himself blasphemous claims of partnership with God and
Jesus Christ.
_ The Taipings swept like a scourge over the most fertile
provinces, pillaging and murdering everywhere, captured
Nanking, the southern capital, and even threatened Peking.
It was only with the help of European officers that the Gov-
ernment finally crushed the rebels, the most conspicuous part
being played by the noble Christian soldier, General Charles
G. Gordon, and his “Ever-Victorious Army.” It is esti-
mated that in that awful struggle of 15 years 20,000,000
lives were lost.
The Great Famine (1877-1878). This terrible affliction,
which befell the northern provinces of Shantung, Honan
142 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
and Shansi, took a toll of over 10,000,000 human lives.
But it also proved an occasion for the display of the true
character and aims of the missionaries. Large sums of
money were subscribed by foreigners in China and abroad,
and a staff of missionaries administered effective relief to
the distressed districts. ‘This practical exhibition of Chris-
tian sympathy and help proved the golden key to unlock
many a hitherto closed door to missionary service in inland
China.
Some Prominent Missionaries. Among the many worthy
names connected with this third period only a few can be
mentioned:
Dr. Gritith John (1855-1912), of the London Missionary
Society, was the pioneer worker at Hankow, where for half
a century he remained the central missionary figure. He
was a fearless itinerant and an indefatigable preacher, and
the great number of splendid gospel tracts which came from —
his pen have carried conviction to multitudes, and made Dr. ©
John’s name a beloved household word all over China.
Dr. W. A. P. Martin (1850-1916) was noted as a Chris-
tian educator and writer. His best known work, entitled —
“Evidences of Christianity,” became a missionary classic —
and had an enormous circulation. He was signally honored
by the Chinese Government in being made President of
several high Government institutions, including the Imperial
University at Peking.
James Gilmour (1870-1891), known as “Gilmour of —
Mongolia,” labored heroically for the wild, roving Mon-
gols of that vast, elevated northern plain. He cheerfully ©
endured hardships and privation, spending long periods
afield among them, sharing their black skin tents and un-
palatable food, and suffering the rigor of their bitterly cold
winters, as he relieved their sick bodies and ministered the —
gospel to their dark souls steeped in the superstitions and ©
vices of a degraded Lamaism.
Others of this period were Dr. J. L. Nevius (1854-1893),
strong in his advocacy of missionary methods making for a —
self-propagating native church; Dr. Ernest Faber (1865-
1899), one of the ablest and most voluminous writers in
Chinese, whose books exerted a deep and lasting influence;
Rev. David Hill (1865-1896), of the Wesleyan Mission at
CHINA 143
Hankow, saintly in character and rich in good works, who
during his relief work in the great famine of 1877-78 first
influenced Mr. Hsi, afterwards a distinguished pastor of the
China Inland Mission; Bishop Moule (1858-1918), of the
Church Mission at Hangchow; Dr. A. H. Smith (1872-),
easily the foremost among a host of missionary book writers
on China, and still in active service; Dr. Y. J. Allen (1860-
1907), and Dr. Timothy Richard (1869-1919), able con-
tributors to Chinese Christian literature; Dr. J. C. Gibson
(1874-1919) of Swatow, one of the two Chairmen of the
reat China Centenary Conference’ in 1907; Rev. F. W.
Baller (1873-1922), of the China Inland Mission, whose
Chinese dictionary, language primer and other textbooks
have assisted hundreds of missionaries in acquiring Chi-
nese. But a host of other missionary leaders of almost or
quite equal prominence with these could be mentioned.
“~ China Inland Mission (1865). One outstanding figure
of this period we have reserved for separate mention in con-
nection with the Society of which he was the founder. This
is Rev. J. Hudson Taylor (1853-1905), whom God chose
and prepared for a part of unique importance in the task of
evangelizing the millions of China. Mr. Taylor first went to
China in 1853. His early intimate relations with Rev. Wm.
Burns exercised a strong influence upon his life and subse-
quent service. Compelled soon to return home because of ill-
health, he became overwhelmed with the thought of the
spiritual needs of the vast interior of China, still scarcely
touched with the gospel. Before long he became convicted
that God was calling him to undertake a forward move-
ment in this direction. The result was the formation in
1865 of the China Inland Mission, and in the following year
Hudson Taylor with a party of fifteen sailed for China to
begin that work.
The China Inland Mission was the first, and is still the
largest, of a number of missionary movements to which the
name “faith mission” has been applied, because of their
principle of making no direct solicitation of funds for their
work. The workers are guaranteed no fixed salary, but
trust the Lord to supply their needs through the voluntary
offerings of His people in answer to prayer. This Mission is
international and interdenominational, candidates from dif-
144 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
ferent countries and various evangelical sects all working
together harmoniously. The missionaries include laymen
as well as ordained ministers, and both single and married
women receive official appointment as well as men, and to-
gether constitute more than half of the missionary staff.
The policy of the work is strongly evangelistic, the great
objective being the widest possible witnessing of the gospel
to those who have never heard it, to the end that all may
have the opportunity of salvation, and that the task of world-
wide evangelization committed by Christ to His Church may
speedily be completed in preparation for the Lord’s return.
The whole history of this Mission has been attended by
the rich blessing of God. Its General Director, since the
death of Dr. Hudson Taylor, has been Mr. D. E. Hoste.
Its work has extended into the remotest parts of China, and
its latest report (1923) shows 252 stations and 1,755 out-
stations, and a total missionary staff of about 1,100. Since
the commencement of the work over 93,000 converts have
been baptized. Besides being the largest of the many
Missions working in China, the China Inland Mission
stands out before the whole world as one of the strongest
witnesses to the faithfulness of God in supplying the needs
of so great a company of His workers these many years,
in answer to simple faith and prayer.
Christian and Missionary Alliance (1888). This So-
ciety, patterned largely after the China Inland Mission in
its principles and practice, had a worthy share in the pioneer
work of several of the last provinces of China to be entered
with the gospel. It now has in China 39 main stations in 6
provinces, and a force of about 150 missionaries.
FourTH PERIoD (1895-1911)
Chino-Japanese War (1894-1895). This war broke out
over a dispute between China and Japan regarding their
respective rights in Korea. Within a few months the Chi-
nese troops were everywhere defeated, the Chinese navy
destroyed, several important ports captured, and Manchuria
occupied. China’s defeat at the hands of a small nation like
Japan was a keen humiliation, and rudely awakened her more
thoughtful leaders to the first realization of her national im-
CHINA 145
potence. The conviction grew upon them that drastic re-
forms must be carried out and modern institutions and
methods no longer scouted but adopted, if China was not to
be hopelessly doomed. -Thereupon began a bitter struggle
between the progressive and reactionary parties in Chinese
officialdom, in which struggle the young Emperor, Kuang
Hsu, openly aligned himself with the reformers, while his
aunt, the notorious Empress Dowager, as strongly sided
with the opposing faction. By a skilful stroke of diplo-—
macy the Empress Dowager and her party gained the upper
hand, the Emperor was made virtually a prisoner, and the
newly initiated prceran of reform was suddenly laid in
the dust.
Boxer Uprising (1900). The triumph of the Empress
Dowager and the reactionary party at Peking swiftly cul-
minated in the memorable Boxer uprising of 1900. Num-
erous points of friction with foreign governments and with
foreigners in China, and growing alarm at the steady gain
of foreign ideas and influence within the Empire, united to
precipitate a crisis. An elaborate plot was hatched to murder
or drive out every “foreign devil” and to stamp out every
seed of hated foreign-ism from the country. The blow fell
most heavily upon the missionaries, because of their being
scattered far in the interior in every part of the realm.
Volumes have been written of the fearful sufferings endured
by the missionary body and the native church, especially in
the north, but the full story can never be told. Altogether
189 Protestant missionaries and missionary children were
put to a cruel death as martyrs. The two Missions which
lost most heavily were the China Inland Mission, with 79
martyrs, and the Christian and Missionary Alliance, with 36.
How many Chinese Christians suffered martyrdom will
never be accurately known, but the number certainly reaches
into thousands. Many of these Christians refused the offer
of life at the price of renouncing allegiance to the Saviour,
calmly laid their heads upon the block and sealed their testi-
mony in their blood. Such a record will ever constitute an
enriching heritage to the Church of Christ in China and the
whole world.
Some idea of the extent of damage done to foreign prop-
erty and other material interests may be gathered from the
146 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
fact that the foreign Powers imposed upon China an indem-
nity of $333,000,000 in gold.
And the result of it all upon missions in China? Never
did a dark storm-cloud more truly have a silver lining.
Never did a malicious blow of Satan hurled against the
Church of the living God more signally fail of its object and
rebound to his own hurt. Once again was it demonstrated
that “the blood of the martyrs is the seed of the Church.”
The Boxer uprising not only put missionary work upon a
safer basis, through the new conditions insisted upon by the
great Powers in the settlement which followed the capture of
Peking by foreign forces, but it imparted to the movement
the mightiest spiritual impetus of the whole century. A
comparison of figures shows that the direct results of the
work during the first decade after 1900 were far more than
those of the entire century preceding 1900.
FirtH PERIOD (IQII TO THE PRESENT)
Chinese Revolution. The Revolution which broke out
with startling suddenness on October 9th, 1911, was the
final outburst of smoldering fires of discontent which had
existed under the surface for years. While the precipitating
cause of the outbreak was a dispute between the provinces
and the central government over the control of railways,
yet the real cause lay far deeper, in the misrule, injustice,
and tyranny of the hated alien Manchu government. Elab-
orate revolutionary preparations had been made in secret.
In an incredibly short time the Imperial forces were de-
feated, the revolutionists were in control, the baby Emperor
and Prince Regent were forced to abdicate, and the whole
world stood aghast at the spectacle of the oldest despotic
monarchy suddenly turned into the youngest republic.
This Revolution was in no sense anti-foreign. Indeed,
some of its leaders had been pupils in mission schools or
otherwise in touch with missionary propaganda, and it may
be said that far as that propaganda was, and always is, from
advocating political revolution, yet the great ideas of right-
eousness, justice, and liberty, which Christianity inculcates,
had begun to exercise their inevitable influence in China, as
they earlier had done in Western lands, so that many who
CHINA 147
were not prepared to give their personal allegiance to Christ
were nevertheless made impatient of conditions to which
they formerly submitted with feelings either of indifference
or of helplessness. From this viewpoint Christian Missions
may be regarded as having been the efficient cause of the
Chinese Revolution.
Of the prominent leaders in the new order—Sun Yat Sen,
Yuan Shih Kat, Lt Yuan Heng and others—we cannot
speak, nor yet of the fortunes of the young republic to date.
Its path has been strewn with difficulties arising from con-
flicting ambitions among political leaders and parties, as well
as from the fact that the great bulk of the Chinese are yet
far from prepared for the exercise of citizenship in a re-
public. Discontented and lawless elements have also taken
advantage of the exigencies of this transition period in the
government to create disturbances, so that brigandage and
acts of violence have been much in evidence in various parts
of the country. This unsettled state of affairs has caused
much distress to the people of the districts affected, has
rendered rural missionary operations difficult and dangerous,
and has threatened to embarrass the good relations between
China and the other Powers. New China truly needs our
sympathy, our prayers, and our help in her efforts to work
out her own political salvation.
Changed Conditions. The world has probably never seen
another national transformation so gigantic, so complete,
so far-reaching, within so short a time. The old China
of thirty or even twenty years ago is no more. Literally,
“old things are passed away; behold, all things are become
new.” New politics, new transportation, new commerce
and industry, new education, new social and moral ideas,
new dress and customs—all this and much more. The queue
discarded, opium prohibited, footbinding condemned, tor-
ture abolished, even idols destroyed and temples turned into
schools—surely all this is cheering indeed! But over against
such hopeful features must be placed new and grave menaces
—the curse of foreign rum, cigarettes, harlots, indecent and
atheistic books, and a host of other moral evils and baneful
influences which are pouring in, even faster than the gospel,
through the new “open door.’ Nor dare we deceive our-
selves by imagining that any or all of the improved outward
148 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
conditions necessarily bring China a whit nearer spiritual
renovation than she was before. China’s root difficulty is
sin, the only remedy for sin is salvation, and the only way
of salvation is through Jesus Christ. But what the new con-
ditions do provide is an infinitely better and larger oppor-
tunity to present the saving gospel to China’s 440,000,000
precious souls, and hence the responsibility for her speedy
evangelization is correspondingly greater to-day than ever.
before.
Christian Progress. Some indication of the growth of
missions in China within the last few decades is afforded
by a comparison of figures presented at the four general
conferences of Protestant Missions as yet held. ‘They are
as follows:
1877 +1890 1907 1922
SOCIELIES Ws Wonka tute entero ; 29 AI 82 174
Stations and out-stations ....... 602 seta 5,734 7,520
Missionaries (s)he aeaw armies A730 1200 3,833 6,663
Native: workers) gucinny ewe ac O74 WintsO57 6,961 28,396
SOMMUNICANES hese cee erect oieicns 13,035 37,287 178,251 366,524
A New Epoch Begun. The great National Christian
Conference, held at Shanghai in May, 1922, marked an
epoch in the Christian movement in China of even greater
significance than the Centenary Conference of Protestant
Missions in 1907.
The significance lay not in the large attendance, even
though 1,100 delegates were present, drawn together from
every section of China and representing every branch of
missionary work. It lay rather in the fact that this was the
first Christian Conference in China to which the Chinese
came as delegated representatives of their own communions,
and came in equal numbers to the missionary delegates and
on an equal standing with them. The leadership of the Con-
ference, from the presiding officer down to the chairman
of the least sub-committee, was in Chinese and not foreign
hands. The report of the most important of the five main
Commissions which reported to the Conference—that relat-
ing to the Message of the Church—was prepared entirely
by Chinese.
CHINA 149
The crowning act of this Conference was the creation of
a National Christian Council of 100 members, half of them
Chinese and half foreigners, to which body was. entrusted
the task of supreme leadership and coordination of the vari-
ous Christian forces within the republic.
To quote from a most recent and thoughtful book on
China: “As an event it [the National Christian Conference ]
was truly epoch-making. Immature as the National Chris-
tian Council may be in some of its manifestations, it is the
outward and visible sign of an inward and spiritual grace; it
is the expression of a national Christian consciousness come
to birth. During the sessions of the Conference many of
its members grasped the fact that potentially they, and not
the missionaries, were the pivotal people. Other members
who failed to grasp the full significance of the Conference
at the time will do so when they look back upon it later.
They will see that it was during those days that the mis-
sionaries parted with their heritage of leadership; parted
with it in a great act of Christian faith and love.” *
Chinese Christian Leaders of To-day. To single out for
special mention a few names among many that are eligible,
especially in the case of living men, may be regarded as in-
vidious. Yet as tothe outstanding character of a certain few
of China’s sons, and their distinguished leadership in the
Christian movement in that land at the present time, all who
are familiar with China will agree. Among the best known
are Dr. Cheng Ching-y1, who so ably acted as Chairman of
the National Christian Conference just mentioned; General
Feng Yii-hsiang, the great Christian soldier, among whose
army such amazing evangelistic results have been achieved;
Dr. C. T. Wang, the Christian statesman, who has filled a
- succession of high national offices, and is now Minister of
State for Foreign Affairs; Dr. Chang Po-ling, Christian
educationalist, and principal of one of the greatest purely
Chinese institutions of learning in the republic; and David
Yui, General Secretary of the National Executive of the
Y.M.C.A. in China and “People’s Delegate” to the Wash-
ington Disarmament Conference. Others are equally deserv-
ing of mention, but these names serve as types of Chinese
Christian leadership along various lines—leadership which
1“In China Now,” pp. 140, 141.
150 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
gives high promise for the future of the indigenous church
and the work of the gospel in this greatest of all mission
fields.
Unoccupied Territory. With due appreciation of all that
has been accomplished during the century and more of Prot-
estant Missions in China, the fact remains that the evange-
lization of this great land is yet very far from completed.
The consideration of the vast outlying dependencies of
Mongolia, Chinese Turkistan and Tibet is left for the
chapter on Unoccupied Fields. But even as regards China
proper, the proportions of the unfinished task at this late
date are startling. Heilungkiang, the northernmost of the
three provinces of Manchuria, with a population of 1,500,-
000, is wholly unreached save for two small mission sta-
tions. Of the original eighteen provinces, one-fourth the
total area is still unclaimed as the field of any Mission,
while many sections of the remaining three-fourths are
yet unworked. For forty per cent. of the provinces of
Kueichow, Yunnan, Kwangsi and Kansu, with a population
of 15,000,000, no Society has assumed evangelistic respon-
sibility.
The latest statistics put the number of foreign missionary
resident centers at 693, yet the Hsien or officially recog-
nized cities alone number 2,000 or more. And it has to
be remembered also that three-fourths of China’s popula-
tion lives in the rural districts, while two-thirds of the for-
eign missionary forces and one-third of the Chinese Chris-
tian workers are located in cities with populations of 50,000
or over. When all the facts are put together it is found that
nearly one-half of China proper is still out of reach of the
gospel message.
Moreover, there are specially neglected classes as well as
areas, such as six million aboriginal tribesmen in the south-
west, one or two million boat people in the south, and seven
or more million Moslems, largely in the northwest, for
whom comparatively little has yet been done.
Conclusion. On every line the unmet missionary need is
overwhelming. From every viewpoint the task remaining
is gigantic. The entire situation in this greatest of all mis-
sion fields is a supreme challenge which demands fresh
vision, fresh determination, fresh codperation on the part
CHINA 15
of both the missionary body and the Chinese church. The
ultimate solution of the problem lies far beyond all con-
siderations of strategy, cooperation, method and the like,
important as these things are; it lies in a new controlling
and impelling spirit of apostolic evangelism, that will sur-
mount every obstacle and ignore every sacrifice in carrying
the gospel to the waiting millions yet unreached.
QUESTIONS
I. Give the area, divisions, and population of China, and com-
pare its size with some Western countries.
2. State some of its physical features and resources.
3. How long has China existed as a nation? Mention some of
her high qualities and past achievements.
4. Describe briefly the main religions of China.
5. Give an outline of missionary efforts previous to Protestant
Missions.
6. Divide Protestant Missions in China into its main Periods.
7. Give an account of the first Protestant missionary to China.
8. Mention seven other missionaries of the First Period.
g. Sketch the events connected with the opening of China to
foreign trade and missionary work, giving names and dates of
wars and treaties involved.
10. Name at least ten Societies and five missionaries of the
Second Period. 7
11. Give accounts of the Tai Ping Rebellion and also the great
famine of 1877-78.
12. Name and give brief accounts of ten prominent missionaries
of the Third Period.
13. State the distinctive features of the China Inland Mission,
and sketch its work.
ie Describe the cause, course and effect of the Chino-Japanese
ar.
15. State the causes and results of the Boxer uprising.
16. Give the number of Protestant missionary martyrs in China
before and during Igoo.
17. Describe the causes and course of the Chinese Revolution,
and name three prominent leaders of the resultant new régime.
18. Cite some of the changed conditions prevailing in the New
China as affecting missionary work.
19. Indicate the growth of missions in China by a comparison
of the statistics of four national missionary conferences held.
20. Give a brief account of the National Christian Conference
of 1922, and indicate its bearing upon the future of the Christian
movement in China.
21. Name five outstanding and representative Chinese Christian
leaders of to-day.
22. Indicate the portions of China still unevangelized.
CHAPTER XII
JAPAN
AREA, 175,000 SQUARE MILES. POPULATION, 60,000,000 *
I. General Features.
Location and Sige. Japan, otherwise known as Nippon,
or the Sunrise Kingdom, is an island empire lying in cres-
centic shape off the northeast coast of Asia, close to Korea
and China. It consists of four main islands, besides For-
mosa, which was ceded to Japan in 1895, at the close of the
war with China. These islands form a chain over two thou-
sand miles long, but averaging only one hundred miles in
width. If placed on the east coast of the United States
they would extend from Maine to Cuba, with Tokyo, the
capital, lying off Cape Hatteras. The total land area, includ-
ing Formosa, is more than that of California, or equal to
the British Isles with Belgium, Holland and Denmark
thrown in.
The Empire also includes a large number of small islands,
estimated at 3,000 to 4,000, of which 548 have a circum-
ference of one rz (2.44 miles) or over. The Kurile Islands
are included in the north, and the Loo Choo Islands in the.
south.
It is to be remembered, too, that Japan has now estab-
lished a protectorate over Korea. By her acquisition of For-
mosa, and the annexation by the United States of the Philip-
pines, these two great nations, formerly four thousand miles
apart, suddenly became neighbors.
Physical Features. Japan is of volcanic origin and very
mountainous. Probably no other region of the world has so
many volcanoes to the same area. Twenty active volcanoes
are counted, besides numerous extinct ones, while earth-
1 Including Formosa, but not Korea. The exact figures for the entire
arate Empire are: area, 260,738 sq. mi.; population, 76,987,469 (census
Ot) 1920 )s :
152
_ that the people are a vigorous and prolific race. The density
of population in Japan proper averages about 380 to the
JAPAN | 153
quakes are frequent and destructive. Indeed, the volcano
and the earthquake have been the chief makers of Japan and
given to it its wondrous beauty. Everywhere wooded
mountains, big and little, are in sight, while cascades and
waterfalls abound, and valleys of every conceivable shape
delight the eye. Peerless Fuji, the highest volcano, rises
12,365 feet above sea level, and has been inactive for 200
years. It is the pride of the nation and the center of its
poetry, legend and art. To offset the destruction of life and
property wrought by Japan’s volcanoes, they have provided
her with over one thousand health-giving hot springs, which
have proved a priceless boon and been the secret of the
cleanliness of the Japanese.
Japan is also subject to another destructive force of nature
in the occasional tidal waves which sweep over the coast,
killing thousands of people and ruining millions of dollars’
_ worth of property.
Climate. Japan’s climate has a wide range. In the north
it is cold, and snow falls in great abundance, while in the
south it is warm and damp, with trying summer heat.
Numerous mountain resorts, however, provide a welcome
retreat for foreigners during the hottest season.
Resources and Industries. As a natural consequence of
the features just mentioned, there is little level ground in
Japan. The soil is not for the most part fertile, and only
about one-eighth of the total area is under cultivation, so
_ that considerable food has to be imported, mostly from
China. Fertilization and assiduous toil make up for the
limited fertility of the soil, and excellent crops of rice are
grown, as well as wheat, millet, and a large variety of
vegetables and fruits. The Japanese excel in agriculture and
are still more famous in horticulture. The country has a
good supply of timber and minerals. Fishing, ship-building,
silk and tea culture occupy important places, while there are
scores of minor industries, and the variety of manufactures
is vastly too great to enumerate.
Population. The present population of Japan, including
Formosa, but excluding Korea, is about 60,000,000. In
1872 it was only 33,000,000, and the rapid increase shows
154 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
square mile, and the steady increase has led large numbers
to move to the more sparsely peopled islands of the Empire
—Hokkaido and Formosa—and many more to emigrate to
foreign lands, mainly Hawaii, the United States, Canada,
China, and more recently to Korea and Manchuria.
The People. Where the Japanese people originally came
from is considerable of a mystery. Their own histories ac-
knowledge this, while stating that undoubtedly some of their
ancestors came from Northern Asia, others from Korea, and
still others from Malaysia. “They are, at any rate, a mixed
race, as any one can see from their different facial types.
Some are flat-faced and heavily bearded; others are oval-
faced with high brows, more prominent noses, and with
scanty beards.”’ ?
In the northern island of Hokkaido live the Ainu, sur-
vivors of an ancient and aboriginal race, now reduced to
some 15,000 in number. They are evidently distinct from
the Japanese, and are thought by some to be a fragment of
the Aryan race. They are said to be the hairiest people in
the world, have thick beards, and are of a low physical,
mental, and social order. Their religion is a simple nature
worship.
Traits of Character. The Japanese possess not a few
attractive traits. They are clean and neat in person and —
habits, zesthetic in their tastes, quick-witted and apt to learn, —
so polite that they have been dubbed “the French of the
Orient,” and enterprising and ambitious to a degree. Over
against these qualities is a lack of steadfastness in character. —
They incline to be vacillating and unstable, and in the ©
opinion of Westerners who have spent years in the Far East —
in business and other lines they compare very unfavorably —
with the Chinese in point of commercial integrity and gen-
eral reliability.
Filial piety and national patriotism are the two outstand- —
ing characteristics of the Japanese people. The individual is
nothing, the family and State are everything. There is no
more patriotic people on the face of the earth. Indeed, —
patriotism often becomes a passion, life is held in light
esteem, and no honor is more coveted than to die for ‘‘the
heaven-descended Emperor’ or for country. Unfortu-
2 “Sunrise in the Sunrise Kingdom,” p. 40.
JAPAN 155
nately, other equally important moral principles and virtues
have been all too lightly regarded, and lying and licentious-
ness must be recognized as national sins. ‘Where Chris-
tianity has not brought reform, truth for truth’s sake is a
phrase without force or meaning, while concubinage was
provided for in the legal and social régime, prostitution was
legalized, and without any shock to the moral sense girls
were sold by their parents to lives of shame, and accepted
their dreadful fate meekly and as a matter of course.”’ ®
Historical Résumé. Japanese historians claim that the
authentic history of their country dates back to 600 B.C.,
and they furnish unbroken national records from that time
tothe present. But it is now conceded that all records prior
to 461 A.D. are unreliable, and that the genuine history
begins only from that date. “For many generations, the
islands were divided between various tribes or clans, inde-
pendent and often at war, but finally all were brought under
the sway of a single ruler.’”’* “The Buddhist priest brought
Chinese civilization, and in the course of two centuries it
spread over the country, influencing morality, politics and
everything. Sweeping changes were made in the govern-
ment, which was then organized on the Chinese centralized
plan.”’ ®
While the Mikados were in theory absolute monarchs,
they were far from being able rulers, and the affairs of State
_ were administered by powerful vassals. Little by little a
military class grew up, and in 1190 the chief of the most
powerful clan was raised to the supreme power under the
title of “Shogun” (later known in the West as “tycoon’’),
or commander-in-chief. From this time on the Shogun
was the real ruler of Japan, the Mikado being little more
than a figure-head, and a complete feudal system prevailed
for seven centuries, with barons (daimios) holding large
estates and maintaining about them bodies of armed re-
tainers known as samurat, forerunners of the present gentry.
Finally, in 1868, the Shogunate was overthrown and the
Mikado restored to actual control. Only in 1889 did Japan
become a constitutional monarchy.
3 “A Hundred Years of Missions,” p. 341.
4 Tbid., p. 342.
5 “The Gist of Japan,” p. 40.
156 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Religions. The oldest and indigenous religion of Japan
is Shinto, “The Way of the Gods,” evidence of which is still
everywhere to be seen in the shrines and the artistic tori, or
gateway to the shrine. Shintoism was a system of ancestral
and nature worship, which no doubt exercised some moral ~
influence in the early history of the people. But it devel-
oped a grotesque pantheon of eight million gods and god-
desses and bred all sorts of degrading superstitious and
licentious rites. In modern years an effort has been made
to revive and cleanse it from these excesses, but while its
shrines still attract thousands of worshipers it is doomed to
die, and has already begun to lose its religious character ©
and to exist more as a force for the nurture of reverent
patriotism. The disestablishment of its great Ise Shrine
is a striking indication of the growing influence of Chris-
tianity.
Buddhism was introduced from China by way of Korea
in 552 A.D. It was several centuries in fighting its way —
to acceptance, and in doing so it did not scruple to com- —
promise its original moral and ethical standards, and under-
went such tremendous evolution of doctrine that Japanese
Buddhism has been regarded by Buddhists of Continental —
Asia as heretical. But it met the longing for light on the
great questions of the origin and destiny of life, upon which ©
the national cult was silent, and finally it took complete pos- —
session of the field. Buddhism has exerted a powerful in- —
fluence in Japan, and it still has great life and power. It
boasts over 100,000 temples, many of them of imposing style ©
and proportions, and it is to-day naively copying Christian ©
methods of work such as schools, Sunday preaching, Young ©
Men’s Associations and the like. But the evils of the
system, and especially the vicious character of the priests, —
have drawn the severest criticism from Japanese themselves. ©
Baron Kato Hiroyuki, formerly President of the Imperial —
University, said in an address: ‘‘The priests are indeed a |
rotten set, and they themselves have the greatest need of ©
reformation. They are absolutely unable to save the masses, -
and are, moreover, a peril to society.”
Confucianism has done much to mold the moral life of
the Japanese as well as the Chinese, through the fact that
JAPAN 157
Chinese is the language of Japanese literature and the
Chinese classics have been used in the schools.
II. Missionary Work.
Early Romanist Efforts. The first contact with Japan by
Europeans was probably in 1542, when Mendez Pinto, a
Portuguese navigator, following in the track of Vasco.
da Gama, reached the islands. Other adventurers followed
and were well received, and with them came the Jesuits and
the first introduction of Christianity.
To Francis Xavier, the great Jesuit, belongs the honor of
being the first missionary to Japan. The story has already
been told (see page 70) of his meeting with a Japanese
refugee named Hanjiro in Malacca, his landing in Japan in
1549, and his subsequent labors there. Xavier himself
remained in Japan only two and a half years, and never
fully mastered the Japanese or any other foreign tongue.
Yet his earnest efforts were wonderfully blessed, and his
example inspired scores of other Jesuits to follow him to
Japan. |
The chaotic political conditions prevailing at the time, to-
gether with a decadent Shintoism and a degenerate Bud-
dhism, created a most favorable opportunity for the new
‘propaganda, which bore rapid and abundant fruit. By 1581
there were 200 churches and 150,000 professed Christians.
The converts represented all classes, including Buddhist
=a
‘priests, scholars and noblemen as well as the common
‘people. Two Daimios embraced Christianity and ordered
their subjects to take the same step or go into exile. Even
Nobunaga, the Minister of the Mikado, who hated the Bud-
dhists, gave the new movement his powerful support, though
apparently only for political reasons. So loyal to the church
were the native converts that they sent an embassy of four
young nobles to Rome to pay their respects to the Pope.
This embassy was received with high honors, and on its
return brought seventeen more Jesuit fathers. The new
religion grew apace, its leaders and supporters showing no
scruples against the use of coercion and persecution to effect
converts. Accessions to the church are said to have reached
600,000 and even a million in number.
158 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Those were palmy days indeed, and high hopes were
entertained that Japan would become wholly Christian. But
suddenly dark clouds began to gather on the horizon.
Nobunaga, the protector of the Christians, was assassinated,
and his successors, Hideyoshi and Iyeyasu, two of Japan’s
greatest men, were turned against Christianity by the fear
that the foreign priests had political designs. Nor were
their fears entirely groundless, for one of the weaknesses
of Roman Catholicism has always been to become entangled
in politics, and its emissaries in Japan were no exception to
the rule. Added to this, dissensions arose between the
Portuguese Jesuits and the Spanish Dominicans and Fran-
ciscans, who had come in large numbers from the Philip-
pines, and methods and practices altogether unworthy of
true Christianity contributed to bring about disaster to the
cause.
Persecution of Christians. Systematic persecutions began,
culminating in the famous edicts of 1606 and 1614, which
prohibited Christianity and aimed at utterly exterminating
it from the realm. Foreign priests and friars were banished
and sentence of death was pronounced upon every convert
who refused to renounce his faith. The persecutions which
followed were of the most horrible kind. Christians were
burned, crucified, buried alive, subjected to every form of
torture that barbaric cruelty could devise. Their heroic —
fortitude in bearing suffering and calmly facing martyrdom —
is said by Dr. Wm. E. Griffis, that eminent authority on —
Japan and Korea, to have equaled that of the martyrs of
bloody Roman arenas in the early Christian centuries.
Finally, in 1638, some 37,000 native Christians, driven to
desperation, seized and fortified the old castle of Shimabara
and made a brave stand for their lives. A veteran army was
sent against them, and after four months the castle was
taken and all were slaughtered. Further resistance was fu-
tile, and the sword, fire and banishment did their work so-
completely that it appeared as if every trace of Christianity
was swept away. Yet Christians remained, worship was
carried on in secret and, when 230 years later the country —
was reopened, whole villages of professed Christians were —
found who had retained the faith, albeit in a corrupt form. —
Period of Exclusion. Following upon the banishment,
JAPAN 159
and persecution of missionaries and converts came the most
drastic measures of exclusion ever put into force by any
nation. “The means of communication with the outer world
were all cut off; all ships above a certain size were de-
stroyed, and the building of others large enough to visit
foreign lands rigidly prohibited; Japanese were forbidden
to travel abroad on pain of death; native shipwrecked sailors
who had been driven to other lands were not permitted to
return lest they should carry the dreadful religion back with
them; and all foreigners found on Japanese territory were
executed. Over all the Empire the most rigid prohibitions
of Christianity were posted. The high sounding text of one
of these was as follows: ‘So long as the sun shall continue
to warm the earth, let no Christian be so bold as to come to
Japan; and let all know that the King of Spain, or the
Christians’ god (thought to mean either Christ or the Pope),
or the great god of all, if he dare violate this command, shall
pay for it with his head.’ These prohibitions could still
be seen along the highways as late as 1872.” °
The only means of communication with the outside world
during this long period of exclusion was through a small
colony of Dutch traders, who were allowed to remain under
strict surveillance on the tiny island of Desima in Nagasaki
harbor. Ships were permitted to visit them occasionally,
but Bibles or Christian books were rigidly prohibited. Yet
it was an object lesson of another civilization which was
not without effect upon the Japanese mind and helped to
prepare the way for the open door.
The Door Reopened. The steady increase of trade on the
Pacific, the cruel treatment of foreign sailors and fishermen
from time to time stranded on the Japanese coast, the
danger attending well-meaning efforts to return shipwrecked
Japanese to their own land—these and other considerations
called more and more insistently for the opening of Japan,
and it was the United States which took the first definite
steps to effect this end.
A fleet of four warships was despatched under Commo-
-dore Perry, and on July 8, 1853, dropped anchor in Yedo
Bay, and an interview with the government was demanded.
After a lot of parleying, an official of high rank was sent
6 “The Gist of Japan, Purs7,
160 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
out and received from the Commodore a letter from the
President of the United States addressed to the Emperor
of Japan. Perry thereupon sailed away, but only to return
eight months later with a larger squadron, and to effect
under pressure the signing of a treaty on March 31, 1854,
by which the two ports of Shimoda and Hakodate were
opened to American trade. Other nations were quick to
claim similar advantages, but met with strong opposition.
In 1858 Townsend Harris, representing the United States,
negotiated a new and more liberal treaty, as did also Lord
Elgin for Great Britain a few weeks later. These treaties
secured for the first time the right of citizens of the nations
concerned to reside in certain Japanese ports, and thus re-
opened the long closed door to missionaries as well as
merchants,
It was some time, however, before these rights were
enjoyed with safety. Intense anti-foreign feeling prevailed,
and a succession of outrages upon foreign residents ex-
tended over several years. Severe reprisals were carried
out by British and Allied fleets in the form of bombard-
ments of two Japanese ports. These actions not only made
a lively impression upon the Japanese, but led to friction
among the powerful rival clans and factions, and finally to
the overthrow of the Shogunate and the restoration of sov-
ereign power to the Mikado, or Emperor, in 1868. The
Emperor himself ratified the foreign treaties, the seclusion
of centuries was over, and Japan came forth into a new
national day. :
The Protes:ant Vanguard. The church at home had been:
eagerly watching for the door to open, and was not slow to
enter it. Indeed, the advance guard had already been par-
tially prepared for the task by service in the neighboring
land of China. The first missionary to arrive was Rev. J.
Liggins of the Protestant Episcopal Church of America, on
May 2, 1859, two months before the time stipulated by the
treaties. One month later he was joined by Rev. C. M.
Williams (afterwards Bishop) of the same church. In)
October, J. C. Hepburn, M.D., and wife, of the American.
Presbyterian Board, landed; in November, Rev. S. R..
Brown and D. B. Simmons, M.D., of the Reformed
Church of America; and only a week later Rev. Guido F.
Hy
4n
qi
(Oy
JAPAN 16
V erbeck, also of that church. Early in 1860, Rev. J. Goble,
who had been with Perry’s expedition, arrived under the
American Baptist Free Missionary Society. Thus, within
four months from the opening of the treaty ports to foreign
residents, seven American missionaries were on the ground,
and within a year four American Societies had begun work.
An interval of nine years elapsed before other organi-
zations added their forces. The Church Missionary Society
of England and the American Board both sent their first
missionaries to Japan in 1869, and the Society for the
Propagation of the Gospel and the American Methodist
Episcopal Church entered in 1873.
Noble Pioneers. “It was a noble band of men, excep-
tional even among those whose names have become famous
in missionary annals. Not one but has left his stamp upon
new Japan. Of great intellectual ability, they were gifted
with marvelous tact in dealing with a people that had for
half a century been an enigma to the Occidental. Patient,
persevering, seeking the best in those with whom they came
in contact, they won a personal place such as it has seldom
been the fortune of missionaries to win in the first years of
their life in a new land.’”’? Only meager mention can here
be made of the three most outstanding figures of this early
- group.
Dr. James C. Hepburn was a typical pioneer and medical
missionary, who had seen service in Singapore and China
before entering Japan in 1859. His medical skill and suc-
cess, coupled with a gentle and tactful manner, did much
to dispel prejudice against Christianity and Yo win the con-
fidence and esteem of multitudes during his thirty-three
years of unremitting labor for Japan. In addition to being
a medical missionary he was an educator of the first rank,
whose services the Japanese government tried in vain to
secure at high prices. But his even greater distinction was
asa translator. He prepared a Japanese-English Dictionary
and a Bible Dictionary in Japanese, and was the chief trans-
lator of the Holy Scriptures among a small group of able
men, including Doctors Brown and Verbeck.
“No more sublime hour has been reached in the history
of this awakening people than when, after nearly thirty years
7“The Missionary Enterprise,” p..299.
paar
162 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
of patient toil, he (Hepburn) formally presented the Japa-
nese Bible to the nation. Before a great audience, he lifted
up the five superb volumes and formally presented to the
Sunrise Kingdom the complete Word of God in the tongue
of Japan.”’® “Taking in one hand the New Testament and
in the other the Old, he said: ‘A complete Bible! What
more precious gift—more precious than mountains of silver
and gold—could the Christian nations of the West offer
to this nation! May this sacred Book become to the
Japanese what it has come to be for the people of the West
—a source of life, a messenger of joy and peace, the
foundation of a true civilization, and of social and political
prosperity and greatness.’ ”’ ®
Dr. Samuel R. Brown, of the Dutch Reformed Church,
left a deep and lasting mark upon the Japanese nation as
the pioneer of missionary education. He opened at Yoko-
hama the first English school in Japan, and won great in-
fluence by his rare gifts and abilities as well as the deep love
which he showed for the people. He insisted upon the Bible
as the secret and center of the progress of England and
America, aroused enthusiasm in the young men of Japan for
western learning and ways, and it was largely due to his
influence that the government decided to send the first
Japanese students to study in England and America. Dr.
Griffis, the biographer of Dr. Brown, calls him “A Maker
of the New Orient,” and bears testimony that “in this twen-
tieth century Japanese college presidents, editors, pastors,
translators, authors, statesmen, men of affairs, and leaders
in commerce and literature by the score are ‘images of his
own life,’ while in other countries hundreds gladly acknowl-
edged the inspiration gained under him as their teacher,”’
Dr. Guido F. Verbeck, the remaining member of this
famous triumvirate of early leaders in Japan, became the
most distinguished of all, and his influence even outran that
of the other two as a molder of New Japan. A rare linguist,
he acquired the Japanese vernacular so perfectly that he
could not be detected as a foreigner, and charmed his audi-
ences by his fluent speech. In him was combined a great
variety of eminent gifts in a degree that is most unusual.
8 “The New Acts of the Apostles,” p. 339.
9 “The Modern Missionary Century,” p. 116.
JAPAN 163
He was at once educator and evangelist, orator and trans-
lator, brilliant statesman and humble personal worker. In
1868, after the Revolution in Japan, he was invited to take
a leading part in organizing the great, Imperial University
at Tokyo and planning a new system of national education.
It was largely under his influence and guidance that in 1871
an Imperial Embassy was sent to visit Western countries,
while in 1874 he was called into the service of the Senate
to aid in framing a new Constitution for the Empire. “A
man without a country,” as he styled himself, having actually
no rights of citizenship either in Holland, the land of his
birth, or in the United States, where he had been educated,
he was accorded by the Japanese government a “‘special
passport” never granted to any other foreigner before or
since, received the high decoration of “The Rising Sun,”
and at his death was given a State funeral.
Such are some of the men whom God raised up and used
in the mighty task of laying the foundations of missions in
this little but wonderful Land of the Rising Sun, a land
destined to extend her influence all over the Orient.
Early Difficulties. It was in the face of difficulties neither
few nor small that the early Protestant missionaries pursued
their work. The political intrigues of the earlier Romanists
_ had left a deep-seated hatred of Christianity. In every town
and village the old anti-Christian edicts of the period of
exclusion were still posted publicly, and as late as 1868 an
edict was issued which read thus: “The wicked sect called
Christian is strictly prohibited. Suspected persons are to
be reported to the respective officials, and rewards will be
given.” The missionaries were viewed with suspicion by
the government, and with mingled hostility and fear by the
people. Spies were constantly sent to watch them, and
threatening letters were written them. Their earliest con-
verts, and even some of those merely employed to teach
them the language, were secretly arrested and thrown into
prison. Only in 1873 were the edicts taken down, and in
1884 new regulations secured larger religious toleration.
The Treaties, moreover, permitted foreigners to live only
within small “‘concessions” in a few open ports, and pro-
hibited their traveling in the interior, and it was not until
1899 that such restrictions were wholly abolished.
164 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Then, again, the removal of these restrictions and the
influx of more foreigners into Japan brought the fresh
obstacle of the baneful influence of the immoral and dis-
solute lives which many Westerners live in this and every
Eastern country, while the ever-increasing intercourse be-
tween Japan and the West revealed to the former the
flagrant evils of intemperance, murder, gambling, bribery,
divorce, dishonesty, greed, and the like, which exist in
reputed Christian countries and serve to bring Christianity
and missionary work into disfavor and even contempt.
The “Kumamoto Band,’ One incident connected with
this early period of missions in Japan must here be men-
tioned, since in the providence of God it was destined to
bear vitally upon the whole subsequent spiritual history of
the realm.
In 1872 Captain L. L. Janes, an American army officer
from West Point, was engaged by a feudal prince of the
southern island of Kyushu to found a military school in the
interior city of Kumamoto. Although not a missionary,
Captain Janes was an earnest Christian, filled with a strong
desire to lead to Christ the hundred young men thus placed
under his care. His wife was a daughter of the well-known
Dr. Scudder, early missionary to India, and she supported
her husband’s efforts with much prayer.
Having won the love and loyalty of his pupils by his rare
teaching gifts and attractive personality, Captain Janes by
and by invited them to Bible readings in his home, and a
little later to a preaching service on Sunday mornings. Be-
fore long a deep work of grace began in many hearts, and
finally a revival swept through the school, and more than
half of the students made a clean-cut decision for Christ.
The climax came when one evening, early in 1876, forty
students climbed a hill overlooking the city, and after
prayer drew up and signed a “declaration” solemnly cove-
nanting to renounce all worldly ambition and dedicate their
lives to the high task of preaching the gospel throughout ©
the Empire. |
It is not surprising that this action met with loud protest
and strong opposition, both in the school and among the
relatives of the boys. Bitter persecution broke out, fathers
threatening their sons with the death penalty, mothers
JVABANG;,( 165
threatening to commit suicide in order to atone for the dis-
grace brought by their offspring upon the family name.
Some of the boys were imprisoned, others were banished
from their homes, while a plot was laid, fortunately without
success, to kill the whole company.
Captain Janes himself was forced out of the school, but
not before he had providentially learned through an Ameri-
can newspaper that a Christian school had recently been
opened by Neesima in Kyoto. Thereupon thirty members
of this “Kumamoto Band,” driven from their homes and
native province, made their way five hundred miles overland
to Kyoto and, together with the handful of students already
gathered there, formed the nucleus of the first Christian
college in Japan, which was to grow into the great Doshisha
University.
Joseph Hardy Neesima. It is fitting to introduce at this
point some account of Neesima, that most illustrious of all
Christian converts and native apostles of Japan, because of
the relation which his career bears to the “Kumamoto Band”
‘just mentioned. One would search far to find a more im-
pressive illustration of the power and providence of God in
human life than Neesima’s history and its interlinking with
that of this memorable Band.
Neesima’s life story, as told by at least two biographers
in full,*° and by many other writers in brief, is one of
_ peculiarly fascinating interest. Born in Yedo in 1843, as
_amere boy he renounced idolatry. Later, a stray copy of an
abridged Chinese Bible falling into his hands, he was struck
with the opening words, “In the beginning, God created the
heavens and the earth.”’ His youthful mind reached out in
a quest for the true God, and he prayed, “Oh, if you have
eyes, look upon me; if you have ears, listen for me.” He
chanced also to catch a glimpse of an atlas of the United
States, and filled with a great desire to see the Western
world he contrived in 1864 to get to Hakodate and to
_ smuggle himself on board an American schooner for Shang-
hai. Thence he worked his way to Boston, employing his
_ Spare time on the long voyage in studying English and read-
ing a Chinese New Testament bought in Hongkong. It
10 “Joseph Hardy Neesima” (Davis) ; “Life and Letters of Joseph Hardy
Neesima” (Hardy).
166 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
was without doubt of God’s ordering that the ship on which
Neesima sailed was owned by the Hon. Alpheus Hardy, a
prominent Christian man of Boston. Hearing from the
ship’s captain about the interesting Japanese runaway, Mr.
Hardy befriended him, named him “Joseph Hardy,” and
gave him a good education at Amherst College and Andover
Seminary. .
In 1871 the Japanese embassy on its visit to America
‘heard of Neesima and engaged him as interpreter. Here
was another unmistakable mark of God’s guiding hand, for
the favor of these distinguished men secured for the young
Christian a pardon for the “crime” of having left his own
land without permission, enabled him to visit the best educa-
tional institutions in America and Europe, and won for him
on his return to Japan the friendship and influence and some
of the foremost governing leaders. Indeed, every effort
was made to persuade Neesima to enter government service,
but no attraction of office or wealth could turn him aside from
his God-given purpose to devote himself to gospel work.
He became at once a bold and earnest witness among his
people, and was the pioneer of public gospel preaching in the
interior.
Neesima’s great life work was the founding of the
Doshisha, designed as a collegiate and theological school to
train Christian workers for Japan. It was a daring scheme
for him to choose as a place for such a school the ancient
capital and sacred city of Kyoto, with its 3,500 temples and
8,000 Buddhist priests, but, nothing daunted, he opened his
school there in a small room in November, 1875, with eight
pupils. When, in 1890, death overtook this great man of
God in the midst of his active labors, the Doshisha had —
grown into a great and well-equipped institution of nearly
700 students. It gave the needed impulse to Christian edu-
cation in Japan, and many among its thousands of graduates
have held high places in their country’s history. |
Growth and Development. We are ever thus being re-
minded in missions that the gospel is a living seed of ir-
resistible power. The records of missionary labor and —
results furnish the most glorious Evidences of Christianity |
in all the world, and Japan has been no exception to the
rule.
JAPAN 167
The first convert was baptized after five years (1864),
the next two—one of them, Wakasa by name, being an of-
ficial of high rank—two years later. The first Japanese
church was organized at Yokohama on March 10, 1872, by
Rev. J. H. Ballagh of the Reformed Church, with eleven
members. The years from 1859 to 1872 have been called
the “Period of Preparation.’ Next came the “Period of
Popularity,’ from 1873 to 1888, during which Christianity
grew steadily in favor. Old customs and ideas were rapidly
giving way before the influence of the West, and the mis-
sionaries were much sought, not only for spiritual ends but
as well because of the useful knowledge they possessed on
many lines. It became easy to get large audiences to preach
to, and Christian schools became crowded with pupils.
There were large accessions to the church, yet among them
were undoubtedly not a few in whose hearts no real saving
work of grace had been wrought, but who were mere intel-
lectual converts, eager to recognize and embrace the external
benefits of the Christian religion.
By 1888 this tide of favor had reached its height, and
reaction now began to set in. This was due in part to the
strenuous opposition of the Buddhists, who saw their power
waning, and realizing the need of new tactics to save their
cult from downfall, they began to imitate the methods of
their Christian antagonists by opening schools and preaching
halls, organizing young men’s associations, women’s prayer
meetings, temperance societies, and the like. But a greater
factor than Buddhism in bringing about reaction was the
rise of strong nationalistic sentiment, fed by friction with
foreign Powers over the revision of treaties and other mat-
ters. Conservatives seized the opportunity to stir up anti-
foreign spirit under the guise of an appeal to national loy-
alty. This sentiment affected even Christians, causing free
criticism of the missionaries, and leading on to the advocacy
of a Japanese form of Christianity, a modification of certain
doctrinal beliefs, and an “independent” church movement.
These influences, although for a time apparently checking
the progress and diminishing the numbers of the Christian
Church, were not without their real advantages. A sifting
process took place by which nominal converts disappeared
but real Christians remained, and with their faith and con-
168 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
victions strengthened. The spiritual life of the church was
purified and deepened, and the Lord continued in His own
way to “add to the church daily such as were being saved.”
Statistics compiled in 1900, after four decades of mis-
sionary activity, showed “‘a total of 42,451 Protestant Chris-
tians, 538 churches, of which about 100 were self-support-
ing, and 348 groups of Christians not yet organized into
churches.,”’ **
Loyalty of Christians, For many years the notion that
Christianity was something inherently “foreign” persisted in
the Japanese public mind, and the loyalty of the Christians
to their own nation was constantly called in question. Op-
position to Christianity on this score manifested itself par-
ticularly in the schools, and Christian teachers and students
were discriminated against in spite of the Constitution’s
plain declaration of religious liberty and equality.
The war with China in 1894-1895 afforded an excellent
opportunity to put such charges and imputations squarely
to the test, and it was clearly demonstrated that Christian
Japanese could fight no less bravely than their Buddhist
compatriots. Later, in 1904-1905, came the more serious
war with Russia. “This was Christianity’s opportunity. In
the camps, at home, on the battlefield, Christian men were
in the van. With a Christian admiral to lead her fleets, a
Christian American missionary to lead in prayer to the God
of battles, Christian women to care for wounded and sor-
rowing, it became evident that a Christian Japan might not
be less Japanese than the old dreams of the samurai.” ”
As a result, Christianity in Japan vindicated itself, and mis-
sionary work won new recognition and influence, has num-
bered among its converts persons of high standing and even
national distinction, and has enjoyed ever-increasing oppor-
tunities and returns right up to the present.
Forms of Mission Work. The same methods have been
employed in Japan as in other fields, viz., Evangelistic, Edu-
cational, Literary, Medical and Philanthropic.
The early missionaries took the leading part in the intro-
duction of the multiplied forms of service for the physical,
moral and spiritual welfare of the people, which fall under
11 “Sunrise in the Sunrise Kingdom,” p. 116.
‘ Ay et 3
12“The Missionary Enterprise,” p. 311.
JAPAN 169
these five heads, and missionary work still pursues all of
these lines. Yet changing conditions in Japan have greatly
modified the need in some directions. The extraordinary
progress made by the Japanese themselves in all branches of
secular education, and in medical work, has taken the re-
sponsibility in these matters largely out of missionary hands.
To some extent the same is true of philanthropic work,
although the following sentence from Rev. Dr. J. H. Pettee’s
report of Christian Charities, prepared in 1897, shows how
large a part of such work Christians are still doing: “They
have fifteen orphanages, eleven homes for discharged pris-
oners, one blind asylum, five leper hospitals, two homes for
the aged, five schools for the Ainu, five free kindergartens,
ten industrial schools, ten other schools for the poor, four-
teen hospitals, etc. . . . in a word, about one-half of all the -
regularly organized benevolent institutions of the land.”
Among the best known of these institutions are the Oka-
yama Orphanage opened by Mr. Ishii (the Japanese ‘George
Muller”) in 1887, and the Home for Discharged Prisoners
in Tokyo, founded by Mr. T. Hara.
Newspaper Evangelism. ‘This is a new and unique mis-
sionary method which has been tried out in recent years, and
has proved so successful that it is now adopted as a regular
phase of work in more than one Mission. Its plan is to
utilize paid space in the daily press for presenting Christian
truth through series of short expositions of Scripture texts.
_An offer to supply Christian literature, or answer questions
by interview or by mail, on application to a central office, is
appended. ‘The fact that Japan has so many newspapers
with a large circulation, and that so large a percentage of
the people can read, makes this plan particularly adaptable
to this land. The results have been most encouraging.
The published articles have brought many personal callers
and still more letters asking for literature, and the follow-up
work has already led to a considerable number of clear
conversions, as well as a wide proclamation of the gospel.
Some Japanese Christian Leaders. Besides Neesima
there have been other sons of Japan deserving of mention
as valiant apostles in the Christian Church. Some of these
received their earliest inspiration from Neesima’s example
and took their training in the institution which he founded.
170 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
A few of the best known and most representative leaders
of the present day may here be mentioned.
There is Paul Kanamori, who was one of the leaders of
that famous ‘Kumamoto Band” and a member of the first
theological class in the Doshisha University. He is known
to-day, the world over, for his great “Three-Hour Sermon,”
which he has preached to multitudes throughout Japan, For-
mosa and Korea, and which has guided tens of thousands
into the Christian faith.
There is Kimura, the “Moody of Japan,’ who in huge
evangelistic campaigns conducted in the great cities of
Japan, and in tours among his nationals in Manchuria,
Korea, Hawaii and the South Sea Islands, has already
preached to more than a million people.
There is Colonel Yamamuro, the ‘General Booth of
Japan,’ now the distinguished head of the Salvation Army
in the Empire, a speaker of tremendous power, a promoter
of many forms of practical effort for the poor, the sick and
fallen, and a stirring writer whose “Gospel for the Common
People” has gone through.18o editions.
There is Dr. Uemura, pastor for thirty years of one of
the largest churches in Tokyo, principal of a theological
seminary, editor of a religious magazine sometimes styled
the British Weekly of Japan, and-staunch defender of the
evangelical faith.
There is Kawabe of Osaka, pastor, evangelist, teacher of
deeper spiritual truth and trainer of native workers—a man
of God, a leader of Christians andea winner of souls.
Evangelistic Need. The changed conditions, as noted
above, have led one author (Rev. G. H. Moule) to remark:
“Does it not seem that God has led the missionary in Japan,
by the very force of circumstances, to rely less on the ex-
traneous aid of Western learning and prestige, and to con-
tent himself rather with so presenting Christ to the nation’s
heart, that the Japan-spirit being profoundly influenced,
changed and strengthened by the Christian faith, may itself —
be the instrument for giving in due course a Christian tone |
to the political, intellectual, and social life of the nation?” **
Yet it is a sad fact that direct and aggressive evangelism
is far from having the prominence it deserves in Japan, but
13 “The Spirit of Japan,” p. 180.
JAPAN 171
occupies in many Missions a place distinctly secondary to
institutional work. A few smaller and more recent agencies,
such as the Japan Evangelistic Band and the Oriental Mis-
sionary Society, in addition to a few prominent Japanese
leaders such as have already been mentioned, are putting
their efforts into active evangelistic work, but the combined
forces of evangelism in all Missions are painfully insufficient
for the task which confronts them.
No greater mistake could be made than to conclude, as
many have apparently done from a merely superficial ac-
quaintance with Japan, and from foolishly placing a wrong
estimate upon her adoption of so many advanced features
of modern civilization, that this fair Sunrise Kingdom no
longer needs the same missionary attention as other Eastern
lands. Japan is a beautiful land, her people are clever and
attractive, her education has been modernized, her com-
merce has expanded, her army and navy have become strong
—in a word, she has been civilized. But Japan is still
heathen, grossly and persistently heathen, Missions after
sixty years have only touched the fringe of her territory
and a fragment of her population.
Over 70 per cent. of the people of Japan live in the rural
districts. These country folk constitute not only the bulk,
but also the backbone, of the nation. Yet the missionary
forces have as yet scarcely penetrated this rural area. Many
towns of from 5,000 to 10,000, and thousands of villages
of from 500 to 5,000 souls, have not a vestige of Christian
work in them.
The foreign and even the Japanese workers are largely
in the great cities and provincial capitals. It is here that
missionary progress has been greatest. And yet the phe-
nomenal growth of Japan’s cities during the last decade has
far outstripped the church’s advance, so that the crowded
industrial and commercial centers and congested slums of
the large centers contain millions of souls unreached by the
gospel.
Then there are special classes, as well as areas, which lie
outside the present bounds of Christian activity. Most of
the converts have been from the great middle class. At the
top of the social scale, the nobility and wealthy have received
little attention. At the bottom of the social scale, besides
172 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the industrial masses of the great cities there are 1,400,000
fisher folk, 465,000 miners and 255,000 sailors still waiting —
for the gospel. Yet another almost totally neglected class
are the 1,000,000 outcaste “‘Eta,’’ who are socially ostra- —
cized because of their original occupations as tanners,
butchers, grave diggers and beggars, and are compelled
to live in segregated quarters in poverty, filth and igno-
rance.
Conservatively speaking, then, two-thirds of the popula-
tion of Japan, or over 40,000,000 people, are yet untouched
by the gospel. The present Protestant church membership
constitutes only one-third of one per cent. of the whole
population.
It is to be remembered, also, that wherein Japan is no
longer heathen, she is still predominantly un-Christian. Her
new educational system, while weaning her youth away from |
the old religions of Japan, is leading to atheism and agnos-
ticism rather than to Christ.
A Religious Census of 5,000 students in the Tokyo Uni-
versity, taken a few years ago, told the following shocking
tale: Confucianists, 6; Shintoists, 8; Buddhists, 300; Chris- —
tians, 30; atheists, 1,500; agnostics, 3,000. |
The New Industrial Maelstrom. Japan’s new industrial-
ism, which has sprung up with such amazing rapidity, con- —
stitutes one of her gravest problems of to-day. Twenty —
years ago there were only 1,400 factories employing 30,000
laborers. ‘To-day there are 30,000 plants with over 3,000,-
ooo workers, half of them women and girls. This enor-
mously increased demand for industrial labor has caused a
steady stream of emigration from the country to the manu- —
facturing centers.
Picture what such a transplantation means to multitudes
of women, and of girls and boys in their teens, from the
quiet country hamlet, with its pure air and simple living, to —
the dark recesses of a throbbing metropolis, with its crowded —
and ill-smelling tenements and its dull drudgery of toil, un- ©
relieved by proper labor laws. The physical results alone ©
are terrible. Thousands of the operatives suffer a steady ©
loss of weight and soon break down utterly, or fall victims
to tubercular or nervous trouble or contagious diseases. It —
is said that 300,000 new recruits are required annually to
JAPAN 173
repair the losses and keep pace with the development of
these industrial plants.
But the moral results are even worse. Parental control
and other old safeguards withdrawn, and temptations to
coarse pleasures and questionable pursuits alluring them on
every hand, what wonder is it that great numbers of young
girls and boys are soon demoralized and made victims of
vice and crime? “The state of affairs brought on by this
new whirlwind expansion of industrialism,” says one author,
“is nothing less than appalling.’ ** It is seriously draining
the nation’s vital resources and affecting her entire life. The
whole situation cries to high heaven for relief, and presents
a new and peremptory challenge to the Christian forces of
Japan and those who stand behind them in other lands.
Japan's Influence Over Asia. Japan’s claims for evan-
gelization are rendered the more urgent by reason of her
leading position among the nations of the East. “What is
done in Japan affects other countries, especially those of
Eastern Asia. The Japanese sometimes compare their coun-
try to the rudder of a ship; though the rudder is small, it
directs the course of the whole vessel. The figure is not
wholly unreasonable. The influence of Japan upon the
nations of the Continent is becoming more and more
marked. Unless all the signs are deceptive much of the
world’s history during the next century will center about
Bitastern Asia.” *°
The end of the World War finds Japan facing what some
believe to be the second great crisis of her history. A
struggle is going on within her between the forces of autoc-
racy and democracy, militarism and freedom. Signs are not
wanting of a new reaction in influential circles against Chris-
tianity, as thought to be incompatible with Japanese ideals
and institutions. A new ‘National Cult’ has recently been
formed, which the government proposes to make universal,
and which makes Emperor worship its central dogma.
On the other hand come the most cheering reports of
deepened gospel interest and increased conversions among
the people. Far-reaching issues hang in the balance, and
the situation calls for earnest prayer and redoubled effort,
14 “Creative Forces in Japan,” p. 72.
15 “Japan and Its Regeneration,” p. 123.
174 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
that the tide may be turned in the right direction for Japan
and the other countries involved.
America’s Responsibility. Let it be remembered that —
when Japan was a hermit nation, not wishing to have any-
thing to do with the rest of the world, it was America that
forced her out of her long seclusion into a new world of
mingled benefits and dangers. Upon American Christians, —
then, most of all, rests the responsibility now of giving to —
Japan the only message and dynamic which can meet, the
needs alike of her government and people, and guide their ©
feet into the ways of life and peace. |
FORMOSA
I, General Features.
Since this island now belongs to Japan, brief mention of
it is in order here. Formosa (called by the Chinese and
Japanese Taiwan) is 250 miles long and from 50 to 70
miles broad, and is separated from China by the Formosa
Channel. Its interior is mountainous, with plains sloping
from the mountains to the sea. Its climate is damp and
malarial.
The Portuguese settled there in 1590, and were in turn ©
followed by the Spaniards and the Dutch. In 1683 For-
mosa became a part of the Chinese Empire, and it was
ceded to Japan in 1895, at the close of the war between
China and Japan. While the population (over 3,650,000 in
1920) 1s mainly Chinese, with now a growing number of
Japanese, the aborigines are Malay in origin, dwelling in the
mountains and retaining their savage habits, including
human head hunting.
II. Missionary Work.
Missionary work has been carried on in the south by the
English Presbyterian Church since 1865, and in the north
by the Canadian Presbyterian Church since 1872. The —
career of the Canadian missionary, Dr. George L. Mackay,
known as “The Black-Bearded Barbarian,’’ constitutes one
of the most thrilling narratives in modern missions. With
a fearless faith in God he faced all sorts of dangers and
difficulties in the early years of his labors, including repeated
JAPAN 175
attempts upon his life. Overcoming hatred and hostility,
he gradually won over his worst enemies, endeared himself
to the people by his sacrificing devotion to their physical and
spiritual needs, and lived to see a large work firmly estab-
lished in some sixty stations, including schools, hospital,
and Oxford College for the training of Christian workers.
Dr. Mackay married a Chinese wife, and was among the
strongest advocates of a self-supporting and self-propa-
gating church. He showed little desire for reénforcements
from home, but attached to himself and trained a large and
faithful band of Formosan pastors and evangelists, who
have efficiently continued the work after him.
Statistical Summary. The following figures, taken from
“The Christian Movement in Japan’ (1923), represent the
latest available statistics for Protestant Missions—For
Japan: Societies, 60; Foreign Missionaries, 1,594; Native
Workers, 4,667; Churches, 1,615; Communicant Members,
191,341. For Formosa: Societies, 2; Foreign Missionaries,
21; Native Workers, 509; Communicant Members, 8,397.
QUESTIONS
1. State the location and area of Japan, and how many islands
it comprises.
2. Describe its physical features and climate, and cite favorable
and unfavorable results of its volcanic tendencies.
3. Give the population, and the probable origin of the Japanese
race.
4. Mention their prominent national traits, favorable and un-
favorable.
5. Trace briefly the political history of the nation from its be-
_ ginning to the present.
6. Discuss the character of the three non-Christian religions
of Japan, and their respective influence upon the nation.
7. Give a brief account of the origin, character, course and
results of early Romanist Missions in Japan.
8. When and how did the so-called Period of Exclusion begin
and end? What were the methods employed to effect its objects?
9g. Give the names and the years of arrival of the first seven
Protestant missionaries to Japan, and give brief accounts of the
three most prominent among them.
10. Tell the story of the “Kumamoto Band.”
11. Name and describe the career of the best known of Japan’s
Christian converts.
176 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
12. What contributions have Protestant Missions made to the
welfare of Japan along philanthropic lines? Give the names of
two prominent institutions of this kind and their founders.
13. What new and unique missionary method has been used of
late in Japan, and with what results?
14. Name four prominent Japanese Christian leaders of to-day,
indicating the special dine of each one’s ministry.
15. To what extent has Japan not yet been evangelized, and
what fact adds emphasis to the importance of her fuller evan-
gelization? |
16. Give figures indicating the development of Japan’s industrial-
ism, and indicate some of the menaces and problems growing out
of these new conditions.
17. State the size and population of Formosa, and the nature of
its inhabitants.
18. Mention the main Missionary Societies working in Formosa,
and tell something of the work of its most famous missionary.
19. Give latest general statistics of Protestant Missions in Japan
and Formosa.
CHAPTER XIII
KOREA
AREA, 85,000 SQUARE MILES. POPULATION, 17,000,000
The fact that all intercourse between Korea and the
Western world is a matter of only a few years, and the
further fact of that country’s recent absorption by Japan,
have led to very brief treatment of Korea by most textbooks
on missions, usually in the form of a short postscript to
their chapter on Japan. But the phenomenal success which
has attended mission work in Korea, as well as certain
unique features of missionary policy and methods in that
field, which have deeply impressed the entire Christian
church, and also the grave situation which has of late devel-
oped between the Koreans and their new political masters,
all seem amply to justify a fuller and separate consideration
of this interesting field.
I. General Features.
Names. The earliest name for Korea, conferred by her
Chinese civilizer in the twelfth century before Christ, was
Cho-sen, or Morning Calm, and this is still the name used
by the natives to-day. The word Korea comes from Korai,
the name of the northernmost of three states which were
joined into a united Korea a millennium ago. Korea’s cen-
turies of deep seclusion have also won for her the name of
the Hermit Nation.
Position and Sige. Yorea lies on the east coast of Asia,
between 35 deg. and 43 deg. north latitude. It is a penin-
sula about 600 miles long and 135 miles broad, with a coast-
line of 1,750 miles, and an area, including numerous small
islands which cluster along its western and southern shores,
estimated at nearly 90,000 square miles. Its size is thus
almost that of New York and Pennsylvania states com-
bined, or slightly larger than ea Scotland and Wales.
1
178 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
The Yellow Sea on the west and the Japan Sea on the
east separate her respectively from China and Japan, while
her territory joins that of Russia on the north. She thus
occupies a striking position as a “buffer state” between three
great political powers, among which she has been a continual
bone of contention. ~
The Country. Inthe main, Korea is rugged and moun-
tainous, and its coast line presents a bleak and uninviting
aspect on the approach from the sea. The interior, however, |
has many fertile hills and valleys covered chiefly with wav-
ing rice fields, although other grains, as well as vegetables
and fruits, are grown. Charming scenery is to be found,
and Mrs. Isabella Bird Bishop describes Seoul, the capital,
as one of the most beautifully situated cities in the world.
Despite the crude implements and modes of farming em-
ployed, and the fact also that not nearly all the arable land
is cultivated, the crops raised are ample for Korea’s millions,
and in good years leave a substantial balance for export.
The land is also rich in minerals, but as in China the pre-
vailing superstitions have prevented much mining until re-
cent years, when Westerners have introduced it.
Foreign residents in Korea boast not a little of its fine
climate. The summers are temperate, the winters clear and
cold. During the rainy season of six or eight weeks in
summer rain falls incessantly and in torrents, reaching a
record of five inches in twenty-four hours and twenty-two
inches for a single season. The atmosphere at such times
is hot and sultry. |
The People. Korea seems originally to have been peopled
from the mainland, but an admixture at some time is be-
lieved to have considerably modified both the physical char-
acteristics and the language of the race, Just as Korea lies
geographically between China and Japan, so its people come
midway between their two neighbors in physical and intel-
lectual qualities. The Korean resembles the Mongolian in
general appearance, is larger in stature than the Japanese,
but smaller than the northern Chinese, has good physique
and quite average strength and endurance. The woeful
absence of all knowledge of hygiene and attention to sani-
tation and quarantine, however, has caused disease of almost
every kind to work deadful havoc. Ague, smallpox, typhus,
f
/
KOREA 179
and Asiatic cholera especially abound. The mortality among
little children is appalling.
In temperament, Dr. Horace G. Underwood describes the
Koreans as being “not as phlegmatic as the Chinese nor as
volatile as the Japanese,” and adds: “They are not as slav-
ishly bound by superstition, not as devoted to their old
religions, not as faithful, perhaps, to the traditions of the
past, as the Chinese; nor as initiative and ambitious as the
Japanese.” *
Dr. George Heber Jones writes in a leaflet: “‘Whereas
in China the cast of mind is commercial, giving us a nation
of merchants, and in Japan it is military, giving us a nation
of warriors, in Korea it is literary, giving us a nation of
scholars.”
By other writers more initiative is claimed for the
Koreans than either of these other two races possesses, and
they are credited, in common with the Chinese, with real
ability, in contrast to the mere genius of imitation and adap-
tation in which the Japanese excel.
The old prevalent impression about the Koreans, formed
by Europeans on their first contact with them, is expressed
by the following quotation: “They seemed to be lazy, even
for Orientals; generally dishonest, unclean in person, rather
the left-overs of Asia, as if Mongols, Chinese and others
had successively sought to escape from oppression in their
own lands, and going as far as they could, found themselves
shut in by the sea in this rocky peninsula.” ? But writers
of long residence among the Koreans claim that such low
estimates of them are based on unfair and insufficient evi-
dence, and they cite on the contrary the hardy, self-sup-
porting farmer, the busy city merchant and the proficient
scholar.
The Language. The Korean language has points of re-
semblance to both the Chinese and Japanese, and yet is dis-
tinct from either. It possesses an alphabet of twenty-five
letters. The Chinese ideographs are also used, as in Japan,
in addition to the native script, and the Chinese classics have
for centuries furnished the basis of literary education.
Religions. It is sometimes said that the Koreans are
1 “The Call of Korea,” pp. 45, 46.
2“The Missionary Enterprise,” p. 315.
=
180 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
without any religion. Compared with the peoples of other
non-Christian lands they have certainly not been strongly
held by any religious system, and certain influences have
tended to weaken their faith in their old religions. Temples —
and shrines are few, and priests are relegated to a very low
place in the social scale.
Shamanism is the oldest of Korea’s faiths, and to-day —
still exerts a stronger influence upon the people than any
other. It teaches a great array of spirits, good and evil, of
which the good ones are to be invoked, and the evil ones,
which predominate, propitiated. The system has gathered ©
into itself a mass of grotesque superstitions,
Buddhism entered Korea in the fourth century, and
~~
peta to
through her was later introduced into Japan. In Korea it ©
gradually gained considerable power, and during a certain ©
dynasty became the national religion. Later on, partly be- —
cause of its meddling in politics, it came under the ban, ©
and large numbers of its temples were demolished. Strin- —
gent laws enacted against Buddhism were not repealed until
after the China-Japan war (1895), when the pro-Japanese
party came into power. Buddhism has all along maintained
large and well-endowed monasteries throughout the country,
and among the common people, and especially the women, it
still holds its own.
Confucianism came over from China in earliest times,
along with her literature, and has done much to mold the
thought and life of the nation. But as elsewhere it is to be -
regarded as a system of ethics rather than a religion. Its
adherents are mainly the educated classes, although its —
chief rite of ancestral worship is universally observed
throughout Korea.
Historical Résumé. Reliable records of Korea’s past his-
tory begin with the coming, in 1122 B.C., of a Chinese
noble called Kija, who, having incurred the anger of the
wicked Chinese Emperor, migrated with 5,000 retainers, and ©
settling among the aborigines of Korea organized a new
state. Comparatively little is known of the centuries which
followed, up to within a short time of the Christian era. |
SS ee
4 > ~ eee
ee Ee S CSS.
Thenceforth the history of Korea until recent years, when ~
the first treaties with the foreign Powers were signed, is —
largely a melancholy record of repeated invasions from
KOREA 181
China, Mongolia and Japan. The location of this small and
peaceably inclined country made her a ready prey to her
stronger and rival neighbors. “The invaders would come
on their conquering career, and the people would bend for
a time like forest trees before the storm. But, the pressure
being removed, they would resume their national life; a
nominal tribute would be paid for a term of years; then
after a time they would forget they ever had been con-
quered, when another tidal wave of war would pour over
them from without.” °
During the earlier centuries frequent inter-tribal wars
among the states into which the present Korea was then
divided led to the calling in on opposite sides of Chinese and
Japanese forces to assist, and thus poor Korea became again
and again the battleground of opposing armies, foreign as
well as native, with terrible resultant destruction of life and
property. Gradually the whole country became tributary
by turns to China and Japan, and at times to both together.
In addition to all this, the fact that the famous Mongol con-
queror, Kublai Khan, in 1281 forced the Koreans to assist
in an unsuccessful invasion of Japan, as well as the frequent
depredations committed by Japanese pirates upon Korean
junks and coast towns, engendered bitter hatred between
the peninsular kingdom and the island empire—a feature
which it is well to bear in mind in considering present-day
relations.
Toward the close of the sixteenth century Japan sent a
great army of invasion against Korea, with the real aim
of making Korea’s subjugation a means to the greater end
of the conquest of China. For a time they swept on vic-
toriously, taking an awful toll of life. They sent back to
Japan enormous quantities of booty, and committed the
wanton outrage of cutting off large numbers of the ears
and noses of Koreans, pickling and sending them to Japan,
where the place of their burial at Kyoto is still shown. But
the Koreans rallied bravely, the Chinese came to their help,
and eventually the Japanese were defeated and driven back
with terrible loss.
Early in the seventeenth century began the struggle be-
tween the Manchus and China, ending in the seating of a
3 “Every-day Life in Korea,” p. 26.
4
182 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS ~—
Manchu upon the Dragon throne. Korea was invaded by
the Manchus, its king captured and the country placed ©
under tribute. This completes the long list of invasions, and
brings Korea’s chequered history down to recent times.
The First Treaties. In order to have a clear understand-
ing of the present Korean situation and its vital bearing
upon missions, it is necessary to trace in outline the main —
political events which in tragic succession have led up to
the completely new régime in which the Hermit Nation of ©
yore finds itself to-day. ‘Up to 1876 Korea successfully ©
preserved her isolation, and repelled with violence any at- —
tempt to encroach upon it. In that year Japan forced a
treaty upon her, and in 1882 China followed with ‘Trade
and Frontier Regulations.” The United States negotiated a —
treaty in 1882, Great Britain and Germany in 1884, Russia
and Italy in 1886, and Austria in 1892, in all which, though ©
under Chinese suzerainty, Korea was treated with as an ~
independent state. By these treaties, Seoul and the ports —
of Chemulpo, Fusan and Wonsan were opened to foreign |
commerce.”’ *
Japan's Ascendancy. The China-Japan War of 1894-95
was brought on by the sending of Chinese troops into Korea —
at that country’s request, to help quell an insurrection. This
the Japanese resented as contrary to an agreement signed by —
China and Japan in 1885. The Japanese raised the cry of
“The Independence of Korea,” surprised the world by win-
ning a swift and decisive victory over China, and at once
became the dominating power in Korea. k
Had Japan’s administrative methods been the equal of her ©
military tactics the subsequent course of affairs in Korea —
might have been very different. But the murder of the
Queen, which soon followed, and in which the direct com- ©
plicity of the Japanese Minister to Korea has been proven —
beyond a doubt, was no less a grievous tactical blunder than —
it was a foul crime. This act, and the oppressive measures —
which followed, drove the King to throw himself into the
hands of Russia by fleeing from his palace-prison to the
Russian legation, and forthwith began a new chapter con-
sisting of an eight-year diplomatic duel between Japan and —
Russia for ascendancy in Korea. Both Powers were alike
4“Korea and Her Neighbors,” p. 11.
KOREA 183
selfish in their motives and unscrupulous in the course they
pursued of making tools of clever but unprincipled Koreans
to promote their ends. Russian intrigue gradually gained
the upper hand, and that nation’s obvious intention of ab-
sorbing Korea not only gave Japan just fears for her
own national safety, but also alarmed European nations
lest the balance of political power should be seriously
disturbed.
The long tension finally broke in 1904 and war ensued,
in which the army and navy of the great Russian nation
were ignominiously defeated by those of Japan, and the
little island empire of the Far East rose into new promi-
nence as one of the first-rate Powers of the world. Korea
now agreed to accept Japan’s advice in administrative affairs,
and Japan renewed her assurances that Korea’s independ-
ence would be preserved. How vain were such assurances
is seen in the prompt assumption of authority which fol-
lowed. Japan’s hand became heavier and heavier upon
Korea, and more than one trustworthy Christian writer
openly charges the Japanese military régime with extortion,
injustice and cruel treatment of the Koreans.
On the other hand, it is pointed out by equally reliable
authorities that Korea’s obsolete system of patriarchal gov-
ernment, and the persistent failure of her king and his min-
isters to mend their ways, adjust themselves to a new age,
and face seriously the task of effectively administering the
country’s affairs, inevitably spelled her doom and compelled
control by some outside power. Dr. H. N. Allen writes:
“The Koreans are reaping the harvest of their own sow-
ing. ... Instead of heeding good advice and clearing up
their premises so no powerful neighbor would have an
excuse for doing this for them, they played at all manner
of silly pastimes. The government went from bad to
worse, until it became an easy prey to any one strong
enough to go in and put things to rights. The verdict of
war has left that task to Japan.” ®
But to continue the course of events: “As the summer of
1905 drew to a close it became more and more clear that
the Japanese government, despite its many promises to the
contrary, intended completely to destroy the independence of
5 “Things Korean,” p. 24%.
184 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Korea.” © Marquis Ito was sent to Seoul as Special Envoy
of the Emperor of Japan, to induce the Korean government
to ask Japan to assume a protectorate, but both king and
cabinet held out stoutly, until finally (according to prevail-
ing accounts) military intimidation was resorted to, and
the Foreign Minister was forced to sign the document.’
Two years later the final crisis came with the signing of
the Japan-Korea Treaty on July 24, 1907, the old Emperor-
King was forced to abdicate, and Japan, through her Resi-
dent-General, was left in complete control. For two years
Japan maintained a protectorate over Korea and in IgI0
formally annexed the country.
II. Missionary Work.
Roman Catholic Missions. Late in the eighteenth century
some members of the Korean Embassy at Peking came in
contact with Roman Catholic missionaries and brought back
that faith to Korea. Supplying, as it did, what the existing
religions lacked, it was well received and grew rapidly. In
1835 two Romanist missionaries secretly entered the coun-
try, and others soon followed. Persecution broke out, how-
ever, from time to time, incited by the corrupt Buddhist
priests, and many converts suffered martyrdom along with
the missionaries. In 1864, under a new regent who hated
foreigners, and Romanists in particular, a violent storm of
persecution burst, the Roman Catholic Bishop and eight of
his associates were seized and killed, and a veritable inquisi-
tion was instituted, under which at least 10,000 converts
were put to death. Roman Catholic Christianity in Korea
was threatened with extermination and has never fully ral-
lied from the blow. The effect of the persecution upon the
Koreans was to create a great dread of all foreign religions,
and this has proved a drawback to subsequent missionary
effort, both Protestant and Romanist.
Protestant Beginnings. ‘The first Protestant efforts in
behalf of Korea were put forth by Rev. John Ross, a Scotch
Presbyterian missionary at Mukden, in Manchuria, whose
6 “Korea’s Fight for Freedom,” DBT
7 See “The Passing of Korea, is Dr. fi. Hulbert. “The Unveiled East”
and “‘Korea’s Fight for Freedom,” 1 EI fl 6 oesenes For the pro- -Japanese
version of this ‘and associated events see “In Korea with Marquis Ito,”
Professor George T. Ladd.
KOREA 185
interest was aroused by his contact with Koreans on the
border. He took up the study of their language, translated
the entire New Testament into Korean, and sent Korean
colporteurs across the border to distribute it. These efforts
were so blessed that “when Protestant missionaries came
to Korea later they found whole communities in the north
professing Christianity, studying the Bible among them-
selves, and only waiting for some one to come and teach
them.”’ ®
The signing of the treaty between Korea and the United
States in 1882 afforded a new “open door” for missionary
work which the churches of America promptly prepared to
enter. The Northern Presbyterian Board in 1884 appointed
Rev. J. W. Heron, M.D., to Korea, but his departure was
delayed, and meanwhile Dr. H. N. Allen of the same Society,
who was already in China, was transferred to Korea and
thus became the first Protestant missionary to the “Hermit
Nation.”” His medical skill, and particularly his success in
treating surgically the wounds of a high official who was a
cousin of the Queen, were providentially used to win. the
favor of the court and smooth the way for the missionaries
who soon followed, even though Dr. Allen himself did not
continue in mission work but entered the diplomatic service.
In 1885 Rev. Horace G. Underwood of the Northern
Presbyterian Board, and Rev. H. G. Appenzeller and Dr.
-W. B. Scranton of the Methodist Episcopal Board, arrived
on the field. In 1888 the Y.M.C.A. of the University of
Toronto sent out Rev. James S. Gale, who later joined the
Presbyterian Mission and has become well known for his
interesting books on Korea. Other Societies followed, the
Australian Presbyterian entering in 18809, the English Epis-
copalian (S.P.G.) in 1890, the Southern Presbyterian in
1892, the Southern Methodist in 1896, and the Canadian
Presbyterian in 1808.
Policies and Methods. The consideration of policies and
methods of work assumes much more than ordinary in-
terest and importance in the case of Korea by reason of the
unusual results which so early attended missionary efforts
here. On this point we cannot do better than quote from
Dr. H. G, Underwood, one of the earliest pioneers and fore-
8 “Encyclopedia of Missions,” Vol. I, p. 534.
186 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
most missionary leaders in Korea for many years. He
writes: ““Very early in the history of the work, almost at its
beginning, God in His Providence led us to adopt methods
that have been said by some to have been unique, but in
reality are simply those that have been adopted by numbers
of missionaries in different parts of the world. The only
unique feature has been the almost unanimity with which
these have been followed by the whole missionary body in
this land.” °
This writer cites the visit to Korea, in 1890, of Dr.
John L. Nevius, of Chefoo, China, well known throughout
the entire missionary world for his advocacy of methods
making for a self-supporting and self-propagating native
church, and speaks of the influence exerted upon Korean
mission policies by the several conferences held by Dr.
Nevius with the Korean missionaries. Continuing, Dr.
Underwood writes: “After careful and prayerful consid-
eration, we were led in the main to adopt the ‘Nevius
method,’ and it has been the policy of the Mission—
“First, to let each man ‘abide in the calling wherein he
was found,’ teaching that each was to be an individual
worker for Christ, and to live Christ in his own neighbor-
hood, supporting himself by his trade;
“Second, to develop church methods and machinery only
so far as the native church was able to take care of and
manage the same;
“Third, as far as the church itself was able to provide
the men and the means, to set aside those who seemed the
better qualified, to do evangelistic work among their neigh-
bors;
“Fourth, to let the natives provide their own church build-
ings, which were to be native in architecture, and of such
style as the local church could afford to put up.” *°
Following this line of policy, the first Christians in the
place generally became the teachers of others, themselves
meeting in classes for Bible study and instruction as to their
duties. As one and another evinced special fitness for Bible
teaching and Christian service these would be given super-
vision of districts, their support being undertaken by the
®“The Call of Korea,” p. 5.
10 “The Call of Korea,” pp. 109, 110.
KOREA 187
groups ministered to. Graded classes for these leaders were
formed, which in time developed into schools for systematic
theological training.
Bible Classes. Another prominent feature has been the
holding of large popular Bible classes in each district, for
several weeks during the season of the year most convenient
for the Christian community. The attendance at such gath-
erings has gradually grown, and varies from 200 in the south
to 1,300 in the north. Those who thus gather return home
to assist in holding local classes under the direction of the
missionaries and district leaders, and thus systematic Bible
instruction is carried on throughout the entire field occupied.
Dr. Underwood records that in the one station of Pyeng
Yang in the north 191 such local classes were held in a single
year (1907) in the Presbyterian Mission alone, with an
attendance of over I0,000.
School Work, The need of educational work has not
been lost sight of, although it has been held secondary to
evangelism both in proportion and in order. The principle
adhered to has been to provide Christian education primarily
for the children of the churches rather than to conduct
schools for the heathen as an evangelistic agency. Each
local church was encouraged to open and support its own
primary school under a Christian teacher, and so heartily
have the churches responded to their duty on this line that
one mission alone, in 1907, reported 337 such primary
schools, all but three of which were entirely self-supported.
It became necessary for the missions to take the initiative
to some extent in the matter of schools of higher academic
instruction, so that in the main they have provided the
buildings, equipment, and teaching staff. But even in these
the students have been expected to meet their own support
and the running expenses of the school, and the native
churches have shown a noble spirit in making earnest efforts
to share even the cost of these school plants for the education
of their sons.
All this stands in striking contrast to the prevailing poli-
cies and methods in most other mission fields, and to their
results as well. It is impossible to account for the difference
by assuming greater material prosperity on the part of the
Koreans, for they are certainly as poor as any Eastern race.
188 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
These developments are rather an impressive testimony to —
the splendid results attainable by the adoption and main- —
tenance from the very beginning of true Scriptural principles —
and methods of missionary work, while at the same time
they afford a beautiful example of what the Spirit of grace
can accomplish in the hearts of converts but recently saved —
from heathenism.
Growth and Expansion. Mission work in Korea does
not fall into any well-marked periods. Dr. Underwood sug-_
gests a possible division into the periods of preparation, ex- |
pansion, beginning of large harvests, and greater ingather-—
ings, but says: “From the very beginning we have been
permitted to see results, and the work has been steadily
progressing with an ever-increasing momentum up to the
present time.” ™
From the first there were many who gave a willing ear to |
the missionary’s message, and the books he offered were |
purchased eagerly. The north especially seemed to have been
prepared by the wide seed-sowing that had been done earlier
from China, and for this reason missionary trips and efforts ©
were at first mainly directed thither. The first three con--
verts were baptized in 1886. In 1890, after only five years, ©
and those necessarily given largely to preliminary itineration, —
procuring property, language study, translation work, etc.,
there were over I00 converts.
This receptivity on the part of the Koreans was recog-
nized as a call for reénforcements from home, and the exist-
ing Missions steadily enlarged their staffs and expanded
their work, while other Societies entered the field. Then,
following the China-Japan war of 1894-1895, the period of
large harvests began, with ever-increasing numbers of en-_
quirers and converts. But even these great results were in
turn completely eclipsed by those of the first few years of”
the new century, which far exceeded the highest hopes of
the most optimistic missionaries, and led to Korea’ s becom-
ing known as “‘the missionary marvel of the age.” By 1907
there were actually over 1,000 self-supporting churches with
some 30,000 members and over 120,000 adherents, and|
these churches contributed that year nearly $80,000 in US :
money. A
et
11 “The Call of Korea,” p. 134. P
ee ee
KOREA 189
A Sample Station. The name of Pyeng Yang, the most
important city in northern Korea, has become familiar and
famous among Christians the world over, because of its
being identified with one of the most remarkable spiritual
movements in all missionary history. It was a very rich
and very immoral city, commonly called “the worst city in
Korea.”’ The entry and early work of the missionaries there
met with bitter opposition from the local officials. The
first converts and native helpers were sorely persecuted, some
of them thrown into prison and cruelly tortured. Soon
after this, in 1894, the China-Japan war broke out, and
Pyeng Yang was the scene of one of the most decisive bat-
tles. The unselfish example and work of the missionaries,
as well as the calm and trustful demeanor of the Christians
during this time of turmoil and anxiety, made a profound
impression upon the people. Moreover, the Christians who
were forced to flee with the other citizens, when the Chinese
troops occupied Pyeng Yang, scattered the good seed of the
gospel throughout the whole district by their personal testi-
mony and the printed page. From that time the attitude of
the populace completely changed, and a spirit of enquiry
began and rapidly spread through the city and the whole
countryside, until the strength of the mission workers was
taxed to the utmost to keep pace with the demands upon
them.
Testimony of Visitors. Mrs. Isabella Bird Bishop, the
well known traveler and authoress, visited this city in Decem-
ber, 1895, and afterwards wrote: ‘“‘The Pyeng Yang work
which I saw last winter is the most impressive mission work
I have ever seen in any part of the world. It shows that the
Spirit of God still moves on the earth, and that the old
truths of sin, judgment to come, divine justice and love, the
atonement and the necessity of holiness have the same power
as in the apostolic days to transform the lives of men. What
I saw and heard there has greatly strengthened my own
he i
Dr. Robert E. Speer, after visiting and carefully studying
_ the work of this same station in 1897, wrote: “I am ready to
Say that I met in few places in the world Christians so eager
and intelligent, with such fresh spiritual experiences, with
12 Quoted in “Every-Day Life in Korea,” p. 225.
1909 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
such simple, practical faith, with minds so alert and aba
ened by the gospel.” * |
The following figures speak eloquently of the growth of
this one station within a period of four short years. In
1895 there were in the city of Pyeng Yang twenty church
members, and in the province adjacent seventy-three bap-
tized persons. In 1899 there were 1,182 church members ~
and 7,433 adherents, meeting in 153 self-supporting ©
churches, and that year the Christian community built thirty-
eight new church buildings and gave $1,891 in U. S. money.
The Great Revival. This marvelous visitation of the ©
Spirit of God, of which the whole Christian world has heard,
centered in Pyeng Yang. Like all other revivals it began
with prayer—earnest, united, persevering prayer by mission-
aries and native Christians alike, born of a deep Spirit-
given soul hunger for a richer, fuller experience of divine
grace and power. For months, beginning in the late summer
of 1906, groups met day after day to pray, and although
no manifestation came their prayers knew no cessation.
Then 1907 dawned, and from all points of the north coun-
try Christians gathered, 700 strong, for the customary Bible
study classes at the central station. It was in the course of
those meetings, on January 14, that the Spirit fell upon the
whole assembly with deep heart-searching and conviction.
It is not easy to describe the wonderful scenes that followed,
the intense, conscious presence of God, the pungent convic-
tion, burning tears and agonizing confessions, and the new
and marvelous sense of peace and joy and liberty which fol-
lowed. Old and young, educated and ignorant, missionary,
native worker, and young convert—all came under this divine
influence and power. Sinners were converted, backsliders
reclaimed, Christians got a new vision of God, confessed
their sins, failures and short-comings, adjusted their differ-
ences, made apologies and restitution, and were filled with
new love for Christ and souls and new power for service.
For two weeks schoolwork and all other ordinary activities
were laid aside and everything gave place to prayer.
The wave of revival soon spread to Seoul and all parts
of the land, and here and there similar manifestations oc-
curred. Beyond Korea, too, the movement extended. The ©
13 Quoted in ‘“Every-Day Life in Korea,” p. 227.
so
KOREA 191
churches of Mukden, Manchuria, heard of the revival and
sent two elders to investigate. Rev. Jonathan Goforth also
came from China. As these messengers carried back reports
of what they had seen and heard in Korea the Holy Spirit
was poured out in like manner and measure, first in Man-
churia and later in center after center in China, with won-
derful results which are felt to this day. Thus hath it
pleased God to manifest His grace and power through poor,
humbled Korea unto the purifying and enriching of the life
of the church in the vast empire of China, whence the first
rays of gospel light had, a generation before, penetrated the
gross darkness of the little Hermit Nation.
Korean Christians. While rightly attributing this won-
derful revival and the phenomenal progress of missions as
a whole in Korea to the sovereign hand of God, we cannot
overlook the fact that certain qualities in the Christian con-
verts of Korea have played an important part in bringing
about such results, by providing God with means to work
through. We should sadly miss much of the lesson the
Lord would teach the entire Christian church through what
has taken place in Korea if we failed to observe and ponder
some of the traits and graces exhibited in marked degree
by the Christians of that land. Among these are to be
noted :—
A High Conception of Discipleship. “From the early
days of the mission there has prevailed among the Korean
_ converts a very high conception of the privileges and respon-
sibilities of church membership. A Korean Christian is
always more than a mere church-member ; he is a worker
giving his services freely and gladly to extend the knowledge
of Christ among his neighbors. It has not been an unusual
thing for a pastor of a local church to have not less than
one-third of the entire membership of his church on the
streets on a Sunday afternoon, engaged in house-to-house
Visitation and personal work among their unconverted neigh-
pors,'!7*
Love for God’s Word. This is most marked. Practically
all Korean Christians are Bible students. Old as well as
young make up the Sunday School enrollment, which is said
to aggregate 150,000. Sunday Schools in the large city
14 “Korea in Transition,” pp. 192, 193.
192 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
churches vary in attendance from 2,000 to 3,000. Whole
chapters of Scripture are commonly memorized even by the
illiterate and the aged. An unique feature of mission work
in Korea already noted is the system of Bible study classes
of all grades, held in the centers for periods ranging from —
ten days toa month, Not only the native workers and more
advanced Christians, but the rank and file of the members
as well, attend these gatherings, saving and sacrificing to be
able to come, and traveling long distances from every part
of the district. In the Syen Chun church the enrollment 1n_
the men’s classes held during 1907 was over 2,500, while
two women’s classes enrolled 660.
Church prayer meetings, too, are largely attended. The
Pyeng Yang church is said to hold a world record on this
line, with an average regular attendance of 1,500 at prayer
meeting. Nor are Korean Christians as a rule merely hear-_
ers of the Word, but doers as well.
Self-propagation and Self-support. It is a question
whether any other mission field has furnished an example of
zeal and devotion on these lines, or a record of results
achieved, to equal those of Korea. It is quite true that strik-
ing instances of these traits in individual converts are not
wanting in other fields. But the unique feature about Korea
is that these features dominate the church as a whole. Let
us quote a few testimonies from among many which are
at hand.
“From the first the Koreans were made to believe that
the spread of the gospel and growth of the church was their
work rather than ours. We are here to start them and
guide them in their efforts, but it is theirs to do the work.” |
—Dr. SHARROCKS.
“The Korean is a preacher of the gospel by a kind of
spiritual instinct; he knows and does this one thing only;
he provides for his church schools without a cent from the
homelands; he gives of his means a tenth or more; some-
times he gives all he has over a bare living.”—Dnr. JAMES
GALE:
“Not only in prayers, but in works as well, are the rank
and file of the Korean Christians instant in season and out.
I dare say there is no land in the world where there is 50.
much personal and unpaid—in money—hand to hand, and
‘eS
KOREA 193
heart to heart, evangelistic work done as in Korea.”—ReEv.
J. Z. Moore.
“The Koreans themselves established Christianity in dis-
tant communities where no white man had ever been.’”—F.
A. McKENZIE.
“The progress of Christianity is unprecedentedly rapid.
Native churches, instead of depending on foreign aid, are
becoming self-supporting, self-governing, self-propagating.
An astonishing revival spirit and evangelistic zeal prevail,
and converts are gathering by scores and hundreds. Self-
denying giving is manifested in a unique fashion.”—Dr.
A. T. PIERSON.
Take the Syen Chun (Presbyterian) station as a concrete
illustration of what these witnesses attest. Dr. Sharrocks,
reporting for 1905, gave the increase in the number of
Christians in that one year as from 6,507 to 11,943, an
average of 453 conversions per month. Such results could
not possibly be attributed to the direct work of the small
band of missionaries, nor to the paltry $72 spent on local
mission evangelists. The fact is that fifteen evangelists,
supported by the native church, were giving their whole time
to the work, and in addition the Christians had pledged a
total of over 8,000 days of voluntary evangelistic effort.
The same report states: “In our station we have fifty-six day
schools with 1,192 pupils, receiving not one dollar of for-
eign money. There are seventy church buildings in our
province, into only two of which any foreign money has
-gone.” *° For the entire support of this station, with all its
different phases of work, the Koreans gave $10.62 for every
American dollar used.
The continuance of this spirit of evangelistic fervor in the
Korean church is evidenced by a report of a week’s evan-
gelistic services held in Pyeng Yang in February, 1920,
in which 3,000 persons were led to decide for Christ. ‘These
meetings were planned and carried out almost entirely by the
Koreans themselves. Men, women and children visited
from house to house, and teams of college boys toured the
country districts.’’ *°
Sacrificial Giving. Many touching instances of keen sac-
15 Quoted in “Korea in Transition,” pp. 196-1
16 Missionary Review of the W orld, Sept., Bs! 'D. 824.
194 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
rifice in the giving of the Korean Christians “for Christ’s
sake and the gospel’s” could be cited. Dr. George Heber
Jones reports that “Korean men have been known to mort-
gage their houses that mortgages might be removed from
the houses of God; to sell their crops of good rice, intended
for family consumption, purchasing inferior millet to live
upon through the winter, and giving the difference in cost
for the support of the workers to preach among their own
countrymen. Korean women have given their wedding
rings, and even cut off their hair that it might be sold and
the amount devoted to the spread of the Gospel.”
The same missionary tells of the leader of a little village
group of Christians, who, when all other resources had been
exhausted to meet the cost of a new chapel, sold his only ox,
and the next spring he and his brother hitched themselves in
place of the ox and dragged the plow through the fields that
year.
Subscriptions not only of money, but also of time, to be ©
given to evangelistic work and manual labor in the erection
of churches, are quite the order of the day, thousands of
Christians contributing from a week to a month of time,
and many still longer periods.
Foreign Missionary Efforts. In addition to all that the —
Korean churches are doing for the support of the work and ©
spread of the gospel in their own land, they have again set
an example to other mission fields by launching missions
among their own countrymen in foreign lands, such as Man-
churia, Siberia, Hawaii, Mexico, and the Pacific coast of
the United States. In the Shantung province, China, they
also have begun missionary work among the Chinese, hav-
ing accepted responsibility for a section of that province.
Four married pastors and one doctor, assisted by fifteen
Chinese evangelists, are carrying on fruitful evangelistic, —
medical and school work. Regular services are now con-
ducted in upwards of twenty centers, and about 500 con-
verts have been baptized.
The Independence Movement. Japan’s administration in ©
Korea since she annexed that country in t910 has been —
galling to the Koreans. It has been a military despotism, a
system of arbitrary and drastic measures with the aim of |
forcing the Koreans to a complete renunciation of their old
A ee
KOREA 195
nationality and an assimilation to Japan. The results of
such unfair and short-sighted policy have been the opposite
of what the Japanese expected, and the Korean national
consciousness has been strengthened rather than weakened.
All the material benefits which Japanese rule has introduced,
including the improvement of agricultural methods, build-
ing of roads and railroads, new public school, banking and
postal-saving systems, hygienic regulations and other things,
could not atone for the overbearing attitude of the Japanese
officers of the law in treating as an inferior and conquered
race a people boasting such antiquity and culture. When,
therefore, the Great War brought an end to German mili-
tarism, and the acceptance by the victorious nations of the
principle of “‘self-determination” of subject peoples, new
hopes were born in the breasts of patriotic Koreans of be-
coming liberated from such intolerable conditions. A Pas-
sive Resistance uprising was organized, a “Declaration of
Independence’ was drawn up and signed by thirty-three
leaders, and for two months beginning March 1, 1919,
demonstrations took place in Seoul and throughout the coun-
try, in which the Koreans uniformly refrained from any
acts of violence and contented themselves with merely parad-
ing and shouting “Manse1’—(literally “ten thousand
years’), a patriotic expression used much like “Hurrah” in
English.
The unarmed “demonstrators” were promptly fired on,
sabered, bayoneted, arrested, beaten and tortured by the
Japanese military police, and a campaign of violent and
shocking repression ensued. Pamphlet No. 2 of “The Ko-
rean Situation,” issued by a Commission of the Federal
Council of Christian Churches in America, supplies the fol-
lowing figures among others: Koreans killed, 631; arrested
(March i-July 20, 1919), 28,934; flogged and released
(March 1-Oct. 31, 1919), 10,592; sent to prison, 5,156.
Volumes have been written describing the inhuman cruel-
ties and atrocities practised by the police, the horrid tortures
resorted to, the shameful indignities to which pure women
were subjected, etc.
The missionaries, who were wrongly suspected of com-'
plicity in the independence uprising, because of the large
number of Korean Christians who took part in it, came in.
196 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
for their share of insult and injury, and a discrimination by
the Japanese officials against the Christian movement was
plainly noticeable. Seventeen churches were totally de-
stroyed, and twenty-four others partially so. A report of —
the Presbyterian churches in October, 1919, states that of
that denomination alane, 336 pastors, elders and helpers had
been arrested, as well as 2,125 male and 531 female mem-
bers, 41 had been shot and killed, 6 beaten to death, and
1,642 were still in prison. The other denominations suf- —
fered proportionately.
The strict Japanese military censorship for a time pre- —
vented the facts reaching the outside world, but gradually
they filtered through. Then, needless to say, this reign of
terror and outrage called forth general and vigorous con-
demnation and protest. The federal Council of Churches in
America, and later the Federated Missions of Japan, made —
representations to the Japanese Imperial Government. It ©
took time and pains to convince that government of the ©
existence of such shocking conditions in its Korean adminis- —
tration, but once convinced the Premier and his Cabinet acted ©
with commendable decision and a fair measure of despatch.
Changed Japanese Administration. In August, 1919, the —
Military Governor General of Korea was recalled and Baron
Saito sent in his place. The new Governor held conferences .
with representative missionaries and Koreans, and addressed
himself with evident sincerity to the serious task of cor-
recting abuses and remodeling the government. The mili-
tary police system has been abolished, an order issued doing
away with flogging and torture, promises made of equal
treatment of Koreans and Japanese as regards official posi-
tions and salaries, of more freedom for the ixorean press, of
larger liberty and recognition for mission schools, and so on.
As to the merits of what has already been done and of the
assurances given for the future, opinions differ. Some
things have already occurred which are at variance with the
promises given of reform. The Koreans as a whole are not
satisfied, and are distrustful of Japan. They feel that the
reforms do not go far enough, nor are they disposed to be
content with any mere reforms; they want independence. ©
Further occasional uprisings have been reported and fresh
arrests made. The Korean Independence Movement is still
x
{
}
7
|
KOREA 197
being maintained, with its headquarters in Shanghai, China,
and a Bureau of Information in the United States, where it
is receiving considerable backing by Americans as well as
the Korean student body.
The Missionary Outlook. The ultimate effect of these
recent events upon the church and mission work in general
in Korea is to some extent problematical. It is too early to
speak positively. But it must be evident to every thoughtful
person who has followed the course of events closely that the
Korean church is being put to a new and severe test, that the
missionaries are faced with a task of extreme delicacy in
standing firmly against injustice and inhumanity, showing
rightful sympathy for those whose individual rights and
legitimate national aspirations may be violated, and at the
same time maintaining a strictly consistent missionary atti-
_tude of non-interference in matters political.
Latest mission reports indicate that the Christian move-
ment is still going on, with a steady growth in the church,
numerically at least. Some have feared lest the new zeal
for education may mean a letting down in the peculiarly
evangelistic efforts of the church. Yet cheering word keeps
coming of revival and of ingatherings at various points,
and the churches were never so full of young people as at
present.
The whole situation calls for sympathetic and believing
_ prayer that through all that has befallen the nation of Korea,
or may yet befall her, Korean Christians and missionaries
alike may be “more than conquerors,” and that the wonder-
ful work of divine grace and power in that afflicted but
plucky little nation, which has given her an unique place in
missionary annals, may still continue and increase.
Statistical Summary. The following figures are taken
from The Christian Movement in Japan (1923) :—Foreign
_ Missionaries, 458; Native Workers, 1,628; Churches or
Groups, 3,590; Communicant Members, 97,466.
QUESTIONS
1. Give the boundaries, area and population of Korea.
2. Describe its physical features and resources, and also its
climate.
\
198 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
3. Trace the origin of the Korean people, and compare their
characteristics with those of the Chinese and Japanese.
4. Briefly describe the various religions which preceded Chris-
tianity in Korea.
5. Sketch Korea’s history from its authentic beginning until
it came under the domination of the Manchu Dynasty of China,
giving opening and closing (approximate) dates.
6. Give a list of the first series of treaties between Korea and
foreign nations, with dates, and describe the events which led
finally to her annexation by Japan.
7, Give an account of the beginnings of Protestant missionary
work in Korea, and the names of four of the prominent pioneers
and the Societies they represented.
8. What distinctive missionary policies and methods have been
followed in Korea? Give illustrations of the results as regards
(a) evangelization, (b) schoolwork, (c) support of churches.
g. Give an account of the Great Revival, and some idea of the
extent of its results.
Io. Cite four outstanding features of Korean Christians as bear-
ing upon the quality and progress of mission work.
11. Describe briefly the foreign missionary efforts of the Korean
Church.
12. Give an account of the Korean Independence Movement,
suggesting something of its influence upon missionary interests
and prospects in Korea.
13. Give latest statistics of Protestant Missions in Korea.
CHAPTER XIV
THE NEAR EAST
The term ‘‘Near East,” which of late has come into such
common use, applies to that group of countries lying around
the meeting point of the three great continents of Europe,
Asia and Africa. The extent covered by this general term
is not precisely defined, but varies with different writers.
It is here regarded as comprising Egypt, Asia Minor (in-
cluding Armenia and Kurdistan), Syria, Palestine, Arabia,
Mesopotamia and Persia.
I. General Features.
Area and Population, The swift succession of political
changes that have taken place in the Near East during and
since the World War has so affected the boundaries and
populations of its different countries as to render statistics
for the time being very uncertain. The following table is
based mainly upon the Statesman’s Year Book for 1923 :—
Area (sq. m.) Population
PELILOPCAM ML USK OY! cis laie stadia sles elas ee be 10,882 1,891,000
Best OTE ths clk ete s oaks culls Site sales 199,272 10,186,900
PArimeniavanauiUrdistanhy aly wtieie sms aie tere 71,990 2,470,900
PreOre tay anGA ZeTDAL{aAnl vos veka sts, oles y's 59,730 4,469,376
(Republics of Soviet Russia)
Breeonotainia Witak }. Sasso sears es 143,250 2,849,282
Ree R Une rs ile Gi ee eek raat a talet 628,000 8 to 10,000,000
EAN TRG ACA St ga RR a Ca Oa Va 1,000,000 5,000,000
Bey Man Tench VANCALE i ws, here loielsteres 60,000 3,000,000
masestine (oritish Mandate) sc). 2042 9,000 757102
SOT il ae Tne ee ets ole ek oe eon ate) Bee NY haladeta 500,000
EMPLEO 6) AUER YN 350,000 13,551,000
Past and Present Interest. “From whatever standpoint
one approaches the Near East, the interest and emotions
aroused are more intense and fundamental than those stirred
by any other group of countries.” *
1Dr. Jas. L. Barton, quoted in “The Near East: Crossroads of the
World,” p. 195. At
200 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
1. It was the cradle of the human race. Mt. Ararat, in
Armenia, lifting its snow-crowned head 17,000 feet high,
stands as a mighty monument to our earliest ancestors, for
it is the traditional resting place of the ark, and the site
whence Noah and his family replenished the earth. Some-
where in this region.to the south, perhaps in the Euphrates
valley, the Garden of Eden is thought to have been located.
The territory upon which this lofty mountain looks down —
has throughout all time been the home of the early races of ©
mankind. |
2. It was the site of the world’s greatest ancient empires.
Here in the Near East, Egypt, Assyria, Babylon, Medo-
Persia and Greece, the mighty kingdoms of the hoary past, —
all in succession took their rise, flourished and waned. No
other region in the world compares with the Near East in —
its wealth of monuments, ruins and landmarks of ancient
civilization, and archeological research has here found its
largest field and richest rewards. :
3. It was the land of the Bible and the Saviour. All the ©
scenes and events of the Old Testament Scriptures lay —
here, and—what will ever make the Near East of transcend- —
ent interest to Christian hearts—the Holy Land is here,
the land where our blessed Saviour lived and died and rose
again, from which also He ascended to heaven, and to which
He will some day return to reign.
4. Itts the present storm center of the world. Upon this
region the eyes of the Great Powers are focused, for here
some of the most delicate and difficult problems of the ©
World War have yet to be threshed out. Here, ever since —
the Armistice was signed more than five years ago, ani-
mosity, strife and turmoil have prevailed, Turk and Bol-—
shevist against Greek and Armenian, Frenchman against
Arab, Moslem against Jew, Asiatic against European, and —
even to-day the situation is still one of great uncertainty and
the political air is full of disquieting rumblings.
Strategic Importance. But there are still more vital con-—
siderations to claim attention for the Near East. A glance
at the map reveals at once the strategic position of this area.
Constituting as it does a bridge between the three great con-
tinents of the Old World—“Asia the continent of the past, —
Europe the continent of the present, and Africa the conti-
‘
t
i
THE NEAR EAST Da Red
nent of the future’”—it has well been called the “Crossroads
of the World.” This term applies with equal force from
each of three viewpoints :
1. Trade. All trade routes between the East and the
West, between the North and the South, lie across this
territory, linking together the unlimited raw materials of
Asia and Africa with the factories and markets of Europe.
As the writer recently sped by rail across the Syrian desert
to Damascus, he saw the Old-World camel trains, laden with
rich merchandise, still threading their way across the track-
less sands, going to and from Arabia and Mesopotamia.
The opening of the Suez Canal in 1869 revolutionized
trade and travel between the Occident and the Orient. Some
idea of the volume of traffic through this waterway is given
by the fact that in the year 1921 vessels to the number of
3,975, aggregating over 18,000,000 tons, and carrying close
to 300,000 passengers, passed through the canal.
More recently the iron horse has appeared and begun
to effect still greater changes. Aleppo, in northern Syria,
bids fair to become one of the leading railroad centers of
the world, as it is already in common with Damascus and
Cairo a flourishing mart and entrepot for Eastern and West-
ern wares of every description. Westward from Aleppo
stretches a trunk line across Asia Minor to Constantinople,
with connections there for the different European capitals.
Eastward the line runs through the rich land of Mesopo-
tamia, formerly ending at Baghdad, but now completed to
Basra, at the head of the Persian Gulf, where it connects
with a weekly line of steamers to India. Southward from
Aleppo another trunk line runs through Damascus down to
Medina, in the very heart of old exclusive Arabia. From
Dera’a, south of Damascus, a line branches off westward
across Palestine to Haifa, and thence southward to Jerusa-
lem and Jaffa. And now this route extends on south, over
the road built by General Allenby’s army, and reaches the
Suez Canal and Egypt. Egypt has its splendid Government
railway system, comprising 2,319 miles of rails, extending
far up the Nile toward the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, while
a “Cape-to-Cairo Railway” through the full length of Africa
from north to south, so long the dream of far-visioned Brit-
ish statesmen, is rapidly becoming a reality.
202 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
What infinite trade possibilities are to be seen in such a
vamification of railroads, added to the older caravan and
water highways of travel! And what a future is in store
for the Near East as the converging point of such far
reaching trade routes, as well as in possessing rich agri-
cultural and mineral resources of its own, waiting to be
developed by the introduction of modern methods and
machinery !
2. Religion. The Near East is the native home of three ©
great religions—Judaism, Christiamty and Mohammedan-
ism. This fact makes it the rendezvous for multitudes of
religious visitors from every quarter of the globe.
Every year a stream of English-speaking tourists visit
Egypt, Palestine and Syria. Dr. Charles R. Watson esti-
mates the yearly number of such visitors to Egypt alone
at 12,000. These include many prominent and representa-
tive persons, a large proportion of them actuated by religious
motives and interested in mission work. The fact that so
many Westerners get in the Near East their first glimpse of
missionary work, and their first impressions about it, is an
added argument for making the missionary work done and
seen here a worthy and convincing sample of what such
work should be.
Then there are thousands of pilgrims of the Greek and >
Latin churches—Russian peasants and religious devotees
from Central Europe, South America, Australia and other
lands—who annually visit the Christian shrines of the Holy
Land.
Moslems, in turn, come from all parts on pilgrimages to
Mecca, their Holy City, or to some other celebrated shrine.
Dr. Zwemer in his book entitled ‘‘Arabia the Cradle of -
Islam’ gives the number of pilgrims arriving by sea at
Jidda, the port of Mecca, in 1893, as 92,625. Kerbela, near
Baghdad in Mesopotamia, a shrine only less sacred than
Mecca, is said to be visited by 200,000 pilgrims each
year.
To all these streams of religious pilgrims there must now |
be added the new influx of Jewish Zionists to Palestine. |
These are impelled, it is true, by nationalistic rather than —
religious motives. Yet none the less they contribute along
with the rest to create a missionary opportunity of stra-_
THE NEAR EAST 203
tegic significance, because of the outreach of its influence to
the very ends of the earth.
3, Politics. For centuries these lands have been a crucial
problem in world politics. “Egypt is the gate to Central
Africa, Persia is the bulwark of Southwestern Asia, and
Constantinople is the natural avenue of approach to Eastern
Europe.” ? The Great Powers have therefore vied with
one another in their ambitions and efforts for political as-
cendancy in the Near East. Great Britain established her-
self in Egypt with a view to safeguarding the Suez Canal
route to her valued Far Eastern possessions, and gained a
“sphere of influence’ in Southern Persia to check possible
Russian designs upon India. Russia, feeling the need of
a secure outlet through the Bosphorus, because her north-
ern ports are ice-bound half the year, has done everything
in her power to obtain possession of Constantinople, which
dominates that waterway. Indeed, Constantinople has been
the coveted prize of all the Great Powers, who recognize its
strategic location for a world capital. France, Italy and
Greece have all staked out colonies and sought special com-
mercial privileges in Syria and Asia Minor. Germany’s
ambitious scheme for a mighty empire reaching from the
North Sea to the Persian Gulf led her into shrewd diplomatic
dealings with the Sublime Porte.
The lesson to Christian Missions in all this is not far to
seek. Given a strategic area or center for commerce and
politics and you have the same for missionary work. For
Christianity to become dominant in the Near East would be
for its influence to extend powerfully through the adjacent
continents in every direction. The case of Islam furnishes
a striking proof and illustration of this.
The question may properly be raised as to whether we
have attached to the birthplace of the Founder of Christian-
ity the significance it deserves. We are accustomed to dwell
upon the humble aspect of the Saviour’s birth and life on
earth, in the fact of His being identified with so small a
land and nation as that of the Jews. But, on the other hand,
have we rightly appreciated the fact that God planned that
the incarnation and redemptive work of His Son should
be accomplished at the geographical and strategic center of
2“The Near East,” p. 176.
204 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the world? To-day in every large city of the Near East—in
Cairo, Jerusalem, Damascus, Aleppo—we find the external
features of Pentecost constantly repeated in the mingling
together of men “out of every nation under heaven.” The —
variety of faces, costumes and tongues will not soon be for-
gotten by one who has moved among the crowds in one
of those Eastern marts.
The Different Races. To infer that the inhabitants of
what has hitherto been known as Turkey in Asia are all
Turks, just as those of England are Englishmen and those
of China are Chinese, would be very far from the truth.
Nowhere within a similar area is there to be found a greater
diversity of races—a fact which adds great complexity to
the missionary task in the Near East. Hence some mention
of these different races is essential to a proper understanding
of the situation, from whatever viewpoint it is to be re- —
garded.
Turks. The real Turks are Mongolian in race, and
pushed their way westward from the plains of Turkistan, in —
Central Asia, eight or nine centuries ago. They are thus ©
newcomers as compared with most of the other races. Be-
fore the War they numbered about 6,000,000, dwelling —
mainly in central and western Asia Minor.
The Turks are Mohammedan in religion, grossly igno-
rant and fanatical in mind, and have earned a world-wide
reputation for cruelty and savagery by their brutal treat- —
ment of their Christian neighbors. In war they are fierce ©
and courageous fighters. But despite the many bad quali- ©
ties of the Turk, it is only fair to say that missionaries and ~
travelers testify to kindness and hospitality received at their —
hands, and that the common peasants are far better than the ©
corrupt and unscrupulous educated and official classes.
Armenians. The Armenians are a very ancient people ©
with a well attested national history of 2,500 years. The |
kingdom of Armenia once reached from the Mediterranean ~
to the Caspian Sea.’ When the War broke out the Arme-—
nians within the Turkish Empire numbered about 2,000,000.
They are a hardy, industrious and intelligent race, decidedly —
superior to their Turkish over-lords. They have overcome |
the difficulties of a severe climate and a none too productive —
soil, and have survived centuries of conflict and repression.
THE NEAR EAST 205
They have set a high value upon education, maintaining their
own system of schools and being among the first to embrace
the higher educational advantages brought to the Near East.
Not a few Armenian young men have made their way to
Europe and America for study or commercial purposes, and
have accredited themselves well on both lines.
The Armenians have the distinction of having been the
first nation to adopt Christianity. This was toward the end
of the third century, when their king led the way by re-
ceiving baptism from a Christian bishop. Through cen-
turies of persecution and repeated massacres they have held
tenaciously to their Christian faith and have displayed the
greatest fortitude. If they have made themselves unpopular
by a tendency to combativeness and untrustworthiness of
character, let it be said that these unpleasant traits are
doubtless due in large measure to the many generations of
cruelty and injustice which have been their heritage. The
wholesale massacres of Armenians in 1895-1896, 1909 and
1915-1917, fiendishly planned and carried out by the Turkish
authorities, stand out among the most heinous national
crimes in history.
Greeks. Up toa very recent date the coast of Asia Minor
was peopled by this race, the direct descendants of the an-
cient Greeks who lived here. Just south of the Dardanelles
lie the ancient plains of Troy (the Troas of St. Paul’s day),
famous in Grecian history. “Smyrna is practically a Greek
city, and at least one-third of the people of Constantinople
are Greeks. Before the War there were not less than a
million Greeks in this part of the Near East, and many:
Greek villages are to be found in the interior.” *
Religiously these people belong to the Greek Orthodox
Church, now predominant in Eastern Europe and Western
Asia, and of which the seven churches of Asia mentioned
in the Book of Revelation were the forerunners. As to
occupation, these present-day Greeks are true to the tradi-
tions of their ancestors in being largely keen merchants,
although many also are farmers and fruit growers. They
are intelligent people, a fair proportion are well educated;
and, like the Armenians, they maintain a system of good
‘schools, including many of higher grade.
_ “The Near East,” p. 36 (written before the recent sack of Smyrna).
206 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
During the War the Greeks suffered only less than the
Armenians at the hands of the Turks. It is safe to say that
several hundred thousand of them were driven from their
homes into the interior, there to perish from exposure and
starvation.
Kurds. These hardy, semi-nomadic tribesmen, number-
ing perhaps 2,000,000, inhabit the region known as Kurdi-
stan, lying in eastern Asia Minor and western Persia, north
of Mesopotamia. They dwell mostly in black mohair tents
among the mountains, ruled over by feudal chieftains. They
are keepers of flocks and herds, but make their living also —
by plundering their Armenian neighbors and waylaying
caravans in transit. Along with their love of booty and
other evil propensities, however, they possess some good
qualities, for they are home-loving, frugal, as hospitable
as the Arab, and for the most part free from polygamy.
They are decidedly more moral than the Turks and much
less cruel. Instances are recorded of kindness and succor
extended by Kurds to bands of Armenians in their help-
less plight, as they fled before the brutal fury of the Turk.
The Kurds are of Eastern ancestry, and their language
is Aryan at its base, although mixed with Turkish, Arabic
and Persian. They are classed as Mohammedans in reli-.
gion, but are not zealous as such, and their worship is a
strange mixture, including elements of paganism and also
some rites resembling those of Christianity. They have
never been loyal to their Turkish rulers, nor have they ever
been brought under complete control. Many Kurds are
already favorably disposed toward Christianity, and under
better political conditions these people would offer a prom-
ising field for missionary effort. :
Arabs. The Arabians are an ancient and interesting peo-
ple, of original Semitic stock. At least the tribes of North-
ern Arabia are held to be descendants of Ishmael, thus
making the Arab a cousin to the Jew. There are said to be
from one to one-and-a-half million Arabs of pure Semitic
blood. The population of the whole country is a matter of.
conjecture, since no accurate census has been possible. Pub-_
lished estimates have varied widely. Dr. S. M. Zwemer has
considered 8,000,000 a conservative figure, but the latest
THE NEAR EAST 207
edition of the Statesman’s Year Book (1923) suggests four
or five million.
The Arabs have burst the bounds of their original pen-
insular home and have repeatedly swept over Syria, Meso-
potamia and Egypt, leaving a permanent impress of their
stock upon these lands. A striking evidence of the influence
they have exerted is the fact that Arabic, which is a sister
tongue to Hebrew, is the prevailing language all over the
Near East, and even beyond. The Arabs, moreover, possess
a strong religious instinct, and have with ardent zeal prop-
agated the faith of their prophet Mahomet far and wide in
the three continents which meet in the Near East.
Like the Kurds, the Arabs have had no affection for
their Turkish masters, and have never been reconciled to
the assumption by the Sultan of the Caliphate, or supreme
headship of Islam, a title which they claim to belong within
the family of the Prophet in Arabia.
The Arabs are fine specimens of physical development,
and as a race are above the average in intelligence and mental
ability. In appearance and customs they differ widely ac-
cording to their environment. A more striking contrast
could not well be found in any nation than that between the
wild, skin-clad Bedouin of the desert and the educated, well-
groomed young civil or military officer, with his faultless
European speech and manners, whom the writer met in
Damascus and other centers. Without doubt the Arab race
is an important factor to be reckoned with in the recon-
struction of the Near Fast.
Syrians. This race, dwelling in Syria, Palestine and
upper Mesopotamia and numbering about 3,500,000 before
the War, is chiefly Semitic in stock, but with Greek, Roman
and Crusader blood grafted in. The Syrians are very
bright in intellect and keen for education. They are both
industrious farmers and shrewd merchants, and have
traveled the world over on business enterprises. As to re-
ligion, about two-thirds are Moslems, and one-third belong
to one or other of the Oriental Christian sects, more espe-
cially the Greek Orthodox Church.
Jews. It is a pathetic fact, and a solemn reminder of the
certainty of God’s judgments, that of the 15,500,000 Jews
208 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
in the world to-day only 83,794 * are to be found in Palestine,
the home of their fathers. There is a large colony also near
Baghdad, and many live in Persia and Egypt. The total
number of Jews in the Near East is between one-half and
three-quarters of a million. The rest of the Hebrew race
are scattered among every nation under heaven.
A place of sad intérest to every visitor to the Holy Land
is the Wailing Place of the Jews, a narrow alley in Jerusalem
adjoining the ancient Temple area. There one sees aged
and devout Jews reading the prophets, and mingling their
tears with their prayers as they kiss the foundation stones
of their former Temple structure. The Mosque of Omar
now crowns the site of the Temple, and from this and the
other most sacred places God’s ancient people have long been
rigidly excluded by their Moslem rulers. The Jews one
meets in Jerusalem are a poor and unworthy specimen of
the race, many of them supported by charity, and as a rule
bigoted religiously in proportion to their poverty and igno-
rance.
But great changes are beginning to appear in the Jewish
aspect of Palestine through the efforts of the Ziomst Move-
ment, organized less than twenty-five years ago with the
object of “securing for the Jewish people a publicly and |
legally assured home in Palestine.’’ Already quite a number
of successful agricultural colonies of Zionist Jews are to be
seen throughout the land. An expert Zionist commission —
has made a survey of Palestine, and the claim has been
made that with the introduction of modern scientific methods - |
of farming and appropriate industries, and the development
of natural resources, the “Promised Land” in its full extent _
is capable of supporting a population of five or six millions |
instead of the seven or eight hundred thousand inhabitants :
in present-day Palestine. A stream of Jewish immigration
has begun to flow toward the Holy Land, the largest a
bers thus far being refugees from Eastern Europe, and
under the powerful patronage and liberal financial support
of the Zionist organization this stream promises to rae
steadily in volume.
Persians. Whether the name Persia brings to mind the
ancient Medo-Persian empire founded by Cyrus and over-—
4 Official census, October, 1922.
i
i
4 i
THE NEAR EAST | 209
thrown by Alexander, or the more modern empire which
fell under Arabian domination in the seventh century and
has since been swayed by successive Arab, Turk and Mongol
rulers, it is one and the same land. The Persians of to-day
are of the same old Iranian ° stock that inhabited the land
in the days of Nehemiah and Queen Esther.
The present population, estimated at 8,000,000 to Io,-
000,000, consists of two classes, tent-dwellers and town-
dwellers. The former constitute one-fifth of the whole,
and like the Bedouin Arabs lead a nomadic life, tending
their flocks and herds on the steep mountain sides. The
townspeople cultivate the fertile valleys, raising grain and
luscious fruits, spinning and weaving wool and mohair, and
making vegetable dyes. Others are skilled craftsmen en-
gaged in the manufacture of the world-famous Persian rugs
and shawls of beautiful design, the exquisite enamel work
on metal, and mosaic work in bone and ivory.
Persia to-day, however, is a pitiable spectacle of de-
terioration materially, commercially, agriculturally and eco-
nomically. This condition is fundamentally due to a weak,
incompetent and negligent government, but it has been
ageravated by the fearful ravages of the late War. The
absence of any public school system and the lack of proper
roads and communications are a serious handicap. ‘The
masses are sunk in poverty and ignorance. ‘The estimated
illiteracy is ninety-five per cent. in the towns and cities and
ninety-eight per cent. in the villages. The cities and villages
are full of idle men, and beggars everywhere abound.
The Arab conquerors of the seventh century forced their
Moslem faith upon Persia, and nine-tenths of the present
populace is Moslem. The balance is made up of Jews, Ori-
ental Christians (Armenians and Nestorians) and a few
remaining Zoroastrians.
It is a cheering fact that the Moslems in Persia are far
more tolerant and approachable than in any other Near
Eastern land. The influence of the missionaries and their
splendid work has told most favorably, the former bitter
prejudice has steadily given way, and a large proportion not
only of the boys but also of the girls in the Mission schoois
are now from Moslem homes. The Mission hospitals have
5 [ran was the ancient name for Persia.
210 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
profoundly influenced public sentiment. The missionaries
have come to be treated with friendliness and courtesy, and
an unique missionary opportunity exists to-day which is a
loud challenge for greatly needed reenforcements.
Egyptians. While the streets of Cairo, Egypt’s splendid
capital and Africa’s greatest city, present a never-ending -
pageant of Oriental life—Copts, Turks, Syrians, Nubians,
Sudanese negroes, Bedouins and many others—for practical |
purposes the population of Egypt may be said to consist of ©
two classes. Furst, there are the Arab Moslems, originally
from Arabia, who have settled in the rich corn lands of the
delta of the Nile and now comprise nine-tenths of the entire
population. Second, there are the Copts, who are the true
Egyptians, “the direct descendants of the men who built the
pyramids and who, when the rest of the world was asleep,
developed a civilization which has been the wonder of the
AGES ke
The Copts are Christians in name, the Coptic Church hav-
ing seceded from the main body of Christianity as a result of
a doctrinal controversy before the time of the Mohammedan
invasion. The Copts have suffered much persecution from
the Moslems, possibly more than any other Christian sect
except the Armenians.
Prior to 1922, when Egypt was given recognition as a
sovereign state, a third class was to be reckoned in the popu-
lation, namely, the ruling class. Up to the War this class”
was composed chiefly of Turks, and from 1914, when a
British Protectorate over Egypt was declared, the high offi-
cials were British and the underlings Turkish. The novel
spectacle was thus presented of one alien race governing the -
native race through a second alien race as its intermediary,
all three races having their mutual antipathies.
Turkeys Career. By their capture of Constantinople in
1453 the Turks became practical masters of the Near East. ©
Their armies subsequently swept down through Syria, took
Jerusalem from the Arabs in 1517, invaded Egypt and
brought that land and the other North African states under
Turkish sway. From that time the Sultans of Turkey as-—
sumed the title and authority of the Moslem Caliphate, —
wresting it from the Arab line.
6 “The Lure of Africa,” p. 45.
THE NEAR EAST 211
The Ottoman rule reached the zenith of its power and
glory in the sixteenth century, at which time its dominion
extended from the borders of Austria to Persia, and from
the Caucasus to the deserts of Africa, “At that time the
Sultan of Turkey ruled over an empire 2,000,000 square
miles in extent, containing a population of 50,000,000 peo-
ples speaking a score of different languages and dialects.
Since then her borders have been constantly contracting:
Hungary, the Balkan States, Southern Russia, the Barbary
coast, Cyprus and Egypt have one by one slipped from her
possession,” * :
On July 24, 1908, the whole world was astounded, and.
the diverse subjects of the Turkish Empire became delirious
with joy at the sudden news of a bloodless revolution in Tur-
key, by which that most absolute and tyrannical monarchy
in the world gave place to a constitutional government.
Those responsible for this undreamed-of change styled
themselves the Young Turks Party, and they at once pro-
ceeded to inaugurate a new régime which promised great
things for the realm. The bloody tyrant Abdul Hamid was
dethroned and his harmless brother Mohammed V given the
empty title of Sultan in his place. But, alas, all hopes cen-
tered in the Young Turks were doomed to disappointment.
Plots, counter-plots, intrigues and assassinations followed,
but without any substantial change for the better in the gov-
ernment. Finally three men rose to prominence and power,
to become one of the famous triumvirates of history. These
were Talaat, Enver and Djemal, all of whom rose from ob-
scurity until, by means of ability coupled with ambition and
conceit, they occupied the high offices of Prime Minister, —
Minister of War and Minister of Marine respectively. They
became the “political bosses” of the nation, controlling its
policies and shaping its destinies with a ruthless purpose and
an iron hand.
It would seem that God sent a deceiving spirit into the
counsels of these aspiring and wicked men. Against the
wishes of the people and the protests of a number of cabinet
ministers, they yielded to the cunning diplomacy of Ger-
many and allowed her to drag Turkey into the War on the
side of the Central Powers. In so doing they practically
7“The Near East,” pp. 21, 22.
212 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
signed Turkey’s death warrant, and that Power began to
move swiftly toward her doom.
The War in the Near East. Early in the War England,
having declared a protectorate over Egypt and deposed the
pro-Turkish Khedive, proceeded to make Egypt the base
of Allied military operations for the Near East. A great
training camp and Supply station was established at Kan-
tara, on the Suez Canal, and from this point, after the de-
feat of a daring attempt by the Turks to seize the Canal, —
General Allenby began his hard and memorable advance
across the Sinai desert and northward through Palestine.
On the 1oth of December, 1917—a day never to be for- ©
gotten by lovers of Zion—Jerusalem capitulated, and Al-
lenby entered the city at the head of the Allied army. A
few more months sufficed to rout the Turkish armies in
northern Palestine and Syria, and Turkey’s effective part
in the War was at end.
Brief mention must also be made of the auxiliary war
campaigns in two other sections of the Near East, namely, -
Arabia and Mesopotamia. In Arabia the Sherif of Mecca
at the beginning of the War renounced Turkish allegiance
and, with British approval, proclaimed the independent ©
“Kingdom of Hejag.’ Other Arab tribes rallied to his ©
standard, and under the leadership of his now well-known —
son, Emir Feisal, a strong force of intrepid Bedouins —
pressed northward along the line of the Damascus-Medina ©
railroad and gave valuable assistance to Allenby.
Mesopotamia and Western Persia were also for a time >
war sectors of importance. England early despatched a
force of her Indian troops to the Persian Gulf, primarily
for the protection of her valuable pipe lines from the Per-
sian oil wells. Desperate fighting took place, and eventually
the Turkish armies were defeated and driven northward as —
far as Mosul. Mesopotamia was reclaimed, and with the
welcome change from Turkish neglect to British care and
enterprise this natural garden spot of the world has revived, |
so that already the largest harvests in many generations ©
¥
have been gathered.
Turkish War Atrocities. Had the crimes and outrages ©
visited by the Turk upon the non-Moslem peoples of the
Near East during the War been committed under some great ©
THE NEAR EAST ; 213
provocation or in the heat of desperate conflict, even then
they would have sufficed to arouse public indignation. But
what language can describe the feelings of the whole civil-
ized world in the light of the indisputable fact that those
crimes and outrages were the systematic carrying out of a
deliberate program, hatched in cold blood by Enver and
Talaat and their infernal brood of “Young Turks” for the
extermination of all the Christians of the realm! The very
details of the barbarous treatment of the detested Chris-
tians are known to have been discussed and enthusiastically
approved by them. “Every new method of inflicting pain
was hailed as a splendid discovery, and the regular attend-
ants were constantly ransacking their brains in the effort
to devise some new torment. . . . They even delved into the
records of the Spanish Inquisition and other historic in-
stitutions of torture and adopted all the suggestions found
there.” °
As early as the spring of 1915 this government policy
was determined. ‘First, the Greeks were driven from the
seacoast. Then the Armenians from the interior were de-
ported from their homes; the men and boys were cruelly
massacred; the women and children were marched over
mountain and plain—barefoot, ragged, hungry, and thirsty
—and along the way they were robbed, insulted and out-
raged. Many fell by the wayside never to rise again; many
threw themselves into the streams, unable longer to endure
the hardships.” ?
Mr. Henry Morgenthau, American Ambassador at Con-
stantinople during the War, who had better opportunities,
perhaps, than any other outsider of knowing fully what
_ transpired within the Turkish Empire, lays bare in his book
some of the ghastly details of the official murder of the Ar-
menian nation. One instance is given of a caravan of 18,000
which started from Harpoot. On the seventieth day, after
experiences too horrible to relate, an exhausted remnant ot
150 reached Aleppo.
At least two-and-a-half millions were victims in one de-
gree or another of this crusade of outrage and massacre,
and of these more than half perished. Mr. Morgenthau in
8 “Ambassador Morgenthau’s Story,” p. 307.
®9"The Near East,” pp. 52, 53.
214 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
summing up his account writes: “I am confident that the
whole history of the human race contains no such horrible
episode as this. The great massacres and persecutions of
the past seem almost insignificant when compared with the
sufferings of the Armenian race in 1915.” *°
And finally, as again attesting the true source and aim of
the movement, he quotes verbatim Talaat Pasha’s proud
boast to his friends: “I have accomphshed more toward
solving the Armeman problem in three months than Abdul —
‘Hamid accomplished in thirty years.” ™
II. Missionary Work.
The Vanguard, Protestant Missions in the Near East
began with the sending out of two young men—Pliny Fiske
and Levi Parsons—by the American Board in 1819. Find-
ing conditions unfavorable for locating at Jerusalem, they
made Beirut their base and itinerated extensively throughout
Syria, Palestine and the adjacent lands. ‘The missionary —
career of these two pioneers lasted only five years. Fiske
lies buried at Beirut and Parsons at Alexandria in Egypt.
But they blazed the way for others who soon followed.
Pioneer Problems. Little did either these earliest mis-
sionaries, or yet the home churches which sent them out,
realize the magnitude of the task they were undertaking.
The Near East was largely an unknown quantity. It was a
stunning problem in all its aspects, this vast sweep of terri-
tory then known as the Turkish Empire, covering the full
extent of Bible lands, and embracing forty or more millions
of diverse peoples, thrown together physically and yet sepa-
rated by irreconcilable differences of race and religion.
There were backward material conditions of every kind,
prevailing ignorance and illiteracy, outlawry, crime and
cruelty—and all under the oppressive hand of a despot at
Constantinople, who as Sultan was supreme political ruler
and as Caliph was the exalted head of Moslemism the world
over.
“The first twenty years of this century of missions was
spent largely in spying out the lands. The accounts of the
10 “Ambassador Morgenthau’s Story,” pp. 321, 322.
11 [bid., p. 342. Significantly enough, Talaat was assassinated in Berlin
on March 15, 1921, by an Armenian ‘student bent upon avenging the mas-
sacres of his people.
THE NEAR EAST 215
travels, exploits and adventures of these intrepid explorers
are most fascinating and exciting. The story of Eli Smith
and of H. G. O. Dwight in their journey from Constanti-
nople to Tabriz, Persia, traveling 2,500 miles on horseback
and 1,000 miles by water through a ‘wild country beset with
robbers and perils of every kind’ rivals any tale of travel
or adventure ever written.” *
The Religious Situation. Three venerable religions occu-
pied the field then as now, “Judaism, rigid and exclusive;
Islam, arrogantly and persecutingly tenacious; Christianity,
defiantly and degradingly corrupt.’ ** All three, having
sprung from the same root, were alike monotheistic and yet
sadly perverted.
It was with a proper sense of the need of evangelizing
both Moslem and Jew that these early missionaries were sent
out, but with an entire misconception of the existing Oriental
Christianity. Taking for granted that the Eastern Chris-
tian sects—Greek, Armenian, Copt, Nestorian and others—
were still what they had been in the early centuries, the
church at home had no thought of its missionaries going to
establish a new Protestant sect in these Eastern lands. They
fully expected to cooperate with the historic churches,
stimulating their spiritual life and zeal and making them
_ the channel for the evangelization of the non-Christian popu-
lace. The policy of the missionaries was not to proselyte
nor to interfere in ecclesiastical matters, and those who first ~
came under evangelical influence were urged to continue in
their churches with the hope of purifying and vitalizing
them.
But the futility of such hopes and efforts soon became ap-
parent. While at first the missionaries received a friendly
welcome in certain quarters, the ecclesiastical leaders of the
Eastern churches soon began to manifest disfavor, and be-
fore long open hostility. Finally a storm of persecution
broke out, which Dr. James L. Barton ** graphically de-
scribes. All evangelicals were branded as heretics and ex-
communicated from the church.
This contingency at once created the necessity for a new
12 “The Near East,” pp. 117, 118.
13 “‘Modern Missions in the East,” p. 113.
14 See his ““Daybreak in Turkey,’ Chapter XV.
216 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
organization, inasmuch as according to Turkish law persons
unconnected with some recognized religious sect were de-
nied all civil status, could collect no debts, could be neither —
married nor buried—in short, had no longer any part or lot
in their own nation. Accordingly, the first evangelical
church was organized in .Constantinople in 1846, and an ~
official firman was secured from the Sultan in 1847 recog-
nizing the new Protestant sect. |
Occupation of the Field. It is impossible to give here any
full or connected account of the actual missionary opera-—
tions in this vast area, or even to mention by name all of
the Societies which have had part in the work. Speaking
broadly, the American Board has been the principal agency
in European Turkey and Asia Minor; the Northern Presby-
terian Mission in Syria and, together with the Church Mis-
sionary Society, in Persia; the United Presbyterian Mission
and the Church Missionary Society in Egypt.
Palestine, as the “Holy Land,” has attracted a dispropor-
tionate number of Societies. Sixteen are tabulated, besides.
not a few independent workers, and these represent a great
variety of policies and methods. The Church Missionary
Society is the largest. Then come the London Jews’ So-
ciety, the Scotch Presbyterian Missions, the Society of —
Friends, the Christian and Missionary Alliance, and up to —
the World War the German Evangelical Missions also. :
With Arabia the name of Jon Keith Falconer will ever be ©
associated, as the man whose pioneer efforts were used of —
God “to call attention” to that “ignored peninsula.” This —
young Scotch nobleman, a brilliant Cambridge scholar, gave ©
up fame and fortune, and with his equally devoted wife set
out in 1885, at his own expense, to reach the destitute Mos- |
lems of Arabia and adjacent parts with the gospel. He
made his headquarters at Sheikh-Othman, near the British
port of Aden, and began a survey of the surrounding terri- —
tory. But repeated fevers sapped his strength, and within
two years he breathed his last. His grave at Aden consti- —
tutes at once a challenge and an inspiration for the evan- —
gelization of one of the darkest corners of the world. His —
work was taken up and is being successfully carried on by —
the United Free Church of Scotland. :
In 1889 another effort in behalf of Arabia was launched ~
THE NEAR EAST 217
by a small group of students of the (Dutch) Reformed
Church in America. The American Arabian Mission was
formed, with Rev. James Cantine as its first missionary.
Rev. Samuel M. Zwemer, D.D., who followed in 1890, is
its most distinguished worker and one of the foremost fig-
ures in the field of Moslem Missions. As yet only four
coast points are occupied—Sheikh-Othman (Aden), by the
United Free Church of Scotland, and Muscat, Behrein,
Koweit and Basra, by the Reformed Church in America.
Most of the vast interior is still a prohibited area.
Mesopotamia, with nearly 3,000,000 inhabitants, has had
only two stations, Mosul and Baghdad, under the Church
Missionary Society, and even these had to be given up as a
part of that Society’s enforced retrenchment after the War.
But happily the Presbyterian and Reformed Churches of
America have arranged together to enter this neglected
field. They have respectively occupied Mosul and Baghdad
and are planning for at least two other stations.
Advance and Development. A full century of missions
in the Near East has just been rounded out. Following the
early periods of pioneering and organization the missionary
forces have steadily lengthened their cords and strengthened
their stakes, until their testimony and influence have spread
in some degree to every part of this great area. Mission
stations have been planted at strategic points, including al-
most all important centers in Asia Minor, Armenia, Kur-
distan, Syria, Palestine and Egypt, and a limited number in
Persia, Mesopotamia and Arabia. Extensive evangelism
has been carried on by local and itinerant preaching, by the
distribution of literature, and by personal interviews.
Schools and hospitals have been opened, Bible translations
made, Christian literature published, and a full round of
activities carried forward at a tremendous cost of conse-
crated toil and talent. ‘A full century of mission work,
with the discouragements, persecutions, martyrdoms,
achievements, has laid the broad and deep foundations for
the building of a Christian civilization in this new day.’ *
Mission Schools and Colleges. Christian education, al-
ways an important branch of missionary work in every field,
has held a place of prominence and proved singularly effec-
15 “The Near East,” p. 116.
ry
218 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
tive in the Near East by reason of the peculiar conditions to
be faced. As one writer puts it: “Superstition and fanati-
cism are the children of ignorance, hence the proper school-
ing of the young is the surest means of overcoming these
twin evils.”’** Moreover, the formidable difficulties and
dangers confronting direct evangelism because of Moslem
rule and religion havé heretofore in a measure shut the mis-
sionaries up to institutional work.
Primary schools were begun everywhere; schools of
higher grade followed; and finally colleges for men and
women sprang up, reaching twelve in number, with an en-
rolment of between four and five thousand students. Added
to these, schools were opened for Bible training and a vari-
ety of technical subjects, including medicine, dentistry, com- —
merce and engineering. The whole system finds its capstone —
in three great institutions which have achieved international —
fame. These are Robert College at Constantinople, founded ©
in 1863 by Dr. Cyrus Hamlin; the Syrian Protestant Col-
lege at Beirut, founded in 1866 by Dr. Dantel Bliss; and the
American College for Girls at Constantinople. All three ©
of these grew out of the work of the American Board Mis- —
sion, although the College at Beirut was transferred in 1870
to the American Presbyterian Mission. Each is now inde-
pendently incorporated and endowed, and the influence they —
have exerted upon the entire Near East cannot well be over- —
stated.
Let the single case of the Syrian Protestant College at |
Beirut serve as an example. It started with sixteen students
in a rented house. It now has its own campus of twenty- |
seven acres with twenty-six fine modern buildings. It has —
graduated about 3,000 students, who occupy high positions —
all over the Near East as preachers, teachers, editors, au-—
thors, physicians, lawyers, civil and military officers and —
merchants. Its name was changed in 1921 to the American
University of Beirut to conform to its larger present scope. —
Emir Feisal has borne the following testimony to this insti-—
tution and its influence upon his country : ‘“Dr. Daniel Bliss, ©
the founder of the college, was the grandfather of Syria;
his son, Dr. Howard Bliss, the present president,*’ is the
16" The New Hast, 15.7255,
17 Dr. Howard Bliss has since died (May 2, 1920).
THE NEAR EAST 219
father of Syria. Without the education this college has .
given the struggle for freedom would never have been won.
The Arabs owe everything to these men.”
To these outstanding institutions must now be added the
new American University at Cairo, opened in 1921, with
Dr. Charles R. Watson, formerly of the United Presbyterian
Mission, as its president. This Christian University will
head up the large and excellent educational work in Egypt.
The United Presbyterians alone have 180 schools with 16,-
000 pupils. 7
Mission Presses and Literature. Literary and publica-
tion work has also wielded a mighty influence for good in
these lands. The wide diversity of races and languages has
greatly increased the task of providing translations of the
Scriptures and other Christian literature, and such work
claimed large attention at the hands of the earlier mission-
aries.
The first Mission Press was set up at Malta, until condi-
tions permitted its removal to Beirut in 1833. Dr. Eli
Smith, who established and for thirty years directed this
enterprise, and Dr. C. V. VanDyck, his successor, rendered
monumental service by their translation of the whole Bible
into Arabic. This was published by the Beirut Press in
1865, and “its sale extends from Constantinople to Khar-
tum, and from Beirut to Basra, Bombay and even Can-
Bote,
The Beirut Press, together with the more recently estab-
lished Nile Mission Press at Cairo and another at Constan-
tinople, must be regarded as amongst the potent missionary
factors in the Near East, and the streams of evangelical
literature constantly flowing from these depots have reached
to every corner of the Moslem world.
Peculiar Difficulties. The fact that in the Near East
heathenism with its gross idolatry and degrading supersti-
tions has not to be reckoned with, as in most other mission
fields, by no means argues an easier task in these parts.
Experience has proven, sadly enough, that the religions
which possess a partial knowledge of Christian truth, but
without its saving message, far from being a stepping-stone
to Christ offer a more stubborn resistance to Christianity
18 “Report of World Missionary Conference,” 1910, Vol. I, p. 180.
220 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
than even rank paganism. All three of the dominant re-
ligions of the Near East present peculiar and formidable
difficulties to gospel effort.
Mohammedanism is notorious for its bitter opposition to
Christianity everywhere, and converts from it have been
exceeding few. Only during the last fifty odd years, under
strong European pressure, has the law been changed which
imposed the death penalty upon any Moslem in Turkish ©
dominions who changed his religion, and even as late as
Ig19 an official decree was issued which made it clear that
it was regarded as no crime to kill a Moslem who became —
a Christian. The fact is that Islam is a political as well as
a religious system, and the obligation to persecute the Chris-
tian and punish with death the Moslem who accepts the —
Christian faith is as clearly prescribed by the Koran as the
obligation to believe in the Prophet. Under the old régime,
therefore, the only safety for the converted Moslem lay in
flight from the country.
The attitude of the Oriental Churches to evangelical mis-
sions has already been referred to. It needs to be borne in ©
mind that these churches have a national character, so that ©
religion is identified with patriotism. Children do not “join —
the church”; they are church members from birth. Thus
church life becomes national life, and a convert to the evan-
gelical faith cuts himself off from his civil standing no less —
than from his former religious connection. This fact deters ©
many from a full response to the gospel message. .
Judaism, universally exclusive and defiant, is nowhere
more so than in the Holy Land. The austere Rabbis of old —
Jerusalem, with their embroidered robes, and ringlets of ©
hair before their ears, are the true successors of the proud —
and bigoted Pharisees of Bible days, and use their best ef-—
forts to poison Jewish minds against the gospel. Modern
Zionism, with all its high aims, has already adopted methods ©
aimed deliberately at boycotting mission work in Palestine, —
as evidenced by recent utterances in the Palestine Hebrew
Press, and the great prospective Hebrew University, the ©
cornerstone of which has been laid on Mount Olivet, wile
doubtless prove a powerful force against Christianity.
Neglected Areas. Despite the faithful labors of a splendid
SO ee a
THE NEAR EAST 221
body of missionaries in Near Eastern lands for a full cen-
tury, large areas are yet wholly unoccupied.
The trans-Caucasian states of Georgia, Azerbaijan and
Russian Armenia, now republics allied to Soviet Russia,
with a combined population of 6,000,000, are without evan-
gelical missionaries. So also are the great bulk of 1,000,000
or more Kurds directly to the south, and of nearly 3,000,000
people of Mesopotamia.
The vast interior of Arabia, a territory of 1,500 by 1,100
miles, embracing the provinces of Nejd, Hejaz and Hadra-
maut, has no missionary among a population estimated con-
servatively at 3,000,000.
Then northward lies Trans-Jordania, between Arabia and
Syria, a large region with boundaries yet undefined. Its
population is estimated at 500,000, mostly Arabs and Mos-
lems, and except for one recently opened mission outpost
from Palestine it is an unoccupied field. Likewise the his-
toric Sinat Peninsula, lying to the west toward Egypt, has
50,000 people with no missionary.
_ Even within Syria and Asia Minor there are still totally
neglected districts, while it would be far from true to say
of the rest of that territory that it is adequately occupied.
For it must be remembered that bitter political opposition
and Moslem intolerance have prevented missionary work
ever bearing more than the most indirect and superficial
relation to the Moslem population throughout the old Turk-
ish Empire.
_ Coming finally to Persia, we find large sections of that
country that have never yet seen a missionary. Nomad
tribes numbering a million or more are wholly unreached.
Dr. Robert E. Speer, writing from Persia on his visit there
in 1922, dwells upon “the appalling extent of our unaccom-
plished task,” and mentions one stretch of country 560 miles
east and west, and the same distance north and south, within
the Presbyterian field, with not a resident missionary save
at Teheran on the west and Meshed on the east.
Present Situation and Outlook. The close of the World
War was felt to mark the passing of the old and the usher-
ing in of a new era throughout the Near East. In some de-
gree, and particularly in respect to certain parts, this has
222 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
proved true, but the unexpected turn which events have
taken in relation to Turkey has brought about a painfully
involved situation,
1. Political. The facts are briefly these. The crushing
defeat of the Ottoman military power by Allenby’s allied
forces put it clearly within the power of the allied Govern-
ments, had they acted promptly and unitedly, to have im-
posed upon Turkey such just and drastic peace conditions
as would have placed the revival of Turkish rule and Turk-
ish atrocities beyond the bounds of possibility. But delay
and vacillation, due to jealousies and rivalries among the
Allies, allowed the hard-won victory to slip through their
fingers.
The wily Turk was emboldened to renew his wicked ways,
and fresh massacres took place in Armenia and Cilicia.
When finally the Sultan’s assent to the Treaty of Sevres was
exacted, that settlement was already a dead letter, through
the action of the Turkish Nationalists under Mustapha
Kemal in setting up a new Government at Angora, gaining —
control of most of Asia Minor and repudiating the treaty.
The Nationalists grew steadily stronger and more defiant, ©
and the Allies, divided in policy and without military forces, —
were helpless to deal with them. Finally Greece, backed by -
British support, took the field against Kemal’s forces, only ©
eventually to suffer a crushing defeat. The Nationalists fol-_
lowed up their victory by the bloody sack of Smyrna (Sep-—
tember, 1922), the wholesale destruction of surrounding
towns and villages, and the deportation of hundreds of)
thousands of Greeks and Armenians. They all but suc-_
ceeded in carrying the war into Europe.
At the Peace Conference which followed at Lausanne |
they insolently rejected the allied proposals, and dictated -
humiliating terms to the very Powers before which, only
four years previously, they lay defeated and helpless.
The world stands aghast to-day before the spectacle of
the unspeakable Turk with all his hideous record of crime,
cruelty, perfidy and incompetence, rising suddenly from his
prostrate position into a sovereignty even more complete
than he enjoyed before. Constantinople, the key to the Bos- :
phorus, is his unconditionally. The allied fleet has had to -
leave Turkish waters. The capitulations which safeguarded |
THE NEAR EAST 223
foreign residents in Turkey are swept away. Worst of all,
the whole Armenian Question has gone by the board, and
the remnants of that pitiable nation and the other Christian
minority groups within Turkish domains are left to face
deportation, extermination, or whatever else their cruel over-
lords may decree.
One glorious fruit of the defeat of Turkey in 1917 re-
mains, namely, that Syria, Palestine, Arabia, and Mesopo-
tamia continue severed from the Turkish dominions. Syria
is under a French Mandate; Palestine (including Trans-
Jordania) and Mesopotamia were placed under a British
Mandate, but Britain later made Mesopotamia an independ-
ent state under the name of Jrak, with Emir Feisal as its
king, and entrusted Trans-Jordania to the administration
of Emir Abdullah, brother of Feisal. Arabia now consists
of an associated group of independent states and tribes,
while Egypt is in the experimental stage of self-govern-
ment.
2. Missionary. The effect of the above mentioned politi-
cal changes upon missions varies widely in the different sec-
tions.
Within the area which still belongs to Turkey the situa-
tion at present is dark and difficult enough. The War and
its aftermath have struck a terrific blow at missionary work,
and for the time well-nigh paralyzed operations. The
American Board—the great agency in that field—has lost
nearly thirty missionaries by death since 1914, and’its total
“missionary force has been cut in two. Ninety per cent. of
its churches, all eight of its colleges and five of its ten hos- .
pitals are closed. Of its forty-one educational institutions
before the War, only three are now open. Its property loss
is estimated at $2,880,000.
Moreover, since with few exceptions the converts have
been from the non-Moslem subject races, the threatened
banishment of these races from the Turkish realm would
mean practically the extinction of the Christian churches in
Turkey. It looks as if work in the future must be largely
among the Turkish population, hitherto almost wholly un-
responsive. Yet among the common people there are many
who have come to recognize the missionaries as their real
Friends, and to appreciate the value of their work and mes-
224 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
sage. The crux of the problem is in the attitude of the -
Turkish officials and influential classes, who hitherto have
treated the Christian message with contemptuous indiffer-
ence, and have manifested a desire to rid the realm of the
missionaries as a fancied menace to the nationalistic ambi-
tions of Turkey.
In the other Near Eastern countries, Arabia excepted,
the outlook is decidedly brighter, for the break with Turkey
has meant the dawning of a new day of freedom of thought
and action for millions of hitherto shackled souls.
A marked change of attitude toward the missionary and
his message is noticeable among all classes. The harrowing
experiences of the War period have chastened and humbled
many hearts and brought them to realize that the mission-
aries are their best friends. The heroic, self-effacing work
of the missionaries, and of the Red Cross and Near East
Relief workers so closely allied with them during and since
the War, in succoring multitudes from Turkish cruelty and
outrage, as well as starvation and disease, has triumphed
over prejudice and distrust and won the confidence of the
people.
A decided change of complexion has come over mission
work. Never before have there been such open doors of
contact; never before such interest and response; never be-
fore such numbers of enquirers; never before such demand, —
particularly among Moslems, for Christian literature.
Dr. S. M. Zwemer, so long and fully conversant with the
Near Eastern missionary situation, writes: “The present —
opportunities for evangelism among all classes, and espe-
cially among Moslems who form the bulk of the population, ~
are unprecedented. Not only during the War but since the
armistice Bible distribution has been unhindered and on a
far larger scale in Egypt, Palestine, Arabia, Syria and Per-
sia than ever before. Doors that once were only ajar are
now wide open. New highways have been built. The col-_
porteur can now travel by fast express from Cairo to Da-_
mascus and Jerusalem, from Jibuti on the Somali coast to~
the capital of Abyssinia, from Alexandria to the Province
of Darfur, and by steamship to all the ports of the Medi-
terranean and the Red Sea.” *®
19 From an article in World Call, November, 1920.
THE NEAR EAST 225
The Call of the Near East. The present aspect of the
Near East is new and unique, as the writer can testify from
a personal visit there since the War. The words oppor-
TUNITY and URGENCY are written large over those lands.
Splendid returns will be the certain reward of prompt and
adequate missionary effort, but it must be Now. The whole
situation is a stern challenge for fresh investment of life,
and money, and prayer.
We close with another most fitting quotation from Dr.
Zwemer: “There is only one fundamental problem in the
Near East. Its solution would affect all classes, all nation-
alities and all other problems. It is that of carrying the
gospel to each individual, and, through the regeneration of
the individual, to society. There is nothing that the Near
East so needs as the life of Jesus Christ. They know the
history of that life; Moslem, Jew and Christian vie with
each other in crowding to visit the sacred places connected
with that earthly life; but His resurrection power is
strangely absent, and the Near East, as one of their poets
has said, is waiting for His life-giving touch. . . . Seeing
the multitudes one cannot help being moved with compas-
sion. They are sheep scattered having no shepherd. Now
is the hour for all of us to pay the price of true leadership
by special training, a strong faith, self-effacement and sym-
pathy. Who will offer in this new day? Who will come
and help evangelize the new Near East?”
QUESTIONS
1. Name the countries constituting the Near East, and give the
area and population of each.
2. Upon what several grounds does the peculiar interest attach-
ing to the Near East rest?
3. From what different standpoints is the Near East of strategic
importance? Give data in support of each point.
4. Name and locate the various races of the Near East, and
give a brief sketch of each.
5. Outline the career of Turkey from the beginning of her po-
litical ascendancy down to her entry into the War, giving important
dates and names of leaders.
6. Describe briefly the course of the War in the Near East.
7. Give some account of the Turkish treatment of the Armenians
and other Christian subject races during the War.
226 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
8. Outline missionary operations in each section of the Near.
East from their inception to the present, giving important dates’
and names of leading missionaries and societies. i
9. Mention the most prominent Mission Colleges and Presses.
in the Near East, and state what part education and literature have
played in the work, ;
10. Discuss the peculiar difficulties attending missionary effort
among the three main religious classes of the Near East. |
11, Describe the present Near Eastern situation and outlook,
from both political and missionary points of view.
;
A
|
4
CHAPTER XV
AFRICA
AREA, 12,000,000 SQUARE MILES, POPULATION, 150,000,000 *
I. General Features.
Names. The word Africa is said to have come from
Afarik, the name of a Berber tribe which dwelt in a corner
of Tunis in the days before the greater portion of the con-
tinent was known, or its vast extent ever suspected.
Stanley called Africa “The Dark Continent.’ The term
is fitting from several points of view. Africa is the one
continent populated almost wholly by dark-skinned peoples.
Then its vast interior lay until recent times in unpenetrated
darkness. And finally its native religions are devoid of
sacred writings and defined system, are vile and degrading,
and have left their followers in the “blackness of darkness”
morally and spiritually.
Sige. Africa is the second continent in size, Asia alone
being larger. Its area is variously given as from 11,500,000
to 12,000,000 square miles. But figures of such dimensions
are hard to grasp, and comparisons are better. Africa is
three times the size of Europe, about half again as large as
either North or South America, and contains nearly one-
fourth the total land area of the globe.
Bishop Hartzell ingeniously presents a map of Africa on
which the United States is fitted into the narrower south-
ern portion, Europe into the northwest, and India and China
(the eighteen provinces) into the northeast, with Scotland,
Ireland and Wales filling in the chinks, and Porto Rico and
the Philippines easily accommodated on the island of Mada-
gascar.
| 1 Estimates of native population run from 100,000,000 to 180,000,000,
but the latest and most reliable favor the more moderate figures of from
130,000,000 to 150,000,000. The white population, most numerous in South
Africa, is probably nearly 2,000,000. ‘There are, besides, some 300,000
Indian and 25,000 Chinese imported eae in S. and E. Africa.
2,
228 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
From north to south Africa measures 5,000 miles, from
east to west at its greatest width, 4,500 miles or more.
Physical Features. Africa’s configuration has been lik-
ened to an inverted saucer, of which the rim is the low-
lying coast strip, 50 to 200 miles in width. The raised cir-
cle on which the saucer rests is the region of slopes and
mountain ranges lying behind the coast strip, with an aver-
age height of 2,000 to 3,000 feet, and containing some lofty
peaks. The center of the saucer, within the raised circle, is
the vast interior plateau, slightly depressed in the middle.
Here in these depressions of the interior section lie the
great lakes, out of which flow the mighty rivers that drain
the whole continent. The largest lakes are in East Central
Africa, Victoria Nyanza, Tanganyika and Nyasa being the
most important. Victoria Nyanza is the second fresh water
lake in size in the world, only Lake Superior being larger,
and Tanganyika while only about forty miles wide is the
longest in the world. Lake Tchad, in the Sudan, is the
largest of several lakes with no outlet to the sea.
The rivers of Africa may be said to be the dominating
feature of its topography. The four giant streams are the
Nile, Congo, Niger and Zambesi. By far the longest is the
Nile, whose annual overflow gives to lower Egypt its re-
markable fertility. With a basin 2,500 miles in length, the
Nile is probably next to the Mississippi the longest river in
the world, but the Congo, although not so long, drains a
still larger basin, and has a volume of water only less than
that of the Amazon. Its entire system includes fully 10,000
miles of navigable streams, and the invaluable forests and
amazing fertility of the area which it drains make this river
the most important one of the continent. On the Zambesi
are the famous Victoria Falls, 343 feet high, exceeding
Niagara in magnitude and rivaling it in grandeur. There
are other large rivers, but of secondary rank compared with
the four mentioned. Altogether Africa is said to have
40,000 miles of navigable rivers and lakes. )
All the river basins are heavily forested. Stanley has
written eloquently of these African forests, telling of
growths so dense that the sun’s rays never penetrate to the
ground, and of luxuriance and beauty unequaled elsewhere.
In Rhodesia red and brown mahoganies in great profusion |
~sbh Uy ee
Viv Lure Vv
ad
BLACK
mc3a
TURKEY
\2
es
EUR: meet! oh ge ee
e
‘\
OROCCO az
rOR He Lt
se ae «a
pa
UNIS
~
GS Meu Se yr Rorie)
WEST AFRICA
a
2 ABySss! winrson. | 2
ey i
L¢
230 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
are said to measure ten to twelve feet in diameter and 200
feet in height. Other forests, on the contrary, are thin and
scragey, their tree-trunks so crooked and knotty as to prove
of little industrial value. On the central plateaux are the
famous savannahs, or long-grass lands of the continents,
answering to the prairies of America, where lions, leopards
and other big game are found.
But in addition to prairies and forests Africa has deserts
of vast extent. The Sahara Desert outranges all other des-
erts in the world, being actually equal in size to the United
States including Alaska. It is not to be thought of, how-
ever, as one monotonous waste of sand, for it varies widely
in elevation, and has extensive oases supporting considerable
population. There is also the great Kalahari Desert of
South Africa, and there are stretches of desert land along
the Red Sea and in Somaliland.e™
In mountains Africa cannot: compare with the other con-
tinents, yet she is not without some fair specimens. The
Atlas range in the northwest attains a height of 15,000 feet.
Then there are the tangled mass of mountains in Abyssinia
and the Drakenbergs in Natal. There are also not a few
solitary volcanic peaks, among the highest being Kilima-
njaro (19,300 ft.), Kenia (17,000 ft.), and Ruwenzori (16,-
600 ft.) in the east, and Kamerun (13,300 ft.) on the west
coast.
Climate. By far the greatest portion of Africa lies
within the torrid zone and hence has a hot climate, although
the temperature varies much according to elevation. The .
low, marshy coast lands, particularly on the west, are hot
and unhealthy. Malaria is prevalent and virulent, and the
death rate among whites has been appalling. The tracing
of this disease in late years to the anopheles mosquito, and
the measures adopted against infection, have greatly im-
proved the situation. Another deadly affection prevalent
mainly in the Congo basin and Uganda is sleeping sickness,
which has taken a frightful toll of native lives. This affec-
tion is now attributed to the tsetse fly, and medical science
is dealing with the problem of overcoming it.
The higher regions of the interior are cooler and more
healthy, while North and South Africa, outside the tropics,
have a climate quite agreeable to Europeans... Over most of
AFRICA 231
the continent dry and rainy seasons alternate. The rainfall
is more abundant in the south than in the north, although
the tropical forest regions of both parts are profusely wa-
tered.
Natural Resources. These are almost incalculable in ex-
tent and value, and obviously vary widely according to local-
ity. The Mediterranean States yield grapes, olives and
figs. The forests of the Atlas mountains furnish cork-oak,
and the oases of the Sahara dates in abundance. The Nile
valley grows fine cotton as well as rice, wheat, sugar and
vegetables. In South Africa pasture and farm lands pre-
dominate, and ostrich-culture is a leading industry. The
savannah lands are adapted to grazing and grain-raising,
and cattle are the chief product of the Sudan. The rich
soil of Equatorial Africa grows in profusion everything
suited to a tropical climate, ~~sava, coffee, sugar, bananas
and many other fruits being aiuong the main crops.
Africa’s forests produce valuable oil-palm, ebony, ma-
hogany and rubber trees in great abundance. Ivory still re-
mains an important though steadily decreasing product.
Last, but greatest of all, the mineral wealth of this con-
tinent is beyond computation. From Kimberley and other
South Africa mines come ninety per cent. of the world’s
diamonds, from Johannesburg one-third of its gold supply.
When to these are added rich deposits of copper, silver, iron,
coal and tin in various parts, which have only begun to be
worked, it can readily be seen what vast possibilities the
future holds.
The People. The fact that 523 distinct languages and
320 dialects have been identified in Africa bears impressive
testimony to the bewildering array of races and tribes which
inhabit the Dark Continent. Authorities pretty well agree
in a general classification of the present native population
under five heads:
1. Berbers—the aborigines of the Mediterranean States
_and the Sahara, mainly Caucasian in origin and of very fine
physical type.
_ 2. Arabs—from Western Asia, constituting the great
bulk of the population of Egypt and scattered widely over
North Africa.
3. Negroes—mainly in the great Sudan, from the Nile
232 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
on ae
to the Atlantic, the purest type being found in the Guinea
Coast region, They have receding foreheads, high cheek —
bones, broad, flat noses, thick lips, woolly hair and coal-black —
skin. This region furnished a large majority of the slaves —
taken to America.
4. Bantu—comprising almost all the tribes south of the |
Equator—Kaffirs, Zulus, Basutos, Bechuanas, Matabeles —
and others. They closely resemble the negroes proper in -
many respects, but have more regular features, are not gen-
erally so black or thick-lipped, and speak an entirely distinct —
group of languages. It is among these people that mission-
ary work has achieved its greatest results.
5. Pygmies, Bushmen, Hottentots—scattered through the
Se ee a
Bantu section of the continent, dwarfed in stature, primi-_
tive and nomadic in habits, and lowest in the scale of Afri-—
can humanity.
Religions. Reckoning on a basis of 130,000,000 as the ©
total population of Africa, Dr. C. H. Patton ? estimates that —
there are 80,000,000 Pagans, 40,000,000 Mohammedans,
and 10,000,000 Christians, the last term being used to em-
brace possibly 3,000,000 Protestants and 7,000,000 mem-
bers of the Abyssinian, Coptic, and Roman Catholic
Churches.
Another author * divides Africa, religiously, into three
great sections: Mohammedan Africa (north), forty to fifty
millions; Pagan Africa (central), one hundred to one hun-
dred and ten millions; Christian Africa (south), three and —
a half millions.
Mohammedanism as a religion has already received men- ©
tion in earlier chapters, and as a modern menace to mis- —
sions in Africa will be dealt with later in the present chapter.
Paganism, or Fetichism, the native religion of Africa, is
i
a species of Animism, or the worship of spirits. It is a re-_
ligion of gross darkness. Its gods are innumerable malig-—
nant demons, which the African conceives of as enveloping
him on every side and constantly seeking his injury and
death. These demons inhabit every object, animate and in-
animate—plants, trees, rocks, rivers, reptiles, birds, animals —
—and also impersonate deceased relatives. Constantly
2“The Lure of Africa,” p. 189.
3 “Christus Liberator,” pp. 57, 58.
i
a ss
(7,
hal
\
Se
AFRICA 233
haunted by fear of such evil spirits, the African resorts to
fetiches, or charms, consisting usually of a mixture of curi-
ous natural objects or carved figures—heads of birds, teeth
of a lion, leopard or serpent, pieces of glass, pebbles, human
bones, etc.—which he wears upon his body to procure the
protection and aid of spirits.
The African’s religious philosophy has given rise to vari-
ous horrible practices. It has led to human sacrifices to sup-
ply the needs, avert the vengeance, and win the favor of the
gods. It is responsible for the burial alive of the wives of
achief with his dead body, and even for cannibalism, which
is said by careful authorities to have originated as a sacri-
ficial feast. It has produced witchcraft, that fiendish sys-
tem which has taken a toll of countless lives as victims of
the witch doctor’s poison cup. “It is estimated that 4,000,-
000 people are killed annually in the endeavor to discover
witches. Whole districts have been depopulated by witch
trials.” *
African Paganism is summed up in the following words
of terrible indictment :
“Delicacy permits but the most guarded references to the
revolting brutality and nauseating licentiousness which are
the legitimate offspring of Pagan gods and religion. To be
consistent with his perverted conceptions of religion the
African cannot be other than he is... . The Pagan Afri-
can is what he is because of his religion.” °
“In a word, the religion of the African is a religion of
terror and hate. . . . In the things which pertain to God he
lives in abysmal darkness. When most religious, he is most
fiendish.” °
_ Early History. Africa is a paradox in the puzzling con-
trasts and contradictions its history furnishes. North
Africa cradled one of the oldest civilizations of the world.
Egypt led the nations in science, art and literature. Her
philosophies dominated the thought of the East. Next to
Palestine, North Africa was the land most closely connected
with Hebrew history. Egypt and Ethiopia figure promi-
nently in both Old and New Testament records. Alexandria
4 “Daybreak in the Dark Continent,” p. 99.
5 Ibid., p. 101.
6 “The Lure of Africa,” p. 144.
234 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
for several centuries was the greatest stronghold of early
Christianity, with Carthage as a second center. Within 200
years after Pentecost 900 churches were numbered in North
Africa. The first missionary training school was founded
in Alexandria in the second century, and from it mission-
aries carried the gospel to lands near and far. Had the
North African Christianity of those early days retained its
spiritual life and missionary zeal, the subsequent history of
the whole continent might have been very different. Alas,
the church fell a victim to theological controversy, became
divided into factions, lost its spiritual vitality and mission-
ary vision, and thus enfeebled it was unable to stand before
the aggressive Mohammedan invasion of the seventh cen-
tury. As Roman government in North Africa fell before
the Arab conquerors, so Christianity was all but wiped out
by the incoming hordes of fanatical Moslems. ‘For more
than 1,500 years Christianity in Africa, except as expressed
by the corrupt Coptic and Abyssinian churches, was almost
dead, and the “Dark Continent’ throughout its enormous
length and breadth remained silent in the shadow of death,
waiting for the dawning of a new day.” *
Discovery and Exploration. With some allowance for
the possibility of early Phoenician exploration down the east —
coast, it is generally conceded that until the fifteenth cen-
tury little was known of the Dark Continent except along —
the Mediterranean and Red Seas.
Portugal, in the person of Prince Henry, led the way in |
exploration down the west coast. Bartholomew Diaz
rounded the Cape of Good Hope in 1487, and ten years later ©
Vasco da Gama, pressing farther on, sailed up the east coast ©
and discovered the new route to India.
The English, French and Dutch followed suit in the six-
teenth century, and the names Grain Coast, Ivory Coast,
Gold Coast and Slave Coast, given to different sections of |
the Guinea coast, indicate the character of the trade opened -
up by the early traders of these nations.
Settlements followed the development of trade in the sev- —
enteenth century, the Portuguese establishing themselves on —
the Guinea coast, at the mouth of the Congo and on the east
7“Outlines of Missionary History,” p. 164.
|
i
AFRICA 235
coast, the English along the Gambia River, the French on
the Senegal River, and the Dutch near the Cape.
But it was only the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries
which saw exploration into the yet unknown interior under-
taken in earnest. A long line of great explorers laid bare
the secrets of this vast and marvelous continent. Among
those whose names are best known were James Bruce,
Mungo Park, Speke, Grant, Burton, Baker, and Henry M.
Stanley, besides the missionaries Krapf, Rebmann, Moffat,
and—towering above them all—the illustrious David Living-
stone.
II. Missionary Work.
Early Roman Catholic Efforts. Dominican and Jesuit
missionaries followed closely upon the early Portuguese ex-
plorers. Soon after the discovery of the Congo, in 1484,
missions were opened along that river. The beginnings
were promising and thousands were baptized. But the
work was sadly superficial, forms and ceremonies being sub-
stituted for vital piety. Moreover, the unscrupulous ex-
ploitation of the natives by the traders neutralized the mis-
sionary efforts. The Christian communities became de-
graded and dwindled away, so that when Protestant work
began there was little trace of them left.
Work was also begun by Portuguese missionaries in
Abyssinia with good promise of success, but the proverbial
Roman Catholic policy of meddling in politics brought its
just desert. The missionaries were banished, and Roman
Catholicism has ever since been held in disrepute.
The Protestant Vanguard. To the Moravians belongs
the honor of blazing the Protestant missionary trail in the
Dark Continent. George Schmidt was sent out in 1737
from Herrnhut, in response to an appeal in behalf of the
oppressed Hottentots, sent home by Ziegenbalg and Plut-
schau on their way round the Cape to India (see page 77).
But the Dutch, then in control of South Africa, met with)
derision the attempt to Christianize these natives, whom they |
regarded and treated almost like animals. Schmidt persisted
bravely, won the confidence of the Hottentots, and within
four years baptized a little company of Christian converts.
236 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
This aroused the bitter hostility of the Dutch settlers, and in
1843 Schmidt was ordered home to Holland by the authori-
ties and never permitted to return. Half a century elapsed
before his faithful beginning of work could be followed up.
The fact that Africa is not simply a country, but a conti-
nent of vast size, presenting a collection of fields totally dif-
ferent one from the other in almost every particular, makes
it necessary to divide it into several sections for even the
general consideration of its missionary work which the
limits of this volume permit. The ordinary division into
North, South, East, Central and West, is admittedly some-
what vague, but is perhaps the most convenient for our pres-
ent purpose.
NortH AFRICA
Egypt. This country has already been mentioned in the
previous chapter, as a part of the Near East. Mission work |
here has been carried on mainly by the Church Missionary
Society of England, which entered the field in 1825, the
American Mission (United Presbyterian), which followed
in 1854, and the Egypt General Mission, which began work
in 1898. The American Mission has developed a strong
and extensive work, which now numbers a hundred churches
with over 16,000 members, drawn mostly from the Copts.
Reference has already been made to the large and influential
educational work of the American Mission, and also to the
Nile Mission Press as a potent factor, through its output of ©
excellent evangelical literature, in the evangelization not
only of Egypt but of the entire Moslem world.
Egyptian Sudan. The efforts of both the United Presby-
terian Mission and the Church Missionary Society have ex-
tended more than 2,000 miles up the Nile, and stations have.
been planted among several of the benighted negroid tribes
of the Egyptian Sudan. ‘
A sad and humiliating example of the miscarriage of a_
missionary project is furnished by Gordon College at Khar-
tum. Founded with funds contributed by Christians in-
England to provide a missionary institution in memory of
the noble General Charles Gordon, the College has through
i
.
a
AFRICA 237
the compromising policy of the British authorities been
turned into a center of Moslem teaching and influence.
Barbary States. This vast area bordering upon the Medi-
terranean, and consisting of Tripoli, Tunis, Algeria and
Morocco, contains a population of 14,000,000, almost
solidly Moslem. Some thirteen missionary agencies are
listed, the largest being the North Africa Mission. All told
there are less than 200 missionaries.
The field has always been a desperately hard one because
of the wild nature of the country and its people, and the
intolerance of long-entrenched Mohammedanism. Of late
years another hindrance has been added through the politi-
cai control of France and Italy, with their well-known
Opposition to evangelical missions. Visible results of the
faithful labor expended are painfully small, and the vast
hinterland must still be regarded as in the main an unoc-
cupied mission field.
Abyssinia. The Church Missionary Society attempted an
entrance in 1844, but without success. The Swedish Mission
followed in 1866, and have made brave and determined
efforts to reach the heathen tribes, but thus far with scant
success. They still have a station at Addis Abeba, the
capital, and several stations in the ad jacent Italian territory
to the east.
Very recently, in 1919, the United Presbyterian mission-
aries in the Egyptian Sudan were invited to extend their
work into western Abyssinia, and have opened two stations
there, with bright prospects of further expansion. The an-
cient Abyssinian Church has through the centuries become
so corrupted that it can no longer be looked upon as Chris-
tian, and Abyssinia is still an almost wholly unoccupied field
of more than 11,000,000 ignorant and degraded people.
SoutH AFRICA
The progress of missions here, subsequent to the earlier
pioneer efforts of Schmidt and one or two others, will ever
be associated with a few great missionary names well known
the world over. Most worthy of mention are the follow-
ing:
Robert Moffat. Following upon the British occupation
238 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
of Cape Colony in 1806, Moffat, sent out by the London
Missionary Society, arrived in 1817. After some time spent —
in Capetown, he at length obtained permission to proceed —
inland and set out for Namaqualand, in the Orange River —
country. He was warned against Africaner, a native chief
whose barbarous crimes had made him a terror to that re-
gion. But meanwhile the gospel had reached and influenced |
Africaner. Moffat spent six months in his town, the chief
became a true and humble Christian, and when in 1819
Moffat reappeared in Capetown, bringing with him this con-_
verted savage and outlaw, the sensation produced was pro-
found.
In 1820 Moffat, having married Miss Mary Smith, left ©
again for the interior and opened the first station among >
the Bechuana tribes, at Kuruman. Later he pressed on to
the Matabele country as far as the Zambesi River. For
many years these brave pioneers labored, preaching and —
teaching amid great perils and strange adventures, without
seeing any converts. But finally their faith was rewarded,
and in 1829 the first Bechuana church was formed at Kuru-
man. There, too, the first Bible in the Bechuana tongue ©
was printed in 1857, the work of translation having been
done single-handed by Moffat. In 1870, enfeebled by age
and work, the Moffats returned to England, where Mrs. -
Moffat died the next year and Mr. Moffat in 1883. Dur- |
ing their fifty-three years of heroic life and labor in South —
Africa they succeeded in turning murderous savages into a ~
Christian people cultivating the arts and habits of civilized
life, and with a written language of their own.
David Livingstone. This greatest of all Africa’s apostles —
was the direct successor to the Moffats, having joined them —
at Kuruman in 1840, and later married their daughter, Mary —
Moffat. His first few years were spent in regular mission- —
ary work among various tribes within a limited radius. He
then began to push northward, bent upon getting farther into
the heart of Africa. After several preliminary trips, during ©
which his family suffered much from illness, he decided to
send them to England for two years, while he gave himself —
to further exploration with a view to opening up the interior —
to missionary work. Starting out at the end of 1852, Liv-_
ingstone entered upon his first great journey, which occupied -
AFRICA 239
four years. During this time he traced the Zambesi to its |
source, proceeded thence to the western coast at St. Paul «'
Loanda, in Angola, and then recrossed the continent tc ».e
Indian Ocean, discovering on the way the famous Victoria
Falls. This wonderful journey of 11,000 miles, covered
entirely on foot, involved untold hardships, dangers and
physical sufferings. At its close, in 1856, Livingstone re-
turned to England with a mass of invaluable records, and
was there received with great honor by all classes.
Among the many impressions which his journey in Africa
had made upon him, the thing that stirred his soul to its
depths was the revolting slave trade, ghastly evidences of
which he had witnessed everywhere. In all his continued
labors to open up the Dark Continent he was fired by a pas-
sionate determination to crush this cursed traffic in human
lives and heal “‘the open sore of the world.”
While it was under the official appointment of the British
Government, and as an agent of the Royal Geographical So-
ciety, that Livingstone returned to Africa in 1858, his mis-
sionary spirit and motive appear in the following words,
uttered in reply to a suggestion that he should relinquish
missionary work and give himself solely to discovery. Said
he, “I would not consent to go simply as a geographer, but
as a missionary, and do geography by the way. The opening
of the country is a matter for congratulation only so far as
it opens up a prospect for the elevation of the inhabitants.
I view the geographical exploration as only the beginning
of the missionary enterprise.”
The remaining fifteen years of his life, except for a sec-
ond brief visit home in 1864-65, were spent in persistent ex-
ploration, during which he discovered the sources of the
Nile, located the great lakes of East Central Africa and
verified the upper courses of the mighty Congo. For long
periods of time he was cut off in the far interior from com-
munication with the outside world. What his mission cost
him few if any will ever fully know. Racked by disease, at-
tacked by wild beasts, threatened by savages, robbed and
betrayed by carriers, tortured in spirit by the horrors of the
slave hunters, “not one man in a million would have pushed
forward as he did in the heart of Africa.” It was in 1871
that Henry M. Stanley, at the head of a relief expedition
240 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
ut
sent out by the New York Herald, found Livingstone in an ;
exhausted condition at Ujiji, on Lake Tanganyika. But all
\tanley’s efforts to persuade Livingstone to accompany him —
hcme proved in vain, and so the two men parted, Stanley
bearing home Livingstone’s precious journals of six years,
while Livingstone, renewed in health and spirits by his few
months* companionship, set out on a fresh journey of ex- —
ploration, impelled by a firm conviction that his task was not
completed. The remainder of the story until that morning —
of May 1, 1873, when he was found dead upon his knees ©
in a rude hut in Chitambo’s village of Ilala, on Lake Ban-
gueolo, has been rehearsed the world around.
Livingstone’s remains were embalmed and carried, to- —
gether with all his papers and instruments, a year’s journey
to Zanzibar, by Susi and Chuma, his faithful African ser- —
vants. Thence they were conveyed to England and buried ©
with the nation’s noble dead in Westminster Abbey. But his
heart lies buried in the remote heart of the great Continent
whose darkness he lived and died to lighten. The names ©
Africa and David Livingstone will always suggest each the —
other.
John Mackenzie, of the London Missionary Society, was a
missionary statesman. While his immediate field lay among ~
the Bechuanas, he “multiplied the significance of his life by ©
promoting the expansion of British empire over the regions ©
Livingstone explored. He thus saved native states from —
annihilation by the Boers and ensured the best colonial rule —
in the world to vast stretches of Africa.’ °
Barnabas Shaw arrived in 1816 as the pioneer of Wes-
leyan Missions, which have since spread widely over South
Africa with large results. He was divinely guided to the ©
Namaquas at a time when they were feeling after God, and
a great work of grace began among them.
Francois Coillard was the most famous missionary of the
Paris Evangelical Society, which began work in 1829. He
and his colleagues witnessed God’s wonderful working first
among the Basutos and later among the incorrigible Barotsi —
of the upper Zambesi.
James Stewart, better known as “Stewart of Lovedale”
after the title of his biography, stands out as the distin- ;
8 “Daybreak in the Dark Continent,” pp. 229, 230.
AFRICA 241
guished missionary of the United Free Church of Scotland,
which entered this field in 1824. Lovedale Institute,
founded by Stewart, is called the Hampton of South
Africa, to indicate its commanding importance as an edu-
cational and industrial mission center.
The American Board began work in Natal in Zululand
in 1835. “Forty Years Among the Zulus’ tells the thrilling
story of the saintly Josiah Tyler and his comrades in that
field.
The South Africa General Mission was established in
1889, with the well known and godly Andrew Murray as
president of its South Africa Council and Spencer Walton
as its director. This is a Faith Mission whose work covers
a wide area, reaching from Cape Town to Nyasaland on
the northeast and the borders of Congo Belge on the north-
west. Its latest advances have been into Portuguese East
Africa, and a section of Angola (Portuguese West Africa)
containing 2,500,000 people, which field has been desig-
nated as the “Andrew Murray Memorial.”
Other Societies, including several of German and Scandi-
navian origin, cannot be mentioned by name. In all, thirty
or more mission agencies divide the South Africa field.
Mission work is also carried on by the English and Dutch
colonial churches. The mission churches of a number of
the British and American Societies already mentioned have
attained their majority and been set free from the control
and support of their parent organizations.
EAST AND CENTRAL AFRICA
So closely are these two sections connected in the record
of missionary advance that it seems best to consider them
together. In this great region missions have achieved some
of their most splendid results, but not without much heroic
suffering and the sacrifice of many noble lives.
Krapf and Rebmann. These brave men were the Protes-
tant pioneers of the east coast. John Ludwig Krapf, after
sharing in the unsuccessful attempts of the Church Mission-
ary Society in Abyssinia, landed in Mombasa in 1844. Two
months later his wife and only child died. “Himself sick
to death with fever the deeply stricken man wrote to the
242 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS i
directorate of the Society the prophetic words: ‘Tell our
friends that in a lonely grave on the African coast there
rests a member of the Mission. That is a sign that they
have begun the struggle with this part of the world; and
since the victories of the church lead over the graves of
many of her members, they may be the more convinced that
the hour is approathing when you will be called to convert
Africa, beginning from the east coast.’ ”’ °
Krapf projected bold plans for a chain of mission sta~
tions across Africa from east to west and north to south,
in the form of a cross, each station being named after an
Apostle. People at first smiled at his idea as a mere idealis-
tic dream. But although long delayed the fulfilment of his”
vision is now well on its way, with but a short gap existing
between the Nile Missions and those of South Africa, and
between the Congo Missions and those of the east coast.
John Rebmann joined Krapf in 1846, and together they
added to their missionary achievements the geographical
distinction of discovering Mounts Kilima-njaro and Kenia.
The news of their discovery, along with their announcement.
of the existence of a great lake in Central Africa, aroused
European geographers and set in motion a whole series of i
exploring expeditions. }
The Advance Inland. An even stronger impulse to the
opening up of Central East Africa to missionary occupa=
tion than that of Krapf and Rebmann was imparted by the
discoveries of the great Livingstone, and even more by his”
untiring agitation against the slave trade. Britain, at.
length aroused, wrung from the Sultan of Zanzibar a treaty
abolishing this cursed traffic. British warships liberated a
large number of slaves, and the problem of caring for these
led the Church Missionary Society to establish a refuge for,
them at Frere Town, opposite Mombasa. This colony thus
became the center and point of departure of missionary ac-
tivity in East Africa. Another impulse was soon added by
Stanley, who was so profoundly influenced by his inter-
course with Livingstone that he resolved to consecrate his
life to the continuation of the latter’s work. Entering upon
his famous journey through the Dark Continent, Stanley
sent back to England from Uganda in 1875 his stirring
9 “History of Protestant Missions,” Warneck, p. 258. 1
|
AG
AFRICA 243
“Challenge to Christendom.” King Mtesa had asked for
missionaries for his people. Would Christians respond to
this cry from the heart of Africa? The effect was like
magic. Men and means for the projected mission were
soon forthcoming, and the next year (1876) saw the first
contingent of eight missionaries on their way to Africa
under the Church Missionary Society.
Mackay of Uganda. The leading one of these eight, who
was to become a famous figure in missionary history, was
Alexander Mackay, a highly educated and gifted young
Scotch engineer. “My heart burns for the deliverance of
Africa,” he wrote the Church Missionary Society, “and if
you can send me to any of those regions which Livingstone
and Stanley have found to be groaning under the curse of
the slave hunter I shall be very glad.”
“Mackay’s farewell speech to the Board of Directors is
characteristic: ‘I want to remind the committee that within
six months they will probably hear that one of us is dead.
Yes, is it at all likely that eight Englishmen should start
for Central Africa and all be alive six months after? One
of us at least—it may be J—vwill surely fall before that.
When the news comes, do not be cast down, but send some
one else immediately to take the vacant place.’ ’’ *°
How sadly prophetic were these words! Within three
months one was dead, within a year five, and in two years
Mackay himself was the only survivor. For twelve years
he fought on against terrible odds—fever, persecution, the
intrigues of Moslem Arab and Roman Catholic priest, and
repeated attempts upon his life. The story of his career—
his early struggles and later successes, the use of his engi-
neering skill, his keen diplomacy, his tireless energy, his
supreme sacrifice for an ungrateful people—reads like a
romance. He was finally driven from his field through the
subtle influence of Arabs upon King Mwanga, and took
refuge at the southern end of Victoria Nyanza. There, un-
daunted, he pursued his labors for three years longer, and
then, attacked with fever, he died on February 8, 1890.
He had received urgent appeals to give up and come home,
but turned a deaf ear and wrote in his last letter: “It is not
a time for any one to desert his post. Send us our first
10 “Daybreak in the Dark Continent,” p. 234.
244 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
twenty men, and I may be tempted to come and help you
find the second twenty.”
A Wonderful Mission. Mackay died facing the foe and
without being permitted to see the fruit of his labor. ee
he and his comrades had laid the foundations of one of the
most wonderful missions of modern times. ‘
The transformation wrought by the gospel in Uganda
has few parallels in any land. Stanley accurately described
these Baganda people, despite their strong physique, expres-
sive features, cleanly habits and sttperiority in many points
to the surrounding tribes, as “craity, deceiving, lying, thiev-
ing knaves, taken as a whole.” Polygamy, witchcraft, vida
and violence were rife. Human life was held of little aca
count. King Mtesa himself sacrificed 2,000 captives to his
dead father’s spirit. Yet in barely twenty years from the’
advent of the first missionaries, Rilkingten;one of Mackay’ S.
worthiest co-workers, whose name also shines with luster, -
could write (in 1896) the following remarkable summary: ;
“A hundred thousand souls brought into close contact with ;
the gospel—half of them able to read for themselves; 200
buildings raised by native Christians in which to worship.
God and read His Word; 200 native evangelists and teachers.
entirely supported by the native church; 10,000 copies of.
the New Testament in circulation; 6,000 souls eagerly
seeking daily instruction ; statistics of baptism, of confirma-_
tion, of adherents, of teachers, more than doubling yearly
for the last six or seven years, ever since the return of the
Christians from exile; the power of God shown by changed]
lives—and all this in the center of the thickest spiritual
darkness in the world! Does it not make the heart aa
with mingled emotions of joy and fear, of hope and appre
hension: Pat :
The history of the Uganda church is not without its bap-_
tism of fire and blood. Under Mtesa’s successor a terrible”
persecution broke out. The missionaries were driven from
the country, and many of the native Christians suffered in-
human torture and martyrdom. Their sublime faith shone”
brightly amidst these fierce testings. Some of the Christian”
boys actually went to the flames singing the hymns they had”
been taught. Such testimony could not fail to bear fruit;
11 “Pilkington of Uganda, UePDi vere i 2. i
eS
AFRICA 245
before long the missionaries were back again, the tide turned
and the church entered upon a period of rapid g growth which
has continued to the present.
In 1919 there were reported to be 2,000 churches with
100,000 members. The new cathedral at Kampala, dedicated
in September of that year, is probably the largest Christian
church in Africa. At the opening services the vast building
was quickly filled and the throng outside was estimated at
20,000. The following Sunday 864 communicants partook
of the Lord’s Supper.
Schools now also flourish, there is material prosperity on
every side, and recently the native leaders in Uganda inaugu-
rated a missionary movement in behalf of neighboring
tribes. Thus the ‘zone of Pagan darkness” has become
the “zone of Christian advance,’ and Uganda has been
called the “brightest spot on the map of Africa.” :
Bishop Hannington. Another missionary whose name,
like the names of Mackay and Pilkington, has become a
household word, was this young martyr bishop. Cruelly
murdered on his arrival in 1885, by order of the wicked — a
King Mwanga, he said to his executioners: “Go tell Mwanga
that I die for Baganda, and that I have purchased the road —
to Uganda with my life.” a
A Group of Great Missions. ‘The inspiration imparted by |
Livingstone’s life and labors found expression not only in |
the C.M.S. Mission in Uganda, but through other channels
‘in other localities as well. At least four other missionary
enterprises in this section of Africa are traceable to the same
origin.
The Universities Mission grew out of the interest kindled
by the great missionary explorer’s visit to Oxford and Cam-
bridge in 1857. Its earliest attempts in the Shiré Highlands
cost the lives of Bishop Mackenzie and others. Later it
established itself in Zanzibar and the region east of Lake
Nyasa. a
The London Missionary Society, which with pride counts
Livingstone among its missionaries, sent out its first party
in 1877. Its field lies on the shore of Lake Tanganyika,
but this work has been limited in size and success.
The Blantyre Mission, named after Livingstone’s birth-
place, was established at the southern end of Lake Nyasa
246 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
in 1875, by the Established Church of Scotland. ‘The site \
chosen proved an unusually healthy one and is now crowned
with a flourishing town wearing a decidedly Scotch air, a
kind of miniature “Edinburgh”. in Africa, The work of
this Mission—evangelistic, medical and industrial—has been —
much blessed and its influence extends far afield. i
The Livingstonia Mission is the most distinguished of all”
these memorials of Livingstone. Begun by the Free C hurch
of Scotland in 1874, it now occupies the whole western -
shore of Lake Nyasa. Dr. Robert Laws, the leader of its”
pioneer party and still in active service, has all along been |
the outstanding figure of this remarkable work. The story |
of the Mission, including the early struggles and dangers |
attending the opening up of the field, the subsequent trials |
and vicissitudes heroically met and overcome, and the ulti- ui
mate progress and spiritual victories achieved, is one which :
has seldom been equaled in missionary literature. All the”
lake peoples, whom Dr. Laws found indulging gross super-—
stitions and hideously cruel customs, have been profoundly ;
influenced.
Perhaps the greatest victory was won among the wild”
and wicked Ngoni tribe. After eight years there were only |
two converts. ‘Ten years later the regular church attend-—
ance was 10,000. At the opening of a lofty new church ‘
among them on a Sunday morning in 1904, 3,130 sat on
mats on the floor, 300 carefully selected aduit candidates
were baptized, and 904 of those one-time nude savages satl i
reverently at the Lord’s table. ”
Among the results to date of the Livingstonia Mission _ :
which can be tabulated may be mentioned the reduction of |
eight languages to writing, 850 schools with 51,000 pupils, ~
a church membership of To, ooo and a Christian community —
of 40,000. A central training school known as Overtoun
Institution is in the scope and character of its work a
second “Lovedale.” Such is the fruitage of only forty
years. ‘
German Missions. The occupation by Germany of terri-—
tory on the east coast led to the initiation of six German”
Missions. The earliest of these efforts began in 1886. The
World War brought German activities to an end, German |
East Africa became British, under the name of Tanganyika
i
iy
AFRICA 24T
Territory, and the mission work of the German Societies
has been taken over as far as possible by British and Ameri-
can agencies.
The Africa Inland Mission was organized in 1895 as an
interdenominational society on the faith principle of sup-
port, with the object of carrying the gospel into those parts
of the interior still unoccupied. Its General Director from
the beginning has been Charles E. Hurlburt. Its staff at
the end of 192i consisted of 187 missionaries and 444
native workers. These occupied 43 stations among 25 tribes
in Kenia Colony, Tanganyika Territory and northeastern
Belgian Congo. The population of the area worked by this
Mission is estimated at 1,500,000.
West AFRICA
Next to South Africa this coast constitutes the oldest
field of evangelical missionary effort on the continent. But
its past and present conditions have made it one of the
hardest fields.
More than any other part of Africa the West Coast was
the slaver’s hunting ground. Indeed, it was the interest
aroused by African slaves imported by that wicked trade
into so-called Christian lands which gave the strongest im-
pulse to the early missionary efforts on this coast. Alas!
along with the missionary came also the curse of foreign
tum and “civilized” vices to counteract the gospeler’s in-
fluence. In no part of Africa, moreover, have tribal customs
been more atrocious, or has heathen religion sunk to lower
depths of vileness.
Added to all this is the barrier of a most unhealthy cli-
mate, which has made the heaviest drafts upon missionary
life. To give but one illustration, between 1804 and 1824,
53 missionaries of a single Society laid down their lives in
Sierra Leone. Fortunately the death rate in later years has
been greatly reduced by improved living conditions and the
discovery of the true mode of malarial infection—the
Anopheles mosquito—and the adoption of protective meas-
ures,
Christian Colonizing Experiments. Two early philan-
thropic enterprises took the form of Colonies for African
248 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS |
freedmen, The first of these was Sierra Leone, begun by —
Englishmen in 1788 and handed over to the British crown. 4
in 1808. The second was Liberia, originated in 1816 by )
the American Colonization Society under the influence of.
Samuel J. Mills and others. In 1847 this Colony developed ‘
into the Republic of Liberia. |
While the success of both these experiments was very
limited as to their design of promoting A frica’s vans
tion through colonies of her emancipated and civilized sons, -
yet they served a good purpose in pointing the way and pro- | |
viding starting points for more direct missionary effort. ;
Distribution of Missions. Step by step a line of stations —
has been formed at intervals down this far-stretching coast —
from Senegal to Angola, and up such main rivers as the :
Niger, Ogowe and Congo. Some thirty Societies—British,
American, French and Swedish—are at work, the German. :
Missions having been excluded since the War. ’
In Sierra Leone are the Church Missionary Society _ of |
and Missionary Alliance of Agi In Nigeria are the ;
Church Missionary Society, Sudan Interior, Sudan United ©
and Southern Baptist Missions. In Calabar are the Scotch ~
Presbyterian and the Qua Iboe Mission from Ireland. In 7
the Kamerun country are the Northern Presbyterian of 7
America and the Paris Evangelization Society. In Angola ©
are the Congregationalists sa the U.S.A. and Canada, the ,
American Methodist Episcopal and South Africa General i
Missions. x
The vast Belgian Congo has many Societies, including Q
English and American Baptists, American Presbyterians, 4
Methodists, Disciples and Mennonites, and such interde-_
nominational Faith Missions as the Christian and Mission- i
ary Alliance and Heart of Africa Mission. ‘
Among the most fruitful fields are the Kamerun and the ©
Belgian Congo, where in recent years large spiritual harvests —
have been reaped. ,
Some Worthy Pioneers. The record of suffering anal
sacrifice, of heroism and endurance, by a long succession of ‘|
missionaries on the west coast, constitutes a glorious bequest |
to the Church universal. “Nowhere is death such a King —
of Terrors as in Equatorial Africa. Nowhere is weakness —
AFRICA 249
more liable to overmaster or character to be sapped than on
the equator. But the men and women who held this coast
for Christ knew their God and did exploits. They drank
more deeply than others of the Saviour’s cup of sacrifice,
and out of a fuller experience than the first disciples had,
they could say, We are able.’*”
Only a few names, among many deserving ones, can be
mentioned here:
Melville Cox, the first foreign missionary of the Metho-
dist Episcopal Church of America, landed in Liberia in
1833, only to die within four months. But his noble
example stirred the church, and his dying appeal, “Let a
thousand fall before Africa be given up,” was heeded and
obeyed.
Thomas Comber reached the Congo from England in
1876, at the age of 24, and after ten years of eager toil
filled one of those lonely graves which have been the step-
ping-stone of Christianity into the interior of dark Africa.
Stanley wrote of him: “Again and again, as I looked at
him, he reminded me of the young man with the banner on
which was the word ‘Excelsior.’ ”
George Grenfell, one of the early heroes of the English
Baptist Mission, stands high in the honor list of African
explorers as well as missionary pioneers. Reaching Africa
in 1873, he contributed thirty-three years of splendid service.
It was he who in his little Steamer Peace discovered the
Ubangi, the largest tributary of the Congo, and the story
of his journeys through cannibal tribes and his escapes from
showers of spears and poisoned arrows is unsurpassed for
exciting interest.
Henry Richards planted the gospel seed at Banza Man-
teke, on the lower Congo, in 1879, and after watering it
with prayers and tears for seven years reaped the first ripe
sheaf. ‘Thereupon broke out the “Pentecost on the Congo,”
which swept a thousand souls into the kingdom. “All the
people around Banza Manteke abandoned their heathen-
ism. They brought their idols, and at the first baptism had
a bonfire of images, destroying every vestige of idolatry.” **
Adolphus C. Good, the talented and dauntless pioneer of
12 “Christus Liberator,” pp. 157, 158.
13 “New Acts of the Apostles,” p. 279.
250 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the American Presbyterian work in the Gabun, labored un-
tiringly for twelve years (1882-94), and saw the first be-
ginnings of those marvelous changes which the gospel has —
wrought in that fruitful field. “He carried the standard
of the Cross a step farther towards the heart of the conti-
nent and left the path open to others. “May good men never
be wanting for this Interior,’ was his dying prayer.” *
Mary Slessor of Calabar is probably best known of all
to present readers. Her life-story rivals in many particu-
lars that of David Livingstone. She served in Africa under
the United Free Church of Scotland from 1876 to I915.
From an unlettered factory girl in the homeland she ad-~
vanced into the foremost rank of missionary pathfinders.
Her work was that of a pioneer among the most savage
tribes of the Calabar hinterland. Practically single-handed
she tamed and transformed three pagan communities in suc-
cession. It is a question if the career of any other woman
missionary has been marked by so many strange adventures, —
daring feats, signal providences and wonderful achieve-—
ments. |
Having thus touched separately upon the missionary work
of the various sections of the continent, it remains to men-_
tion a few features relating to the field and work as a whole.
Adaptive Methods of Work. The missionary task 1s
different in Africa from what it is in most other fields, be-
cause of different conditions to be faced. India, Persia, —
China and Japan have a civilization, a literature, a culture of
their own upon which to build. Africa has nothing of this
kind, and society has to be built from the ground up. The
missionary has had to reduce languages to writing, establish —
social customs and institutions, formulate moral codes and —
introduce the first rudiments of education. The problems
involved in such a program are many and great, and they
challenge the brightest mind and highest statesmanship.
In addition to direct evangelism, always the preéminent
method, there is a great field for industrial education, and
the contribution to missionary success made by such institu-
tions as Lovedale in Cape Colony, Kondowe in Nyasaland
and Elat in Kamerun is beyond computation.
14 “Christus Liberator,” pp. 159, 160.
AFRICA 251
Medical missions have a sphere of need in Africa hardly
equaled elsewhere, because of the unhealthy climate, the
prevalence of malaria, blackwater fever and other deadly
diseases, the fearful ravages of sleeping sickness and im-
ported diseases of civilization, and the prevailing ignorance
of the first laws of sanitation and health.
The fact that so many regions are unfit for white resi-
dence enhances the responsibility of the native church for
Africa’s evangelization, and thus the importance of Train-
ing Schools for native workers.
African Christian Converts. The African is of a deeply
religious nature, and gives abundant evidence of ability to
apprehend lofty spiritual truth. That some converts back-
slide, yield to temptation, and fail at some point in their
Christian walk is not to be wondered at when one considers
the terrible heathen heredity and abysmal depths of degra-
dation from which they have emerged. Yet many African
Christians have come into a spiritual experience of a very
high order. Their openness of mind and simplicity of faith
have led some of them to a knowledge of Christ and a like-
ness to Him in character and walk beyond the generality
of believers in Western lands. A few out of many examples
may be cited,
Samuel Crowther is one of the most conspicuous trophies
of African missions. Belonging to the inferior Yoruba
_ tribe on the Niger, he was as a boy carried off by Portuguese
slave raiders, rescued by a British war vessel and sent to
school in Sierra Leone. He early accepted the Saviour, and
showed such ability and devotion in his studies that he was
sent to England to complete his education.
In 1864 he became Bishop of the Niger, and his mission-
ary career up to his death in 1891 was one of rare consecra-
tion and high distinction. The story of how he found and
baptized his own mother, for whom he had long searched, is
full of tender pathos.
Paul, “The Apostle of Banza Manteke,” is another won-
derful convert. The son of a chief, his wickedness won for
him the nickname of “the curse.” He did everything in his
power to obstruct the local missionary work until, like Paul
_ the Jew, he was suddenly arrested by Jesus and changed
from a child of the devil to a saint of the Lord. Thereafter
252 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
he was filled with a holy passion for Christ and souls, cheer-—
fully endured ostracism and opposition, laid gospel siege to
the stoutest pagan stronghold, and at his death left behind —
him a church cf 600 converts, all won through his personal
ministry.
King Khama of Bechuanaland is a fine witness to the
miracle-working power of the gospel. Yielding his heart
and life to Christ, he firmly withstood his father’s per-
suasions to have the son succeed him as sorcerer as well as
chief, and became a veritable “Alfred the Great,” waging
war alike upon heathen customs and the white man’s rum
and other vices. He was at once a devout and humble
Christian and a firm and sagacious state builder, who turned
a whole savage tribe into a peaceful and industrious Chris-
tian people. ‘To pass from Bechuanaland before Khama
to Bechuanaland with Khama is like passing from Dante’s
Inferno to his Paradiso.” ?° The news of the death of this
fine old Christian king on February 21, 1923, in his ninety- ©
fourth year, has just been cabled the world around.
_And the time would fail to tell of Moolu, the humble at-—
tendant of Prof. Henry Drummond in his journey through |
Central Africa, whose godly life so impressed his master
that he wrote: “oy believe in missions, for one thing because
I believe in Moolu’; of Sus: and Chuma, Livingstone’s |
heroic “bodyguard’’; of “Old Nana,” the Christlike “first-_
fruits of the gospel” in Bululand (Kamerun) ; of Kanjundu,
the Angola Chief, wonderful in his forgiving spirit toward —
his persecutors—all of them lustrous gems from the spir-]
itual diamond fields of the Dark Continent.
Neglected Areas. The impression might be gathered ©
from the account given of existing missionary operations
that the evangelization of Africa has now been fairly well
provided for. Such an impression would be very wide of ©
the mark. It must be remembered that in this chapter, as
in no previous chapter, we are dealing with a whole conti-
nent, and that continent the largest but one in the whole
world. When all that missions in Africa have accomplished
has been summed up at full value, it still remains true that
the proportions of the territory yet unoccupied and the
populations yet unreached are staggering.
15 “Daybreak in the Dark Continent,” p. 261.
ta
AFRICA 253
The vast integral region lying at the heart of the conti-
nent, known under the general name of the Sudan, is re-
served for the chapter on Unoccupied Fields. But aside
from that there are many other areas, larger and smaller,
which are wholly neglected.
Reference has already been made to the unreached in-
terior of all the Barbary States, and to the spiritual destitu-
tion of Abyssinia. French Congo and French Guinea are
still largely unoccupied fields. In the former the French
and Swedish Missions have a little work; in the latter a
bare beginning has been made by the Christian and Mis-
sionary Alliance and a few independent workers. Despite
a number of stations in the various Colonies of the Guinea
coast, manned by English Wesleyans and others, the hinter-
land of all that region, including Liberia also, contains an
unreached population of several millions. Large sections of
Nigeria and Kamerun are still beyond missionary effort. In
Belgian Congo, with a population of 12,000,000, ‘4,000,000
are being reached by existing agencies, 4,000,000 more are
within the radius of present influence, while the remaining
4,000,000 are still to be provided for.’’*° Two millions or
more in Portuguese West Africa (Angola), and almost or
quite as many in Portuguese East Africa, have no mis-
‘sionaries among them. Even in Uganda, the best occupied
field, nearly one-half of the people are reported not to have
been reached. Italian, British and French Somali lands
together contain about a million people, mostly nomads, as
yet practically untouched.
The above is given not as a complete list of unworked
areas, but only as an illustration of the dimensions of the
unfinished task of missions in Africa. Under existing con-
ditions no figures in this connection can lay claim to ac-
curacy, but the estimates of those who have given the great-
est attention to the subject put the number of Africa’s people
who are still beyond the reach of present missionary forces
somewhere between 50,000,000 and 70,000,000. Well does
the Report of the Edinburgh Conference say in closing its
teview of the situation: “The question can be seriously
raised, Has the Church more than made a beginning in the
evangelization of the Dark Continent?’ **
16 “Rock Breakers,” pp. 47, 48. ITV Tp 2823
254 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Roman Catholic Opposition. Those who know this re-
ligion only as practised in free countries will hardly be pre-
pared to appreciate the situation which Protestant Missions
face in those large sections of Africa controlled by Roman
Catholic States, where Roman Catholicism is actively sup-
ported by the government. The whole training of the
priests leads them to hate Protestant missionaries and to
oppose them in every way. “At the beginning of Congo
Missions the College of Propaganda at Rome issued this
Encyclical, ‘The heretics are to be followed up and their
efforts harassed and destroyed.’ ” *®
The early Protestant Missions to Abyssinia were expelled
through Jesuit intrigue. Mackay and his colleagues in
Uganda were maligned, persecuted and plotted against by
Roman Catholic missionaries. Any amount of evidence is
forthcoming from missionaries laboring in Belgian, Portu-
guese and Spanish territory as to the systematic and deter- ©
mined efforts of the priests, often by foul means, to obstruct
and destroy Protestant work. |
Added to this are the hampering legal restrictions im-
posed by Roman Catholic governments upon Protestant
Missions, and the serious hindrance of the compromising
policies and corrupt practices of Roman Catholic propa-
gandists.
Opposing Forces from Without. As if paganism, witch-—
craft, superstition, ignorance, deadly climate and other for-
midable enemies already present in Africa were not a suf-
ficient challenge to missionary work, two gigantic evil forces
from without have come to add their powerful opposition: ©
(a) The Moslem Menace. Dr. Cornelius H. Patton in —
his “Lure of Africa’ devotes a chapter to Islam on the
March. He reveals in startling fashion the magnitude of
the Moslem menace throughout the northern half of the —
continent. And he is only one of many writers who have —
sounded a loud alarm. Both the World Missionary Confer-
ence at Edinburgh in tgto, and the Conference on Moslem ~
Missions held in Lucknow in 1911, characterized the ©
Moslem advance in Africa as perhaps the largest world ©
missionary problem confronting the whole church at the ~
beginning of the twentieth century. q
18 Triumphs of the Gospel in the Belgian Congo,” p. 176.
AFRICA 255
The facts in brief are these. The Arab slaver of yester-
day has become the Arab trader of to-day. His attitude
toward the African has changed from one of arrogance to
one of condescension. Closer akin than the European to
the black man, he has more readily adapted himself to
native conditions, and with shrewd diplomacy and patient
persistence has succeeded not only in capturing trade, but
also in making converts by the wholesale to the Moslem
faith. The easy-going morals of Mohammedanism make
it far simpler to win “converts” to that religion than to
Christianity.
Tribe after tribe has been annexed by these Moslem
“missionaries,” until now by far the larger portion of the
great Sudan has been preempted for the false prophet, and
the Moslem advance is sweeping southward into the Congo
region and down the two coasts. Nigeria is two-thirds
-Mohammedan, and Kamerun is said to have 500,000 ad-
herents to Islam. The important Swahili tribe of British
East Africa is being rapidly won over, and Moslem influence
is being powerfully felt as far south as Uganda, Tangan-
yika Territory and Nyasaland.
An important factor in this Moslem advance, too little
realized at home, is the attitude of the European govern-
ments concerned. Great Britain and France, the controlling
Powers in the Sudan, have not merely tolerated Mohamme-
danism, but have actually become its patrons for reasons
of political expediency. They have found that Moslem
ascendancy over pagan chiefs has tended to diminish tribal
wars and make European control more secure. The amaz-
ing spectacle has thus been presented of so-called Christian
governments restricting activities of Christian missionaries
and in some instances positively prohibiting them, lest they
offend the sensibilities and arouse the fanaticism of the
Moslem chiefs.
(b) The White Peril. The aggression of the white man
has resulted in the partition of almost the entire continent
among the Powers of Europe. Only little Abyssinia and
Liberia have continued to be the black man’s countries.
Egypt has just recently been given self-government, with
results yet to be seen.
As a general principle it may be granted that it is for the
256 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
good of the world that barbarism be displaced by yilizaa 7
tion. But a no less important principle requires that the
civilized nations assuming control should respect native
rights, and rule in such a way that the natives may share
the benefits of the new order and not be victims of exploita-
tion for selfish ends. ;
What, then, must be our appraisal of the case for civi-_
lization in Africa in the light of these principles? It must
be acknowledged that European government has brought
some great material benefits to the African. Tribal wars
have been suppressed, law and order established, cruel and —
revolting native customs put down, better agriculture, in-
dustries, sanitation and business enterprise introduced. :
Railway development is rapidly revolutionizing the con-—
tinent. The dream of that British statesman “of South —
Africa, Cecil Rhodes, of a ‘“Cape-to-Cairo”’ railroad is_
rapidly being fulfilled, for already 1,600 miles are completed
and in operation from the Capetown end and 1,300 miles
from the Cairo end. Britain alone built 1,500 miles of rail-_
road in the Sudan in fifteen years, besides constructing _
5,000 miles of telegraph wires and inaugurating 2,000 miles —
of steamboat service on the great lakes and rivers. France ©
has also built some railroad lines and projected others in |
her Sudan territory, while still other roads have been buileM
in Belgian, Portuguese and German colonies. Altogether _
eight lines penetrate the interior from the east coast and SixX-
teen from the west.
Due credit must also be given for some instances of
beneficent colonial administration, resulting in greater se-—
curity of life and property and other advantages to the |
natives.
But secular civilization in Africa has its debit as well as_
its credit side, and in the mind of the African native, strange ©
as this may seem to the European, the debit side ‘far out-
weighs the other.
There is, first of all, the indelible record of the horrible
slave trade of past generations, and the hardly less iniqui- |
tous record of brutal repression and wholesale massacre
openly tolerated, and in some cases deliberately instigated, |
by certain European governments. The notorious Congo”
rubber atrocities are perhaps the best known illustration.
ears
SES as ceca ins Ne Ce Pee ee RT
AFRICA 257
But there are present scores as well. The African smarts
under the contemptuous attitude of the white man. He
resents being cuffed and kicked as if he were a dog. He
chafes under the burden of taxation—poll tax, head tax,
cattle tax, etc.—imposed by his civilized overlords, and also
under the galling restriction upon his freedom of leaving
his immediate locality without a permit which is difficult
to secure. Moreover, he blames the white man for the fact
that the railways and steamers, while improving travel facili-
ties, are the means of spreading cattle pests and such deadly
human diseases as smallpox, tuberculosis and syphilis.
But there is still much more to be said. As one writer
puts it: “Christian civilization without Christ is worse than
Paganism. The state of morals among some Europeans is
scarcely whisperable. It is awful, the amount of corruption
and filth introduced by them.”
Take the liquor question, for example. How often has
attention been called to the deplorable fact that almost in-
variably the same ship which carries one or two missionaries
to convert the African, carries also thousands of gallons
of rum to damn him! The proportions of this foreign rum
trade and the demoralization wrought by it are appalling.
Dr. Patton states that during the year ending in April, 1916,
3,815,000 gallons of spirits were imported into British West
Africa, and during 1914-15 there were shipped from Boston
alone to the west coast of Africa, 1,571,353 gallons of
rum.*°
Another fearful moral menace has sprung from the rapid
transformation of the South African veldt into a great in-
dustrial district. The rich gold mines of Johannesburg and
the diamond fields of Kimberley have drawn together a mul-
titude of native laborers from all the tribes south of the
Zambesi. The mining region known as “The Rand” has
a population of nearly or quite 500,000. The natives who
compose this conglomerate mass have been removed from
all family and tribal restraints and thrown under conditions
of life which make for unbridled moral license along every
line. Low-down whites, including some of the worst crooks
and criminals, have gravitated here from all parts of Europe
and America. What the resultant situation is may be con-
19 See “The Lure of Africa,” p. 123.
258 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
jectured from the fact that Johannesburg has been named —
“the university of crime.” The vices and crimes of civi-
lization have been added to those of heathenism, and thou- —
sands have become the victims of drunkenness, gambling, —
robbery, murder, sodomy and prostitution. Nor are these
terrible conditions restricted to this one center; they prevail
also in such cities as Kimberley, Pretoria, Durban and Cape-
town.
After discussing candidly both sides of the case for —
secular civilization, Dr. Patton proceeds to “strike the bal- —
ance’ and concludes as follows: “Clearly civilization finds —
itself on the wrong side of the account: Jt has brought more ©
evil than good to the African. ‘The plain and ugly fact is ©
that in many parts of Africa the natives would be better off, ©
physically and morally, if European enterprise had never —
OMe, , 3
As to the bearing of all this upon missions, the following ©
quotation speaks for itself: ‘It is comparatively easy to |
convert primitive Africans to Christianity, and to establish
them against the later introduction of the vices of civiliza-_
tion. It is supremely difficult to Christianize them after
they have become viciously civilized.” **
Challenge to Christianity. We have seen Africa’s plight, ©
sunk in the filthy mire of paganism, deceived and misled 7
by crafty Mohammedanism, cruelly wronged and oppressed —
in the past by the stronger nations of Christendom, and now ©
threatened with physical and moral ruin before the colossal ©
vices of godless civilization. What hope remains for her? ©
Verily, the power of pure Christianity alone! And what a \
superb challenge to the Christian church does Africa present —
with her vast size and her vaster potentialities! The work ‘
H
of Christian Missions in the Dark Continent has been prose- Pi
cuted at a costly sacrifice of lives, but the trophies already ©
won have been a glorious evidence alike of the sufficiency of |
the gospel to meet the African’s need and of the suscepti-
bility of the African to the gospel’s deepest influences and —
highest demands. In other words, the results to date are an ©
inspiring sample of infinitely greater possible results. But
such greater results can only follow a vastly greater invest-
20 “The Lure of Africa,” p. 127. a
21 “Daybreak in the Dark Continent,” p. 120. b iN
{
AFRICA 259
ment of life and prayer and treasure than has yet been made
available. Missions have little more than begun the work
of Africa’s complete evangelization. The doors are wider
open than ever before, the possibilities are infinitely larger.
Will the church see, and heed, and act in terms of the actual
completion of the task?
MADAGASCAR
AREA, 228,000 SQUARE MILES, POPULATION, 3,600,000
Location and Sige. It seems most natural that any men-
tion of this island should be made in connection with Africa,
because of its close proximity to that continent. Mada-
gascar, now a French possession, lies about 250 miles off
the east coast of Africa. It is the third largest island of
the globe, in area slightly larger than France and Belgium
combined. |
The People. Its inhabitants are called Malagasy and are
of Malay origin. They are divided into numerous tribes,
of which the Hova is much the largest.
Madagascar first attracted notice by its terrible traffic in
slaves. The island was given over to idolatry of the most
degraded kind and was the scene of perpetual war, lust
and superstition. Vices were exalted as virtues. So hope-
lessly depraved were the people that the French Governor
of a neighboring island told the first missionaries that they
might as well attempt to convert sheep, oxen and asses.
Yet through the wondrous working of divine grace this
island has later been made famous by the heroic faith of its
Christian martyrs.
Early Missions. In 1818, during the reign of the benefi-
cent King Radama, the London Missionary Society opened
work. The Bible was translated, schools and industries were
begun, and the work met with such favor and success that
by 1833 the native church numbered 2,000 members, and
30,000 Malagasy were able to read.
Persecution. Upon the death of King Radama one of
his twelve wives, known as Ranavalona I, seized the throne,
murdering all rivals, and began a reign of terror that won
for her the name of the “Bloody Mary” of Madagascar.
q
260 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS ;
She was a veritable monster of cruelty, and it is said that —
“from twenty to thirty thousand victims fell annually a prey —
to her atrocious crimes.” 4
This wicked queen turned her malicious eye of death upon ~
the Christians, and from 1835 to 1861 a terrific storm of ©
persecution raged, with only short intervals of respite.
Every conceivable torture was employed with the object of ©
stamping out the Christian faith, yet none of the native —
Christians turned back to heathenism. They bore the ©
severest suffering, and even death itself, with quiet hero-
ism and unfaltering trust in God. “To the amazement of ©
the queen, for every one she put to death a score accepted ©
the new faith. ... And wonder of wonders—the little 7
company of believing men and women, left by their English ©
pastors and teachers in 1836 as sheep without a shepherd,
had multiplied at least twentyfold in 1861, the year of the
queen’s death.” *” :
Turning of the Tide. The son of Ranavalona I, who ~
succeeded her on the throne, proclaimed religious freedom
and protection for all Christians. In 1868 a wonderful
change took place when Ranavalona II became queen, for ~
soon after her coronation she openly confessed herself a —
Christian and was baptized. As her predecessor, Ranava- —
lona I, became notorious for her infamous cruelty, so —
Ranavalona II became renowned as a wise and gentle Chris- ’
tian queen. Under her rule idolatry with its corrupt rites ;
and practices received its death blow, and Christianity be-
came the recognized faith of the realm. Large accessions to i
the church followed, reaching within a short time to several i
hundred thousand, and the sifting of professed converts and
the instruction and discipline of the churches imposed upon —
the missionaries a task far beyond their ability adequately —
to cope with. i
Missionary Reénforcements. Other Societies thereupon ©
came to the help of the London Missionary Society and — hs
entered the Madagascar field. These were the Society for —
the Propagation of the Gospel (1864), the Norwegian Mis-_ f
sionary Society (1866) and the British Friends, or Quakers — g
(1867). The work of all these agencies grew and prospered it
up to the occupation of the island by. the F rench., ¥
22 “Wonders of Missions,” pp. 277, 278.
AFRICA 261
Results of French Subjugation. A very sad postscript
has to be added to the story of missionary progress just
sketched. In 1885 France established a protectorate over
Madagascar, and in 1896 formally annexed the island.
From the first the French authorities, incited by the Jesuits,
were hostile to the English missionaries and did everything
to oppose and hamper the evangelical churches. Native
Christians and workers were imprisoned as suspects, some
were even put to death, practically all the mission schools and
many of the churches were closed, and for a time it looked
as if the missionaries would all be obliged to withdraw.
The situation was partly relieved by the action of the Paris
Evangelical Society in coming to the aid of the hard-pressed
Protestants, sending out French pastors and taking under
its care much of the work of the English Societies. But
the promising aggressive movement of the mid-nineteenth
century has been suppressed with a heavy hand, and “it yet
remains to be seen if the martyr spirit of their ancestors is
in the present Malagasy, and if they will remain as faithful
under the persecution of a Christian nation as did their
forefathers under that of a heathen queen.”’ **
QUESTIONS
1. Give the size and population of Africa, and the name by which
it is commonly known.
2. Describe its main physical features, and name its prominent
rivers, lakes and mountains.
3. Describe the climate and natural resources of its different
parts.
4. Give the names and distribution of its main racial groups,
and state the number of languages and dialects spoken.
5. Divide its population on a religious basis, and name and
describe its native religion.
6. Explain how early Christianity in North Africa became al-
most extinct.
7. Sketch the course of discovery and exploration in Africa
down to the present century, and name six prominent explorers.
8. Describe early Roman Catholic missionary efforts, their char-
acter and results.
9. Who blazed the Protestant missionary trail in Africa, in
what year, and with what success?
23 “The Missionary Enterprise,” p. 219.
262 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
ee:
10. Name the chief missionary agencies at work in Egypt, —
Egyptian Sudan, and the Barbary States, and state the nature of
the last mentioned field.
11, Sketch missionary efforts in Abyssinia.
12. Give accounts of Robert Moffat and his illustrious son-in- —
law.
13, Mention four other prominent missionaries in South Africa, |
and the Societies which they represent.
14. Name and describe the work of the first two Protestant
pioneers in East Africa.
15. Tell the missionary story of Uganda, and of the great mis-
sionary whose name is identified with it.
16. Name and locate four Missions in East Africa whose be-
ginnings were inspired by Livingstone’s career.
17. (a) What state of things led to the first missionary efforts
on the West Coast? (b) What form did those efforts take, and
with what success?
18. Give the general distribution of Missions down the entire —
West Coast.
19. Write brief notes on six worthy pioneer missionaries on this |
Coast.
adapted to conditions in Africa?
21. Give brief accounts of three noted African converts.
22. Indicate the areas in Africa at present most neglected.
20. What methods of work have been found specially well j
23. Discuss (a) the Roman Catholic attitude toward Protestant —
work; (b) the influence of Mohammedanism; (c) the pros and
cons of civilization in its various aspects.
24. Give size and population of Madagascar, and describe con-
ditions when missions entered.
ata oaks Society began missionary work on the island, and
when:
26. Sketch the course of missionary work there through its
successive stages down to the present.
CHAPTER XVI
LATIN AMERICA
AREA, 8,500,000 SQUARE MILES. POPULATION, 85,000,000 *
The Americas. We are accustomed to speak of two
Americas—North and South. Geographically there are in
reality four—North, South, Central and Oceanic. Racially
there are two—Anglo-Saxon America and Latin America.
The Rio Grande is the dividing line, and Latin America
stretches south from that line to Cape Horn and the Ant-
arctic Ocean. It comprises about three-fifths of the entire
Western Hemisphere, Anglo-Saxon America’s area being
6,577,800 square miles against Latin America’s 8,459,081
square miles. In population, however, the ratio is reversed,
since Anglo-Saxon America has 115,667,117 inhabitants
against Latin America’s 85,000,000.
“Latin Americans.’ While the inhabitants of Latin
America are commonly designated Latin Americans, the
truth is that from the racial point of view only a small
‘ proportion—one-fourth at most—can be properly so called.
The foreign blood that is in them is mainly Latin, and the
comparatively small upper class is dominantly of Latin
blood; but, the racial basis of the Latin American peoples °
as a whole is Indian, not Latin.
This fact, standing in striking contrast as it does to the
case of Anglo-Saxon Americans, is readily explained by the
totally different nature of European colonization in these
two sections of the Western Hemisphere. The early Anglo-
Saxon colonists in North America were actuated largely by
religious motives. They came seeking freedom of con-
science to worship God, came with their wives and little
ones, came to establish new homes and communities and
1 Figure taken from Survey of Interchurch World Movement (1920).
Populations given by Statesman’s Year Book (1923) for the constituent
“countries make a total of over 90,000,000.
2638
264 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
to settle down to till the ground and develop the country.
They encountered the Indians, fought and drove them back,
but disdained any idea of intermingling or intermarrying
with them.
Not so the Portuguese and Spaniards who first touched —
y
i
the shores of the Squthern Continent. These were daring
adventurers, lured to the New World by the tales they heard ~
about its fabulous treasures of gold and silver. They came
as single men or without their families. Moreover, the first ©
Indians they found were very different from those of North
America, for the Incas were civilized, docile and skilled in
agriculture. So while the Conquistadores from overseas —
shamefully mistreated the native races, decimated their ©
numbers and reduced them to slavery, they did not wipe —
them out, but mixed freely with them, and thus the surviving —
Indians furnished the stock upon which the Latin blood ©
from Europe was grafted.
To this day, as the traveler passes from republic to repub- ©
lic of Latin America, he readily observes the varying degree
in which Indian blood has been affected by European strain.
In Bolivia, Peru and Ecuador he finds great masses of mixed ~
population in which Indian features and character are dom- —
inant; while in Chile and Colombia the mixed populace, —
although retaining many Indian qualities, is more strongly —
Spanish in character. The people of Argentina and
4
Uruguay are almost purely European, and constitute nearly ©
one-half of the all-white population of Latin America. In ©
the case of Brazil, and to a much more limited extent Vene- ©
zuela also, the admixture of blood has become still greater ©
because of the importation by the early colonists of large ©
numbers of African slaves.
Racial Classification. Latin America’s total population
is roughly classified as follows:
NAT WAR Soc ue Ma eehnt Ld ee ey RM ia RA ie G88 eh fel 18,000,000
PTIGEATIS retuned pie aay CEL Nea bln My ate Gate det Me a 20,000,000
IN CET S pl toe UC ags UNUM RHO Shit Au ni aan 6,000,000
‘Maxed sWihitevands Indian tin ews ert ee 32,000,000
Niixed (Witite andiNecrois et 2 ae eee 8,000,000
Mixed\Neprojand slnidiag setae mes whee 700,000
East Indian, Japanese and Chinese........ 300,000
85,000,000
i
woos 45
Se ae
TROPIC oF CRACER
eo
n
cA Re ee
ght?
OCEAN
COLOMBIA ( ne
pena eli as 108 i
= ____ EQuaToR _ a veo
ECUAD eA "
aa
1 | AC} ite
: | ( BAAR A aa al
EAC
z ums \e@ N
| )
‘ ee
| BoOLiviaA Si
5 Ue
i =
i Oe i
Ae LS) < oftto/ce
\ & _ TROPIC — oF CAPRICORN __ in a, ap ges
RICE SER TAS ORIEL =
! NR ge
' | ft p=
!
) Gi Gi tat N SANTIAGO | 2} ~ iy,
A | } bh Ayaes
Ds ac eis
Zz :
: VT)
Sane
| | Sys aa
Yi
By
| :
: Q
a CENTRAL ano
| ! S.AMERICP
~ AS 45°
266 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Political Divisions. Latin America consists of twenty
republics—ten to the north and ten to the south of Panama
—together with colonies of France, Great Britain, Holland
and Denmark, and also Porto Rico and the Canal Zone now
administered by the United States. These twenty republics
together form the largest group of democracies in the
world, Eighteen of. them speak Spanish, Brazil alone
speaks Portuguese, and Haiti speaks French. About 15,-
000,000 Indians can be reached only through their own
tribal languages.
Since South America comprises by far the greater por-
tion of Latin America, being a continent in itself, and since
its dominant features are common to the whole, our main
attention will be given to it, leaving only such additional
mention of the other sections as their particular interests call
for.
SouTH AMERICA
AREA, 7,598,000 SQUARE MILES. POPULATION, 63,000,000 ?
Names. Miss Lucy Guinness named South America
“The Neglected Continent.’ Later, Dr. Francis E. Clark
called it “The Continent of Opportumty.” Still later,
Bishop Stuntz styled it “The Continent of To-morrow.”
All three authors are correct in their designations.
That it has been, and still largely is, “the neglected con-
tinent’ admits no argument. The rest of the world has been
strangely content to remain in gross ignorance of the geog-
raphy, the resources, the commercial, educational and social
progress of these growing Latin countries, and to class
them all together indiscriminately as illiterate and lawless
tropical states—a negligible quantity in world \ affairs.
Highly humorous stories are told of absurd ay on the
part of prominent North American business firms
ing with orders from South America.
Commenting on the scant attention paid these couiher
countries, one writer remarks tersely: “Latin America was
discovered by Columbus in the fifteenth century; it was re-
n deal-
2 Statesman’s Year Book (1923) figures give total of 63,690,171.
LATIN AMERICA. 267
discovered by North Americans in the twentieth century.” °
But Miss Guinness had chiefly in mind the spiritual
neglect of South America, and this is by far the saddest
and most serious aspect of the matter. No satisfactory
reason can be offered for the aloofness and inaction of
centuries on the part of the churches of Protestant lands,
and especially North America, toward a continent of 60,-
000,000 people lying so close at hand, united to North
_ America by physical bonds and by many common features
and interests as well, yet sunken in moral and spiritual deg-
_radation of the deepest sort.
Even when a century ago the church at home was awak-
ened by Carey and Mills to new vision and zeal, and the
modern missionary movement set in, it was to the distant
Se ee ee = “ae
lands of India, China and Africa that missionaries were
sent, and several decades elapsed before any serious atten-
tion was directed to South America, despite its being so
much nearer and more accessible. To plead as an excuse
the unfavorable attitude of Roman Catholic governments
and the bitter hostility of the degenerate priests toward
Protestant effort is weak, in the light of the even greater
perils faced and obstacles surmounted in carrying the gospel
into remoter heathen and Moslem lands. To argue that
Latin America has no need of Protestant missionaries be-
cause of the pretentious claims of the Church of Rome
‘in that region is, in the light of plain facts, the hollowest
evasion. The truth is that Christianity’s long neglect of this
great and needy land was a guilty neglect, due to the lack of
spiritual concern for the souls of men.
_ In recent years a gradually rising tide of interest in our
South American neighbors has set in. This is evidenced
_by more books and magazine articles upon this region, by
anew stream of tourist travel in this direction, by strength-
ened diplomatic relations, and by new and heavy invest-
ment of capital in South American enterprises. All this,
along with quickened spiritual interest and increased mis-
-sionary effort, goes to prove that the world has at last
discovered in South America “the continent of opportunity,”
-and desires a share in it as “‘the continent of to-morrow.”
Size. Comparisons, not figures, convey the best idea of
3“The Living Christ for Latin America,” p. 17.
268 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
size. South America is seven-eighths as large as North
America, or nearly twice the size of Europe. It has a coast
line of 18,000 miles. Its largest country, Brazil, would
hold the entire United States and still leave room for.
Germany and Portugal. Argentina is equal to all of the
United States east of the Mississippi plus the first tier
of states to the west. Bolivia and Venezuela are each more
than twice the size of Texas. Chile, nicknamed ‘‘the shoe-
string republic,’ because of its long narrow shape, stretches
from north to south as far as from New York to San
Francisco, and would make two Californias or four
Nebraskas. Ecuador, so tiny on the map, is equal to New
England, New York and Pennsylvania combined.
Physical Features. But South America’s claims do not
rest merely upon her size. She can boast the largest rivers,
the densest forests, and, with the single exception of the
Himalayas, the highest mountains of the world. She also
has the greatest stretch of undeveloped fertile territory.
“There is more undiscovered territory in Brazil than there
is in the whole continent of Africa.” *
The Amazon, largest of all rivers, offers 2,200 miles of
waterway to ocean-going vessels and 25,000 miles to steam-
ers of lighter draught. The La Plata, comprising in its
system the Parana and its affluents, is 150 miles broad at its
mouth, and pours into the ocean a volume of water seven
times that of the St. Lawrence. It is navigable by sea-
going vessels for 1,200 miles beyond Buenos Aires. Of
lesser magnitude than these, but yet great in size and im-
portance, are the Orinoco, 1,500 miles in length, the Mag-
dalena, San Francisco and many other streams.
The majestic Andes range extends the whole length of
the continent, forming a massive bulwark along the Pacific.
In Ecuador alone fifteen mountain peaks rise to a height
of over 15,000 feet, including the famous Chimborazo (20,-
697 feet) and Cotopaxi (19,493 feet), while farther south
towers the peerless Aconcagua (22,868 feet), the crowning
peak of the Western Hemisphere.
As illustrations of engineering skill may be mentioned
the scenic Trans-Andean Railroad, which pierces the Andes
on the Argentina-Chile boundary line by a two-mile tunnel
4“Problems in Pan-Americanism,” p. 16,
LATIN AMERICA 269
at an altitude of 10,000 feet, and the Central Railroad of
Peru, which climbs to a height of 15,865 feet—the high-
est point reached by any railroad in the world.
Climate. The great bulk of the continent lies within the
‘tropics, although most of Chile, half of Paraguay, all of
Uruguay, and practically all of Argentina are in the south
temperate zone. The tip of Patagonia is not far from the
antarctic circle. The normal effect of latitude, however, is
greatly influenced by such factors as altitude, moisture,
prevailing winds and ocean currents, so that South America
presents great variations and some very unique phases of
climate. An elevation of a mile near the equator gives the
mean temperature of a point a thousand miles north or south
at sea level. The Humboldt current from the south polar
sea lowers the temperature of the southwest coast by twenty
degrees. Higher up the same coast is a large rainless area.
The great interior offers every variety, from dry and barren
deserts to regions of excessive rainfall. Brazil has a hot
tropical climate, and its vast Amazon basin is feverish and
unhealthy. Uruguay, Argentina and Chile have a climate
much like that of the United States. The southern extremity
of the continent consists of a bleak, wind-swept, fog-covered
area which provides pasture for millions of sheep.
Resources and Industries. No part of the world is more
‘tichly endowed with natural resources than South America.
Her wealth of mine, forest and soil is almost beyond esti-
‘mation.
Of minerals practically all the useful ones are found,
many of them in abundance. Rich seams of gold exist in
almost every State, and some of the very mines worked suc-
cessively by pre-Inca, Inca and Spanish miners centuries
ago are to-day being worked by modern machinery, with
no signs of their output diminishing. Fifteen million
ounces of silver are produced annually. The mountains
of Peru, Bolivia and Chile contain such enormous deposits
of copper, tin and iron as to have led wealthy American
‘and British capitalists and manufacturing firms to invest
‘money by the tens of millions in plant, machinery and other
equipment for mining and exporting these ores on a gigantic
scale. ?
Chile’s nitrate fields largely supply the world with fer-
270 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
tilizer. The output in 1913 was worth $120,000,000. Great
coal fields in the Andes lie as yet almost untouched, and
mining engineers have as yet barely begun their task.
The forest wealth of the continent is likewise incalculably
great.. Brazil abounds in virgin forests of mahogany, rose-
wood, ebony and other rare and expensive hardwoods, and
the rubber district’ of the upper Amazon is one of the
richest known.
The agricultural and pastoral resources even eclipse in
extent and value those already mentioned. While there
are certain large areas of desert, swamp and jungle land,
there are other enormous sections, particularly in Brazil,
Uruguay, Argentina, Chile and Colombia, unsurpassed in
fertility anywhere. The grain-growing pampas of these
countries aggregate hundreds of millions of acres and yield
huge crops of grain, cereals, sugar and other products.
In the Argentine stock raising surpasses farming. In
1914 that nation owned 123,612,000 cattle, horses, sheep,
goats, mules, pigs, etc., of which 80,000,000 were sheep.
The world’s greatest packers have established bases here,
and the export trade in grain, wool and frozen meats has
taken on huge proportions.
Brazil furnishes over two-thirds of the world’s coffee, or
a billion and a half pounds a year. Ecuador from her
ivory nuts supplies one-third of the world’s buttons, besides
cacao beans and the finest panama hats. Luscious tropical
fruits are sent north by shiploads from the Caribbean coast.
The rapidity of development in every line of this great
continent’s production, industries and export trade is almost
without a parallel elsewhere, and has a large significance for
the whole world. |
The Early Races. The origin of South America’s earliest
people is wrapped in mystery. Fragments of earthen pots
and crude implements found on the coast of Peru seem to
point to a primitive people in the remote past. Following
these came a race much more advanced, massive stone relics
of whose remarkable civilization are still to be seen near
Lake Titicaca in the highlands of Peru and Bolivia. Certain
resemblances between these people and the Chinese, Japanese —
and Malays have led to theories of their Oriental origin, but
where they came from is an unsolved problem. |
LATIN AMERICA 271
Of the next succeeding Indian races, most prominent
among whom were the /ncas of Peru, the Caras of Ecuador
and the Aztecs of Mexico, we have fuller and more reliable
knowledge. The Cara kingdom reached its zenith at the
end of the fourteenth century, when it was overthrown and
partly absorbed by the Incas.
The wonderful civilization of the Incas has been the fas-
cinating theme of many authors.” The Inca Empire at-
tained its height of power and prosperity in the generation
just before the coming of the Spaniards. It stretched along
‘the Pacific for nearly 3,000 miles and embraced perhaps
10,000,000 people. Agriculture was developed to a remark-
able degree by schemes of irrigation, terraced fields and vast
aqueducts. Great cities, splendid roads and bridges and
magnificent temples were built. The government was pater-
‘nalistic and socialistic, controlling everything. The king
lived in a gorgeous palace of stone, his subjects in huts of
sun-dried brick, and an impassable gulf lay between the
‘tuler and the ruled. It would appear that the swift and
sudden overthrow of so great a nation by a mere handful
of Spanish adventurers was mainly due to the inherent
frailty of this socialistic order. It developed weak depend-
ence rather than virility of character, so that when a blow
was struck the central government the whole civilization at
once collapsed.
Beyond the domains of the Incas and Caras other Indian
tribes of varying social order down to the rude savage
peopled the continent. Inter-tribal wars were common and
contributed to the ultimate conquest of the country by the
white man.
_ European Discovery and Conquest. Columbus himself
began the Spanish exploration of South America. On his
third voyage, in 1498, he sighted the Venezuelan coast, and
in his fourth and last voyage, in 1502, he sailed along the
Colombian shore to the Isthmus of Panama.
In 1513 Balboa crossed the Isthmus and discovered the
Pacific Ocean. The several colonies planted in that region
became centers of further exploration north and south.
Cortez invaded Mexico in 1519, overthrew the Aztec Em-
5 Prescott’s “The Conquest of Peru” and Dawson’s “South American
Republics” are among the best authorities.
272 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
pire in 1521, and in 1525 extended his conquest for Spain
to the territory now comprising Central America. Mean-
while Portuguese navigators had discovered Brazil. The
earliest landing there was effected by Cabral in 1500, at
Bahia. He was succeeded by Amerigo Vespucci, whose
name was given to the new world, and de Souga, who in
1532 founded the first colony at Sado Vincento, near the
present great coffee port of Santos. From this beginning
Portuguese colonization spread along the Brazilian coast
and to the mountain site of the present city of Sao Paulo,
colonial government was established and the sugar industry
begun.
It was the startling tales that reached the Spanish colon-
ists on the Isthmus of the wealth of the Incas that prompted
a party of some three hundred daring freebooters to under-
take, in 1531, a hazardous voyage from Panama down the
west coast. Their captain was Francisco Pizarro, a man of
low birth and no education, utterly without principle, but
equally without fear, and full of reckless daring. The
thrilling story of this expedition and its momentous results
is too well known to need recounting here in detail. After
a series of fierce assaults Pizarro in 1532 stormed the Inca
capital of Cuzco, seized the sacred King Atahualpa, and
after demanding and receiving an unheard-of ransom of —
gold to the value of $22,000,000, foully betrayed his pledge
and slew his captive. By a succession of vigorous cam-
paigns the whole vast Inca Empire was subdued by 1540,
and twenty years later almost the entire western and south-
ern sections of the continent had been overrun and brought
under Spanish control. |
Three Centuries of Iberian Rule. The story of the three
centuries which followed the subjugation of the continent
to Spain and Portugal cannot be fully told here. It is no
easy task justly to appraise the varied factors of the new
régime. It cannot be denied that Iberian occupation brought ©
many material benefits to South America, such as civilized
laws and letters, the introduction of new and valuable ani-_
mals, grains and fruits which raised the level of the well-
being of such inhabitants as survived. But its wrongs and”
injustices so far outweigh these benefits as to make possible.
only one verdict. It brought untold suffering to the Indians
LATIN AMERICA 273
and such sweeping destruction to their civilization that
Peru to-day is vastly worse off in many important respects
than it was under the Incas. ‘The masterful whites simply
climbed upon the backs of the natives and exploited them.” °
The Indians were driven, under the cruel lash of the task-
masters, to impressed labor in mines and plantations. Of
10,000,000 Incas only 2,000,000 lived through the first cen-
tury of serfdom. Well does Dawson call the colonial period
“the devil’s dance of Spanish carnage.’ Nor was it alone
the native people who suffered. An intolerable burden was
laid upon the colonists themselves, by reason of the outra-
geous colonial policy of arbitrary exactions and restrictions
in regard to immigration, trade and everything else. To
this day the republics of the western seaboard bear the blight-
ing mark of-those dark centuries. Finally, as one writer
expresses it, “oppressive rigor and shameful abuse of privi-
lege brought their own corrective and finally ousted the last
henchman of Spain.” ’ The fires of revolution, long smol-
dering beneath the surface, burst into flame, and the des-
perate struggle for freedom began.
Mexico was the first to declare her independence, in 1810,
and by 1826 eight sovereign states had been set up. The
names of Francisco Mirando, the able pamphleteer who first
spread the doctrines of freedom, and Bolivar, San Martin,
O’ Higgins, Juarez, and Sucre, the military leaders in various
parts of the continent, are immortally enshrined in the
hearts of all Latin Americans.
The Republics. The history of the present ten South
American republics, now about a century old, has been a
checkered one. The previous régime was devoid of all
training or preparation for self-government. This fact, as
well as the racial complications, partly explains the slow
progress of the majority of the republics and the frequency
of revolutions. Paraguay has become notorious for her
revolutions, which cost her so many men that at one period
the female population outnumbered the male five to one.
Venezuela has had fifty-two uprisings within a century.
Others of the republics, however, have a much better record.
The republics recognized as progressive are Argentina,
6 “South of Panama” (E. A. Ross), Preface.
7“The Living Christ for Latin America,” p. 39.
274 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Brazil, Chile and Uruguay. The remaining six are classed
as backward, with Ecuador and Colombia footing the list.
While each of the ten has to- -day all the machinery of re-
publican administration, politics and patronage play a seri-_
ous role in government affairs, and corruption at elections i is 5
general.
The Roman Cathélic Church, which exerted such strong
influence in colonial times, is no less a political force in the
republics, The church party constitutes the conservative
wing, against which are arrayed the radicals and liberals.
The aggressions and political pretensions of the church are —
increasingly resented and opposed, not only by the other ©
political parties, but by the public in general.
Social Features. A striking characteristic of Latin civi-
lization in South America has been its development of a
few great cities to the neglect of the country. Think of one-
fourth of the entire population of Argentina being in its
capital, Buenos Aires, which is the largest city not only in ©
South America, but in the whole Southern hemisphere. Two
cities in Chile together contain more than one-seventh of her
whole population. “The small population of each land gives —
to its one or two largest cities a predominant influence.
Almost everything centers in the capital. Such a condition |
is not wholesome. These cities suck in the wealth of the ©
nation, beautifying themselves with revenues needed for —
the development of the nation’s wider interests, and they —
absorb the energy of government which should be national
and not urban.” ®
Nothing strikes a visitor to South America more than the ©
wide contrasts between urban and rural conditions. We
found the main cities, Buenos Aires and Rio de Janeiro in ©
particular, wonderfully developed and attractive. Buenos —
Aires, with a population of 1,700,000, combines the com- —
mercial features of London with the beauty and pleasures
of Paris. Rio de Janeiro, with a population of 1,000,000,
is said to be the cleanest and loveliest city in the world. Its.
finest avenida rivals Fifth Avenue, New York. Monte- —
video, Santiago, Lima, Quito and Sado Paulo are among —
the other best cities. But one has only to go a short dis-_
tance into the country from any of these centers of com-
8 “South American Republics,” p. 66.
.
se ae
LATIN AMERICA 275
merce and culture to meet with conditions of life as crude as
in the interior of Asia.
A most serious feature of South America’s social order is
the almost entire absence of the middle class, which consti-
tutes the backbone of other countries. The population is
divided into the rich aristocracy, who although comprising
less than ten per cent. of the whole, are the landlords of the
country and exercise almost complete control, and the com-
mon people who are their tenants and for the most part
extremely poor. There are scarcely any small farmers.
Five per cent. of the Latin Americans own ninety-five per
cent. of the land and make it well-nigh impossible for others
to secure any of it.
With the exception of a few more advanced cities, such as
those already mentioned, there is everywhere an appalling
ignorance of modern sanitation and hygiene. Open sewers
run through the streets, meats are exposed to swarms of
flies in the public markets, and other filthy conditions prevail
which promote diseases of every sort. Even ina progressive
republic like Chile, with an almost ideal climate, seventy-five
to eighty per cent. of the children die under two years of
age, and the general rate of mortality is nearly twice as high
as that of Europe. Epidemics of smallpox, typhoid and
other infectious diseases rage on unchecked. Guayaquil,
the flourishing port of Ecuador, was in 1918 altogether the
filthiest city of its size we had ever seen. It had become
notorious as a hotbed of malaria, yellow fever and bubonic
plague, with Callao, the main port of Peru, a close second.
Reports indicate that there has been some improvement
since then. The sacrifice of so many lives as victims of
diseases which might be prevented or cured by better know-
ledge and simple means is deplorable.
Illiteracy is one of the fundamental problems. It ranges
from forty or fifty per cent. in such progressive republics
as Uruguay and Argentina to eighty-five per cent. in such
backward ones as Venezuela and Peru. The average for
the entire continent is estimated at about seventy-five per
cent., or three illiterates out of every four persons. An up-
to-date authority states that New York City’s present budget
for education equals the national budget for education of
all the twenty republics of Latin America.
276 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Moral Conditions. Dr. Speer says: “The fundamental
trouble in South America is ethical... . Speaking gen-
erally, the people are warm-hearted, courteous, friendly,
kindly to children, respectful to religious things, patriotic
to the very soul; but the tone, the vigor, the moral bottom,
the hard veracity, the indomitable purpose, the energy, the
directness, the integrity of the Teutonic peoples are lacking
in them.” ® Another writer mentions the prevalency of un-
truthfulness, often cleverly hidden beneath evasive words, in
which the Spanish language is rich. The inordinate love
of pleasure of the Latin Americans finds vent in gambling,
card-playing, horse-racing, cock-fighting and bull-fighting,
social evils which have grown to large proportions, and
which are not frowned upon by the Church of Rome.
Drunkenness is another terrible evil. Large sections in
Argentina and Chile are devoted to grape-growing, and in
Chile ordinary wine is cheaper than milk. More Latin
Americans are drunkards than total abstainers. “With few
exceptions the Chilean laborer gambles away or drinks up
most of his wages.” *° It is said that in Valparaiso, a city
of 200,000, there is one saloon for every twenty-four men.
Drink has nearly wiped out the Indians of Chile and is un-
dermining the strong constitution of the whites.
But the crowning evil is moral unchastity. Conditions on
this line are too shocking to permit the plainest speaking,
but too well known by all who have given any attention to
South America to require it. The blame rests most heavily
upon the men. Male chastity is almost unknown, and the
idea that a man should be morally pure is commonly ridi-
culed. Nor is the evil even mainly confined to unmarried
men, for marital infidelity is deplorably common. Esti-
mates by reliable writers as to the proportion of illegitimate
births for all South America vary from one-fourth to one-
half of the population. Even when due allowance is made
for cases where couples are faithful to each other, but have
dispensed with the formal marriage ceremony because of the
extortionate fees demanded by the clergy, the record is a
truly appalling one. The lack of any popular conscience in —
9 “South American Problems,” pp. 73, 74.
10 Quoted in “South of Panama,” p. 219.
LATIN AMERICA 277
the matter makes it that much worse. These illegitimate
births are duly registered, the names of father and mother
appearing in the public record, and yet no shame attaches
to it. What an awful blot is such a state of affairs upon
any people, not only condemning them before God, but also .
effectually barring all true and lasting progress and prosper-
ity, which can be the heritage only of nations built upon in-
dividual morality and the sanctity of the home!
Romanism on Trial. To turn to the consideration of
spiritual conditions is to confront squarely the issue of the
Roman Catholic Church in South America. For four cen-
turies she has had an absolutely free hand, without a com-
petitor, and in the main with the substantial backing of the
State. Under such conditions she has had the best possible
opportunity of showing what she can do to uplift the people.
What use has she made of this opportunity, and what results
has she to show? Applying the Master’s own test, “By
their fruits ye shall know them,” the following facts speak
for themselves:
Romanism has systematically and bitterly opposed every
movement toward civil, political or religious freedom. She
has herself been a political rather than a religious power,
and her unscrupulous methods have won for her contempt
and antagonism in politics.
She set up the infamous Spanish Inquisition in South
America, at the hands of which 120,000 people were tor-
tured and 189 were burned at the stake in Lima, and its
overthrow was effected only in the teeth of her strenuous
resistance.
She has not scrupled to employ the boycott and every
form of persecution to intimidate those who have sought
peace outside her fold, nor to use violence, imprisonment
and even the assassin’s dagger and bomb to dispatch heretics.
She has been the inveterate foe of popular education,
thereby contributing to the prevailing illiteracy. Her leaders.
in Argentina persistently fought the Morris Schools, which
befriended and educated thousands of homeless waifs in
and around Buenos Aires.
She has opposed the translation of the Bible into the ver-
-nacular, and its distribution, has forbidden her people to
278 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
buy or read it, and has publicly burned the Book. Bible
colporteurs have been stoned, flogged, imprisoned and mur-
dered at the instigation of her clergy.
She has defiled herself by becoming a partner in the lot-
tery and other iniquitous practices.* She has encouraged
Sabbath desecration through the sanction of the use of that
day for public games} excursions, feasting and social merri-
ment, if only early mass has been attended.
She has promoted irreverence to the point of sacrilege, in
allowing sacred terms to be applied to common objects and
commercial affairs in a way that profoundly shocks all true
religious sentiment. We personally came upon such busi-
ness signs as “Butcher Shop of the Holy Spirit,” “Furniture
Shop of the Saviour,” ‘Tailor Shop of Jesus on the Cross,”
“Fishmonger of Holy Mary.” A bottled mineral water in
Peru was labeled ‘Jesus Water.” But the most blasphemous
instance which came under our notice was that of a maga-
zine which on Good Friday featured as an advertisement a
picture of Christ upon the Cross, with Judas and others
standing in the background, and the words put into Judas’
mouth: “If I had had such cigarettes to smoke I wouldn’t
have betrayed Him.”
But the case against Rome in South America is even yet
stronger when her doctrines and morals are examined. Her
teaching deserves to be called Mariolatry rather than Chris-
tianity, for a godhead of four persons, not three, is recog-
nized, and with Mary the first person. The Jesuits taught
their converts to say: “We confess that the Holy Virgin
Mary should be held in greater esteem by men and angels
than Christ Himself the Son of God.” ”
“On a tablet beside the door of the Jesuit Church in
Cuzco, Peru, there is an inscription in Spanish: ‘Come to
Mary, all ye who are laden with works, and weary beneath
the weight of your sins, and she will succor you.’ ” *
Except in the larger coast cities, where foreign influence
is strong, few sermons are ever preached and no prayers
offered in any of the churches, in the language of the people.
11 The author of “The Living Christ for Latin America’ testifies to
having seen over a moving picture show managed by Franciscan monks the
sign ‘Recreation Hall of the Child Jesus,’ and more than one wine cellar
directly beneath the altar of a church.
12 “The Evangelical Invasion of Brazil” (S. R. Gammon), p. 99.
13 “The Living Christ for Latin America,” p. 95.
LATIN AMERICA 279
The observance of ritualistic forms and sacraments is made
the hollow substitute for repentance and regeneration, as a
perusal of the authorized Roman Catholic catechism of
Christian doctrine in use will show. And along with these
empty ceremonies a whole stock of grossly sacrilegious
superstitions are foisted on an ignorant and credulous people.
The priests are largely responsible for the shockingly
low moral standards, not only by their extortionate marriage
fees, but even more by their own abominable immoralities,
which have called forth loud protests from an outraged
public, from high dignitaries in the Church, and even from
the Pope himself.
A certain bishop in Bolivia wrote concerning the priests
of his district: “I have done all in my power to pull them
out of the cesspool of ignorance and vice. . . . They are
always the same—brutal, drunken, seducers of innocence,
without religion and without conscience. Better would be
the people without them. . . . You cannot imagine the pain
these things give me. I am sick and tired of it all. There
are exceptions, but so very few that they are not enough to
mitigate the pain.” **
Little wonder is it that a great proportion of the people,
particularly the educated and intelligent classes, have turned
in disgust from such a travesty of religion to absolute un-
belief, so that the chief task of evangelical missions is not to
proselytize from the Roman Church, but to call to a rational
faith and a pure and upright life those who have already
thrown off this false religion and are drifting toward
atheism and moral ruin.
Said an intelligent man in Argentina to a missionary who
was endeavoring to awaken in him a concern about spirit-
ual things: “Sir, we have been so miserably deceived and
defrauded by this damnable religion, that it will be a long
while before we can be expected to take any interest again
in anything that bears the name of religion.’ He spoke
with evident heat, and who will blame him? Yet there are
people who resent the idea that South America is a legitimate
field for evangelical missions, because it is a “Christian’’
country under the care of a “‘sister’’ church! Let the facts
cited speak for themselves. While gratefully recognizing
14“The Continent of Opportunity,” p. 317.
280 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the true Christian faith and character of certain individu-
als within the Church of Rome, and the heroism and self- ©
sacrifice of some of her early pioneers in this continent, we
must solemnly affirm that Romanism in South America
stands condemned on its own record, at the bar of God
and humanity alike, and is hopelessly impotent to meet
the social, moral and spiritual needs of 63,000,000 needy
souls. After personal contact with South America and most
of the great mission fields of Asia and Africa, we share the
deep conviction of many other observers that South America
to-day stands in need of the gospel not one whit less than
China, India, Africa and the Moslem world.
II. Missionary Work.
Early Roman Catholic Missions. In the discovery and
settlement of Latin America the religious motive was not
lacking along with the political and commercial, and the very
earliest expeditions were accompanied by monks or priests.
The first of these were of the Franciscan and Dominican
Orders, but the Jesuits who followed were here, as else-
where, the great missionary agency of Rome.
Some of these were worthy disciples of Loyola and Xav-
ier, and faced hardship, danger, disease and persecution in
a heroic spirit deserving of all praise. They penetrated the
continent at many points, and “there was no tropical wilder-
ness too intricate or far-stretching for them to traverse,
no water too wide for them to cross, no rock or cave too
dangerous for them to climb or enter, no Indian tribe too
dull or refractory for them to teach.” Yet they were a
part of the militant, ecclesiastical and political system of the
times, so that their ardent evangelism and humanitarian
service were strangely mingled with cruel slaughter and
subjection of the natives, and extortion of their land and
wealth. Conversions were often by a wholesale process, and
the Church ingeniously adapted its doctrines, rites and sym-
bols to suit the religious traditions and notions of its pagan
“converts.”
For the above reasons it is not unfair to say, nor is it
surprising, that Roman Catholic Missions in Latin America
have proved an almost complete failure. The greatest tem-
porary triumphs of the Jesuits were in the interior of south-
LATIN AMERICA 281
-ern Brazil and in Uruguay and Paraguay, but later they fell
under the suspicion and disfavor of both Portuguese and
Spanish governments because of their great accumulation of
wealth and assumption of power. In the eighteenth century
the Jesuits were expelled, their possessions confiscated and
their work shattered, never to be restored.
First Protestant Efforts. Vhe first Protestants to land
in South America were a company of French Huguenots
sent to Brazil in 1555 by Calvin and Coligny, with the hope
of founding a colony for persecuted Protestants. They
landed on an island in the Bay of Rio de Janeiro and were
reénforced by a second company a year later. But their
leader, Villegagnon, turned traitor and abandoned the col-
ony, which was later destroyed by the Portuguese. A few
survivors escaped into the interior and attempted work
among the Indians, but these were hounded down and put to
death by the Jesuits.
In 1624 the Dutch captured Bahia and attempted to plant
colonies there and at Pernambuco, with alleged religious as:
well as commercial ends in view. Religious liberty was de-
creed and work begun among the Indians, but the Dutch
West India Company later decided to withdraw, and so this
second missionary attempt was aborted.
Modern evangelical effort may be said to have really
begun*in 1735, when the Moravians opened work in Brit-
ish Guiana. In 1738 this work was extended to Dutch
Guiana.
_ The Lancasterian. Schools. The dawn of the era of
independence among the South American republics, early in
the nineteenth century, coincided with the awakening of the
church in Europe and America to new missionary en-
deavor, and the formation of societies for the translation
and distribution of the Bible. In England a project had
been begun by one named Joseph Lancaster for a system of
popular schools for children, with the distinctive features
that the Bible was the main textbook and that the older
scholars were made pupil-teachers of the younger ones.
The success of the project at home led to plans for extending
its benefits to other lands, and so ‘““The English and Foreign
School Society” was organized. The British and Foreign
Bible Society had just begun its great work abroad, and
282 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
these two societies united in sending Mr. James Thomson
to South America.
Thomson began his work in Buenos Aires in 1820, only
four years after Argentina’s declaration of independence.
He preached the first Protestant sermon ever preached
there. His plans met with immediate success, over one
hundred schools were opened in Buenos Aires, and he won
the favor and support of the leading statesmen. Uruguay
and Chile soon called for his services and initiated his school
system under government patronage. ‘Thus he passed from
one republic to another, his good work enjoying a tem-
porary triumph which was most gratifying. In Peru, Gen-
eral San Martin turned out the friars of the Convent of St.
Thomas and handed the place over for a Lancasterian school.
Bibles were everywhere sold in large numbers, and auxili-
ary Bible Societies were formed in several republics, with —
the endorsement and support of prominent officials.
But stern reaction soon set in through the secret and
powerful tactics of the jealous priesthood. Parents were
forced to take their children from the schools, and those
who had purchased Bibles were ordered to surrender them to
the priests. “Gradually the coils tightened about the evan-
gelical institution and it was strangled by political and cleri-
cal pressure. It recetved a warm welcome because it pur-
ported to be educational; it met with a violent death by
priestly suffocation because it was evangelical.” *°
Mr. Thomson returned to England in 1826, and the few
who followed him grew discouraged under the difficulties
which beset them and were compelled to abandon their
efforts on these lines.
Captain Allen Gardiner. ‘The first enduring Protestant
Mission to South America began with the sacrifice of Cap-
tain Allen Gardiner, who perished of starvation in Septem-_
ber, 1851, in Spanish Harbor, Tierra del Fuego.” *®
This noble British naval officer had seen service in many
parts of the world, was converted during one of his voyages, |
and became filled with a passion for Christ and lost souls.
He was deeply impressed with the pitiable condition of the
15 “The Living Christ for Latin America,” p. 115.
16 “South American Problems,’ p. 219.
LATIN AMERICA ~ 283
aborigines of South America, and made earnest efforts to
open work among the Indians of Chile and the region in
northern Argentina and western Paraguay known as the
Chaco. Being persistently balked by the opposition of the
priests he turned his attention to Patagonia.
The Indians of that extreme southern tip of the continent
and the adjacent Island of Tierra del Fuego were among
the most degraded people in the world. The eminent natu-
ralist, Charles Darwin, dubbed them ‘‘the missing link” be-
tween man and monkey, and declared them incapable of
-moral discernment. Gardiner accepted this challenge and
was permitted to labor long enough to convince Darwin of
his error.
After some preliminary work among the Patagonians he
returned to England in 1843, and effected the formation of
the South American Missionary Society in 1844. His re-
“maining six or seven years were full of adventure and hard-
ship in his dauntless efforts to plant mission stations in that
remote and inclement region and to win the debased Indians
to Christ. Driven from their center at Banner Cove by the
truculence and pilfering of the unregenerate Indians, Gard-
iner and six companions, who had recently joined him from
England, put to sea in their little vessel and took refuge in
Spanish Harbor, where they waited and prayed for the com-
ing of the promised supply ship from home. Before it
arrived starvation had slowly overtaken every member of the
heroic little band, Gardiner himself being the last to succumb.
Their bodies and diaries were found to tell the pathetic tale.
“Poor and weak as we are,’ wrote Gardiner, ‘our boat is
a very Bethel to our souls, for we feel and know that God
is here. Asleep or awake, I am, beyond the power of ex-
pression, happy.’. Instead of repining or lamenting, he left
behind only earnest entreaty that the mission should not
be abandoned, and left a brief plan outlining further opera-
tions.” *7
The news stirred the Church of England to its depth and
gave new impulse to the work among the Indians. The
transformation wrought among the Fuegians as a result of
‘the work begun by Gardiner drew from Darwin a frank
17 “The New Acts of the Apostles,” pp. 111-112.
284 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
testimony of astonishment and appreciation, accompanied by
a donation to the Society’s funds and a request to be made
an honorary member.
Some Early Trail Blagers. There were hardy pioneer
missionaries among the Latin population as well as the
Indians.
Rev. D. P. Kidder of the M.E. Church of the U.S.A.
made the first attempt to plant the gospel in Brazil. Land-
ing in 1836, he traveled overland and up the great Amazon,
braving hardships, perils and bitter opposition in his work
of distributing the Scriptures for the first time in that vast
republic, till circumstances compelled his leaving the field
in 1841.
The first agency in Brazil which has continued its serv-
ice to the present was launched in 1855 by Dr. R. R. Kalley,
a Scotch physician whose work, begun independently, is now
carried on by an interdenominational society known as
videlpator brazily
The first permanent denominational work in this State
was the Presbyterian Mission founded in 1859 by Rev. A.
G. Simonton.
Worthy pioneers in other parts included Rev. David
Trumbull, D.D., of the Foreign Evangelical Society, who
entered Chile in 1845, and Rev. H. B. Pratt, who began
the work of the Presbyterian Board in Colombia in 1856.
The Bible Societies. The contribution of the Bible So-
cieties to the evangelization of South America can hardly
be overestimated. Reference has already been made to the
early efforts of the British and Foreign Bible Society
through its first agent, Mr. James Thomson. The American
Bible Society later entered the field, and these two great
Societies shared the enormous task of sowing this Scripture-
less continent with the Word of God.
Their representatives did largely the preliminary scouting
which opened the way for local missionary work. The full
record of their heroism as they toiled across desert sands,
through fever-laden swamps and over mountain trails, and
as they exposed themselves to insult and injury by their
bitter enemies, the Roman Catholic priests, will never be
known this side of heaven.
A colporteur of the American Bible Society, José Mon-
LATIN AMERICA 285
giardino by name, dared to penetrate Bolivia in the face of
the declaration of a high Roman Catholic functionary that
he would never get out alive. He sold all his books, but in
a lonely spot on the road he was beset by two cut-throats
hired by the priests, and foully murdered. In 1883 two
distinguished agents of the same Society, standing by this
martyr’s grave, bared their heads and consecrated their lives
anew to the service of Christ. These were Dr. Andrew M.
Milne, General Agent of the Society, who on account of his
long journey among Indian tribes in unexplored territory
has been called the Livingstone of South America, and
Rev. Francisco Penzotti, the worthy head of the La Plata
Agency, who through a period of forty years of valiant
service has repeatedly suffered stripes and imprisonment for
the Master’s sake.
These are outstanding names, but hundreds of colpor-
teurs of humbler rank, but similar courage and devotion,
have followed in their train in this invaluable department
of missionary work. It 1s estimated that within the last
half century over 2,000,000 copies of the Word have been
circulated in Spanish and Portuguese America. To these
must be added thousands upon thousands of tracts, books
and periodicals to make up the great sum total of evangelical
literature, the use of which has been one of the most potent
factors in South America’s evangelization.
Present Missionary Occupation. The Report of the
“Panama Congress on Christian work in Latin America,
held in 1916, gives the total number of missionaries in
South America as 1,207, distributed among 267 stations,
and of native workers 1,342. A moment’s reflection upon
these figures, in relation to a whole continent of such size
and population, will show the utter inadequacy of the pres-
ent missionary occupation.
Brazil (30,600,000), the first republic to be entered, still
leads all other Latin American countries in Protestantism.
The Congregational, Protestant Episcopal, Northern and
Southern Presbyterian and Southern Methodist and Bap-
tist denominations, and also the Evangelical Union of South
America, are all working here.
The work was begun on sound lines and has yielded larger
eo better results than in any other republic. Several of
286 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the denominations have quite a number of self-supporting
churches. The Independent Presbyterian Church has over
6,000 members. One church in Rio de Janeiro raises
$15,000 a year, supports a missionary in Portugal, and con-—
ducts fourteen Sunday-schools in the suburbs of its own
city.
of high grade colleges, of which the best known is Macken-
zie College at Sao Paulo.
All the missionary work in Brazil, however, is yet con-
fined to the fringe of coast line and a few adjacent interior
states. The greater portion of the vast interior has scarcely
been touched, and northern Brazil is one of the most neg-
lected fields on earth.
Argentina (8,700,000) is worked by the Methodist Epis-
copal and Southern Baptist denominations, the Evangelical
Union of South America, Christian and Missionary Alh-
ance, Inland South America Missionary Umion, Salvation
Army and a group of the Brethren.
This republic is a great melting pot for European immi-
gration, and the forces of agnostic socialism and material-
ism are strong. The attitude of the people toward the
gospel is one of indifference rather than opposition. It is
said that there is no other great city in the world with
The missionary educational work heads up in a number
so few places of worship as Buenos Aires. Brooklyn alone
has as many churches as the whole of Argentina, Protestant
and Roman Catholic combined. Great areas, including
hundreds of towns, are yet untouched by evangelical mis-
sionaries.
Chile (3,750,000) has several strong Missions—the
Northern Presbyterian, Methodist Episcopal, Christian and
Missionary Alliance and Southern Baptist. The first two
have a Umon Training School and magazine at Santiago,
where there are also mission colleges for boys and girls.
The Alliance Mission has a number of stations with vigor-
ous churches in central Chile, and is pressing its evangel-
istic efforts southward into a hitherto totally neglected area.
The Chileans are a strong, virile nation, and the Missions
are developing a fine type of native worker. S
A
Uruguay (1,500,000) is the smallest, but most progres-
sive of all the republics, with a high percentage of literacy
‘
sy
LATIN AMERICA 287
and some advanced educational institutions. The Methodist
Episcopal and Southern Baptist Societies are in Montevideo,
and plans are being laid by the Committee on Codperation
for a large Union Theological Seminary at this center, but
the rural districts have hardly been touched.
_ An unique feature in Uruguay is the existence of a strong
colony of Italian Waldensians, whose pioneers came over
in 1858. They have survived many early hardships, as well
as persecutions by the Roman Catholic Church, and to-day
are a prosperous colony of about 6,000. With their Latin
and Protestant inheritance they offer fine material for evan-
gelical missions, if brought under the right spiritual influ-
ence and properly trained.
Paraguay (850,000), in its diminished population, pov-
erty and general backwardness, still bears the scars of a long
succession of wars and revolutions. Formerly it was the
seat of aggressive Jesuit Missions, but religion is to-day at
a low ebb. Evangelical work is as yet limited to a few
centers, aside from that carried on among the Indians. The
main agencies are the South American Missionary Society,
the Inland South American Missionary Union and the Sal-
vation Army. The Disciples Church has accepted denomi-
national responsibility for this field, but its work has barely
been begun.
Bolivia (2,900,000) is 50 per cent. Indian and 25 per cent.
half-breed. The population is confined to fertile spots, with
vast stretches of poor and unsettled country between, illiter-
acy amounts to 85 per cent., conditions are terribly back-
ward, and the problem of adequate missionary occupation is
staggering.
The Methodist Episcopal, Canadian Baptist, Bolivian In-
dian and Peniel Hall Missions have each a small staff. There
are two institutions of learning, at La Paz and Cochabamba,
under Methodist Episcopal auspices, which receive State
aid.
Peru (4,600,000) is 50 per cent. Indian, rs per cent.
white, and the remainder half-breed, Negro and Chinese.
‘The racial and language differences, the extreme illiteracy,
and the geographical divisions with deserts and mountains
intervening are features of difficulty here.
The Methodist Episcopal Mission and Evangelical Union,
288 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
with their very limited forces, and a few independent work-
ers, are utterly inadequate for this republic. Twelve great
“departments” are without any mission work, and the whole
of northern Peru must be reckoned as unoccupied territory.
Ecuador (2,000,000), one of the most backward coun-
tries on earth, was formerly more intolerant religiously than
any other republic.” Now, however, it is wide open to mis-
sionary work, of which it stands in desperate need. The
only agency at work, apart from a few independent units, is
the Christian and Missionary Allhance, which has a force
of thirty missionaries engaged in evangelistic work. There
are as yet no mission schools, and missionary plans for Ecu-
ador greatly need strengthening and enlarging.
Colombia (5,900,000) has only one Mission—the North-
ern Presbyterian, which after over half a century can count
only a meager number of converts in its five stations. The
present handful of missionaries are but a mere fraction of
the number required. There is only one ordained mission-
ary for every million people. Little itinerating has been
done except by colporteurs of the Bible Societies, and there
are regions in such utter spiritual destitution that many of
their inhabitants do not know the name of Christ.
Venezuela (2,400,000) has work under the Northern
Presbyterian and Scandinavian Alliance Missions, the Bible
Societies and a few groups of independent workers. A great
portion of the widely scattered population lies beyond the
reach of the present missionary forces and in a condition
of illiteracy and moral and spiritual degradation.
The Guianas (500,000) have a mixed population, mostly
East Indian, Negro and half-caste. A number of British
and American Societies are laboring in British Guiana, and
the Moravians pretty well occupy Dutch Guiana. No infor-
mation is at hand regarding evangelical work in French
Guiana, and it is safe to conclude that little exists.
The Indians. No positive figures can be given for the
purely Indian population of South America to-day. Most
estimates have lain between 5,000,000 and 6,000,000. A
very recent estimate, however, by Dr. W. E. Browning,
Educational Secretary of the Committee of Cooperation in
Latin America, is considerably higher. His figures are :—
<
’
LATIN AMERICA 289
GOOD een Vn ue ce oak es 2,000,000
Veter elaine ait fils Suku elas 6 300,000
PECUAAOG AY. OP RUNE t ate aee 1,600,000
1 (ot aR MINOR al ria oN Vy GEAR LD Rad 3,000,000
15a yin: WNW APO DN AMIR ie Fal TD 1h 1,000,000
Crafanase ey Uae We et ae 40,000
1 Fe Vad EE NN CLS PN FIG ead pepe EI 1,500,000
PAracuady au. Une ea nieces 4 50,000
PRL BENIULA ard stay ne een ais hose 50,000
OTL eR oleh UR ONC gies sean 102,000
9,642,000
The Indians are divided into a number of main groups,
and these subdivided into about 350 tribes. The South
American governments have done little for them, while the
rubber trade and other “civilized” enterprises have shame-
fully despoiled them and made them victims of drunkenness
and other vices. The Roman Catholic Church for the most
part has totally neglected them, and the little work it has
done has left them still pagans at heart, with a thin veneer
of medieval Catholicism.
Protestant work has been begun in several regions. The
South American Missionary Society, which grew out of the
heroic Allen Gardiner’s efforts, stands first in the field of
Indian work. Rev. W. Barbrooke Grubb in 1888 led a party
into the interior of Paraguay, and began a work among the
Lengua Indians which has been replete with thrilling experi-
ences. It has now extended to other tribes in what is known
as the Gran-Chaco, including adjacent territory in Paraguay,
Argentina and Bolivia. Mr. Grubb is an accredited author-
ity on conditions there. |
The same Society carries on a good work among the
Araucanian or Mapuche Indians of Chile, with evangelistic,
industrial, school and medical features, and the Christian
and Missionary Alliance has a station in the same tribe.
In Bolivia the Bolivian Indian and San Pedro Missions
have a few centers among the Quichuas. The Seventh Day
Adventists maintain a fairly well equipped and aggressive
work among the Aymaras in the Lake Titicaca region of
Peru. Near Cuzco the Evangelical Umon has a good farm
work for the Quichuas.
200 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
The Christian and Missionary Alliance has done prelimi-
nary itinerating and has opened one station among the
Quichuas of the Ecuadorian “Sierra.” )
The Inland South American Missionary Union is at work
among the Guarani Indians of Paraguay and the Terenas of
southern Brazil, and is now projecting an advance north-
ward in the Bororo and other tribes of the great Brazilian
state of Matto Grosso.
These are the main points of contact to date. They have
involved real sacrifice and danger for the brave, devoted
pioneers, but they have barely touched the outer fringe of
the Indian problem. In addition to these hordes of semi-
civilized Indians, who have not in any adequate sense been
evangelized, there are still unknown numbers of savage
Indians on the eastern slopes of the Bolivian and Ecuador-
ian Andes, in northern Peru, in southeastern Colombia,
along the Orinoco in Venezuela, and above all in the vast,
unexplored interior of Brazil, who have yet to be touched
by the first missionary. Many of them are utterly wild, nude
savages, hidden away in the forests, never having seen a
white man. The difficulties of access, climate and language,
as well as the gross moral and spiritual darkness of these
tribes, make the task of reaching them one of the mightiest
challenges ever presented to Christian heroism and faith.
Who will dare to accept this challenge, and when?
CENTRAL AMERICA
Divisions. This area, lying between Mexico and South
America, comprises British Honduras and the six small
republics of Guatemala, Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua,
Costa Rica and Panama.
Area and Population. Its area, about 215,000 square
miles, is somewhat smaller than the combined Atlantic sea-
board States from Maine to North Carolina inclusive. Its
population approximates 6,000,000, one-and-a-half to two
millions of whom are Indians.
Spiritual Neglect and Need. Rich in resources, densely
populated, capable of magnificent development, and lying
so close to the United States, Central America is still one of
the most neglected mission fields in all the world. ‘The
LATIN AMERICA 291
Roman Catholic Church is here as inefficient, bigoted and
corrupt as in the worst South American countries.’”’ It em-
ploys the lottery for raising its funds, has repressed popular
education and !eft the people steeped in ignorance of mind
and darkness of soul.
Inadequate Missionary Forces. The Presbyterians have
a strong Mission in Guatemala, the Baptists are in Nica-
ragua and Salvador, the Friends in Guatemala and Hon-
duras, the Moravians in Nicaragua, the Methodists, Epis-
copalians and Baptists in Panama, but practically confined
to the Canal Zone. The Central American Mission, an in-
terdenominational Faith Mission, is in five of the republics,
the Pentecostal Mission in two, and the Plymouth Brethren
in three.
But most of these agencies have only recently begun work,
and their forces and equipment are small and altogether in-
adequate. While considerable seed has been sown through
the distribution of Bibles and itinerant preaching, there are
only a very few well organized centers of work, and co-
operation between Missions has been very poor. In the six
republics there is but one mission hospital, and not a single
training institution for native workers. There are few
day schools, and there is but one mission school building for
girls and one for boys. In one state a single brand of for-
eign whisky has ten times as many propagandists as there
are gospel preachers.
Little has been done for the Indians except by the Mo-
ravians in Nicaragua. Their work is most worthy, but needs
to be greatly extended to meet fully the need. Throughout
the interior of Central America are numerous tribes of
Indians still living in savagery and paganism—a million or
more in Guatemala alone.
Strategic Centers. The cities of Panama and Colon, at
either end of the Panama Canal and immediately adjacent
to the Canal Zone of American occupation, are notorious
for their vices, with which they befoul the great stream of
the world’s traffic that flows unceasingly past them. They
present a challenge to the Christian forces of America to
turn them into strategic centers of radiating moral and spirit-
ual influence.
292 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS .3
MExIco
Area and Population. Mexico has an area of 786,000
square miles—almost the size of the United States east of
the Mississippi—and a population of 15,000,000.
Resources and Main Features. Mexico is enormously
rich in resources, leading the world in silver and ranking
second in petroleum, copper and dye-woods. In 1919 it pro-
duced 80,000,000 barrels of petroleum. But in social and
educational conditions it is only emerging out of the six-
teenth century, while it suffers the blight of corrupt and
lifeless religion and chronic political revolution.
No’ other country presents more striking contrasts than
Mexico. With a university founded before Harvard or
Yale was ever dreamed of, its masses are distressingly illit-
erate. With a hospital established before the American
Colonies were formed, its people in general are ignorant of
the simplest laws of sanitation and hygiene. While a few
landowners possess unlimited wealth and live in palaces, the
bulk of the populace are poverty stricken and live in hovels.
The “Mexican Problem’’—by which is meant the peren-
nial state of revolution and the evils attendant thereupon—
has become a hackneyed phrase. But as to this condition the
Mexican people deserve sympathy rather than blame, for
their problem can be solved only as they are brought into
vital touch with Christ and His teachings. As one writer
remarks: “There would be no Mexican problem to-day if the
United States and other Christian countries had displayed
the same interest in the development of Mexico’s soul that
they have in the exploitation of her natural resources.”
Evangelistic Opportunity. Mexico presents at this time
a strategic opportunity for missions. To the former legal
religious liberty has now been added actual religious equal-
ity. Evangelical Christianity is favored in official circles,
and the product of the Christian schools is receiving full
recognition. Better still, a spiritual hunger has been awak-
ened, and the response to direct evangelistic efforts among
all classes is such as has never before been known in Mexico
and is equaled in few other Latin countries. This is the
more gratifying in the light of the unsettled political and
social conditions, and also the bitter opposition of the Ro-
LATIN AMERICA 293
man Catholic Church, amounting in some places to open
persecution and acts of violence.
Inadequate Misstonary Occupation. ‘The principal mis-
sion work has heen carried on by the Northern and Southern
Presbyterian and Methodist, Southern Baptist, Congrega-
tional and Episcopal Churches of the United States. Un-
fortunately there has been until very recently no united plan
of work, or agreement as to division of territory among the
missionary forces. The distribution of effort has been
so unequal that fourteen of the twenty-eight states, com-
prising 5,000,000 people, or one-third of Mexico’s total
population, are said even yet to have no resident missionary.
_iYhere are cities of 20,000 which are totally neglected. With
only 200 ordained ministers, both foreign and native, to
preach the gospel to 15,000,000, each minister has 75,000
people dependent upon him.
The Neglected Indians. When it comes to considering
the Indian population, estimated variously from 3,000,000
to 10,000,000, the situation is deplorable in the extreme.
Rev. L. L. Legters, of the Pioneer Mission Agency, states,
on the strength of his recent special study of this field, that
in all Mexico there are only two evangelical missionaries
working among Indians who speak only their own vernacu-
lar. He puts the Indian population at 10,000,000, and cites
_one tribe of over 500,000, three tribes between 200,000 and
300,000, one tribe between 150,000 and 200,000, and sev-
enteen tribes over 20,000.
Such a distressing condition calls imperatively for atten-
tion. Indeed, the whole array of facts concerning the Mexi-
can field is tremendously shocking, and we are forced to the
humiliating acknowledgment that the nearest of all foreign
mission fields to the Christian churches of North America,
lying at their very door, is to-day one of the most neglected
and needy fields in the world.
New Codperative Plans. As evidence of some promise
of better things, it is encouraging to note that under the
_ stimulus imparted by the Committee on Cooperation in Latin
America there was held in Mexico City, in I9I19, a repre-
_ sentative conference of Christian workers which inaugurated
a new cooperative and far-reaching program of missions
for this neglected neighbor republic. May these plans be
294 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
richly blessed of God and their aims speedily begin to be
realized!
Latin West INDIES
Extent and Population. ‘These islands are three in num-
ber, Porto Rico, Santo Domingo-Haiti and Cuba. Their
combined area is over 77,000 square miles, or about the size
of Ohio and Indiana together, and their total population
about 6,500,000. All but Haiti are Spanish in race and
language, except as English is coming more and more into
use under the present dominating influence of the United
States. Haiti, formerly a French colony, is almost purely
negro, and is French-speaking.
Resources. The islands are all extremely fertile, produc-
ing and exporting large crops of sugar, tobacco and coffee,
besides all varieties of tropical fruits and vegetables. The
forests of Cuba and Santo OES are rich in valuable
cabinet and dye woods.
General Conditions. Social, moral and religious condi-
tions in all these islands, excepting Porto Rico, are largely
those of the less advanced states of the Caribbean seaboard.
The control of land, industries and political power is in the
hands of a few individuals, and the masses are cut off from
opportunities of culture and advancement and live in poverty
and ignorance.
In Cuba a striking contrast is now presented between the
low material order of things in general and the new and
up-to-date aspect of the leading centers. Havana, the capi-
tal, and the largest and wealthiest city of the West Indies,
has magnificent driveways and elegant buildings, and is both
a great commercial metropolis and a gay pleasure resort —
which attracts visitors at all seasons.
American intervention in Cuba and Santo Domingo has
brought about decided improvement in government, educa-
tion, and conditions in general, particularly in the case of
Santo Domingo, which was formerly the most backward |
of all the Spanish islands. Political graft in Cuba stands
seriously in the way of good government and education. —
Haiti has been influenced least of all, and has ranked lowest
in civilization of all the republics in the world. It has been —
LATIN AMERICA 295
controlled by unscrupulous rulers, and only three per cent.
of its people can read or write. Voodooism, a relic of
African fetichism, is said +o be widely practised.
Since Porto Rico became a part of the United States, in
1898, general conditions in that island have undergone great
changes for the better. Road building and sanitation have
been promoted, an excellent system of English schools has
been established, and the whole social and moral order im-
proved. On the other hand, industrial opportunities are
limited and there is much poverty among the people.
Missionary Work. Roman Catholicism has been the
prevailing religion of all the islands, but to the majority of
the people it has been little more than a name. The for-
malism, corruption and political activities of the Church
have developed a strong antagonism toward it, and many
have discarded all religion and gone over to spiritualism.
Although some missionary work has been carried on in
the islands for many years, it was of a disjointed character
and with utterly inadequate forces, Only recently, follow-
ing American intervention, have the American churches
given serious attention to the spiritual needs of the islands.
Under the guiding hand of the Committee on Cooperation
in Latin America a united program of occupation has been
launched by the various Home Mission Boards.
In Porto Rico the field was from the start divided among
the denominations, and a high degree of cooperation has
been realized. Perhaps the most rapid and solid expansion
of the evangelical movement anywhere in Latin America
is taking place here, and the steady growth of the churches
and of native Christian leadership promises not only the
speedy evangelization of Porto Rico itself, but also a con-
tribution of no small value toward the work in other Latin
American countries.
In Cuba the work is also progressing encouragingly.
More is being done by the Missions in an educational way
than in Porto Rico, because of the marked insufficiency and
inefficiency of the public schools.
In Santo Domingo the Presbyterian, Methodist and
United Brethren Boards have agreed to establish a United
Protestant Church without denominational distinctions,
while in Haiti the Baptists have been asked to assume the
296 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
primary responsibility for occupation of the field. Actual
operations in both these republics are still in the initial
stages.
The efficient part played by the American Bible Society
in catrying the Bible into every part of the Latin West
Indies should not go unmentioned.
OTHER WEsT INDIES
Passing mention may appropriately be made here of the
other islands of the West Indies, which do not belong to the
Latin group. These consist of (a) French Islands—Guade-
loupe and Martinique, and (b) British Islands—Bahamas,
Jamaica, Leeward Islands, Windward Islands, Barbados and
Trinidad. The population of all these islands consists
mainly of negroes and mulattos. In the French Islands the
population of half a million is nominally Roman Catholic.
There is no Protestant community, and the islands have
‘been entirely neglected by all Protestant agencies except the —
American Bible Society. As a result of Bible circulation
there are a few evangelical believers.
In the British West Indies, which have a population of
about 1,700,000, the long-continued labors of several lead-
ing Societies, chiefly British, have been richly rewarded, and
strong indigenous churches have developed, some of which
have not only become self-supporting, but are now assisting
in the extension of gospel work to less favored islands and
to parts of Central America—whither some of their members
have migrated. At the same time the shockingly low social,
intellectual and moral conditions yet prevailing among many
communities, even in the most advanced islands, are an
evidence of the need still existing for missionary effort.
QUESTIONS
1. How many Americas are there (a) geographically, (b)
racially?
2. Compare Latin America with Anglo-Saxon America (a) in
area and population, (b) in the nature of their early colonization.
3. Classify the population of Latin America racially, and give
its divisions politically.
LATIN AMERICA 297
4. Give the area and population of South America, and the
names by which it has been called, with the reasons for them.
5. Describe its physical features, naming its chief rivers and
mountain peaks.
6. Describe the climate, resources and industries of its different
parts.
7. Tell what is known about the early races of South America.
8. Trace the steps of European discovery and conquest in South
America, giving dates.
g. Describe Iberian rule in South America, and the rise of the
republics.
10. Describe the prevailing social and moral features of South
_ America.
II. Cite the charges against Romanism on the ground of her
record in this continent.
12. Discuss the course and character of early Roman Catholic
Missions here.
13. Give a brief account of the first Protestant missionary ef-
forts.
14. What were the Lancasterian Schools, when and by whom
were they introduced, and what success did they achieve?
15. Outline the career of the great pioneer missionary to the
South American Indians.
16. Name five other noted early missionaries in South America,
17. Describe the part played by the Bible Societies in South
America’s evangelization, giving the names of leading workers.
18. Name the chief Societies working in each South American
country, and mention any important missionary institutions or
other features.
19. Give the population and distribution of Indians in South
America, and indicate the present points of missionary contact
with them.
20. Name the countries comprising Central America, and the
islands comprising the Latin, French and British West Indies.
21. Give the areas and populations of Central America, Mexico,
and Latin, French and British West Indies, describe their social,
moral and spiritual condition, and indicate what missionary work
is being done within them.
CHAPTER XVII
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS
I. General Features. |
Divisions. The Island World is usually regarded as com-
prising the following groups of islands lying in the Pacific
Ocean :—
Malaysia, or East Indies—including Sumatra, Java,
Borneo, Celebes, the Moluccas and many smaller islands.
The Philippines, while usually classed as a separate group |
by themselves, are closely adjacent and a part of the Malay
Archipelago.
Melanesia (the Black Islands)—lying west of 180° E.,
east of Malaysia and south of the Equator, the principal
groups being Fiji, Loyalty, New Caledonia, New Hebrides,
Banks, Santa Cruz, Solomon, Bismarck and Papua or New
Guinea.
Micronesia (the Little Islands)—lying north of the
Equator and west of 180° E., including the Gilbert, Mar-
shall, Caroline, Ladrone (or Mariana) “and Pelew groups.
Polynesia (the Many Islands)—lying east of 180° E.,
including the Hawaiian, Marquesas, Paumotu (or Low
Archipelago), Society, Austral, Hervey (or Cook), Tonga
(or Friendly), Samoa, Ellice, Phoenix and other groups,
besides almost innumerable isolated islands.
Wide Distribution. The Pacific Ocean is the largest body
of water in the world, its area being more than a quarter of
the earth’s surface. Over this vast expanse are scattered
some 30 main groups of islands, and many lesser groups
and separate units. The total number of islands is esti-
mated at 1,500, exclusive of Malaysia and the Philippines.
To illustrate the isolation of the separate members of this
great family of islands, the Carolines may be cited. This
group consists of 49 islands, with a total area of only 600
square miles (one-half the size of Rhode Island), and yet
298
PHILIP.
E Is.
e
r) do
$00 a 90%
MOLUCCA
Ast _'8.
Qs
O? GILBER
13.
PHOENIX
oe we 1S,
O™FLLICE
P yo 18,
SANTA gRUT %”
&,0° o IS. |
& SOLOMON
De 1S.
>
°
on ua y
CALEDON!
TROPIC
UNION
“mo, is:
MARQUESA
Ps) 4
3°
+)
Soc. 1899 28 seu
fad — o
TP On®
a
abo, coo|
a 3 lieavey 138,
oo AUSTRAL
r)
OCEANIA
Oo
THE PACIFIC ISLANDS
300 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
distributed over a sea-surface the size of the Mediterranean. —
Little wonder that the navigators of the sixteenth century —
cruised the Pacific for fifty years without sighting more than —
a few islands.
Population. The native population of Melanesia, Micro-
nesia and Polynesia, or the three divisions constituting what
are known as the “oceanic” islands, lying far out in the
Pacific, is estimated at 1,600,000 or 1,700,000. The islands ©
of the Malaysian division, known in distinction to the above
as “continental” islands, because they lie close to Asia, have —
a population of 50,000,000, and the Philippines 10,000,000.
Physical Features. In formation the islands are of two
kinds. Some are coral islands, built up by the slow work
of the coral polyp; others are of volcanic origin, the result
of upheaval during volcanic eruption. On nearly all of them
are extinct craters, and some have active volcanoes.
The beauty of this island world is entrancing. Writers
have vied with each other in their glowing descriptions of
the wondrous picturesqueness of the scenery, the rugged
mountains, deep valleys and tranquil lagoons, the glistening
fringe of sandy beach, the stately trees, feathery palms and
luxuriant creepers, the profusion of bright blossoms, deli- —
cious fruits and gorgeous birds. Such features as these —
constrained Professor Henry Drummond to call the islands
“spots from Paradise.”
The Island Races. Whence these island dwellers origi-
nally came is still an unsolved problem. It is generally
thought that their original home was in Asia, and that in
the distant past their forebears were driven by fierce storms
across the broad Pacific, until gradually they peopled the
various islands. Leading ethnologists trace the main racial
stock to the Dravidians of India or to the region of Persia,
while the idea of a contributory stream from South America
is also entertained.
In general, the Islanders may be divided into two racial
groups, the Polynesians, who inhabit the eastern islands,
and the Papuans, who people the western groups.
The Polynesians are fairer, taller, more intelligent, and
altogether the finer race. Although they speak many dia-
lects, these all point to a common origin. Their language
is soft and melodious, with few consonants.
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 801
The Papuans are short in stature, black, frizzly-haired,
with flat noses, and physically and mentally inferior to the
Polynesians, They speak a multiplicity of languages which
abound in consonants.
The Fijians stand on the border line between these two
races, having strong characteristics of both.
The Micronesians are also a mixed race, having a Poly-
nesian basis, but with admixtures of Japanese and Papuan
blood which produce quite different types on the various
islands. They are small of stature, with light brown skin,
_ dark eyes and straight black hair.
Social Conditions. Allowing for certain racial and local
differences, the customs and habits of all the Islanders are
strikingly similar. For many centuries they have been com-
pletely isolated from the rest of mankind, uninfluenced by
the great currents of thought and life that have so changed
other parts of the world. The warmth of the climate, the
ease with which they can obtain varied products from a rich
soil—yam, taro, sugar cane and bananas—and an ample
supply of fish from the sea, tend to develop an indolence
which is one of their chief dangers. In their primitive
condition they wore little or no clothing, and their homes
were slight mat structures raised on posts or perched high
in trees. They knew nothing of modern tools or weapons,
yet with their crude stone axes and adzes they constructed
wonderful canoes out of the trunks of trees. The women
were clever at weaving mats from grasses and the pandanus
leaf, and beating out cloth from the bark of the paper-
mulberry or the breadfruit tree.
It is sad, yet true, that where nature has achieved her best,
man is often found at his worst. And so these islands of
enchanting beauty have been the haunts of the lowest
savagery.
“Wars almost exterminated the populations of some of
the islands; the immorality was appalling; from one-fourth
to two-thirds of the children were buried alive; cannibalism
was frequent; the sick and aged were usually killed rather
than left to die a natural death.” *
Religion. ‘In religion they were polytheists almost to the
extent of pantheism, for nearly every object in nature was
1“The Pacific Islands, from Savages to Saints,” p. s.
302 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
in their eyes a god of good or evil portent. Their religious
ceremonies were accompanied with sorcery, human sacri-
fices, and bestial orgies such as might characterize the in-
fernal regions.” ”
“The spirits of ancestors also were worshiped and their
aid sought in battle and in witchcraft. Their crowning
superstition was the tabu. By this certain articles of food,
certain localities or occupations, were forbidden under pain
of death. The tabu forbade women to eat with men, or to
eat pork, fowls, bananas or fish—in fact, most of the choice
articles of food.” °
Yet amidst all this paganism some remnant of man’s
nobler nature remained and at times asserted itself, and it
would be an injustice not to make mention of these better
traits to offset in some degree the darkness of the picture.
“In spite of all the cruelty and horror of their lives, these
people maintained a sunny brightness of disposition, shared
their goods with one another, practised unlimited hospi-
tality, and in their best moments reached out toward some-
thing higher and better. Through offerings, sacrifices,
charms, and ceremonies beyond number, they sought to
bridge the gulf that separated them from God, but because —
their knowledge of God was so mistaken their lives were
lived under shadows that were often black as a starless
night.(/)"
Contact with Civilization. The first European to look
upon the broad waters of the Pacific seems to have been
Balboa, who reached its eastern shores across Panama in
1513. Seven years later Magellan sailed the first European
ships through the Strait which is called after him, and into
what he himself named the Pacific Ocean. Other navigators
and explorers followed, the most famous being Captain
Cook, who was sent out by the British government, and the
account of whose voyages between 1768 and 1778 did so
much to awaken the interest of the West in this new part —
of the world.
In the wake of the navigators came whalers, traders in
sandalwood, copra, pearl shells and tropical fruits, and in ~
othe Pacific Islands, from Htioshe to) Sainte Opis.
3 “Christus Redemptor,”. pp. 7,
4“The Kingdom in the Be ee DOs) tent.
;
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 803
course of time recruiters of island laborers for work in the
plantations and mines of Australia and South and Central
America.
While among these Europeans there were some whose
lives were irreproachable, for the most part they were dis-
solute and unprincipled, and left a shameful trail wherever
they went. They reveled in the heathen immorality, im-
ported rum wherewith to frenzy the natives, and firearms
to add to the horrors of tribal warfare, they deceived and
exploited the Islanders and were guilty of the grossest ex-
cesses and cruelties. Dr. John G. Paton records how traders
deliberately put on shore at different ports of the New
Hebrides men ill with measles, in order to diminish the
population, and how they met his remonstrance with the
scornful words: “Our watchword is, “Sweep these creatures
away and let white men occupy the soil.’ ”’
The traffic in South Sea Island laborers for plantations
abroad was very largely slavery in disguise. Natives were
kidnaped, seized in open raids, or decoyed on board ship
under false pretenses and carried off. Many of them died
of starvation on the voyage, or from fever or ill treatment
on the unhealthy plantations; others were shot while at-
tempting to escape. Comparatively few ever saw their
native land again, and those who did return almost in-
variably brought back the “civilized” vices, to which they
had become addicted, and feelings of intense hatred and
revenge toward the race at whose hands they had suffered.
Dr. John G. Paton estimated that 70,000 Islanders had
thus been taken from their homes by these slave hunters.
The fearless fight which this noble missionary and his
fellows have waged against this iniquitous traffic won for
them the sworn enmity of the unscrupulous traders, to whom
may be traced most of the libelous tales about missionaries
which furnish the stock arguments of critics of foreign
missions.
It should further be said that the massacre of John
Williams, Bishop Patteson and other missionaries, as well
as inoffensive traders in the South Seas, is directly traceable
to the murderous treachery of these white “savages” that
produced in the Islanders such distrust, hatred and thirst for
revenge.
304 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS :
Political Aggression. To the above disgraceful story — ‘
must be added some allusion to the aggressions of the vari- —
ous European governments. Assuming their right to posses-
sion of the islands simply because their subjects discovered —
them, they have acted with little or no regard for the rights ©
of the inhabitants, since the usurpation was professedly for ©
the benefit of the latter. But when account is taken of lands ©
stolen, fisheries depleted, freedom taken away, physical —
strength sapped, and morals further corrupted by the intro- —
duction of Western vices and foul diseases, and the steady ©
depopulation of the islands—in some cases almost to the ©
point of extinction—through these and other imported
causes, it becomes a grave question whether the alleged ad- —
vantages of European rule, such as more settled government, —
better agriculture and industries and the like, can equal the
loss sustained.
Conditions in the islands to-day vary considerably accord-
ing to the government in control, but in the majority of
cases there is still much to deplore. For example, strong —
criticisms from trustworthy sources are current concerning ~
wrongs alleged to exist in the New Hebrides under the
“Two Masters” government of France and Britain. It is
charged that laws prohibiting the importation of firearms
and ammunition are ignored, that the illegal and demoraliz-
ing liquor traffic goes on unchecked, and that existing laws
are treated as a dead letter.
Instances are cited even of the existence of slavery at a —
very recent date, and this under the flags of nations that are —
nominally Christian and boast themselves the champions of —
liberty and equality. Altogether the indictment against
civilized nations in their dealings with the islands of the
Pacific, practically all of which are now under their political —
control, becomes heavy indeed, and one feels the force of ©
the concluding remark of one author, who says: “The sad-
dest thing for a heathen people is to come into contact with ©
civilization without Christianity.” * |
II. Missionary Work.
Of Roman Catholic missionary attempts in the Pacific | 7
Islands, following in the path of the early Spanish navi-
5“The Islands of the Pacific,” p. 51.
? OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 305
gators, there seem to have been few, in contrast to other
lands, so that when the modern missionary movement began
hardly any traces of them were to be found. The record
begins, therefore, with Protestant effort. We shall deal
here with the outstanding facts connected with a few of the
“main island groups.
Society ISLANDS
London Missionary Society Pioneers. The accounts of
Captain Cook’s voyages, which, as we saw in an earlier
chapter, were an important factor in shaping Carey’s mis-
-sionary purpose, aroused extraordinary interest in the South
‘Seas, so that when in 1796 the London Missionary Society
was formed, it was decided to make these islands its first
field of operation. A party of thirty missionaries sailed in
‘September, 1796, in the Duff, under Captain Wilson, and
in March, 1797, reached Taluiti, the largest of some thirteen
islands comprising the Society Islands, named in honor of
the Royal Geographical Society. Eighteen of the party
remained here, ten went on to the Tonga (or Friendly)
Islands, and two to the Marquesas. Only one of the latter
remained, while those on Tonga suffered severe privations
and perils, three of them were martyred and the rest finally
escaped.
Early Hardships. The missionaries at Tahiti were at first
well received by King Pomare, and glowing reports carried
‘back to England by Captain Wilson called forth fresh en-
thusiasm and recruits. But the Duff on her second voyage
was captured by the French, and it was five long years be-
fore supplies or communications reached the lonely workers.
Meanwhile they had been reduced to sort straits, three
were killed, others fled, so that when the nineteenth century
dawned but five men and two women were left, the only
missionaries in all the vast Pacific.
Opposing Forces. Moral and religious conditions on the
island were fearful, and cruel wars were well-nigh incessant.
Pomare’s treatment of the missionaries fluctuated between
courtesy and threats. He was a fickle and brutal king, who
during his career offered 2,000 human sacrifices to his gods,
He died in 1804, and his son, Pomare II, who succeeded
| ee
306 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS —
him, at first walked in his footsteps, until the missionary
outlook became as dark as possible.
Turning of the Tide. Prompted by the grave reports rei
ceived from the field, a special meeting was called in London
in July, 1812, to pray for Pomare’s conversion, and in that
very month he gave up his idols and asked for baptism,
This was the turning point of the work in Tahiti. Idolatry
was completely overthrown, the king sent for a printing
press to prepare Bibles and hymn books for his people,
and at his own expense he built a huge church, where in
the presence of 4,000 of his subjects he was baptized. Thed
light spread not only over all Tahiti, but also from island ‘
to island of this and other groups, through the efforts of
the Tahitian Christians as well as the missionaries, and
Tahiti will ever be known as the seed-plot from which the
gospel was scattered far and wide over Oceania. :
French Occupation, Unspeakably sad to relate, this new ‘
and happy state of affairs in the Society Islands was ruth-—
lessly broken up by the greed of a so-called Christian nation.
A long succession of intrigues and oppressions began with
the violent intrusion of Roman Catholic propagandists in-
1836, under the protection of French warships. In 1842
a French protectorate was forced upon the islands, and full”
annexation followed in 1880. Liquor and vice were intro--
duced, mission schools closed, and all the work of the mis
sionaries obstructed, until finally the London Missionary”
Society had to withdraw and turn over its operations to the
care of the Evangelical Society of France. :
i
Fijy1 IsLanps
Population. This group lies on the border line between
Polynesia and Melanesia, and about 1,000 miles north of |
New Zealand. “When first visited, more than a century
ago, the population numbered about 200,000, but it has been
reduced since then to 117,000 or less, largely through the
ravages of certain infectious diseases.” °
The People, Of the Fijians, Dr. D. L. Leonard says im
part: “Physically and intelligently they rank among the fore-
most in the South Seas; but before Christianity wrought its
6 Rey. D, L, Leonard in ‘The Pacific Islanders,” p. 143.
, Das
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 307
astounding miracles of transformation they had no equals
for brutality, licentiousness and utter disregard of human
life. The world over their'name was a synonym for all that
is atrocious, inhuman and demoniacal.”’ *
Another author writes: “In character they occupied a
preeminence of degradation unrivaled by that of any other
islanders. . . . Cannibalism, occasional on many of the
island groups, or reserved for the treatment of conquered
foes, was here elevated into a national cult and custom. The
man who had eaten the greatest number of human beings
was highest in social order. They used to mark these pleas-
ant little achievements by memorial stones. The great chief,
‘Ra Undreundre, had 872 of these set up to mark his
prowess.”’ ®
Missionary Beginnings. The story of how the gospel was
introduced into this “annex ante-chamber to the bottomless
pit” is a novel one. It came about by means of a curious
combination of circumstances which man might regard as
pure accident, but which was unmistakably of God’s design-
ing. The first ray of light came through converts from the
Tonga Islands, 300 miles east, where the English Wesleyans
had begun work in 1823 and had reaped a rich reward in
the conversion of several thousands. Among the Tongans
who crossed in their canoes to Lakemba, an eastern island of
the Fiji group, for purposes of trade, were some recent
Christian converts whose testimony made a deep impres-
‘sion upon the Fijians. This led to the sending of Revs.
Wm. Cross and David Cargill in 1835. They met with a
rough reception, several of their native Christian teachers
were killed, and their own lives were in danger. But before
long their kindness broke down the hatred and won the
good will of the savages. In five months 31 were baptized,
and 280 within one year.
But meanwhile by a stranger providence the gospel was
finding entrance into Ono, a small island 150 miles south
of Lakemba. In 1835 a terrible epidemic raged on this
island, and all the efforts of the pagan priests to overcome
it by devices to appease the angry gods utterly failed. In
this emergency one of the chiefs, crossing to Lakemba,
7 Rev. D. L. Leonard in “The Pacific Islanders,” pp. 143, 144.
8 “Christus Redemptor,” pp. 139, 140.
308 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
learned from another Fiji chief who had visited Tahiti that
the only true God was Jehovah, and that one day in seven”
should be set apart. for His worship. Laying hold of this
fragment of truth he and his people set aside the seventh
day. and, dressing in their festive attire, attempted to worship
this unknown God. While they were thus groping their way
toward the light, a*Christian Tongan teacher visited Ono™
and told them all he knew of the new faith. Later, other
teachers were sent to them from Tonga, and a deep work
of grace began. The entire population of this and a neigh-—
boring island renounced idolatrous practices. In 1839 Rev.
James ot alvert, who had the previous year reached Lakemba, —
was sent over to Ono, and within a few months it was given
to him to baptize 200 converts. :
Strongholds of Satan. As yet, however, only the out-—
skirts of the awful realm of darkness in Fiji had been
touched. The worst islands lay to the west, whither the
missionaries proceeded. A fierce battle lay before them, |
for they seemed to be attacking the very seat of Satan.
Some of the horrors which they were forced to witness—
at one time the strangling of the sixteen wives of the king’s ©
son who had been drowned, at another the cooking and
eating of the bodies of eleven war captives—were almost
beyond endurance. For a full decade their faith continued ©
to be sorely tested. |
Wonderful Transformation. Finally, in 1845, a sweep- |
ing revival began. Several influential chiefs—one of them —
a monster of iniquity—came under pungent conviction of ©
sin and were regenerated by the Spirit, and their people —
followed in large numbers. From these beginnings such a _
marvelous work of grace swept the entire islands that sixty —
years later there were 826 churches and 1,000 points where ©
the gospel was regularly preached. Church members num- —
bered 36,000, additional inquirers 17,000, and 80 per cent. —
of the whole population were attendants upon public wor- —
ship. The baptismal font of one fine church, made out of a
stone upon which formerly human victims for cannibal —
feasts were slaughtered, speaks eloquently of what the gospel ¥
has done in the Fiji Islands. ‘
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 309
New HeEpsriIpDES ISLANDS
Extent and Population. This group, lying to the west of
the Fiji Islands, comprises about 70 islands, some 30 of
which are inhabited. The estimated population is 70,000,
but among that number 20 different languages are spoken.
Three Great Missionaries. In connection with the mar-
velous work of transformation which has taken place among
these Islanders, once ferocious savages degraded by horrid
customs and steeped in gross superstition, three names will
ever shine with peculiar luster. These names are John
Williams, John Geddie and John G. Paton—*‘the three
epistles of John,’ as they are sometimes called.
John Williams, the first of the trio and deservedly called
“the Apostle of the South Seas,” was identified with the
New Hebrides in death rather than in life. Born in Eng-
land in 1796, he was sent out by the London Missionary
Society in 1817 to its work in the Society Islands. He was
a born leader and a man of unusual resource and action,
whose vision for the work reached out far beyond that of
the missionaries who preceded him. Declaring that he
could not content himself “within the narrow limits of a
single reef,’ he launched a campaign of expansion and
began the training of a native agency to augment the mis-
sionary force for carrying the gospel to other islands. The
result was the extension of missionary effort within a few
years to the Austral, Hervey, Samoan, Fiji and other
groups. From first to last five mission ships, purchased or
built by himself, were pressed into service by this dauntless
apostle, and with such effect that by 1834 “no group of
islands, nor single island of importance within 2,000 miles
of Tahiti had been left unvisited.” °
The inception of the work upon each new island involved
dangers and hardships not a few, but the native workers no
less than the English missionaries rose nobly to the task, and
they were as nobly backed by the prayers and gifts of the
native churches.
The blessing and power of God attended the efforts of
Williams and his co-laborers, particularly in the case of
Raratonga in the Hervey group, and also Samoa, in a degree
9“The New Acts of the Apostles,” p. 119.
310 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS ~
seldom paralleled elsewhere. Says Dr. A. T. Pierson: “The
changes which the Apostle to the South Seas saw defied
description, and when described seem fables for the credu-_
lous. He himself was overawed by the proofs of the hand’
of God. At Tahiti over 14 years had gone by before one
convert was made. Yet Williams witnessed changes noth-—
ing short of a radical revolution, within 20, 18, 12 months,
and sometimes within as many days. He went to islands —
where all were heathens; he visited them later to find chapels
with thousands of worshipers; he found them without a —
written language, and left them reading in their own tongue —
the wonderful words of God.” *°
Williams spent four years in England (1834-38) pub-
lishing his “Missionary Enterprises,” the sale of which ran ©
to 40,000 copies, seeing through the press the Raratongan ~
New Testament, raising money for a new ship, securing —
new recruits and perfecting other plans. His visit awakened ©
immense new interest in South Sea Missions.
Soon after his return to the scenes of his previous tri- ©
umphs in Raratonga and Samoa, he set his heart on a visit
to the New Hebrides, and sailed for that group in his new
ship Camden, taking with him 12 native teachers as pioneers, —
On November 20, 1839, he landed on the Island of Erro-
manga with Mr. Harris, a young man sailing in the Camden.
All seemed pleasant at first, but suddenly a shout was heard,
the natives turned upon them, and before they could make
the shore both men were felled by the clubs of savages and ~
then speared to death. Their bodies were dragged into the
bush for a horrid cannibal feast.
As the tidings of Williams’ martyrdom reached Samoa
a wail of profound grief rose from the hearts of thousands —
of converts. But at once 25 volunteered to take his place,
and in six months the Camden was again at Erromanga,
where two were landed, but after a year of suffering were
forced to withdraw. Continued attempts were made at the
cost of a number of lives and much suffering, and by 1852,
through the agency of these Samoan teachers and their
Erromangan converts, 100 had been won from heathenism
and two chapels built. But even after that Erromanga was
stained by the blood of many another missionary martyr.
10 “The New Acts of the Apostles,” pp. 118, 119.
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS $11
By arrangement during Williams’ visit to England, the
London Missionary Society was to open the New Hebrides
work with native workers from other islands, and the field
was then to be manned by the Presbyterians of Scotland
and Nova Scotia.
John Geddie, “the father of Presbyterian Missions in the
South Seas,’’ reached the most southerly island of Aneityum
in 1848. Asa boy in Nova Scotia “little Johnnie Geddie”
had pored over the stories of the heroes of the South Seas
and longed to become a missionary. Finally his persevering
efforts were rewarded and the Nova Scotian churches sent
him as their missionary.
It was through many trials and vicissitudes, and by dint
of infinite patience and perseverance, that Mr. and Mrs.
Geddie won the confidence of the natives and eventually
saw the gospel triumph over vile heathen practices and im-
morality. Mr. Geddie reduced the language of Aneityum
to writing, and his translation of the Gospel of Mark was
the first completed book published in any language of the
Western Pacific. He established a printing press and a
training school for native workers, and 50 evangelists have
gone forth from Aneityum to other islands, supported by the
gifts of the native church.
“On a tablet in the large church, seating 1,000 people,
this inscription was placed in memory of John Geddie:—
‘When he landed in 1848 there were no Christians here;
when he left in 1872 there were no heathen.’ ” **
John G. Paton became perhaps the best known of all the
missionaries of the last generation, because of the world-
wide circulation of his wonderful autobiography. “No nar-
tative of missionary toils and triumphs is either more read-
able or more romantic, more graphic or pathetic, or more
abundant in proofs of supernatural power.” **
Born in a Scotch highland home, with its plain living
and high thinking, Dr. Paton was sent out in 1858 by the
Presbyterian churches of Scotland, Canada, Australia and
New Zealand, and with two associates and their wives
settled on the Island of Tanna, where Messrs. Turner and
Nesbit and their wives, missionaries from Samoa, had
11 “Christus Redemptor,” p. 160.
12“The New Acts of the Apostles,” p. 347.
812 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
landed in 1842 and after terrible experiences had been
rescued by a passing ship. For four years these new mis-
sionaries battled against all the powers of darkness, Their —
lives constantly threatened by dark foes and in danger of
treachery from professed friends, they went steadily on,
teaching, healing, and befriending all whom they could
reach. But after they had displayed superhuman courage
and overcome tremendous difficulties, the situation grew so
grave that nothing remained but flight from the island.
Dr. Paton’s subsequent labors were upon the small Island
of Aniwa, where, after a series of experiences as thrilling
as ever fell to the lot of any missionary, he finally witnessed —
a marvelous work of grace which changed the whole popu-
lation from murderers and cannibals into the “most openly
and reverently Christian community that he had ever vis-
ited.” The story of this heroic man “records perhaps fifty
cases in which his life was threatened, or death by violence
overhung him; yet in marvelous ways deliverance came, so
that his preservation seemed like a perpetual miracle.” *°
The work of evangelizing the several islands which still
remain heathen, as well as caring for the churches already ~
established, is now in the hands of the John G. Paton
Memorial Mission, with a staff of five missionary couples
and some 120 native teachers. The work includes a native
teachers’ training institute and three small mission hospitals.
MELANESIA
In addition to the New Hebrides and Fiji groups, the
former always classed as belonging to Melanesia, the latter
usually so classed, brief mention must be made of two other
islands—Santa Crug and New Guinea—because of their
connection with two great missionary martyrs, Patteson ~
and Chalmers.
Bishop Patteson. In 1849 Bishop Selwyn, the missionary
bishop of New Zealand, began the work of the Melanesian
Society of the Anglican Church of New Zealand. He
cruised extensively among the islands, and established a
center first at Auckland and later on Norfolk Island, where
promising young men from the different islands were trained
13“The New Acts of the Apostles,” p. 309.
Sa a oa,
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 313
to become native teachers and evangelists among their own
people.
In 1855 Selwyn was joined by John Coleridge Patte-
son, an Oxford graduate of rare gifts and rarer consecra-
tion. In 1861 Patteson was made missionary bishop of
_ Melanesia, and thereafter for ten years he directed the work
of island evangelization far and near with singular devotion
and success. The greatest difficulty he encountered was the
wicked work of white traders in carrying off Islanders for
enforced labor in the plantations of Fiji and Queensland.
He fought this fiendish traffic with all his power.
It was in 1871 that with a group of his beloved island
workers in the Southern Cross he headed for Nikapu, one
of the Santa Cruz Islands. Landing alone and without sus-
_ pecting any harm, he was cruelly murdered and his body
placed in a canoe to drift back to the ship. Upon his breast
had been inflicted five wounds covered over with a palm
branch tied in five mysterious knots. It was learned later
that this signified that the deed was done in revenge for the
kidnaping and death of five natives at the hands of white
traders some time before. It is reported that work is being
carried on vigorously in over 30 islands by Bishop Patte-
son’s Society. Young people from all these islands are
being trained on Norfolk Island, and in 1905 there were
already 550 natives teaching in 250 schools and churches
with more than 16,000 scholars, while there were over
12,000 baptized members in the native church of Melanesia.
James Chalmers. ‘The name of this other great mission-
ary will ever be associated with Papua or New Guinea, the
land for which he laid down his life as a martyr.
New Guinea has the distinction of being the largest island
-in the world. Its area is 312,000 square miles, or more
_ than the combined area of all the other Pacific islands to the
east of it, comprising Melanesia, Polynesia and Micronesia.
“If you were to place the map of New Guinea upon the map
of America it would stretch from New York to Omaha,
and from Canada to St. Louis.” ** It is thus a vast country
of high mountains, forest-clad valleys, broad plains, great
rivers and rich resources still largely undeveloped. Indeed,
14Rev. C. W. Abel in The Missionary Review of the World, March,
TO23 30. 107. :
314 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD WIDE MISSIONS
although the island was discovered by the Portuguese in |
= sy a
I511I, a great portion remains yet unexplored, owing to the —
trying climate and the ferocity of the natives.
The northwest section now belongs to the Dutch, the
southeast (and since the War the northeast, which was —
formerly German) to the British, The whole native popu- —
lation is estimated at 1,000,000.
James Chalmers, called by Robert Louis Stevenson the —
“Great Heart of New Guinea,’ was born in Scotland, and ©
as a boy received the missionary vision through hearing an ©
address on the Fiji Islands. He and his wife were sent out
by the London Missionary Society, in 1867, to Raratonga,
where they spent ten years.
_ When Chalmers went to New Guinea in 1877 the work
there, already begun by such noble men as Dr. MacFarlane
and Dr. Lawes, was in its early pioneer stage. Chalmers
with his physical strength, superb courage, quick intuition,
tact and resourcefulness, was eminently fitted for pioneer-
ing. He pursued a policy of broad exploration and the
planting of a chain of stations at intervals along the coast.
His career was marked by many thrilling adventures and
hairbreadth escapes. His heroic character and splendid
achievements were among the foremost influences that
changed Stevenson from a prejudiced critic to an enthusi-
astic friend of missions. :
Chalmers twice revisited England, and threw himself with
tremendous energy into presenting missions in great meet-
ings throughout the country. His simplicity, fervor and
contagious enthusiasm stirred thousands to new missionary
interest.
His thirty-three years of lofty service ended in martyr-
dom in 1901. Together with a young missionary named
Tomkins and several native helpers Chalmers landed on
Goaribari Island to make some explorations. Without
warning they were set upon by the savages, clubbed to death
and their bodies eaten. The news of Chalmers’ death was
received with passionate sorrow by the thousands of natives
to whom he had been friend and father. Later, a monu-
ment to the martyrs was erected on the spot, and a church
now stands near the ground where their red blood stained the
sands,
a es ee ee ee ee
gE ee
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 315
The London Missionary Society now has 13 stations
along the southern coast of New Guinea, at an average of
50 miles apart. Rev. Charles W. Abel, who went to that
field in 1890 and was for eleven years associated with
Chalmers, has recently stirred American audiences by the
wonderful story of divine grace and power in his work at
Kwato.
Two other Societies, the Australian Anglicans and Wes-
Jeyans, have also had work on the New Guinea coast for
some years.
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS
Special interest attaches to this group, not only on ac-
count of the complete transformation wrought by the gospel
within an incredibly short time, but also because, by the vote
_ of the Hawaiian people, the islands have become a part of
the United States.
Discovery. The islands were discovered in 1778 by the
famous English navigator, Captain Cook, who named them
the Sandwich Islands. Cook was killed by the natives in
an unfortunate affray. Hawaii lies at the “‘cross-roads of
the Pacific,’ over 2,000 miles from San Francisco, and is
the central point of a great network of ocean highways
between all parts of America and Asia, as well as the other
Pacific Island groups.
Size and Population. The islands have an area of 6,640
square miles, slightly smaller than New Jersey, and a popu-
lation of 284,538, according to the latest reliable estimate. *°
An analysis of this population is significant as showing how
the bulk of the inhabitants are no longer Hawaiians, but be-
long to other races, the Japanese largely predominating.
The exact figures are: Hawaiians 21,738, part Hawaiians
18,868, Japanese 117,047, Filipinos 30,763, Chinese 22,745,
_ Koreans 5,486, Portuguese 26,093, Spanish 21,120, Porto
Ricans 6,329, Americans, British, Germans and Russians
32,763, others 586. The serious bearing of such a diversi-
fied population upon missionary work will be readily ap-
parent.
Physical Features. The islands are largely of volcanic
15 Estimate of June 30, 1922. See Statesman’s Year Book (1923).
316 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
G
oi
¢
wy, 5
origin and contain a number of noted active volcanoes. ©
Their exquisite natural beauty and fertility, together with
their delightful climate, have won for them the name “Para-
dise of the Pacific.”
Early Conditions. Like the other Islanders, the Ha-
waiians were sunk in the lowest social degradation and moral
pollution, and given over to spirit-worship and all sorts of
debasing superstition. The tabu had here reached a highly
developed system which held the people in its tyrannous ;
grip.
i These terrible conditions were further aggravated by the
visits of white traders, who violated every law of God and
man, dealt treacherously and brutally with the natives, in-
dulged in shameless debauchery, and introduced rum and
- venereal diseases which wrought fearful havoc and deci-
mated the population.
How the Gospel Entered. The story of how the gospel
first entered Hawaii is one of unusual interest. A Hawaiian
lad named Obookiah escaping from a tribal war was brought
to America by a kind-hearted ship captain. He was found
one morning weeping upon the steps of Yale College, in
despair of getting an education for which he longed. Some
Christian students, Samuel J. Mills among them, befriended
him, and his education was provided for. He became a
Christian, and was zealously preparing to go back as a mis-
sionary to his people when he sickened and died. But his
example had stirred the hearts of others. Hiram Bingham,
a student of Andover, volunteered to go in his stead, others
joined him, and on October 17, 1819, a company of seven-
teen set sail from Boston and reached the islands in March,
1820. Thus began the famous Mission of the American
Board to the Hawaiian Islands.
Idolatry Bantshed. ‘These first missionaries on their ar-
rival found a situation altogether unique. A strong and
able chieftain, Kamehameha I, had succeeded in uniting
the islands in one powerful state, and thus putting an end to
the constant and bloody wars. Moreover, a reaction had
set in against idolatry, mainly because of tidings which had
come concerning the wonderful changes wrought by the
gospel in Tahiti and other southern islands. The Hawaiians
had turned against their idols, destroyed their temples and
a eS Na
a OT ay ae a ae
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 317
made a beginning at abolishing the tabu. The missionaries
were astonished to find a people actually without a religion.
Yet there were difficulties enough still to face, one of the
most formidable being the vicious influence of unprincipled
white traders. These wickedly sought to turn the king and
people against the missionaries by subtle lies about their
aims, and persistently opposed every effort for reform.
Nevertheless the work took root, the language was reduced
to writing, a printing press established and stations opened
on several islands.
Royal Converts. Among the first converts were the
queen, the queen-mother and other members of the royal
family, who became devout Christians and took an active
interest in the work of the gospel. The most famous of all
Hawaiian converts was the high chiefess Kapiolani, in whom
the grace of God wrought a marvelous change. The story
is a thrilling one of how she resolved to break the lingering
hold of superstition upon her people by defying the much-
feared goddess Pele, who had her abode in the depths of the
fiery volcano Kilauea. Against the pleadings of her ter-
rorized subjects she made the terrible journey of a hundred
miles on foot over rough lava beds, ate freely of the berries
sacred to Pele, and fearlessly ascending to the very brink
of the crater hurled stone after stone into the great lake of
fire, challenging the reputed fire-goddess to avenge herself.
“Tt was a brave and heroic deed that has been likened to that
of Elijah on Mt. Carmel, challenging the priests of Baal,
and to Boniface in Germany, cutting down the sacred oak
of Thor,” ** and it had its similar effect upon the people.
The Great Awakening. For some years the numerical
growth of the church was small, the missionaries being ex-
tremely careful not to admit any who might wish to adopt
the new faith merely in imitation of their rulers. By 1825
there were only 1o baptized members, and by 1832 only
577 in all the islands. Then, in 1837, came “The Great
Awakening,” largely the result under God of the evangelis-
tic tours of Rev. Titus Coan. A wave of spiritual revival
swept the island, congregations increased to thousands, and
the missionaries labored day and night with throngs of
anxious inguirers. On one memorable Sabbath day at Hilo,
16 “The Transformation of Hawaii,” p. roo.
318 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
1,705 were baptized by Mr. Coan, and 2,400 sat down at
the Lord’s table.
Under the heading “The Pentecost at Hilo” Dr. Pierson
has graphically described the wonderful scenes witnessed as
a result of the Holy Spirit’s work. The revival continued
in full force until 1843, and during those six years about
27,000 converts were received into the church. Ultimately
this awakening brought about the transformation of the —
social, political and industrial life of the island.
Growth and Extension. The robust character of the
Christian churches of Hawaii early showed itself in their
efforts to spread the gospel to other island groups. In 1852
they joined enthusiastically with the American Board in
Jaunching the first mission in Micronesia, and have ever
- since continued to send and support their own ‘representa-
tives there. The work in these islands has passed through
the same successive stages and accomplished the same cheer-
ing results as in those already mentioned, until the foreign
missionary agencies have been able gradually to withdraw :
and to entrust the spiritual interests of the now largely evan-
gelized islands to the well-developed native churches.
So great was the advance towards a Christian civiliza-
tion in the Hawaiian Islands that the American Board in
1870, on its fiftieth anniversary of the founding of the Mis-
sion, announced its decision to withdraw from the field,
leaving the work entirely under native leadership.
Annexation to U. S. A. In 1894 Hawaii became a re-
public, in 1898 it was annexed to the United States, and in
1900 it was organized as a Territory. Missionary prob-
lems have since been greatly complicated by the influx in
such large numbers of other races, chiefly Japanese and
Chinese, bringing with them their heathen religions and
customs.
PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
Location, Area and Population. These islands, called by
some writers “The Land of the Palm and the Pine,” lie
about 500 miles east of Indo-China, and are separated from
Borneo, of the Malaysian group, by the Sulu Sea. There
are some 7,000 islands and islets, more than a thousand of
ee ee ee OS a
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 319
which are named. Eleven are large and important, the
largest being Lugon in the north, and the next Mindanao
in the south. The total land area is 112,000 square miles,
or about equal to New England and New York, and nearly
as large as Great Britain and Ireland. The population is
between 10,000,000 and 11,000,000,
Physical Features and Resources. The islands are vol-
canic in origin, with a number of volcanoes still active,
mountainous and well wooded, and they possess a wealth of
verdure and a rich soil yielding heavy crops of rice, hemp,
sugar cane and tobacco. The cocoanut industry is one of
the largest, and rubber plantations are now assuming im-
portance. Mineral resources are also great, but as yet un-
developed.
The climate is tropical, with wet and dry seasons, but
varies considerably in different parts according to elevation.
Though hot, it is not unhealthy, and with present improved
facilities Americans can live here comfortably.
The People. ‘The great variety of tribal divisions and
languages to be found on the islands has led many writers
to erroneous statements about the diverse character of the
people. More careful study has shown a high degree of
solidarity of race among the native population.
The Negritos are regarded as being the aborigines of the
islands, driven back into the interior by the invading race.
They are diminutive blacks, living in a semi-savage state,
and are slowly dying out.
Apart from these, the Philippine Islanders give evidence
of being Malay in origin, the differences among them being
accounted for by earlier and later migrations. Of these
there are three main divisions, known as Igorrotes, Moros
and Filipinos.
The Igorrotes, lowest in social order, consist of a number
of more or less fierce tribes living mainly in the mountains.
They probably represent an earlier migration of more primi-
tive Malay stock, and are strong, energetic people—fine ma-
terial in the rough. They still retain their primitive pagan
religions.
The Moros are “Mohammedan Malays who were rapidly
pushing their conquest of the Archipelago when the Span
iards conquered the islands. Their advance was checked by
320 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the Spaniards and they were driven off the northern islands |
and confined for the most part to the Sulu Archipelago and
the island of Mindanao.’ *’ They are divided into several
tribes, and hold fanatically to a degraded form of Moslem >
faith.
under control during the Spanish occupation, but they have
Neither the Igorrotes nor the Moros were ever brought ©
begun to yield encouragingly to the fairer and more tactful
dealings of the American administration.
The Filipinos, traced to a later migration of Malay stock, —
constitute nine-tenths of the native population. They are
the highest type of the Islanders, have been more or less
nominally converted by the Spaniards to the Roman Catholic
faith, and are known as Christian Filipinos.
In addition to these native races there is a large foreign
population, representing many nationalities—Spanish, Por- —
tuguese, Chinese, Korean, Siamese, etc. Of these the Span-
ish and Chinese have all along been the most numerous and —
have exerted the deepest influence upon the Philippines.
Both have intermarried with the Filipinos, giving rise to an —
influential mestigo, or half-caste population. The Spanish ©
mestigos became the aristocrats of the Philippines. The —
Chinese, who began to trade with the islands even before ©
their discovery by Magellan, have by their keen business |
ability and industry easily captured the bulk of trade from —
the easy-going and none-too-industrious Filipino, and are —
to-day everywhere the leading merchants.
Historical Résumé. The Philippines were discovered in —
1521 by Magellan, the Portuguese navigator, and later were ©
named in honor of Philip of Spain. The first serious at- —
tempt to colonize and Christianize them was made by Le-
gaspi in 1564. Spain kept possession until 1898, when by
the swift victory of Admiral Dewey over the Spanish fleet
in Manila Bay her supremacy was broken and the Philip-
pines passed into the hands of the United States.
The Old and New Régimes. Spain is to be credited with
some accomplishments in the islands. She introduced the
beginnings of civilization, reduced the principal dialects to
writing, gave some education to the upper classes, and sup-
planted heathen religion by at least the form of Christianity,
17 “Christus Redemptor,” p. 221.
}
: =~ ms _—— =" = ~“t = _ 7 ae a _
ee es
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 321
with its truer viewpoint and higher ideals. But what she
failed to do stands out far more prominently than what she
did, and the record of her stewardship is one of superficial-
ity and inefficiency.
American occupation found the islands at a low level
materially, intellectually, morally, religiously. It is safe to
say that the first twenty years of the new régime have seen
more accomplished for the advancement and welfare of the
Islanders than four centuries of the old.
Particularly noteworthy has been the new educational
system introduced by the United States government.
Within three years of the transfer of the islands the first
shipload of 500 American teachers had landed in Manila,
and five years later the enrolment of pupils in the secular
schools had reached 500,000. This educational system has
been of a thoroughly practical character, stress being laid
upon industrial and normal training, until the part played by
American teachers is more and more becoming that of super-
vision, and the bulk of the teaching has passed into the hands
of trained Filipinos.
The Roman Catholic Friars. Under the Spanish régime
the political power passed to the ecclesiastical leaders. The
Report of the Taft Commission says: ‘The friars, priests
and bishops constituted a solid, powerful, permanent, well-
organized, political force which dominated policies.” *°
They acquired property to an enormous value, all free of
taxation. They enriched themselves by exorbitant fees for
religious rites, stifled all freedom of thought, and imposed
a galling yoke of oppression upon the people. Besides all
this, their foul sensuality has made their profession of
celibacy a stench, and has been a prime factor in bringing
about a general condition of shocking sexual immorality.
Moreover, the Roman Catholic Church has not censured,
but has rather tolerated, the social evils of cock-fighting and
gambling, so prevalent and ruinous in Filipino life. The
record of Roman Catholicism in the Philippines, therefore,
is practically the same as in Latin America. It has been
largely a hollow farce of external rites and priestly trap-
pery, devoid of reality and saving power.
Evangelical Missions. In the light of what has just been
18 Quoted in “The New Era in the Philippines,” p. 126.
322 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
said, no apology need be offered for the prompt entry of
Protestant missionary agencies into the field when control —
passed from Spain to America, and religious liberty was
established. A conference of American Mission Boards —
was called and an agreement made for the division of the
field, with Manila as a common center.
The first permanent missionaries to enter were Rev. and
Mrs. J. B. Rodgers, of the Presbyterian Board, who arrived
in April, 1899. The Methodist Episcopal and Baptist
Boards began work in 1900, followed very soon by the
United Brethren, Disciples and Protestant Episcopal and
later the American Board and Christian and Missionary
Alliance. Two great Bible Societies—the British and For-
eign and the American—were also early on the ground. to
- contribute their invaluable aid.
Rapidity of Results. From the very first the evangelistic
work met with a warm response from the people. In the
Presbyterian work in Manila alone there were 9 converts
the first year, 27 the second, 200 the third, and 410 the .
fourth. In other stations and societies there were similar
results. Within five years after the first missionary landed
there were over 2,000 adult Protestant Christians in the
islands; now there are at least 125,000.
Accessory Methods. Educational and medical work have
been added to evangelism. ‘The first Mission hospital was
opened by the Presbyterians at Iloilo in 1901, and the first
Mission boarding school was the now prominent Silliman
Institute at Dumaguete, on the island of Negros.
A fruitful agency has been the Christian hostels for Fili-
pino students attending the Government schools of higher
learning in the large centers. These hostels surround the
students with moral safeguards and pure spiritual influences
in the midst of strong temptations, and they have been the
means of winning many of these bright young people to
Christ and leading some of them to dedicate their lives to
His service.
Unreached Sections. It must be remembered that mis-
sionary work thus far has been almost wholly confined to
the so-called “Christian” Filipino population. The Moham-
medan Moros and the pagan tribes, together numbering
nearly a million, have scarcely been touched. These present
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 323
a field of pressing need and no little difficulty, and there
should be no further delay in entering that field.
America’s Stewardship. In the providence of God the
privilege and responsibility of ministering to the spiritual
need of these 10,000,000 bright, responsive, but hitherto
neglected Islanders has been entrusted to the Christians of
America. It is not enough to give the Philippine Islanders
liberty and education, and to train them for ultimate self-
government, high and worthy as these objects are. They
need to know the only true God and Jesus Christ whom He
hath sent to be their Saviour. Will the true followers of
Christ in America see to it that this knowledge is given
them, given all of them, and without delay?
MALAYSIA
Location. Malaysia consists of a vast Archipelago of
large and small islands lying between southeastern Asia and
New Guinea and Australia. These islands are otherwise
known as the Dutch East Indies, with the exception of
North Borneo, which is British, and North Timor, which is
Portuguese.
Population and Races. This division of the Island World
covers a vast expanse of 873,000 square miles, and has a
population of over 50,000,000,
This population presents one of the greatest mixtures of
racial elements to be found anywhere in the world. There
are the indigenous races such as the Malays, Javanese, Sun-
danese, Bataks of Sumatra, Dyaks of Borneo and a host of
others. Then come the Chinese, both Straits-born and from
China, numbering a million or more and speaking five dif-
ferent dialects, Tamils and Telugus from India, Arabs,
Eurasians of all varieties, a large number of Europeans of
different nationalities, and finally quite a few Americans.
Singapore, on the tip of the adjoining Malay Peninsula,
which serves as a great rendezvous and distributing point
for the island races, is perhaps the most cosmopolitan city
in the world, and throughout Malaysia 150 languages are
said to be spoken.
The Missionary Problem. Missions face the task of
reaching three main classes:
324 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
”
Bs
1
4
(1) Mohammedans, These form the bulk of the popu- :
lation, numbering at least 35,000,000. Islam began its
penetration of this region as early as 1200 A.D. To-day ~
it holds religious sway over most of the indigenous tribes,
and is advancing rapidly with the hope of absorbing the re-
maining heathen. Fortunately Mohammedans here are more
approachable and more easily influenced by the gospel than
elsewhere, so that the fruits of missionary work among
them are many times larger than in the Near East. But
the situation calls for prompt and energetic action, for no
less than 20,000 Arabs are here zealously carrying on Mos-
lem propaganda, and the ever-increasing pilgrimages to
Mecca are binding Malaysia more and more closely to Islam.
(2) Chinese. These are already numerous and are said
- to be increasing by immigration at the rate of 250,000 a
year. They are the most industrious and progressive ele-
ment and have become the commercial masters of the Archi-
pelago. With their keenness for Western education and
enlightenment they show a disposition to support liberally —
Christian schools. They constitute a strategic base, both
for Malaysia and for China itself, and their thorough evan-
gelization is imperative.
(3) Native Heathen Tribes. Perhaps eight or nine mil~
lion aborigines remain who have not yet been laid hold of by
Islam. These belong mostly to inland tribes difficult of ac- —
cess. They are very low in the social scale, some of chem
still wild cannibals. But missionary effort among them,
notably on Sumatra and Celebes, has already been blessed
with abundant harvests, and they are becoming more and
more open to the gospel.
Missionary Occupation. Christianity was introduced into
the Archipelago in the sevententh century by the ministers
of the Dutch East India Company, but it was of a very low
order, and the early missionaries of the Netherlands M1s-
sionary Society, which in 1812 began work in the islands,
found the professed Christians so degenerate as to be —
scarcely distinguishable from the heathen. They labored
faithfully among them, however, with good results. Other
Dutch Societies followed, as well as the Rhenish Mission
from Germany, and to-day eight or more continental agen-
cies are still at work. The pioneer missionaries suffered
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 325
severe hardships and dangers and some were martyred. The
records contain some noble names, albeit little known in
English-speaking countries.
The American Methodist Episcopal Mission also entered
this field in 1905, the Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel has work in British North Borneo, and the British
and Foreign Bible Society is circulating the Scriptures far
and wide in many languages.
The most important work and the largest results are in
Sumatra, Java, Celebes, Borneo, some of the Moluccas and
a few other small islands. Altogether the missionaries num-
ber between four and five hundred, and the native member-
ship has reached 600,000, including 45,000 converted Mos-
lems. The present force is far from adequate for the exist-
ing work, while many portions of Malaysia are still wholly
neglected.
Unevangelized Territory. Dr. Zwemer in his survey of
the Malay Archipelago calls attention to many whole islands,,
and parts of others, which are yet without any missionary
work. This list includes large portions of Sumatra, Borneo:
and Celebes, together with such islands as Banka, Madura,
Flores, Timor, Bali, Lombok and one or more of the Mo-
luccas, besides several groups in the Sulu Archipelago. He
estimates the entirely unevangelized population of these
islands at between 6,000,000 and 7,000,000. In two of
them Hinduism prevails, in all the rest Mohammedanism is
either already dominant or is rapidly displacing paganism.
This fact makes their evangelization the more urgent.
CONCLUSION
Nowhere has the gospel won more glorious triumphs or
wrought more wonderful transformations than in the island
World. Nowhere, it must also be said, have spiritual vic-
tories cost more dearly. They are sealed with the blood of
many a martyr and bear the scars of heroic sacrifice and
suffering.
In some parts of Oceania the work of evangelization ‘s
complete, in others it is only partially done, while there are
parts which still await the beginning of work. “There are
perhaps a million savages in New Caledonia, Papua, New
326 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Hebrides, Santa Cruz, the Solomon and Bismarck Islands
yet untouched by the gospel.” *°
The years that have passed since this ocean field was
entered have increased, rather than diminished, the mission-
ary problems. The influence of trade and “civilized” vices
is penetrating more and more deeply. Practically every one
of the island groups has now come under the political con-
trol of one or other of the Great Powers, and the sad fact
is that this has proven with few exceptions to be to the moral
and spiritual detriment of the Islanders. Under French
rule, which now extends over a population of about 80,000
in the South Seas, Protestant Missions find themselves
thwarted and hindered.
Commercial expansion has led to the introduction of
Asiatic labor into the Pacific. In the Fijis alone there are
now 40,000 Indian coolies. This means for the imported
Asiatics a life little different from absolute slavery. It
means for the Islanders fresh exposure to the influences of
false religion. ‘The Moslems among the coolies are strenu- —
ously seeking to win not only the Hindus, but also the Chris-
tian Fijians, to Islam. Whether they succeed or not, the
coolie element is increasing so rapidly that Fiji will soon be |
heathen again. The islands that were won so gloriously, and
at such a cost of blood and treasure, are passing under the
sway of Islam before the very eyes of the Church, and she
does practically nothing till Islam has obtained a tremendous
advantage; and what is happening in Fiji is just what is
bound to happen all over the Pacific.” *°
Must it ever be that the “children of this world are wiser
. . than the children of light?” Will the churches of
Christendom awaken to see the dangers that threaten to re-
verse the victories already won, and will they bestir them- |
selves to worthier efforts to check the challenging forces,
and strengthen and complete the good work so well begun?
The future of the Pacific Islands hangs upon the answer to
this question.
19 “World Survey of Interchurch World Movement,” 1920.
20 “The Kingdom in the Pacific,” pp. 121, 122.
OCEANIA, OR THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 327
QUESTIONS
1. Give the great divisions of the Island World, and the main
islands or groups in each.
2. Give some idea of the number, extent of distribution and
population of the Pacific Islands, and describe their physical fea-
tures.
3. Divide the Islanders into racial groups, and describe briefly
each one.
4. Describe the social and religious life of the Islanders before
Christianity reached them.
5. Tell how civilization first touched the islands, and what its
prevailing effect has been.
6. Give some account of the aggressions of European Govern-
ments in the Pacific.
7. Sketch the story of Missions in each of the following island
groups, giving dates, names of prominent Societies, missionaries
and converts: (a) Society, (b) Fiji, (c) New Hebrides, (d)
Hawaii.
8. Give an account of the martyr missionary of (a) Santa
Cruz, (b) New Guinea, and the subsequent development of the
work in those islands.
-g. Give the location, size, population, physical features and re-
sources of the Philippines.
10. Name and describe the main divisions of the people of
the Philippines.
11. Outline the history of the Philippines, and contrast the old
and new governmental régimes.
12. Describe the character of the Roman Catholic Friars and
their work.
13. Sketch Protestant missionary work in the Philippines, giv-
ing date of first missionary arrival, names of main Societies, and
some idea of the results.
14. Give the area and population of Malaysia, and some idea
of the variety of races and languages.
15. Name the chief Societies working in Malaysia, and describe
the three distinctive classes to be reached.
16. What proportion of the Island World is still unevangelized,
and what detrimental influences are at work where the gospel has
already gone?
CHaPpter XVIII
THE JEWS
The only reference thus far made to the Jews in this vol-_
‘ume is in connection with Palestine and the Near East, but
the great bulk of the Hebrew race lives no longer in the Holy
Land, but in Europe and North America. While these two
continents do not fall within the geographical scope of our
‘present missionary survey, yet that survey would be seri-
«ously incomplete without some further mention of the race
which, although it gave the world its Redeemer and its
first Christian missionaries, is now scattered far and wide,
a fugitive among all nations, and is as needy of missionary
effort as any heathen or Moslem people.
Number and Distribution. According to the American
Jewish Year Book for 1923-24, the total Jewish population
of the world is over 15,500,000. The distribution by conti-
nents is :-—
TTPO PRy ho) iy eas ian ieaths wn ming 10,530,755
North and South America....... 3,850,122
ASO lsc ek east ergter wlattie ee cle tis Siu es 599,581
yh eds Ml ECO AE A AGU aR ag balet 8 AE 508,295
PRUSUDALASIAND Moni eiaiis atk) eater actos 24,045
15,518,798
From these figures it will be seen that two-thirds of the
Jews live in Europe, and one-fourth in North and South
America. The other three continents combined have only
slightly over 7 per cent. of the total population.
The countries having the largest Jewish population are:
United States, 3,600,800; Poland, 3,500,000; Ukrainia,
2,200,000; remainder of European Russia, 716,000; Rou-
mania, 950,000; Germany, 615,000; Hungary, 500,000;
Czecho-Slovakia, 360,000; Austria, 350,000; British Isles,
300,000.
328
THE JEWS 329
The vast majority of Jews in every country live in the
larger cities in separate communities, closely packed to-
gether, and distinct in social life from the surrounding Gen-
tiles. Greater New York has 1,750,000 Jews, the largest
Jewish population of any city in the world. Chicago has
over 300,000, Philadelphia 230,000, and seven other U. S.
A. cities have each between 50,000 and 100,000.
Language. Most Jews speak the language of the country
in which they dwell. In addition, however, Yiddish is
spoken by perhaps nine-tenths of all the Jews, including the
majority of those in continental Europe, the British Empire
and the United States. Yiddish has been well called the
international tongue of the Jews throughout the world. It
is not based upon any Eastern language, but is a corrupt
German of the Middle Ages with a sprinkling of Polish and
Hebrew words, written with Hebrew characters. A very
extensive literature has sprung up in this exclusively Jewish
tongue, and at least twenty-five newspapers are published in
it. In the case of many of the poorer classes it is the only
language known, making it necessary for the Jewish mis-
sionary to learn it in order to reach his hearers.
Progress and Prominence. The Jews are in many ways
the most remarkable race in the world. Next to the Chinese
and the Egyptians they are the oldest race, with a history
that stretches back over 3,800 years. Threatened with na-
tional destruction at least five times in the course of their
history, they have been divinely preserved, and to-day they
are more in number, probably, than at any previous time.
Always and everywhere an object of dislike and prejudice,
and many times of plunder and massacre, they have not
-merely survived, not merely increased in number, but have
made for themselves a worthy record of progress and
achievement along every line, intellectual, social, political
and commercial. The Jew has become a factor of prime im-
portance in every civilized nation, and the Jewish question
holds the attention of the entire world to-day.
The names of Jews stand high in the list of distinguished
men of letters, historians, poets, novelists, journalists, scien-
tists, musicians, artists, scholars, educationalists, physicians,
lawyers, bankers and capitalists down through history.
As to the prominence and influence of the Jews in Amer-
830 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
ica the following facts relating to New York City speak for
themselves. Just a trifle over one-fourth the population of
that greatest American metropolis is Jewish. Yet the Jews
have their grip tightly upon the principal wholesale and re-
tail business, own and control all the theaters, own two
and perhaps three of the English daily newspapers, as well
as three Anglo-Jewish weeklies and two monthlies, and com-
prise the bulk of the industrial workers. Of the public
school children 38 per cent. are Jewish, while a survey of
nine of the leading colleges and universities in 1918-19
showed 381% per cent. of their entire student body to be
Jewish. |
In a striking article entitled, “Is there Room for the Jew?”
in the Missionary Review of the World for December, 1915,
Rev. S. B. Rohold sets forth a striking array of facts and
figures to show the vital place of the Jew in the affairs of
the great nations, and particularly his contribution in men,
money and brains to the World War. At that early stage
of the War 550,000 Hebrew soldiers were already in the
ranks—double the proportion of Gentiles engaged—and
many of them won distinction and were awarded decora-
tions for deeds of heroism. In Great Britain five Hebrews
were holding positions in the Cabinet, five were in the House
of Lords, six were Privy Councilors, sixteen were Baron-
ets, fourteen were Knights, and eighteen were members of
Parliament. It was Lord Reading, Britain’s Lord Chief
Justice—a Jew—who at a crisis moment secured for Britain
and her Allies a loan of $500,000,000 in the United States,
in the face of strong opposition. It was Henry Morgen-
thau—a Jew—who as Ambassador for the United States at
Constantinople during the War bore a superhuman strain
of responsibility for the lives, property and interests in Tur-
key of the citizens of ten other nations besides America, and
won the praise and gratitude of all alike for his devoted and —
splendid service. It was Herr Arthur Ballin—a Jew—who
organized and directed that wonderful railway transporta-
tion system of Germany by which the Kaiser’s troops were
skilfully transferred time after time, and with tremendous ©
effect, from one fighting front to another. These are but
a few instances among many which the article in question —
cites. Summing up, Mr. Rohold says: “The Jew, imperish-_
THE JEWS vot
able as ever, has been strenuously leading in all the episodes
of the War, in its politics, in its economy, in its finances,
in its organizations, in its supplies, in its armies and in its
horrors. The Jew is not wanted, yet at the same time he is
being sought after, especially by the warring nations.”
Religious Conditions. As to religion the Jews are divided
into two main classes or sects—Orthodox and Reformed.
The Orthodox Jews are found principally in Eastern
Europe and the Near East, and also in America and Lon-
don. They accept the Old Testament and also the tradi-
tions of their fathers as contained in the Talmud, and they
look and long for the coming of the Messiah and for res-
toration to their own land. They answer to the Pharisees
of old.
Reformed Jews are found mostly in Germany, France,
Italy, the British Empire and America. The sect was
founded in Germany less than a century ago, and has had
its fullest development in America through the late Rabbi
Wise and others. Reformed Jews belong mostly to the well-
to-do, educated classes. They reject the Talmud and the
inspiration of the Old Testament, have given up the hope
of a personal Messiah and of a return to Palestine, and have
practically become Judaistic Unitarians. They answer to
the Sadducees of old. To some extent they imitate Chris-
tian methods in worship and church work, in many cases
even to the holding of their religious services on Sunday.
“In a general way it can well be said that the Jews the
world over are religiously disintegrating, and that the
younger generation is drifting away from the religion of the
fathers.” *
Jewish Missions. We cannot here attempt any account
of Jewish Missions through the first eighteen centuries of
the Christian era, with their ebb and flow of enthusiasm,
early successes and medieval persecutions, revived interest
after the Reformation, and subsequent decline and disap-
pearance before the wave of German rationalism.
Modern Missions to Jews began in 1809 with the found-
ing of the London Society for Promoting Christianity
among the Jews, more commonly known as the London
Jews’ Society. Its scope, originally confined to London,
1 “Report of World Missionary Conference,” Edinburgh, Vol. I, p. 272.
332 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS '
gradually extended, as doors opened, until it has Missions in |
i
q
almost all parts of the world—Europe, Asia, Africa and —
America. This Society in 1914 reported a staff of 250 7
missionaries, over gO of whom were Christian Jews.
From time to time other Societies entered the field—
British, Continental, American, Canadian, Asiatic, Austral-
asian and African. Accurate figures as to the present num-
ber of missionary agencies and workers among the Jews
throughout the world are difficult to secure. A good deal
of the work in Europe was disrupted by the War, and is ©
only now beginning to be resumed. On the other hand, the ©
forces in the United States and in Palestine have increased
since the War. It is probably pretty near the mark to say
that there are about 150 Jewish Missionary Societies and
oe rp ae sie he ge
~ 800 workers. Many of these agencies, however, carry on |
work in only one center, with one or two workers and very
limited equipment.
Methods of Work. The equipment of the larger centers |
of work among Jews is varied and extensive. ‘The staff
usually consists of one or more missionaries, Gentile or
Jewish, who can speak Hebrew or Yiddish and also the local
language of the community, assistants for house-to-house
visitation, colporteurs, Bible women, school teachers, doctors
and nurses.
The departments of work embrace preaching in halls and
on the street, distribution of literature by colporteurs and
in Bible depots, day, boarding and Sunday schools, mother’s
meetings, classes for sewing, cooking, etc., hospital and dis-
pensary. Comparatively few centers combine all of these
features. Direct preaching has nearly always held the fore-
most place, and the distribution of the Word has gone hand
in hand with it. In some countries, where laws restrict pub-
lic preaching, colportage work and Bible depots have been
the most important methods.
Medical work has been a fruitful means of overcoming
prejudice and winning open doors among the Jewish masses,
while schoolwork has attracted great numbers of children,
in spite of the bitter opposition of the Jewish leaders.
Missionary effort, however, has been largely confined to
the common classes of Orthodox Jews, and the mission
THE JEWS 333
methods ordinarily employed are not well adapted to reach-
ing and influencing the more educated and cultured Jews.
Results Achieved. The results of Jewish Missions are
much greater than they are generally thought to be. Their
success can never be measured by statistical tables. For
example, a number of missions do not baptize converts or
receive them into church membership, but confine them-
selves to evangelization. Many converted Jews remain
secret disciples because of the ostracism, persecution, and
in not a few cases danger to their very lives, which open
confession of Christ would involve. Still others change
their abode and later on are baptized in some Christian
church or another mission. And yet it is stated on good
authority that during the nineteenth century 224,000 Jews
were baptized, of which number about one-third entered the
Protestant Church and the remainder the Greek and Roman
Catholic Churches. Protestant converts were one to 156
of the Jewish population, while the converts from heathen
and Moslem nations were only one to 525. Since the War
it is estimated that 100,000 Jews have been baptized.
In quality and worth Jewish converts stand very high.
Thousands among them have heroically endured fierce per-
secution for Christ’s sake, while a large percentage have be-
come preachers of the gospel. Hebrew Christians consti-
tute a large majority of the missionaries among the Jews
to-day.
In the list of converted Jews stand such honored names
as Saphir, Edersheim, Neander, Schereschewsky, Rabino-
witz, and many more.
_ But the indirect results of Jewish missionary work are
-noteworthy, as well as the direct. The bitter prejudice of
Jews against Christ and Christianity has been greatly modi-
fied. The no less bitter spirit among Gentiles toward the
Jews, which goes under the name of anti-Semitism, has been
lessened. The manifestation of Christian love by the mis-
sionaries, and especially such practical forms of Christian
service as medical and relief work, have proven a happy and
effective antidote to the shameful and un-Christian persecu-
tion of Jewish communities in Europe and the insulting
treatment of Jews in other parts.
334 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS j
One need but scan a current issue of any one of the sev-—
eral excellent Jewish missionary magazines to be impressed _
with the fruitfulness and hopefulness of work among He-—
brews everywhere, despite all attendant difficulties and
handicaps. i
The Task Remaining. With a very few possible excep- :
tions, no part of the Jewish mission field is yet adequately
occupied. New York City, for example, with its 1,750,000
Jews, or half the entire number in the United States, has —
half-a-dozen Missions, each with a mere handful of work-
ers, and lacking full equipment for its task. There are 160°
other American cities, with from 1,000 to 500,000 Jewish —
inhabitants, in many of which there is not a single worker —
among the Jews.
The Christian forces at work among the millions of Jews —
in Eastern Europe are hopelessly insufficient, while practi-—
cally no effort is being made to reach the Orthodox Jews —
in Central Asia, and little or none the Reform Jews in Ger-—
many and the United States,
The Call to Advance. The evangelization of the Jew
rests upon a threefold claim—what the Jew has been, what —
he is to-day, and what he is yet to become in the future. :
Can we ever forget what we owe to the race which has ©
given us the Bible, the Saviour, the first missionaries who
took the gospel to our pagan ancestors in Europe? Can we ©
fail to appreciate the leading role played by this race in every —
department of the life of civilized nations to-day, and the
tremendous force they are bound to exert, for good or for
evil, according to the influences brought to bear upon them?
An investigation of present conditions in Greater New
York as regards such matters as social vice, crime, organized .
labor and radicalism, and the relation of the Jews to all of
these things, would be a revelation to many complacent
Christians,
And lastly, are we ignorant of the wonderful place re-
served for this chosen race in the divine program of the
future, as clearly foretold in the Scriptures, when no longer
rebellious and rejected as now, but repentant and restored
to God’s favor, they shall be His willing and effective wit-
nesses to the whole world? Let us remember that “blind-
ness in part is happened to Israel until the fullness of the
THE JEWS 835
Gentiles be come in.” But “if the casting away of them be
the reconciling of the world, what shall the receiving of
Puemiabe but life ‘fromthe deadr (GC Romi itis 15; 25).
“Whatever the future may unfold, this much at least is evi-
dent from Scripture, that God purposes using the Jews ina
large way in bringing the world to Christ. . . . “To the Jew
first’ reveals the divine strategy of Missions, not only in the
first century, but in all centuries. If the Jew is the center
of the divine purposes, then his evangelization ought to be
the supreme object of Christian effort. The Jew is the key
of the world’s missionary campaign.” ”
But however Christians may differ in their interpretation
of prophecy in relation to the future, there should be no two
opinions as to the need and duty of giving the gospel to every
Jew in the world to-day. On this point we cannot do better
than close with a quotation from one of the most recent
books on this subject:
“What is the Christian’s present-day duty in behalf of
the evangelization of Israel? On the very face of it the
answer to the question must be measurably affected by the
fact that 15,000,000 souls of men in blindness and hardness
of sin are in the presence of Christian people, whose field is
encompassed by nothing less than the word ‘whosoever’
. . . How a person with a Bible in his hands can advocate
missions to Mexicans, missions to South Americans, mis-
sions to Alaskans, and to Asiatics, Africans, and the be-
nighted among the islands of the sea, and neglect or oppose
missions to Jews challenges reasonable consideration.”’ *
QUESTIONS
1. Give the present number and distribution of Jews throughout
the world.
2. What languages are most spoken by the Jews to-day?
3. Give illustrations of the progress and prominence of the
Hebrew race in past and current history.
4. Name and describe the main religious sects among present-
day Jews.
5. (a) When did Modern Missions to Jews begin? (b) Name
the first Society to open work, and state the present extent of its
field.
2“A Century of Jewish Missions,” p. 275.
8“The Jew and His Mission,” p. 143.
38386 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
6. Describe the activities of a typical Jewish mission center.
§
7. Indicate something of the results, both direct and indirect, ©
of Jewish mission work, and name several highly honored con-
verts.
to-day.
g. On what threefold claim can the evangelization of the Jew
be said to rest?
'
8. Mention some of the most neglected fields among the Jews
CHAPTER XIX
UNOCGCUPEED: FIELDS?
There are two ways of considering missions. One is to
dwell upon the work already accomplished; the other is to
contemplate what yet remains to be done. For the most
part, consideration of the subject has been wholly from the
former standpoint. It is quite legitimate, and it is highly
gratifying and inspiring, to reflect upon missionary progress
to date, to recount obstacles overcome, fields entered, sta-
tions opened, converts won, churches established, and all the
splendid and varied achievements of missions, both direct
and indirect.
But in the joy and satisfaction of contemplating the un-
paralleled progress of missionary work in recent years, the
Christian Church must guard against the serious danger of a
self-complacency which takes pride in what is after all only
a partial accomplishment of her allotted task. She needs
to remember, and to apply to the missionary situation to-day,
the words of God to Israel, long after they had entered
Canaan and begun the conquest of the Promised Land:
“There remaineth yet very much-land to be possessed.”
The “Regions Beyond.’ When we turn our eyes from
what has already been done, and view the vast proportions of
the yet unfinished task of missions, all ground for easy com-
placency and congratulation is at once swept from under us.
Says Dr. Zwemer: “We must-not be blind to the fact that
there is still work which remains to be begun, as well as
1 The available data upon which to draw for the subject matter of this.
chapter are necessarily meager in volume and somewhat lacking in ac-
curacy, because of the incompleteness of surveys, want of any thorough
census, and limited information in general concerning many parts of the
great unoccupied fields. The main sources of information here relied upon
have been the Report of Sub-Committee on Unoccupied Fields to the
World Conference, Edinburgh, 1910, Dr. Zwemer’s “The Unoccupied Mis-
sion Fields of Africa and Asia,’ more recent articles in The Missionary
Review of the World and other magazines, and reports and letters from
pioneer missionaries in various Se ot the world.
338 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
ee
work which remains to be finished, if the plan of campaign is —
to be all-inclusive in its scope. ‘There are still many por- —
tions of the world and great areas of population without —
organized missionary effort; where the forces of evil hold ©
their own as securely as if the Saviour had never conquered ;
where the famine-stricken have never heard of the Bread
that came down from Heaven for the heart-hunger of the —
world; where the darkness of superstition and error has >
never been illumined by the torch of civilization and the light
of the Gospel.” ?
A Moral Obligation. Frank and serious attention to the
problem of the unoccupied sections of the missionary world
is “justified and demanded both by the claims which Chris-
tianity makes and by the command of our Lord. Christian-
ity claims to be, for all ages and peoples, the all sufficient
and the only sufficient religion. A moral obligation attaches
itself to such a claim. If Christianity be the only sufficient
religion for all the world, it should be given to all the world.
Christ’s command also lays upon the Church an obligation —
for nothing less than a world-wide promulgation of the
Gospel.” ®
Twofold Division. We may perhaps best consider un-
occupied fields under the following twofold classification:
(1) Large integral areas practically untouched and outside
the plans of existing missionary operations; (2) Unreached
areas and constituencies within countries already entered.
I. INTEGRAL AREAS PRACTICALLY UNTOUCHED AND OUT-
SIDE THE PLANS OF EXISTING MISSIONARY OPERATIONS.
It is a most solemnizing fact that at this late date, and
after more than a century of the modern missionary era,
vast areas lying at the heart of each of the three great mis-
sionary continents—Asia, Africa and South America—re-
main almost wholly untouched.
1. The Heart of Asia.
A survey of this immense region includes the following
countries :
Mongolia. Lying to the west of Manchuria, and divided
into Inner and Outer Mongolia, this vast plateau has an
2 “The Unoccupied Mission Fields of Africa and Asia,” =
3“Report of World Missionary Conference,” Beintatoi 1910, Vol. I,
Pp, 279.
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS 339
area almost equal to that of China proper. Estimates of its
population vary widely, the lowest being 1,800,000, the
highest four times that figure. Practically all the mission-
ary work is confined to the southeastern section of Inner
Mongolia. The fields of itineration cover less than one-
eighth of the total area of the country. In all Outer Mon-
golia, which constitutes three-fourths of the area, except for
Urga, there is not a single mission station or resident mis-
sionary.
On a conservative estimate, therefore, 2,000,000 of these
nomadic people are wholly unreached.
Chinese Turkistan. This region, lying still westward,
is now known as Sinkiang, or the New Dominion. Like
Mongolia, it is a Chinese dependency, and it consists of a
series of sandy basins surrounded by lofty mountains. Its
inhabitants are of various races and number about 1,200,000.
“The highest trade route in the world leads from India over
the Karakoram Pass, 18,300 feet, into Chinese Turkistan.
Caravans loaded with ‘tea, spices, cloth and Korans’ make
the dangerous journey. Skeletons of horses and camels
strew the pathway, and yet 13500 Chinese Moslem pilgrims
chose this path over the roof of*the world to Mecca ina
single year.” * Except for a few scattered .points of light
this whole region lies in utter spiritual darkness. Only two
Societies are represented here. The Swedish Missionary
Society entered in 1892 and now has four stations—Kash-
gar, Yarkand, Hancheng and Yangihissar—in the far west.
Between them and the only other station, that of the China
Inland Mission in Urumtsi (Tihwafu) in the east, lies a
fertile and populous district of sixty days’ travel, with no
_ missionary work whatever.
Tibet. A lofty tableland ranging from 10,000 to 17,600
feet in altitude, and with mountains reaching 28,000 feet,
Tibet, which lies between the Himalayan and Kwenlun
mountains, has been called ‘The Roof of the World.” Be-
cause of the extreme difficulty of access and the fierce hos-
tility of its people, it long remained a land of complete
mystery, despite repeated attempts of explorers and mis-
sionaries to enter. Within recent years the country has been
penetrated as far as Lhasa, its proud capital, although no
4“Report of World Missionary Conference,” Edinburgh, Vol. I, p. 194.
340 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
foreigner has been allowed to remain there, or anywhere —
within Inner Tibet. The country is bleak and rugged, and
large regions still remain unexplored.
The Tibetans: belong to the Mongolian family, although
differing considerably in type from the Chinese. Formerly ©
the country was under the sovereign authority of China, but
while Chinese suzerainty is still recognized in name Tibet —
is virtually self-govérning, under a ruler known as the ©
|
i
if
ta
‘
%
'
‘
.
Dalai Lama. The population has generally been placed at ~
6,000,000, but the Statesman’s Year Book for 1923 favors
a drastic cut to about 2,000,000. ‘The fact is that both fig-
ures are little more than guesses, as no reliable census has
ever been taken.
The prevailing religion is Lamaism, a corrupt form of
Buddhism with strongly Animistic features. The country
is completely in the hands of the priests or lamas, who dwell
.
in highly decorated monasteries, lead abominably dissolute ©
lives, and lay the common people under a crushing burden
of taxation. Polyandry is commonly practised, in some sec-
tions at least, and moral conditions in general are shocking.
Missionary attempts to enter Tibet have repeatedly been ~
made ever since the Roman Catholic Fathers Huc and Gabet
penetrated to Lhasa in 1845, only to be arrested and sent as
prisoners to Canton. The story of these prolonged efforts to
enter this great closed land is full of heart-stirring heroism.
A cordon of missionary outposts is being drawn around
Tibet, and although the walls of this defiant ‘‘citadel of
Satan’? have not yet fallen, much faithful labor has been
bestowed upon Tibetans on both the India and China bor-
ders, and the wedge of missionary occupation is being driven
slowly but firmly into the forbidden territory.
The oldest effort is that of the Moravian Mission labor-
ing in the remote and isolated region of Lesser Tibet, ad-
joining Kashmir, India. Entering in 1856, this heroic little
band has exhibited the highest courage and consecration in
the midst of severe hardship and danger. The Mission now
reports four main stations and 153 baptized Christians.
The Church of Scotland and Scandinavian Alliance Mis-
stons, and a few independent workers, are laboring on the
India frontier at Darjeeling. On the China side are the
China Inland Mission, Christian and Missionary Alliance,
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS 841
United Christian Mission and Pentecostal Bands of the
World, each occupying one or more strategic points within,
or close to, the border of Tibet, and itinerating over con-
siderable areas.
The names of two missionary martyrs—Petrus Rijnhart,
a Hollander, who lost his life in 1898 while making the at-
tempt with his wife, Dr. Susie Rijnhart, to reach Lhasa,
and Dr. A. L. Shelton, the intrepid pioneer and devoted
doctor of the United Christian Mission, who was shot by
brigands in 1922, will ever be treasured in the memory of
those who have longed and prayed for the conquest of Tibet.
There is to-day no land that stands in sorer need of mis-
sionary effort and intercession than this one.
Nepal and Bhutan. South of Tibet, and high up within
the Himalayan range, are these two independent kingdoms,
with a combined population of 6,000,000, The people vary
in race and religion. Some are Mongolian in origin and
Buddhists; the majority are Hindu in descent and faith.
Both the Gurkhas, who dominate Nepal, and the Bhutanese
are fine robust people and fairly progressive, but the coun-
tries are still closed to Europeans and without a Christian
missionary.
Afghanistan. Westward still, and lying between N.W.
India on the east and Persia on the west, is Afghanistan,
with a population of over 6,000,000, according to latest
estimates. Afghans comprise the dominating race, and
Persian and Pushtu are the main languages spoken. The
government is an absolute despotism under the Amir, with
Kabul as his official seat.
The country is largely mountainous, yet there are fertile
parts with considerable agriculture. The government’s rigid
policy of excluding foreigners has restricted trade with
other nations and stood in the way of development and prog-
ress of every kind. “Afghanistan is morally one of the
darkest places of the earth, ‘full of the habitations of
cruelty.’ Judicial corruption and bribery are universal, and
the criminal law, based on the Koran and tradition, is bar-
barous in the extreme. Torture in every conceivable form
is common, and the prisons of Kabul are horribly inhu-
man?7?
5 “Report of World Missionary Conference,” Edinburgh, Vol. I, p. 193.
342 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
In religion Afghanistan is fanatically Moslem. There is
no such thing as personal freedom, and a rigorous law makes
the profession of Christianity punishable with death, Even
more than Tibet, therefore, Afghanistan stands out as a
Gibraltar of stubborn resistance to missionary effort. It is
regarded as the most absolutely unoccupied and closed mis-
sion field in the world.to-day. And yet there are indications
that at last the impact of the West is beginning to be felt in
this isolated land. Afghan traders have penetrated into the
remote bazaars of India, Moslem pilgrims pass through Per-
sia to the shrines of distant Mecca and Kerbela, and the
Afghan government has recently made a move toward estab-
lishing trade relations with America. These are cheering
signs that the long and unnatural insularity of Afghanistan
is breaking down. Whatever the process employed, these
changes unquestionably find their efficient cause in God,
and are being wrought through the fervent prayers of those
who jealously long for the opening of this last land to the
message of the Cross.
For years a thin ‘line of missionary outposts has been
forming on the various sides of this stronghold of the
enemy. ‘The earliest gospel effort for Afghans is to be
traced to Bannu, on the Indian frontier, where the Church
Missionary Society opened a station in 1865. ‘There the
gallant Dr. Pennell gave his life by contracting blood poison-
ing from an Afghan patient, and died a martyr to the cause.
This same Society has stations at several other points all the
way from Quetta in Baluchistan to Srinagar in Kashmir,
and is carrying on work by itineration, and through its hos-
_ pitals and the circulation of the Scriptures, among the semi-
independent states and frontier tribes.
The Wesleyan Missionary Society has also a station at
Quetta, and the Central Asian Mission, organized in 1902,
has its base at Hoti-Mardan, near Peshawar.
On the Persian side the American Presbyterian station at
Meshed, quite near the border, offers one of the most stra-
tegic points for advance. Meshed is closely connected with
Afghanistan by one of the main caravan trade routes. Dur-
ing 1917 Afghan merchants purchased 1,791 copies of the
Scriptures at the Presbyterian Mission, while not a few
Afghans have been treated as patients in the Mission hos-
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS 343
pital. The Mission includes Afghanistan in its ultimate ob-
jective, and is ever watching for an opening into this domain
of bigotry and superstition.
Baluchistan, Lying directly south of Afghanistan and at
the extreme western corner of the Indian Empire, of which
it is nominally a part, a small portion of this country is di-
rectly under British administration, while the remainder is
under native government with British supervision. It is a
bleak and arid country, almost unknown to most people, and
has been named by one traveler “the rubbish heap of the
world.” The latest figure given for its population is about
800,000. Its social, moral and religious conditions are those
of Afghanistan. Except for the one station at Quetta, al-
ready referred to, Baluchistan is untouched by missionaries.
Russian Central Asia. Under this head is included all
that region of the late Russian Empire lying between Kash-
mir, Afghanistan and Persia on the south and Siberia on
the north, and between Chinese Turkistan on the east and the
Caspian Sea on the west. This vast area of about 1,500,000
square miles was formerly known under the names Turki-
stan, Bokhara, Khiva, the Trans-Caspian province and the
Steppes, but now under the Soviet régime it is divided intoa
number of autonomous political units, Bokhara and Khiva
being still independent states with treaties of amity between
them and the present Russian government. The region em-
braces lofty mountains, ghastly deserts, rolling, grassy
plains and fertile valleys, and has wide extremes of climate
and other features. Its population reaches 15,000,000, and
comprises “a conglomeration of different races, tribes and
peoples, struggling for existence rather than for mastery.”
Despite railway connections with the great Siberian line
and with the steamers of the Caspian Sea, making Central
Asia accessible to Europe and bringing a touch of Western
civilization, life still preserves much of its primeval sim-
plicity.
Islam for many centuries has held almost undisputed
sway, and its usual fruits of social and moral putrefaction
are in full evidence. Eighty-five per cent. of the population
is illiterate. Almost the only education is the study of the
Koran in Arabic by groups at the mosques. The city of
Bokhara, with 10,000 students and 364 mosques, has been
344 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
called the “Cairo of Asia,” as being the center of Moslem —
learning and influence for all the Middle East.
Generally speaking this great population is still unreached —
with the gospel. A few German Mennonites, expelled from
Russia, exert some influence among their Moslem neighbors.
The Bible is available in Arabic, Turkish and Russian, and
parts of it in a few of the other languages spoken, and some
Bible Society colportage work has been done. A highly edu-
cated and heroic Christian woman of Russian birth, Miss
Jenny de Mayer, has given herself with singular devotion
for years to itinerant work among the Moslems of these and
other lands. At the cost of great hardship and risk of life
she has even made attempts to enter Afghanistan. At last
reports she was in the region of Samarkand and Tashkend,
but meeting with much opposition from the Soviet authori-
ties. The group of Brethren in England known as “Chris-
tian Missions in Many Lands’”’ are reported to have one small
station in Turkistan.. But these efforts of a few individ-
uals, truly worthy as they are, are far from sufficient to
justify this field being classified as occupied territory.
To sum up the foregoing, even apart from Mongolia we
find in the heart of Asia a solid block of territory, stretch-
ing more than 1,000 miles due north from the Indian fron-
tier, and 3,000 miles east and west from Meshed in Persia
to Batang on the China-Tibetan border, as great in area as
the whole of the United States proper, or the continent of
Europe, and with a population of 33,000,000, which, apart
from a few tiny points of light at wide intervals, still lies
in unmitigated darkness. Add Mongolia and this area is
increased almost one-half, while the total unreached popula-
tion becomes 35,000,000,
2. The Heart of Africa.
To an even greater degree than in the case of Asia, the
heart of Africa constitutes an unoccupied field, a vast area
of unrelieved gloom. Dr. Karl Kumm in particular has
called attention to this region, which is geographically
known as the Central African Ironstone Plateau. It em-
braces six or eight large states directly south of the great
Sahara, of which the best known are Wadai, Darfur and
Kordofan, with a dense population of Hamitic and Negro
peoples. In none of these states is there a Christian mis-
“
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS 845
-sionary. From the easternmost mission station in Nigeria
to the nearest station on the Nile the distance is 1,500 miles.
“Tt is as if the United States had one missionary in Maine
and one in Texas, and not a ray of gospel light between.” ®
South of these states, again, is a conglomerate of pagan
tribes, of which Dr. Kumm names forty-seven as the most
important ones. Nor is there a missionary among any of
them. “The nearest station to the south lies beyond 500
miles of virgin forest on the Congo; the nearest to the north,
beyond the Sahara, is Tripoli on the Mediterranean, 2,000
miles away.” ‘
As to the population of this great stretch of territory, it is
extremely difficult to arrive at any satisfactory conclusion,
because of the very limited knowledge of large sections of
the field and the conflicting figures offered by different au-
thorities. Dr. Kumm puts the total at 50,000,000, while the
Statesman’s Year Book for 1923 estimates the combined
populations of French West Africa, French Equatorial
Africa and the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan—which colonial areas
practically embrace the territory under consideration, except
for the hinterland of the Mediterranean States on the north
and the adjacent borders of the Belgian Congo on the south
—at somewhat less than half that number. But even at
the lowest estimate the situation remains an appalling one,
and the burning words uttered concerning it at the Edin-
burgh Conference, in the Report of the Committee on Sur-
vey, should appeal to the conscience and heart of the church:
“Africa has suffered many wrongs in the past at the hands
of the stronger nations of Christendom, and she is suffer-
ing wrongs at their hands to-day; but the greatest wrong,
and that from which she is suffering most, is being inflicted
by the Church of Christ. It consists in withholding from
so many of her children the knowledge of Christ. The flags
of Christian nations float over nearly the whole of Africa,
but there are large domains in which not a missionary station
has been planted. The untouched regions of Africa are a
clamant call to the Church.”
3. The Heart of South America.
_As in Asia and Africa, so also in the Western Hemis-
6 “Daybreak in the Dark Continent,” p. 275.
7 The Missionary Review of the W orid, han 1921, p. 435.
346 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS q
phere, so near to the land whence have gone forth the larger ©
part of the missionary forces into all the world, the hu-
miliating fact of untouched territory confronts us, for a
vast area in the heart of South America has still to be writ-
ten down as wholly unoccupied by missions.
“The greatest stretch of unevangelized territory in the
world lies in the center of South America, including the in-
terior of Brazil, Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, Bo-
livia and Paraguay. An irregular territory some 2,000
miles long and from 500 to 1,500 miles in width would ©
only include two or three missionaries. In northern Brazil
there are seven states, with populations ranging from that
of Maine to that of New Jersey, with no foreign mission-
ary.”
“Northern Brazil is one of the most neglected fields on ©
~ earth. North and west of the San Francisco River lies ©
about two-thirds of Brazil, half the area of South America.
. Two-thirds of this region is covered with virgin for-
ests, through which wander native tribes which have never
heard the name of Christ. The Amazon and its tributaries
furnish 10,000 miles of navigable water by which to reach ©
the 8,000,000 people who live there.”
“In the northern half of Peru, a stretch of territory |
larger than our own thirteen original states, there is not one
evangelical missionary.” ®
Putting together these great geographical stretches which
have been brought into view, we find at the heart of the three —
great missionary continents solid areas gigantic in extent,
and containing an aggregate population, according to the
most conservative estimates, of from one hundred to one
hundred and twenty million human beings who are yet com-
pletely outside the range of present missionary work.
II. UNREACHED AREAS AND CONSTITUENCIES WITHIN
COUNTRIES ALREADY ENTERED,
The distinction between the larger integral unoccupied
areas above considered and the smaller areas and constituen-
cies lying within countries already entered is, after all, more
or less arbitrary. Impressive and well-nigh overwhelming
as is the survey of the one class, the other is of equal im-
8 Extracts from “Survey of Interchurch World Movement,” 1920.
ee
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS 347
portance and to be regarded no less seriously. Indeed,
there is a sense in which the fields classified under the sec-
ond heading call for even greater emphasis, since the fact
that they lie within, or adjacent to, areas where some mis-
sionary operations exist tends to create the impression that
they are provided for, whereas in reality they are no less
destitute than the larger and remoter sections where no
missionary agencies have entered.
Attention has already been called to most of these smaller
unoccupied areas in the preceding chapters, so that further
reference to them here is unnecessary.
One field, Siberia, calls for a word, since the fact that
it is related to European Russia and is nominally occupied
by the Greek Church and its Missions places it as a whole
beyond the scope of our present study. A great proportion,
however, of the 11,000,000 people inhabiting this vast north-
ern land are utterly destitute of vital Christianity, and there
are many actual pagans, such as the Buriats of southern
Siberia, whose horse-sacrifice and other ceremonies, as de-
scribed by a reliable traveler,’ are gruesome to a degree.
No one after reading such an account of superstitious rites
can question their need of the gospel, or the duty of the
Church to carry it to them.
Far from our being justified in regarding the unoccupied
areas within lands already entered as of secondary impor-
tance, the investigations of the Committee on Survey for the
Edinburgh Conference of Ig10 made it clear that the com-
bined population of these areas greatly exceeds the totals for
the large integral regions still wholly untouched.
Causes of Non-Occupation. We cannot be aware of such
great stretches of unoccupied territory, and of so many mil-
lions of souls still hopelessly beyond the reach of the saving
gospel, without being aroused to an earnest inquiry into the
causes for such an awful situation, with a view to their cor-
rection. Among the causes are the following:
1. Lack of Exploration and Difficulty of Access. While
the missionary objective has in many instances supplied the
strongest incentive for geographical exploration, and not a
few of the world’s most famous explorers have been mis-
sionaries, yet it remains true that in some parts of the world
9 J. Curtin, “A Journey in Southern Siberia,” pp. 44-46.
=
348 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
to-day the further advance of missions has been checked by
the absence of exploration and consequently of means of |
transportation.
This factor applies to all three of the great unoccupied
regions at the hearts of the continents of Asia, Africa and
South America, and in some measure also to Arabia and a
few of the large r islands, like New Guinea and Borneo. It
is a fact, too, “that ‘the shifting of the great highways of
travel in recent times from overland to ocean routes has led
to the abandonment of many once popular caravan roads,
and this likewise bears upon some of the above regions.
2. Political and Religious Prohibition, The strong arm
of the state, sometimes backed by religious fanaticism, has
debarred missionaries from some lands. Afghanistan,
Arabia and Tibet are the most notable present day examples
of this hindrance, as the Latin American Republics once
were. In Nepal, Bhutan and certain native states of India
missionary work is also excluded or restricted.
But unfortunately political hindrance has not been con-
fined to Moslem, Buddhist and Hindu governments. France
and Portugal have been guilty of prohibiting Protestant
missionary work in their extensive colonial possessions in
East Asia, Africa and the Pacific Islands, and even to-day
hampering restrictions are imposed in some of them.
3. Hostility of Savage and Uneivilized Tribes. Opposi-
tion of this sort is happily for the most part a thing of the
past, yet it is still in evidence in parts of the interior of Latin
America, Africa and Asia, and in some of the Pacific Island
groups.
4. Lack of Missionary Cooperation and Strategy. While
missionary operations have been marked increasingly by a
fine spirit of unity and comity, as well as the display of able
statesmanship, yet the neglect both of great integral areas
and of sections of existing fields of labor is unquestionably
due in part to a lack of sufficiently comprehensive vision.
Too many missionaries and societies have been content to
view the success of the work merely from the standpoint of
a measure of progress achieved, and have never begun to
think and plan and act in terms of the actual completion
of the task. The thought of carrying the gospel to all the
world has not largely dominated missionary operations,
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS | 34.9
Consequently unoccupied areas, small and great, have not
compelled the attention and effort which they deserve,
whereas activities which, although legitimate and worthy
in their proper order and proportion, are in the light of the
church’s marching orders distinctly secondary to the main
business of a speedy world-wide proclamation of the gospel,
are being unduly stressed, and are absorbing altogether too
large a proportion of the missionary forces. A readjust-
ment of the work in hand and a redistribution of the exist-
ing forces could be made so as materially to modify the
extent of unoccupied fields.
5. Lnadequacy of Missionary Forces and Resources.
When due weight has been given to the last mentioned cause
this more must be said, than which nothing is clearer, that
the present forces and resources made available for the mis-
sionary task render practically impossible the completion of
that task. In multiplied instances these forces and resources
are strained to the breaking points in their attempt to keep
pace with the work already in hand, so that without reeén-
forcement any project of entering new fields or launching
new efforts must be indefinitely postponed.
6. Absence of a World-wide Missionary Vision. The
causes already mentioned are contributory; this one is fun-
damental. When all else has been said, is it not true that the
supreme reason why so large a proportion of the world re-
mains at this late date unoccupied by missionary forces is
that the Christian Church as a whole has never caught the
true vision of God’s world-wide purpose and her own vital
relation to its accomplishment? Lack of vision has resulted
in lack of concern, and lack of concern in lack of adequate
effort. A true vision, sincere concern and serious effort on
the part of the whole church to reach the whole world with
the gospel would, under God, have resulted long ago in the
accomplishment of the task, all the above mentioned hin-
drances notwithstanding. Let us recognize the facts and
make this frank confession.
Facing the Problem. There ought to be no remaining
unoccupied field in the world to-day. The existence of even
one such field, not to say many fields, is a reproach upon the
Christian Church which should with all possible speed be
removed. How shall this be done? If the suggested causes
850 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
of non-occupation are the right ones, then the solution of |
the problem lies directly along the line of their correction.
1. The facts should be marshaled and laid before the ©
united missionary administrative bodies at home, in thea
annual conferences, and through the constituent societies ©
be brought to the attention of the entire church. Since
obviously there are no missionaries in unoccupied areas to —
make known their spiritual destitution, some special agency
should be charged with making thorough investigations and _
reporting. ;
2. There should be strategic planning, including any —
necessary readjustment of present work and redistribution ©
of present forces and resources, and the apportioning of the |
unfinished tasks among the various missionary agencies as —
they are willing to accept fresh responsibilities.
3. Where unoccupied fields lie within areas already ©
claimed as the sphere of established missions, or adjacent —
to them, these missions should if possible be reénforced so —
as to enable them fully to occupy the territory. Where such ©
additional responsibility cannot be accepted by the existing ©
missions, arrangements should be sought for some other
agency to occupy the neglected field.
4. Where the unoccupied fields are so far removed from
the territory of established missions as to preclude the pros- ©
pect of their being overtaken by a process of extension, new ~
missions are called for. It is especially desirable that such —
new missions be inaugurated, as far as possible, by existing -
societies, preferably those having work nearest these fields, —
so as to utilize the wisdom, experience and resources of a ©
well-established organization in meeting the peculiar diffi- —
culties which attend the opening of a new field. But it ©
would be unwise policy for existing societies whose forces ©
and resources are already taxed by the demands of their ©
present work to attempt to establish new missions to the ©
weakening of the existing work. New societies, or new mis- —
sions of existing societies, should rely upon the enlistment —
of additional recruits and enlarged giving for their support. —
5. The duty and ideal of carrying the gospel to the whole —
world must be brought home to the conscience and heart of ©
the church. It should be made a test of the church’s loyalty ~
to Jesus Christ. There is no question as to the church pos- —
a ee
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS Sot
sessing the requisite resources for the unfinished task. It
is simply a question of her heart and will being enlisted, the
task being clearly shown her, and her resources of prayer
and men and money being called forth and directed to the
desired end.
The Crowning Challenge of this Age. Two quotations
fitly sum up the theme of this chapter, lifting it to the
loftiest plane and appealing to the highest sentiment of every
true and loyal Christian.
The first quotation is from a pioneer missionary on the
borders of Tibet: “The eyes of the Christian world turn as
instinctively toward the lands closed to the gospel in this
missionary age as do the eyes of a conquering army toward
the few remaining outposts of the enemy which withstand
the victors and hinder complete victory, without which the
commander-in-chief is unable to close the campaign.” *°
The second is from a well-known missionary statesman
who has belonged both to the circle of missionary adminis-
tration at home and to that of missionary leadership on the
field: ““Vhe occupation of all the unoccupied fields is the dis-
tinctive and crowning challenge of this missionary age.
Upon the church’s acceptance of that challenge great issues
seem to depend: issues affecting the vitality of the Christian
Church, issues determining the welfare and happiness of
millions of our fellow creatures, issues conditioning the lives
of nations, issues upon which God Himself has been pleased
to hang the unfolding of His eternal purposes in Christ.
The unoccupied fields must be occupied, and what is the
price of their occupation? The pathway which leads to their
occupation lies across other unoccupied fields—great areas
these—in our own lives and hearts, not yet surrendered to
the will of Christ, not yet fully occupied by His Spirit, not
yet touched by the flame of a perfect love and consecration.
Only as He is permitted to fully occupy these nearer areas in
our own lives will He be able to gain entrance into those
more distant fields of the unoccupied world.’ **
10 John R. Muir, missionary of the China Inland Mission, |
11 Rev. Chas. R. Watson, D.D., President, American University at Cairo.
352 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
QUESTIONS
1. (a) From what two standpoints may the work of Missions
be considered? (b) What moral obligation is implied by the claims
made for Christianity and the fact of unoccupied mission fields
still existing?
2. Give a twofold classification of unoccupied mission fields.
3. Where do the greatest wholly unoccupied areas lie?
4. Give the main facts about each of the following countries of
Asia, as bearing particularly upon their missionary need and sup-
ply, and including names of related Societies or missionaries:
(a) Mongolia, (b) Chinese Turkistan, (c) Tibet, (d) Nepal and |
Bhutan, (e) Afghanistan, (f) Baluchistan, (g) Russian Central
Asia.
5. Describe the location, extent, population and other features
of the great unoccupied sections of (a) Africa, (b) South Amer-
Ica (C,) woiperia:
6. Discuss six causes of non-occupation, giving concrete illus-
trations where such apply. |
7. Suggest five practical measures looking toward the speedy
occupation of neglected fields.
8. What unoccupied fields in a spiritual sense are suggested
by the existence of these material unoccupied fields at this late
date? 3
CHAPTER XX
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK
Having traced the outlines of Christian Missions from
their inception in apostolic times down to our own day, and
having also looked at the proportions of the unfinished mis-
sionary task, it remains to sum up briefly the present situa-
tion and outlook and, in so doing to discover, if we may,
some practical lessons which the situation holds for the
Church and individual Christian to-day.
I. Salient Features at the Field End.
1. Favorable Features. These include the following:
A World-Wide Open Door. Time was, and not so very
long ago, when the burden of nearly every missionary ad-
dress was an appeal for prayer that doors of entrance might
be opened into closed lands. But with a very few excep-
tions that appeal is no longer heard, for God has answered
_ prayer, and doors have been flung wide open throughout the
world.
Nothing is more remarkable than the completely changed
aspect of the missionary world in this respect within the
short span of a single generation. The writer recalls that
_when he first set foot in China, only twenty-nine years ago,
two entire provinces of that great land, with 30,000,000
people, were still tightly closed against the gospel, and large
sections of practically every other province were in a like
condition. Asa member of a band of pioneer missionaries
who battled their way into those last two provinces he can
testify how every step of advance, right up to the Boxer
year of 1900, was in the teeth of the most stubborn resist-
ance, marked by frequent insult and rioting, and occasional
loss of life. Yet nine years ago it was his privilege to make
a journey through eleven provinces, right across China to
the Tibetan border, and in all those thousands of miles of
inland travel he cannot recall a single instance of insult or
353
354 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
injury, but only uniformly courteous treatment and un- |
restricted freedom for missionary testimony.
It needs to be borne in mind that Japan, which has made
such phenomenal strides forward into the very forefront of
nations, was only two short generations ago emerging from
medieval seclusion, before American insistence in the shape
of Commodore Perry’s cruiser squadron. It is but thirty
odd years since missionaries first gained entrance into the
“Hermit Kingdom’ of Korea. But to-day the 500,000,000
inhabitants of China, Japan and Korea, constituting one-
third of the whole human race, have become wholly ac- —
cessible.
In the providence of God, India, with another one-fifth —
of the human family, has become a part of the British Em- —
pire—a fact which no one who has visited India can fail
to recognize as a potent factor in making possible the evan- —
gelization of that great land. |
Similarly, God has seen fit to wrest from decadent Spain —
and corrupt Romanism the fair Philippines, Cuba and Porto ~
Rico, and to entrust them to the tutelage of the United ©
States, with the result that more than 14,000,000 islanders
have been brought for the first time within the range of
evangelical effort. The fact is patent to all who know these
islands, that twenty-five years of American occupancy have
done infinitely more for the advancement of their promising
peoples than the whole four centuries of the previous régime.
For years every Protestant missionary effort to enter
French Indo-China was repulsed under the influence of the
entrenched Jesuits there. But prayer was made and an-
swered, and through the rupture of State-Church relations
in France the long-closed door swung open eleven years
ago, thereby bringing 20,000,000 benighted Annamese
within missionary reach,
When many readers of this book studied geography the
vast interior of Africa was still largely a blank upon the
map, for it was only in 1873 that Livingstone, prince of
African explorers, laid down the uncompleted task, which
Stanley in turn took up, of discovering the inner secrets of |
the Dark Continent. But now Africa’s vast interior has —
been explored and opened up, so that, from the standpoint
at least of an open door of access, the prophecy that
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 355
“Ethiopia shall stretch out her hands unto God” stands
fulfilled.
Turning to the other great continent of the southern
hemisphere, South America, which until recent years was
closed to Protestant Missions, it may be said that the very
excesses of that corrupt and spiritless religion which for
centuries held unrivaled sway provoked such widespread
revulsion against itself as to fling open the door of welcome
and opportunity to evangelical forces.
Thus, by a series of wonderful providences, the present
generation has witnessed a breaking down of barriers and
a thrusting open to world-wide missions of age-long closed
doors, such as whole centuries heretofore could not record.
When the World War broke out the one notable exception
in the matter of an open door was the Near East, which
constitutes the bulk of the Moslem World. In that region
missionary work still faced a wall of adamant, progress was
at a snail’s pace and results were painfully small. But among
many regrettable results of the War one result, at least,
caused all true Christian hearts to rejoice, and that was the
blow struck at Turkish dominion in the Near East. The
driving out of this tyrannical Power from most of his
Asiatic domains—notwithstanding the recent humiliating
- compromise which that victory has been allowed to suffer—
has ushered in a new day of liberty for millions of shackled
souls in Syria, Palestine, Arabia, Mesopotamia and Egypt,
and has opened a great new door of missionary opportunity
throughout Near Eastern lands.
Behold, then, the inspiration, and the challenge as well,
of a world-wide open door.
Improved Material Facilities. No less providential than
the opening of closed doors has been the rapid improvement
in the means of world-wide travel, communication and other
facilities bearing upon missionary life and labor. Steam
and electricity have belted the globe by land and sea, bring-
ing almost every part within safe and easy reach. The post
and telegraph, and later the wireless also, have placed them-
selves at the service of the Kingdom of God. In many
lands automobiles have cut not in two, but actually in ten,
the time consumed in country tours, and have immensely
extended the radius of the missionary’s field of operations.
356 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Where formerly the outgoing missionary had to take with
him supplies for a whole term of service, and had often to
subsist upon the slender and ill-suited food supply of some
far inland native market, to-day in many instances he can ~
start for his field with no more baggage than he would re-
quire for an ordinary trip at home, assured of ample pro-
vision for his every need through improved local markets,
mail and freight orders from home, and rapid transporta-
tion. Better houses, better sanitary conditions, better food,
better means of travel, and a hundred and one modern con-
veniences and advantages contribute to making missionary
life safer and more comfortable, and missionary work easier
and more effective, than ever before.
Changed Attitude of Eastern Peoples. An open door is
essential, and to have secured it is a great achievement for
the missionary cause; but an open mind is no less essential,
and yet much more difficult, and to have secured that is an
even greater achievement. Many a missionary having
gained physical access to a heathen community has found
that a thick wall of prejudice and hatred still intervened be-
tween him and the people about him.
Nothing in modern missions is more impressive than the
remarkable way in which the peoples of mission lands have
changed within a few years from an attitude of hostility and
exclusion to one of friendliness and open-mindedness toward
the missionary and his message. The complete change of
this kind that has taken place in China, the greatest and
most conservative of all nations, within an incredibly short
space of time, furnishes a notable example, and it is nothing
less than a miracle of God’s own working. But other nota-
ble examples of the same kind are to be found in every part
of the missionary world.
Nothing struck the writer more forcibly on his several
extended journeys in mission lands within the last few
years than the sharp contrast everywhere apparent between
disturbed political conditions and the favorable attitude to-
ward missions. The Near East was at the time seething
with political unrest, racial frictions were everywhere in
evidence, British soldiers were patrolling the streets of
Cairo and other Egyptian centers to forestall threatened up-
risings ; and yet the missionaries at center after center testi-
A,
a ee ee ee ee
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 357
fied to newly awakened interest in the gospel. In old Jeru-
salem a steady stream of Jews, and others, kept coming to
the Mission House to read and discuss the Scriptures, while
there were a number of open confessions of Christ in the
chapel services. On several other stations in Palestine gos-
pel meetings were having a marked increase in attendance,
and a number of Arab sheikhs showed a friendliness which
was in striking contrast to their former cold demeanor. In
Egypt an ever-increasing number of individuals and groups
were seriously inquiring into Christian truth, while the de-
mand for Christian literature for Moslems was almost be-
yond the power of the presses to supply.
In India, just at the time when feeling against the British
Government and Europeans in general was strong, as a
result of the agitation of the Indian Nationalists for home
rule, the writer witnessed the progress of a genuine spiritual
revival in a section of the field theretofore notorious for its
stubborn resistance to all missionary approach. And during
the last two or three years, filled as they have been with
political anxiety as to what might occur at any moment,
missionaries have reported larger sales of Scriptures and
more response on their preaching tours among the villages
than ever before.
The writer will never forget his royal reception as an
invited guest in the home of a Tibetan chieftain, in whose
village only three years earlier the first two missionaries to
venture into that part of the forbidden land of Tibet barely
escaped with their lives. Through persistent and tactful
' missionary effort this one-time bitter foe had been turned
into a warm friend and protector.
In short, the impression gained by wide personal contacts
and from published reports and also direct correspondence
with nearly every part of the field is that throughout the
missionary world to-day more minds are open, more hearts
susceptible to the message of the gospel, than ever before.
It is a situation big with the promise of an unprecedented
harvest if only the opportunity is promptly and fully taken
advantage of.
Cumulative Effect of Work Done. The imagery of hus-
bandry, or the tilling of the soil, is commonly employed in
Scripture in connection with the ministry of the gospel, with
358 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
the result that we have come to use such terms as sowing
and reaping, harvest-time and the like, in a spiritual sense
as familiarly as in a material sense. And when we come
to consider it, the analogy between the processes of material
and spiritual husbandry is a very close one indeed. In both
we have the successive stages of the preparation of the soil,
seed sowing, cultivating and harvesting.
In missionary work these stages are very clearly marked.
The early pioneers in every field had the task of blazing the
trail and doing a lot of hard, slow, preliminary work to make
ready the ground for the seed of the gospel. Then came
the period of seed sowing, with its patient, plodding, perse-
vering toil. Little by little, line upon line, by varied means
and methods, the seed was scattered and watered with pray-
ers and tears. Often long years ensued with little or no
visible sign of fruit to cheer the toilers. In course of time
the first fruit appeared, converts began to come by ones
and twos, then in gradually increasing numbers, and the
first infant churches were formed.
But it has remained for the present generation to witness
the harvest of missions in full force. The cumulative effect
of long years of faithful labor is now showing itself in large
and ever-increasing ingatherings of souls, and in substantial
progress along every line of missionary effort. The seed
has germinated and taken root, the seedlings have been
transplanted far and wide, the assiduous cultivation of the
growing grain has told effectively, and now the fields are
waving with golden grain ready for the reaper’s sickle. To-
day is the harvest-time in world-wide missions in a sense
that no previous day has been, and the returns for a single
day eclipse those of a whole year in any earlier generation.
If only the ranks of the reapers could be doubled or trebled
at once, with the strength of the whole Church behind them,
the immediate results would be beyond estimate on any
basis of reckoning hitherto employed.
Development of Native Churches and Leaders, ‘Truc
missionary vision looks beyond the work of the foreign mis-
sionary force to a firmly planted indigenous church, aiming
at and eventually reaching the ideal of supporting and gov-
erning itself and assuming the responsibility for the evan-
gelization of its own land. Progress toward this goal was
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 359
never before as encouraging as it is to-day. It has taken a
long time for the policy and aim of a self-supporting, self-
propagating native church really to grip the missionary body
and control its methods, but this policy seems at last to have
laid hold effectively upon the missionary body and the na-
tive churches of nearly every field.
No feature in the present situation is more inspiring, or
fraught with greater promise, than the fine growth, in char-
acter as well as in number, of the native churches, and the
development of a corps of native Christian leaders of firm
faith, sterling character and fine ability, who are advancing
steadily into the leadership of the Christian movement in the
greater mission fields. The display of sound judgment and
long-visioned statesmanship by the Chinese delegates who
constituted a majority in the great Chinese National Chris-
tian Conference of 1922 was a revelation to the whole Chris-
tian world, and that Conference undoubtedly marked the
passing of the high leadership of the Christian enterprise
in China from foreign to native hands. A place of similar
prominence has been accorded to native leaders in Japan,
while in India, Korea, Latin America and parts of Africa
and the Island World native leaders are rapidly coming to
the front.
It is a cause for no little rejoicing that from the churches
of Oriental lands God has thus early raised up such great
evangelists as Kanamori of Japan, Kim of Korea, Ting-
li-mei of China, Sadhu Sundar Singh of India, Juan Varetto
of Argentina, and many others almost as well known.
Strong local evangelistic campaigns and Home Mission
movements at longer range have been successfully launched.
Notable among these are the National Missionary Society
of India, organized in 1905 to evangelize parts of India
unoccupied by Foreign Missions, and the National Chinese
Home Missionary Society, started in 1920, which has
opened its first field in the distant province of Yunnan. More
recently, in 1921, the General Assembly of the Indian Pres-
byterian Church took the initial steps toward beginning for-
eign missionary work, with Tibet and Mesopotamia the
probable fields, and appointed a committee to formulate a
society for this purpose. Korea, itself among the youngest
of mission fields, has set a noble example to all others, for
360 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
in addition to taking the leading part in home evangelism its
churches have sent missionaries to Korean communities in
Manchuria, Siberia, Hawaii, Mexico and the United States,
and also to labor among the natives of China and Siberia.
In such movements as these, more than in anything else, lies
the hope of the completion of the task of evangelizing the
world, ‘
2. Unfavorable Features.
Conditions Follouing the World War. Serious as were
the effects of the World War upon missions while it lasted,
its baneful influences did not cease with the signing of the
peace treaty. The truth is that real peace has never yet been
restored, and all the nations are still suffering severe results
_of those horrible years of conflict. Among other features
noticeable are the universal higher cost of living, greatly
increased rates of travel, the financial bankruptcy of certain
European countries with resultant damage to international
trade, a seriously lowered standard of morals, an increase of
outlawry and crime, and a general atmosphere of unrest and
uncertainty the world over. All these conditions have their
obvious bearings upon missionary interests.
In particular is to be noted a widening breach of distrust
on the part of the weaker nations of Asia and Africa toward
the stronger nations of Europe. The old feelings of rever-
ential awe and slavish fear with which the Asiatic and
African regarded the wonderful European have worn away.
The War brought the East and the West into closer touch
than ever before, but unfortunately under anything but ideal
conditions. They met in the trenches and under the stress
of war, and the East saw the West not at its best, but at its
worst, beheld its vices rather than its virtues. ‘The conse-
quence was that familiarity bred contempt, and European
prestige went down in the Orient, never probably to rise
again to its old level.
The War gave distinct impetus to the ambitions of the
backward races of the world for political autonomy. It
quickened their hopes of throwing off completely the hated
yoke of Western domination. In every Eastern country the
clever leaders of nationalistic organizations seized upon the
popular watchwords “‘democracy’”’ and “‘self-determination,”
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 361
coined for them in the West, and from country to country,
as one journeyed through the Orient, were to be heard the
slogans: “Egypt for the Egyptians,’ “Arabia for the
Arabians,” “India for the Indians,” ‘The Philippines for
the Filipinos,” and so on ad libitum. While it is easy for
Westerners to regard such an attitude on the part of these
other races as uncalled for and foolish, there is much to be
said on the other side. All the larger nations of Europe
have against them an unenviable record of aggression in
their dealings with these backward races, greed and cruelty
have figured with ugly prominence, and might has repeatedly
been substituted for right. Little wonder that the peoples
of Africa, Asia and the Pacific Isands chafed to be free, and
that their experiences at the hands of so-called Christian
nations have been, and still are, a serious stumbling-block in
the way of the missionaries in seeking to gain the confidence
of the natives and to present to them the gospel.
Influence of Godless Civilization. Not only does the ag-
gression of Western nations as such react unfavorably upon
the cause of missions, but the base character and shameful
conduct of many representatives of those nations who come
in contact with the Eastern and Island races as traders,
travelers and at times even as officials of Western govern-
ments, constitute one of the most vexatious trials to mission-
aries and their work.
It must be kept in mind that the ever-widening “open
door” which we rejoice in for missionary effort is no less
an open door for the devil’s forces, and he is taking fullest
advantage of his opportunity, and is importing into these
lands in a steady stream all the moral vices of a godless
civilization, all the deadly poison of perverted religions, and
all the subtle fallacies of modern cults. These features have
already been noted in previous chapters as bearing upon
missionary work in the past, and reference is here made to
them again only as a reminder that they are matters still to
be reckoned with to-day, some of them possibly in even more
aggravated form or measure than heretofore.
Effect of Liberalistic Doctrine. In addition to these op-
posing forces from without must be mentioned, not without
deep pain of heart, a force within the missionary ranks which
is working grievous injury to many members of the body
862 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
of Christ in mission fields and weakening the whole cause of —
missions. We refer to what is commonly known as “mod- —
ernism’’ or “liberalism” in theological belief and teaching, —
which rejects the historic interpretation of the Bible, in favor —
of a rationalistic interpretation based upon modern scientific —
theories along evolutionary lines. These views have long —
existed and been made the ground of attacks upon Chris- —
tianity by skeptics outside the Church. In recent years, ©
however, they have gained currency among many within the —
Church, until destructive Biblical criticism and new theology —
have spread to an appalling extent in pulpits and theological —
seminaries. And now, through the product of these liberal- —
istic seminaries at home, such false teaching has reached the ©
mission fields and brought sharp division in the missionary —
ranks. So serious has the issue already become that the ©
Bible Union of China and the Bible League of India, Ceylon ~
and Burma have been formed, for the purpose of withstand- —
ing the influence of modernism upon the mission churches by —
strong and united testimony and teaching on the funda- —
mental truths of Christianity. |
Nothing more deplorable could well be imagined than this ©
rending of the missionary forces by those who are re- ©
pudiating the very foundations of the Christian faith and —
substituting a new gospel of ethical teaching and human im-
provement for the old gospel of divine grace and regenerat-
ing power, which has wrought such mighty transformation
in the lives of multitudes in every mission field.
Nor are the injurious effects of this modernistic trend
upon the missionary enterprise confined to the field end.
They are equally in evidence at the home end, where the
discarding of vital Christian doctrine in the pulpit is pro-
ducing spiritual declension in the pew, and this in turn is
cooling missionary zeal and curtailing missionary support
by prayer and gift. It is a solemn and significant fact that
at this time of general prosperity and unstinted flow of
money in America there is a marked falling off in mission- —
ary contributions and the Mission Boards are hard pressed
financially. In some cases retrenchment on the field has
become necessary, in others much needed reénforcements —
have to be held back, while not a few Boards are facing large |
deficits for the current year.
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 363
II. Vital Factors at the Home Base.
The relation between the success of the missionary enter-
prise abroad and the condition of the Church at home has
been mentioned, and its importance can hardly be too
strongly emphasized. The enterprise is one. Missions
abroad are the projection of the Church at home into other
lands, and their welfare and progress depend vitally upon
sympathy and cooperation at the home base. The mission-
aries at the front can “lengthen the cords” of the gospel
tent only in proportion as those who stand back of them at
home “strengthen the stakes.’’ To attempt the one without
the other would spell-collapse and disaster. We have already
seen how the situation in the mission fields to-day is one of
readiness for a strong advance, with the promise of unprece-
dented harvests. But whether that advance can be made,
and those harvests realized, depends on the Church at home
rather than on the missionaries afield. The latter are work-
ing to the limit of their strength, and utilizing to the utmost
the resources at their disposal. Anything more cannot fairly
be expected of them under existing conditions; the next
move must be made by the Church at home. What, then,
are some of the stakes which must be strengthened at the
home base to permit the lengthening of the missionary cords
‘abroad?
Renewed Conviction as to the World’s Need of Christ.
Time was when the lost condition of the heathen constituted
one of the strongest grounds of missionary appeal. But
times have changed, and we hear much less said on that line
to-day. Men seem to like to dwell upon the benefits of faith
rather than to face the consequences of unbelief. It is to
be feared that there is very prevalent doubt, amounting in
many quarters to positive unbelief, regarding the hopeless
condition of those who’are without the gospel.
Yet Scripture is clear and emphatic in statements as to
the*sin and guilt of the heathen, and missionary experience
everywhere confirms the testimony of Scripture on this
point. The plea so often made for the heathen that they are
living up to the light they have is meant to be charitable, but
it rests on ignorance of plain fact. The heathen themselves
as a rule make no such claim, for they well know the op-
posite to be true. Without entering here upon the question
364 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
of possible exceptions to the rule, the undeniable fact is that
the great mass of heathen to-day are living in the wilful
indulgence of gross sins of every sort. Unless, therefore, ©
divine law is to be abrogated, they must be visited with the ©
penalty of sin. The Word declares that “the wages of sin is |
death,’ with no hint that such statement applies less in one —
part of the world than another. God’s only remedy for sin ©
is salvation through Jesus Christ. John 3:16 declares the ©
glorious news of this salvation, but no less plainly does this ~
verse declare the doom of all men outside of Christ, when it ©
says, “that whosoever believeth in Him should not perish, ~
but have everlasting life.’ We do well to remember that ©
it was for a world already lost, and not merely in danger of ©
being lost, that God gave His Son. To question the neces- ©
sity of the gospel for the people of heathen lands is to ©
question its necessity for the people of our own land. i
After all, perhaps the most convincing argument for the ©
heathen’s need of Christ is found within our own hearts. If ©
I can get along without Christ here, then I may conclude ©
that the heathen can likewise get along without Him there. ©
But if only Christ can cleanse my sin, and give peace to my —
guilty conscience, who else than Christ can do the same for ©
them? By our own confessed need of Christ, and our own |
conscious salvation in Him, do we establish the need of every ©
other man for Christ as his only Saviour.
Without a question, this current unbelief or half-belief —
regarding the absolute need of the heathen world for the ©
gospel is cutting the nerve of missionary zeal and effort. It
is a logical conclusion that the cost entailed in carrying the
gospel to the heathen is too great unless the heathen are in ©
the gravest spiritual peril. Only where desperate need exists —
is unlimited sacrifice demanded or even justified. Hudson
Taylor, when near the end of his life, testified that he would ©
never have thought of becoming a missionary but for the ©
deep conviction of the lost condition of the heathen and
their utter need of Christ. Brainerd, Martyn, Carey and —
Judson all held the same conviction, and the heroic and effec- |
tive missionary careers of these men must be interpreted in ©
the light of that conviction.
When Christians get back to the Book on this point, as —
well as every other, and accept its plain and solemn verdict
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 365
regarding the heathen, a new day of missionary concern
and effort will follow.
A Stronger Sense of Christian Responsibility. It is posi-
tively distressing to discover how few, comparatively, ap-
pear to have any clear, scriptural conception of missionary
responsibility. The great majority of professing Christians
give the matter little or no thought at all. Statistics tell the
shocking tale that only one-third of the Protestant churches
and only one-fourth of the Protestant church members of
America make any contribution to missions. Many others
conceive of missions at most as a philanthropy, a charity
extended to people for whom they bear no responsibility,
so that anything they may give or do for the heathen is just
so much to the good, and quite beyond that which constitutes
their duty.
How different is the Scriptural conception as expressed by
the great missionary apostle Paul! Even after his mission-
ary labors had already covered the extensive territory of
Asia Minor, Macedonia and Greece, he writes to the distant
Romans: “I am debtor both to Greeks and to Barbarians
. SO, as much as in me is, I am ready to preach the
gospel to you also that are in Rome.” No claim of merit
here! No sense of conferring a favor upon those to whom
‘he would carry the gospel! It was his duty, his debt, and
he was only seeking as an honest man to discharge it. He
even adds: “Woe is unto me if I preach not the gospel.”
Elsewhere he uses such terms as steward, trustee, witness,
ambassador—all conveying the same idea of responsibility
and obligation to give the gospel to all who had it not.
Each of the above terms applies to every Christian to-day
not a whit less than to Paul in his day. We owe all men
the gospel; we are their debtors—out of loyalty to Christ,
out of gratitude for our own salvation, out of compassion
for human need and helplessness, out of the realization
that the gospel is the only remedy for their sin, the only
panacea for their many ills, the only hope for their souls’
eternal salvation. To be a true child of God, and to confess
Jesus Christ as Saviour and Lord, is to be essentially related
to this supreme divine enterprise, and to be committed to
some definite share in carrying it out.
It was the general acceptance of this responsibility by the
366 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
rank and file of apostolic Christians which gave to that first —
generation of missionary effort its marvelous character and ~
success. It has been that same high conception of mission- —
ary obligation permeating the whole Korean Church which ~
has made the results of the work in that field the marvel of
this missionary age. If only that same conviction and spirit ©
were to take hold of all the churches of Christendom to-day, ~
such would be the resultant blessing and power of God upon —
their efforts that the end of the task of world-wide witness- —
ing would very soon be in sight. q
A Clearer Understanding of God’s Missionary Program. —
It is vital to the success of any enterprise that the end in ©
view be clearly defined by the one who initiates it, and be ©
as clearly understood by those who engage in it. Of no —
enterprise is this more true or more important than of mis- —
sions, since that enterprise is the greatest in all the world. ©
But although the divine program of missions for this age ©
has been made unmistakably clear in the Word, it seems to
be far from clearly understood by the whole Church.
Two widely different conceptions are in evidence. One —
of these makes the objective of present-day missions to be ©
the conversion of the whole world to Christ. Those who —
hold this view conceive of gospel effort and influence pro-
ceeding onward and outward with ever-increasing momen-
tum, until by a steadily progressive, evolutionary process
not only will individuals be converted, but all social and
moral evil will be overthrown, society regenerated, politics
purged, nations lifted to pure Christian ideals and conduct,
and thus, by the gradual Christianization of the present en-
tire social and political order, a millennium of peace and
righteousness under the universal reign of Christ will be
ushered in.
As regards this view, not only is it difficult to see its justi-
fication by the teaching of the Scriptures concerning the
course and culmination of the present age, but it is equally
difficult to harmonize its hopes with the actual condition and
trend of affairs to-day. One thing, at least, is certain, that
if the goal of present-day missions is as above stated we
are as yet a very long way from that goal. For despite
the encouraging progress and blessed fruits of missionary
work in every field, it cannot be said with any semblance
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 367
of truth that any one of the great mission lands has been
brought to a state even remotely approximating national
conversion. On the contrary, it is an actual fact that
heathen and Moslems are increasing far faster by natural
propagation than are Christian converts by regeneration.
There are actually more heathen in the world to-day than
when Carey launched the modern missionary movement.
Accordingly, this view necessitates the postponement of the
full fruition of missionary hopes to the distant future, and
makes present missionary operations merely a preliminary
stage in an indefinite process. It is this very thing, in our
opinion, that is largely responsible for the indifference and
apathy as to missions which have settled over so large a
section of the Church, since it is only natural to feel that it
matters little whether one does much or little to aid an enter-
prise which looks ahead to future generations for its com-
pletion.
The other conception of the missionary program is quite
different. It regards the present age of missions as a
preparatory and not a final one, and its goal not world con-
version but world-wide evangelization, or gospel witnessing.
Indeed the word “‘witness,” used so prominently in this con-
nection in the New Testament (eg., Acts 1:8; Matt.
' 24:14), furnishes the keynote for the present missionary
program, according to this view. The task enjoined is seen
to be not that of bringing the whole world to Christ, but
bringing Christ to the whole world; not converting all
nations as such, but calling out of all nations a people for
His name, who shall constitute the true Church or Bride of
Christ made ready for His return.
Perhaps the central passage of Scripture, among many
others, upon which this view is based, is Acts 15: 12-18,
which gives an account of the first apostolic, or missionary,
council at Jerusalem. The whole program of Gentile mis-
sions and ingathering is here explicitly set forth, consisting
of (1) a present elective stage, following Israel’s rejection
after Christ’s first coming, and (2) a future universal stage,
following Israel’s restoration after Christ’s second coming.
It is important to note, as concerning this view of the
Church’s present missionary task, not only its comprehen-
siveness in reaching out to the uttermost part of the earth,
368 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
«
;
but also its delimitation, in that it finds the goal not in a
final and complete harvest of world conversion, but in a ~
firstfruits harvest of souls called out from among all
nations.
It is at once obvious that the outlook of this kind of a |
program is radically different from that of the program
previously outlined. _For while we saw in the one case the
necessity for an indefinite postponement of the result aimed
at, tending to discouragement and loss of zeal, we see in
this case the practical possibility of the completion of the
task within the present generation, and this tending to in-
spire hope, kindle zeal and stimulate effort. Could anything
be more inspiring to a missionary society than the hope that
it might have the high privilege of penetrating the last un-
occupied region and thus completing the world-wide witness
for Christ? Could anything be sweeter to the lonely pio-
neer, far away on some distant outpost of the mission field,
than the thought that in the gracious providence of God it
might be his high honor to bring in the last soul to complete
the “people for His name” and thus prepare the way for his
Lord’s return?
God’s children, even His missionaries, do not see alike
regarding the nature of the divine program and the Church’s
appointed task in this dispensation, nor need their differences
of view stand in the way of true Christian fellowship and
mutual appreciation. But the sincere conviction is here ex-
pressed, in all generosity of spirit, that nothing contributes
more to stimulating missionary zeal in the home churches,
and enheartening and sustaining the toilers on the fields
yonder, than the cherishing of the blessed hope of the per-
sonal return of Christ, and seeing the relation between the
task of giving the gospel to the whole world and the realiza-
tion of that blessed hope.
A Mighty Revival of Spiritual Life. There are other
things which might well be given a place in our considera-
tion of vital missionary factors at the home end. Inter-
cessory prayer comes particularly to mind as fundamental
and vital. But when we mention the need of a mighty re-
vival of spiritual life we strike at the deepest root of all, one
which really underlies prayer, sacrificial giving and the
other things which might be spoken of.
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 369
The late Dr. Andrew Murray followed with close scrutiny
the deliberations of the great Ecumenical Missionary Con-
ference in 1900, and then with keen spiritual discernment
wrote “The Key to the Missionary Problem.” He showed
that the root of the whole matter lay far below all considera-
tions of strategy, cooperation, method and the like; that it
lay in the spiritual state of the Church. We reminded his
readers that the Great Commission was given in connection
with Pentecost, and that its fulfillment was made entirely
dependent upon the reality of a pentecostal experience.
“The pentecostal commission catt only be carried out by a
pentecostal church, in pentecostal power.’ Then, in suc-
cessive chapters, he went on to show the intimate relation of
Moravian Missions to the spiritual revival under Zinzendorf,
of the China Inland Mission to the faith and power which
emanated from the holy life of Hudson Taylor, and of the
great forward movement of the Church Missionary Society,
a generation ago, to the mighty spiritual quickening which
attended the visit of Moody to Cambridge, and also the
early years of the Keswick Convention.
Dr. A. J. Gordon, in his illuminating book, ‘The Holy
Spirit in Missions,’ expressed the same truth in strikingly
similar terms. Starting with Acts 1:8 as laying down the
relation between Pentecost and Missions, he proceeded to
trace the succeeding spiritual and missionary histories of
the Church in their bearing one upon the other. The fol-
lowing sentences are illustrative of his impressive line of
thought: “The history of later missions has been, in this
respect, the repeated facsimile of this history of apostolical
missions. . . . Whenever, in any century, whether in a
single heart or in a company of believers, there has been a
fresh effusion of the Spirit, there has followed inevitably
a fresh endeavor in the work of evangelizing the world.
. . . I think it would be no exaggeration to affirm that, just
as distinctly as we can trace the missionary movement of
the first century to the little company who were baptized
with the Holy Ghost on the Day of Pentecost, so clearly can
we find the spring and inspiration of the missionary move-
ment of the eighteenth century in the heart of that little band
of German Pietists of whom Spener and Franke were the
“most conspicuous leaders. . .. Life begets activity, and
370 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
there could not fail to be a missionary revival as the out- —
come of this evangelical revival.”’ |
Then follows, in his book, the citation of instance after
instance down through the years of how new missionary —
impulse has owed its origin to a revival of spiritual life. —
The evangelical revival of Wesley and Whitefield quickened ©
the pulse of foreign missions in England. Moravianism —
was born out of Pietism in Germany. A fresh vision of —
God which brought a rich new experience to the hearts of ©
Jonathan Edwards and David Brainerd caused them, like
Isaiah of old, to cry, ““Here am I, send me,” and sent them —
forth to the North American Indians. A powerful revival —
in Bavaria brought to Gossner a wonderful anointing of the —
Holy Spirit, and thereupon he became ‘“‘the father of faith —
missions.”’ |
Illustrations of this sort could be multiplied were there —
further need. But surely enough has been said to prove that —
true missionary zeal can spring only from real spiritual life,
and that a genuine spiritual revival invariably leads to quick- —
ened missionary concern and endeavor. Just as Pentecost ©
had to precede Missions in the apostolic days, as constituting —
the essential preparation for the work, so the pentecostal —
experience of the Holy Spirit’s infilling has been the fore-
runner of every fresh missionary inspiration and advance
in the centuries that have followed. And further, it is the ©
only thing which can bring that new missionary vision, con- —
viction and passion, so manifestly needed to-day, to enable
the Church to hearken to the world’s cry of need and to —
see and seize the golden opportunities of the present mission-
ary situation.
A mighty spiritual revival in the Church of Christ is the ©
fundamental need of the hour; it is the only thing that will »
avail. In view of the tremendous issues involved, both to —
an embarrassed Church and to a dying world, unceasing —
prayer should ascend to God day and night, from every loyal
and discerning heart, for such a revival. When it comes the
problems of missionary recruits and missionary support will
be solved. When it comes a new volume of missionary
intercession will release the omnipotence of God, before
which every obstacle will give way, every opposing force ©
will be rendered impotent, the whole enterprise of world
THE PRESENT MISSIONARY OUTLOOK 371
evangelization will move firmly onward to its consummation,
and “the ends of the earth shall see the salvation of our
God.”’
QUESTIONS
1. Discuss five favorable features, and three unfavorable fea-
tures, of large bearing upon the missionary enterprise to-day at its
field end, giving concrete facts by way of illustration.
2. Applying to the missionary enterprise the imagery employed
in Isaiah 54: 2, 3:
(a) To which ends of the enterprise respectively would the ex-
pressions “lengthen thy cords” and “strengthen thy stakes” appro-
priately belong?
(b) Upon which end would the hope of further advance seem
primarily to depend to-day?
(c) Suggest four fundamental “stakes” which stand in obvious
need of being “strengthened” in the home church, expanding the
lesson under each heading.
372 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
“He is waiting with long patience
For His:crowning day,
For that kingdom which shall never
- Pass away.
And till every tribe and nation
Bow before His throne,
He expecteth loyal service
From His own.
He expecteth—but He heareth
Still the bitter cry
From earth’s millions, ‘Come and help us,
For we die.’
He expecteth—doth He see us
Busy here and there,
Heedless of those pleading accents
Of despair?
Shall we, dare we disappoint Him?
Brethren, let us rise!
He who died for us is watching
From the skies.
Watching till His royal banner
Floateth far and wide,
Till He seeth of His travail,
Satisfied !”
—Selected.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Missionary literature has grown to comprise an immense num-
ber of books dealing with the various fields and phases of the mis-
sionary enterprise. Limitation of space makes possible the men-
tion here of only a very few, and those have been selected which
the author thinks may prove most helpful to the student or general
reader in amplifying the necessarily brief records of missions con-
tained in the present volume.
For a full list of missionary books the reader is referred to
“A Selected Bibliography of Missionary Literature” (1920), pub-
lished by the Student Volunteer Movement, New York City. He is
further reminded that new and valuable missionary books are
constantly issuing from the press, and these do not appear in even
the latest printed list. The Missionary Research Library, 25 Mad-
ison Avenue, New York City, is probably the best authority on
missionary literature,
HISTORICAL AND GENERAL
Barnes, L. C. Two Thousand Years of Missions before Carey.
1900. Christian Culture Club.
. Buiss, E. M. Encyclopedia of Missions. 1904. Funk & Wag-
nalls.
Buiss, E. M. The Missionary Enterprise. 1908. Revell.
Dennis, JAs. S. Christian Missions and Social Progress. 3 vols.
1897. Revell.
ForEIGN Missions CONFERENCE OF NortTH AMERICA, REPORT OF.
(Annual.) Foreign Missions Conference.
Hopexins, L. M. Via Christi. 1903. Macmillan.
Mason, A. DEW. Outlines of Missionary History. 1921. Doran.
NortH, Ertc M. The Kingdom and the Nations. i921. Central
Committee on United Study of Foreign Missions.
SmiTH, Georce. A Short History of Christian Missions. 1913.
Band) Ts Clark.
SPEER, Ropert E. Missions and Modern History. 2 vols. 1904.
Revell.
STATESMAN’S YEAR Book, THE. (Annual.) Macmillan.
WarneEck, Gustav. History of Protestant Missions. 1904.
Revell.
Wor.tp Missionary ATLAS (1924). Institute on Social and Reli-
gious Surveys.
Wortp Miss1IoNARY CONFERENCE. 9 vols. Ig10. Revell.
Wortp Survey (1920). Interchurch World Movement of N. A,
MISSIONARY APOLOGETIC AND APPEAL
Brown, ArtHuur J. The Foreign Missionary. 1907. Revell.
Brown, ArtHur J. The Why and How of Foreign Missions
1921. Missionary Education Movement.
373
874 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Dennis, JAs. S. The New Horoscope of Missions. 1908. Revell.
Doucuty, W. E. The Call of the World. 1912. Missionary Edu-
cation Movement.
Evitis, Wm. T. Men and Missions. 1909. Sunday School Times.
Gorpon, A. J. The Holy Spirit in Missions. 1893. Revell.
LamsButH, W. R. Winning the World for Christ. 1915. Revell.
Mort, Joun R. The Pastor and Modern Missions. 1904. Student
Volunteer Movement.
Mort, Joun R. The Present World Situation. 1915. Student
Volunteer Movement.
Murray, AnprEw. The Key to the Missionary Problem. 1901.
American Tract Society.
Murray, J. Lovett. The Call of a World Task. 1918. Student ;
Volunteer Movement.
Pierson, ArtHuR T. The New Acts of the Apostles. 1894.
Revell.
SPEER, Rosert E. Missionary Principles and Practice. 1902.
Revell.
SPEER, Ropert E. The Gospel and the New World. i919. Revell.
COMPARATIVE RELIGIONS
Ketioce, S. H. The Light of Asia and the Light of the World.
1885. Macmillan.
Kettocc, S. H. A Handbook of Comparative Religion. 1905.
Student Volunteer Movement.
MarsHat., E. A. Christianity and Non-Christian Religions Com-
pared. 1910. Bible Institute Colportage Association.
Ricuarps, E. H., and others, editors. Religions of Mission Fields
as Viewed by Protestant Missionaries. 1905. Student Vol-
unteer Movement.
SPEER, Rogert E. The Light of the World. 1911. Macmillan.
TIspALL, W. St. Crair. Christiamty and Other Faiths. 1912.
Revell.
ZWEMER, S.M. Christianity the Final Religion. 1920. Eerdmans-
Sevensma Co.
EDUCATIONAL AND MEDICAL MISSIONS
Barton, Jas. L. Educational Missions. 1913. Revell.
LamsButTH, W. R. Medical Missions: The Two-fold Task. 1920.
Student Volunteer Movement.
SPEER, Ropert E. The Foreign Doctor. i911. Revell.
MIsston FIELDS AND BIOGRAPHIES
INDIA
CARMICHAEL, AMy W. Things as They Are. 1906. Revell.
CARMICHAEL, AMy W. Overweights of Joy. 1906. Revell.
BIBLIOGRAPHY 375
Carey, S. P. Wm. Carey. 1923. Doran.
CHIROL, SIR VALENTINE. India, Old and New. i921. Mac-
millan.
Dyer, HeLen S. Pandita Ramabai. 1923. Pickering & Inglis.
Eppy, G. SHerwoop. India Awakening. i911. Missionary Edu-
cation Movement.
Ewine, J.C. R. A Prince of the Church in India. 1918. Revell.
FARQUAHAR, J. N. Modern Religious Movements in India. 1915.
Macmillan.
FLEMING, D. J. Building with India. 1922. Missionary Educa-
tion Movement.
eee Mrs. M. B. The Wrongs of Indian Womanhood. 1900.
evell.
Hiccrnsottom, S. The Gospel and the Plow. 1921. Macmillan.
Hotcoms, H. H. Men of Might in India Missions. 1901. Revell.
Mason, Carotine A. Lux Christi. 1902. Macmillan.
Papwick, C. E. Henry Martyn: Confessor of the Faith. 1923.
Doran.
Paton, WM. Alexander Duff, Pioneer of Missionary Education.
1923. Doran.
_Parxer, Mrs. A. Sadhu Sundar Singh. 1920. Revell.
Ricuter, J. History of Protestant Missions in India. 1908.
Revell.
- STREETOR, Canon. The Message of Sadhu Sundar Singh. 1923.
Macmillan.
SOUTHEASTERN ASIA
Brown, A. J., and Zwemer, S. M. The Nearer and Farther East
(Moslem Lands and Siam, Burma and Korea). i909. Mac-
millan.
CapMAN, Grace H. Pen Pictures of Annam and Its People. 1921.
Christian Alliance Pub. Co.
Dopp, Wm. C. The Tai Race. 1923. Torch Press.
OtpuaM, W. F. India, Malaysia and the Philippines. 1914.
Eaton & Mains.
Rossins, J. C. Following the Pioneers: A Story of American
Baptist Mission Work in India and Burma. 1922. Judson
Press,
CHINA
Anprew, G. F. The Crescent in North-West China. 1921. China
Inland Mission.
BROOMHALL, MarsHaLt. The Chinese Empire. 1907. Morgan &
Scott.
BRoOMHALL, MarsHaLt. Jslam in China. 1gi0. China Inland
Mission.
Brown, ArtHuR J. New Forces in Old China. 1904. Revell.
376 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
CuinA Misston YEAR Book. (Annual.) Missionary Education
Movement.
CLARKE, SAMUEL R. Among the Tribes in South-West China.
1911. China Inland Mission.
_ Gover, A. E.. A Thousand Miles of Miracle in China. 1904.
Hodder & Stoughton.
HEADLAND, Isaac T. China’s New Day. i912. Central Com-
mittee on United Study of Missions.
Hopcxin, H. T. China in the Family of Nations. 1923. Doran.
Keyte, J. C. In China Now. 1923. Doran.
Scott, C. E. China from Within. 1917. Revell.
SmitH, A. H. Rex Christus. 1903. Macmillan.
Tayior, Mrs. Howarp. Pastor Hsi: Confucian Scholar and
Christian. 1907. China Inland Mission.
Taytor, Dr. AND Mrs. Howarp. Hudson Taylor in Early Years.
Hudson Taylor and the China Inland Mission. 2 vols. 1920.
Morgan & Scott. :
WitiiaMs, S. Wetits. The Middle Kingdom. 1883. Scribner.
JAPAN, KOREA, FORMOSA
AXLING, WM. Japan on the Upward Trail. 1923. Missionary
Education Movement.
Bisuop, IsABELLA B. Korea and her Neighbors. 1897. Revell.
CHRISTIAN MovEMENT IN JAPAN, KorEA AND Formosa, THE. (An-
nual.) Foreign Missions Conference of N. A.
DeForest, J. H. Sunrise in the Sunrise Kingdom. i909. Mis-
sionary Education Movement.
FisHer, G. M. Creative Forces in Japan. 1923. Missionary
Education Movement.
Gates, JAs. S. Korea in Transition. 1909. Missionary Education
Movement.
GrirFis, WM. E. Verbeck of Japan. 1900. Revell.
GrirFIs, WM. E. The Mikado’s Empire. 2 vols. 1913. Harper.
Harpy, A. S. Life and Letters of Joseph Hardy Neesima. 1891.
Houghton, Mifflin.
Hur_Bert, Homer. The Passing of Korea. 1906. Doubleday,
Page,
KANAMORI, PauL M. Kanamori’s Life Story. 1921. Sunday
School Times.
Mackay, Georce L. From Far Formosa. 1895. Revell.
McKenzigz, F. A. Korea’s Fight for Freedom. i919. Revell.
Unverwoop, H. G. The Call of Korea. 1908. Revell.
THE NEAR EAST
Barton, Jas. L. Daybreak in Turkey. 1908. Pilgrim Press.
Exvtiotr, Maser E. Beginning Again at Ararat. 1924. Revell.
Forper, A. Ventures among the Arabs. 1909. Gospel Publish-
ing Co.
BIBLIOGRAPHY 377
Hart, Wm. H. The Near East Crossroads of the World. 1920.
Interchurch World Movement.
McGitiivray, M. The Dawn of a New Era in Syria. 1920.
Revell.
Martuews, Basit. The Riddle of Nearer Asia. 1919. Doran.
MorGeNnTHAU, Henry M. Ambassador Morgenthaw’s Story. 1918.
Doubleday, Page.
Puirsy, H. St. J. B.. The Heart of Arabia: Record of Travel
and Exploration. 2 vols. 1923. Putnam.
RicutTer, J. History of Protestant Missions in the Near East.
1910. Revell.
Rogson, JAs. lan Keith Falconer of Arabia. 1924. Doran.
- SHeppD, Mary L. The Measure of a Man, Wm. A. Shedd of
Persia. 1922. Doran.
- UssHer, CLARENCE D., and Knapp, Grace H. An American
Physician in Turkey. 1917. Houghton, Mifflin.
Watson, Cuartrs R. In the Valley of the Nile. 1908. Revell.
Witson, S. G. Modern Movements among Moslems. 1916.
Revell.
WIsHARD, J. G. Twenty Years in Persia. 1908. Revell.
ZWEMER, 8S. M. Arabia: The Cradle of Islam. tgoo. Revell.
ZWEMER, S. M. Islam: A Challenge to Faith. 1907. Student
Volunteer Movement.
ZWwEMER, S. M. The Disintegration of Islam. 1916. Revell.
ZWEMER, S. M., and Brown, A. J. The Nearer and Farther East.
1909. Macmillan.
CENTRAL ASIA
HepIn, SvEN. Through Asia. 2 vols. 1898. Harper.
Hutton, J. E. A Story of Moravian Missions (Section on West-
ern Tibet). 1922. Moravian Publication Office.
PENNELL, T. L. Among the Wild Tribes of the Afghan Frontier.
1909. Lippincott.
RIJNHART, SusIE C. With the Tibetans in Tent and Temple.
1904. Revell.
SHELTON, Frora B. Shelton of Tibet. 1923. Doran.
AFRICA
Biarkiz, W.G. The Personal Life of David Livingstone. 1880.
Revell.
Crawrorp, Dan. Thinking Black. 1912. Doran.
CrawForp, Dan. Back to the Long Grass. 1923. Doran.
Du Pressis, J. The Life of Andrew Murray of South Africa.
191g. Marshall Bros. .
Harris, J. C. Khama, the Great African Chief. 1923. Doran.
Kum, H. K. W. The Sudan. 1906. Marshall Bros.
Livincstone, W. P. Mary Slessor of Calabar. 1916. Doran.
LivinestonE, W. P. Robert Laws of Livingstomia. 1922. Doran.
878 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Mackay of Uganda, The Story of the Life of. By his Sister.
1891. Doran.
MACKENZIE, JEAN. Black Sheep. 1916. Houghton, Mifflin.
Matruews, F. T. Thirty Years in Madagascar. 1904. Religious ©
Tract Society.
Moret, E. D. The Black Man’s Burden. 1920. Huebsch.
Naytor, W.S. Daybreak in the Dark Continent. 1912. Mission-
ary Education Movement.
Patton, C.H. The Lure of Africa. 1917. Missionary Education —
Movement.
WELLS, JAs. Stewart of Lovedale. igo9. Revell.
LATIN AMERICA
CLARK, Frances E. The Continent of Opportunity. 1907. Revell.
Dawson, THos. C. South American Republics. 2 vols. 1910.
Putnam.
Enocx, C.R. The Republics of Central and South America. 1913.
Scribner.
Guass, F. C. Adventures with the Bible in Brazil. 1923. Picker-
ing & Inglis.
Hay, ALEx. R. Saints and Savages: Brazil's Indian Problem.
1920. Hodder & Stoughton.
INMAN, S. G. Problems of Pan-Americanism. 1921. Doran.
Jorpan, W. F. Crusading in the West Indies. 1922. Revell.
McLean, J. H. The Living Christ for Latin America. 1916.
Presbyterian Board of Publication.
PANAMA CONGRESS ON CHRISTIAN WorK IN LATIN AMERICA. 3
vols. 1916. Missionary Education Movement.
Ross, E. A. South of Panama. i915. Century Company.
SPEER, RoBperT E. South American Problems. 1914. Holt.
stuNtTz, H. C. South American Neighbors. 1916: Missionary
Education Movement.
TrowsripcE, E. D. Mexico To-day and To-morrow. 1919. Mac-
millan.
OCEANIA
ALEXANDER, JAS. M. The Islands of the Pacific. 1909. American
Tract Society.
Brain, Bette M. The Transformation of Hawait. 1898. Revell.
Brown, ArtTHUR J. The New Era in the Philippines. Revell.
Burton, J. W. The Call of the Pacific. 1912. Kelly.
COLWELL, JAMES. A Century in the Pacific. 1915. Kelly. ©
Euuis, Jas. J. John Williams: The Martyr Missionary of Poly-
nesia. I889. Revell.
MontcoMery, Heten B. Christus Redemptor. 1906. Macmillan.
PaTon, Jas. John G. Paton, an Autobiography. 1907. Doran.
Paton, Frank L. The Triumph of the Gospel in the New Hebri-
des. 1908. Doran.
ei ia Metin nie Mia meal as
BIBLIOGRAPHY 379
Paton, Frank L. The Kingdom in the Pacific. 1913. United
Council for Missionary Education.
Simon, C. Progress and Arrest of Islam in Sumaira. 1912.
Marshall Bros.
SMALL, ALEX. Chalmers of New Guinea. 1924. Doran.
Worcester, Dean C. The Philippine Islands and Their People.
1898. Macmillan.
THE JEWS
GipnEY, W. T. The Jews and Their Evangelization. 1907. Stu-
dent Volunteer Movement.
OstroM, Henry. The Jew and His Mission. 1923. Bible In-
stitute Colportage Association.
- TuHompson, A. E. A Century of Jewish Missions. 1902. Revell.
UNOCCUPIED FIELDS
Barton, Jas. L. The Unfinished Task. 1908. Student Volunteer
Movement.
- GrawaMm, J. A. On the Threshold of Three Closed Lands. 1897.
R. & R. Clark.
~ Wortp MisstoNaRY CONFERENCE. Ig10. Vol. I. Carrying the
Gospel. Revell.
ZwEMER, S. M. The Unoccupied Mission Fields of Africa and
Asia. 1911. Student Volunteer Movement.
ht
rAd 4 "
/ J
wii®
&
INDEX
Abdul Hamid, 211; massacre of
Armenians by, 214.
Abeel, Rev. David, 137.
Abel, Rev. Charles W., work at
Kwato, 315.
Abgar, accepts Christianity, 42.
Aboriginal Hill Tribes, in India:
Bhils, 98; Karens, 98; Khonds,
98; Khols, 98; Santals, 908.
Aborigines, in Formosa, 174; of
Korea, 180.
Abraham, as a missionary, 27.
Abyssinia, 237; first entry of Gos-
pel into, 42; mountains in, 230;
Portuguese missionaries in, 235;
Roman Catholic missions in, 235;
unoccupied fields of, 237.
Abyssinian churches, 234.
Abyssinians, in Africa, 232.
Access, difficulty of, 347.
Accessions during Apostolic Period,
39.
Aconcagua, peak in Ecuador, 268.
Acts, The, a missionary textbook,
30.
Addis Abeba, 237.
Aden, 216.
Afghan border, missionary outposts
on, 342.
Afghanistan, 341, 343, 344, 348;
move to establish trade with
America, 342; Persian, language
in, 341; Pushtu, language in, 341;
recent changes in, 342.
Afghans, at Meshed, Persia, 342.
Africa, 227-262, 348, 361; adaptive
methods of work in, 250; ag-
gression of the white man in,
255; area of, 227; black man’s
country in, 255; Christian con-
verts in, 251; climate of, 230;
colonial administration in, 256;
deserts of, 230; discovery and ex-
ploration of, 234; diseases in,
251, 257; early history of, 233;
early Roman Catholic efforts in,
235; European governments in,
256; forests of, 228, 231; indus-
381
trial education in, 250; Jews in,
328; laid open to missions, 354;
lakes of: Nyasa, 228; Tangan-
yika, 228; Tchad, 228; Victoria
Nyanza, 228; liquor question in,
257; medical missions in, 251;
mineral wealth of, 231; inland
Missions, missionary stations of,
247; missionary work in, 235;
Mohammedan invasion of, 234;
mountains of, 230; names of,
Afarik, 227; The Dark Conti-
nent, 227; native leadership in,
359; natural resources of, 231;
neglected areas in, 252; opposing
forces from without, 254; the
people of, 231; physical features,
228; policy of European Govern-
ments in, 255; population of:
Chinese imported laborers, 227;
Indian, 227; native, 227; white,
227; power of Islam in, 255;
railways in, 256; religions of,
232; rivers of: Congo, 228; Ni-
ger, 228; Nile, 228; Zambesi,
228; Roman Catholic govern-
ments in, 254; opposition to mis-
sions in, 254; size of, 227; South,
237-241; steamboat service in,
256; taxation in, 257; telegraph
in, 256; unevangelical heart of,
344; unoccupied fields in, 252,
253, 344; volcanic peaks in, 230;
Western vice and crime in, 257;
inland mission, 247.
African slave trade, the open sore
of the world, 239.
Sac barbarous crimes of,
238.
Agnostics, in Tokyo University,
172)
Aggression of Western nations re-
sented, 361.
Ainu, ancient race in Hokkaido,
154; schools at, 160.
Akbar, founded Mogul Empire, 99.
Alaska, Moravian missions to, 83.
Albigenses, persecution of, 66.
382
Aleppo, 204; caravan of Armenians
reach, 213; leading railroad cen-
ter, 201.
Alexander, overthrow of Medo-
Persian empire, 200.
Alexandria, 233; a missionary cen-
ter, 43; Parsons, buried at, 214;
and Carthage, centers of Chris-
tianity, 42.
Algeria, 237.
Allen, Dr. H. N., first Protestant
missionary to Korea, 185; quoted,
on Korean government, 183.
Allen Dro You ids:
Allenby, General, 212;
East, 201.
Alliance, Christian and Missionary,
in French Indo-China, 128.
Amazon, 346; unhealthy climate of,
269; River, 268.
America, Jews in, 331.
Americas, colonization of the, con-
trasted, 263.
American Arabian Mission in Ara-
bia, 217.
American Baptist Free Missionary
Society, in Japan, 161.
in Near
American Baptists, missionary
agency in Assam, 120.
American Baptist Missionary
Union, 107; in China, 130.
American Bible Society, in Siam,
125; in South America, 284; in
West Indies, 296.
American Board, 137; in European
Turkey and Asia Minor, 216; in
Hawaii, 316; in Japan, 161; in
Near East, 214; in Philippine
Islands, 322; in South Africa,
241; Judson sailed under, 109;
losses of, in Turkey, 223.
American Board Mission, in Near
East, 218.
American Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions formed,
107.
American College for Girls, at
Constantinople, 218.
American Colonization Society, in
West Africa, 248.
American Congregationalists and
Baptists, in Siam, 123.
American Jewish Year Book, 328.
American Methodist Episcopal
Church, in Burma, 122; in Ja-
pan, 161.
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
American Methodist Episcopal
Mission, in Angola, 248; in
China, 139; in India, 110; in Ma-
laysia, 325; in Straits Settle-
ments, 1206.
American Mission, in Egypt, 236.
American Pioneers, in China, 137.
American Presbyterian Board, in
Japan, 160.
American Presbyterian Mission, in
China, 1303; in India, 170 qi
Near East, 218; in West Africa,
249.
American Presbyterian Station, at
Meshed, 342.
American Presbyterians (North),
in Siam, 124.
American Reformed Church Mis-
sion, in China, 139.
American Southern Baptist Mis-
sion, in China, 130.
American Southern Methodist
Mission, in China, 139.
American University of Beirut,
name of Syrian Protestant Col-
lege, 218.
American University at Cairo, 219.
Americans, in Hawaii, 315; in
Malaysia, 323.
Amerigo Vespucci, in Brazil, 272.
Amherst College, Neesima edu-
cated at, 166.
Amir, despotic governor of Af-
ghanistan, 341.
Amoy, treaty port, 138.
Ananias of Damascus, 38.
Andes Range, 268
Andover Seminary, 107, 316; Nee-
sima educated at, 166.
Andrew Murray Memorial Mis-
sion, 241.
Aneityum, language of, 311; train-
ing school and press at, 311.
Angles, called ‘Angels,’ 52.
Anglo-Chinese College, founded at
Malacca, 136.
Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, 345.
Anglo-Saxon America, 263.
Augustine, apostle to England, 52;
writer of Early Church Period,
in Africa, 44.
Animism, in Africa, 232;
08.
Aniwa, Paton on Island of, 312.
Anopheles mosquito, carries ma-
laria, 230.
in India,
INDEX
Annam, protectorate of French
Indo-China, 127; Tourane on
coast of, 128.
Annamese, in Siam, 123; made ac-
cessible, 354; people of French
Indo-China, 127.
Annus mirabilis, 95.
Ansgar, apostle to Denmark and
Sweden, 58; apostle of the
North, 59.
Anthony, West Indian negro, 83.
Antioch, a missionary center, 43;
captured by Crusaders, 62.
- Anti-Christian propaganda in
China, 141.
Anti-Semitism, 333.
Apocalypse, seven churches of, 42.
“Apostle of the South Seas,” 309.
_ Apostolic Missions, period of, 3o-
40.
Appeal, India’s, 118.
ge peace Rev. H. G., in Korea,
185.
Arab rulers of Persia, 209.
Arabs, 206; in Africa, 231; in Ma-
laysia, 323.
hm Arabia, 109, 217, 224, 30%, 348;
Bible distribution in, 224; early
churches in, 42; extension dur-
ing apostolic period, 38; exten-
sion during early church period,
41; missions in, 216; new open
door in, 355; territory of, un-
evangelized, 221; the war in, 212.
“Arabia for the Arabians,” 361.
“Arabia, the Cradle of Islam,”
book by Dr. Zwemer, 202.
Arabic, Bible in, 344.
Araucanian Indians, 280.
Areas, neglected, in Near East, 220.
Argentina, 274; climate of, 269;
European characteristics of peo-
ple of, 264; immigration into,
286; missions in, 286; progressive
republic, 273; size of, 268; un-
occupied fields in, 286.
Armenia, 190, 217; cradle of the
human race, 200; massacres in,
222; Russian, unevangelized, 221.
Armenian Church, 215.
Armenian Question,
Powers, 223.
Armenians, accept Christianity, 42;
first Christian nation, 205; his-
tory of, 204; persecutions and
massacres of, 205.
evaded by
383
Armistice, 200.
“Arrow War,” 138, 140.
Aryans, in India, 08.
Ashmore, Dr. William, 1309.
Asia, 348, 361; Japan’s influence
over, 173; Jews in, 328; heart of,
unevangelized, 338; savage tribes
in, 348; southeastern, 120; un-
occupied fields in, 338.
Asia Minor, 199, 217, 365; con-
trol of, by Mustapha Kemal,
222; early spread of Moham-
medanism in, 55; extension dur-
ing early church period, 41;
missionary tour of Paul in, 38;
neglected districts of, 221.
Assam, in India, 98; missionary
work of, 120; people of, 120;
population of, 120; religion of,
120.
Assisi, Francis of, 65; in Mo-
rocco, 65.
Atahualpa, King of Incas, 272.
Atheists, in Tokyo University, 172.
Atrocities, rubber, in Congo, 256;
Turkish war, 212.
Attitude, changed, of Eastern Peo-
ples toward Missionaries, 356.
Auckland, 312.
August Francke, 76.
Austral Islands, 208.
Australasia, Jews in, 328.
Australia, Moravian missions to, 83.
Australian Anglicans, in New
Guinea, 315.
Australian Presbyterian Society, in
Korea, 185.
Austria, first treaty with Korea,
182; Jews in, 328.
Aymaras, tribe in Bolivia, 280.
Azerbaijan, 199; wunevangelized,
221.
Aztec Empire, overthrown by Cor-
LOZ tees
Aztecs, 271.
Babylon to Spain, covered by mis-
sionary work, 39.
Baghdad, 201, 217.
Bailey, Wellesley C., 112.
Baker, African explorer, 235.
Balboa, discovers Pacific Ocean,
271!
Balkan States, 211.
Ballagh, Rev. J. H., 167.
Baller, Rev. F. W., 143.
884 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Ballin, Herr Arthur, organized
railways in Germany, 330.
Baluchistan, 342, 343.
Bangkok, capital of Siam, 123.
Banner Cove, Tierra del Fuego,
283.
Bannu, 342.
Bantu, in Africa, 232.
Banza Manteke, Henry Richards
at, 240.
Baptist Board,
lands, 322.
Baptist Missionary Society, forma-
tion of first, IOI.
Baptist Telugus Mission, in India,
110.
Baptists, in Nicaragua, 291; in
Panama, 291; in Salvador, 291.
Barbary Coast, 211.
Barbary States, 237.
Barnabas of Cyprus, 38.
Baron Kato Hiroyuki, quoted, on
Buddhist priests in Japan,
156.
Barton, Dr. James L., on early
difficulties in the Near East,
215.
Base, home, vital factors at, 363.
Basel Mission, in India, 110.
Basel Missionary Society, in China,
in Philippine Is-
139.
Basra, 217; sale of Arabic Bible
i210!
Basutos, 232. ae ;
Batang, lack of missionaries in,
344.
Bavaria, revival in, 370.
Bechuana tribes, 238.
Bechuanaland, transportation of,
2h,
Bechuanas, 232.
Bedouin Arabs, 209, 210.
Bedouins, give Allenby aid, 212.
Behrein, 217.
Beirut, American Board located at,
214; college transferred from,
218.
Beirut Press, publishes Arabic
Bible, 210.
Beirut, sale of Arabic Bible in,
210.
Belgian Congo, 345; missions in,
248.
Benares, I15.
Benedict of Nursia, 65.
Benedictines, the, 65.
Bengal, seized by British, go.
Berbers, in Africa, 231.
Bergen, Egede sails from, 81.
Bernard of Clairvaux, leader of
Crusade, 61.
Bertha, wife of Ethelbert, 52.
Bhopal, only two mission stations
at t16,
Bhutan, 341, 348.
Bible, first Slavonian, 60; Mohee-
can, 86; silver, work of Ulfilas,
50; tongues translated into, 344;
translated in Korean, 184.
Bible League of India, 362. _
Bible Societies, in Philippines, 322;
in Venezuela, 288.
Bible Society, work in Central
Asia, 344.
Bible, translation into Chinese,
first, 136; into Arabic, first, 219.
Bible Union of China, 362.
pa Hiram, goes to Hawaii,
316.
Bishop, Mrs. Isabella Bird, on
Korea, 178; quoted, on Korean
Christians, 180.
Bismarck, 208.
“Black-Bearded Barbarian,” 174.
Black Hole of Calcutta, go.
Black Islands (see Melanesia).
Black Monks, 65.
Blackwater fever, 251.
Blantyre Mission, established at
South Lake Nyasa, 245.
Bliss, Dr. Daniel, 218; founder of
Syrian Protestant College, 218.
Bliss, Dr. Howard, 218.
Block-printing, in China, 131.
“Bloody Mary” of Madagascar,
259.
Boat people, 150.
Bobbio, monastery at, 53.
Boers, in South Africa, 240.
Bogoris, King of Bulgarians, 60.
Bohemia, Gospel enters, 60.
Bokhara, 344 (see Baluchistan).
Bolivar, military leader, 273.
Bolivia, 346; ancient civilization
of, 270; Bishop quoted on, 270;
missions in, 287, 289; mixed races
in, 264; size of, 268.
Bolivian Indian Mission, in Bolivia,
287.
Bolivian Indian and San Pedro
Missions, 280.
Bombay, educational center at, 111;
oe
‘ INDEX
Martyn in, 104; sale of Arabic
Bible in, 219; trading post formed
at, 99.
Boniface, apostle to Germany, 53.
Borneo, 298, 348; lack of workers
Wy 325.
Bororo Indians, 290.
Boston, Neesima in, 165.
Boxer indemnity, 146.
Boxer Uprising, 145.
Boxer year, in China, 353.
Brahmans, 79; opposition to Duff,
105.
Brainerd, David, 87; influence on
Martyn, 103; quoted, 26; spirit-
ual experience of, 370; views re-
garding condition of heathen,
364.
Brazil, 346; exports largest amount
of coffee in the world, 270; ma-
hogany forests in, 270; missions
in, 285; Portuguese, language of,
266; progressive republic, 274;
size of, 208; temporary triumph
of Jesuits in, 281; tropical cli-
mate of, 269; undiscovered ter-
ritory in, 268; unoccupied fields
in, 286.
Brebceuf in Quebec, 88.
_ Brethren, in Argentina, 286; in
Central Asia, 344; in Straits
Settlements, 126.
Bridgman, Rev. E. C., pioneer in
China,/137:
Brigandage, 147.
Britain, in Africa, 256; in New
Hebrides, 304; Lord Chief. Jus-
tice of, 330.
British, in Hawaii, 315; in New
Guinea, 314.
British and American Societies, in
British Guiana, 288.
British and Foreign Bible Society,
282; in French Indo-China, 128;
in Malaysia, 325; in South
America, 284.
British Empire, Jews in, 331.
British Friends, in Madagascar,
260.
British Guiana, Moravians in, 281.
British Isles, Jews in, 328.
British Protectorate over Egypt,
210.
British Weekly of Japan, 170.
British West Indies, extent of, 206.
385
Brown, Rev. S. R., 160, 161; ca-
reer of, 162.
Browning, Dr. W. E., estimate of
Indian population in South
America, 288.
Bruce, James, 235.
Bruce, “Training of the Twelve,”
30.
Buddhism, 157; in Burma, 121; in
China, 132; in French Indo-
China, 127; in Japan, 156, 167; in
Korea, 1803) ane Siam Wied ao
Tibet (see Lamaism).
Buddhists, in India, 98; in Nepal
and Bhutan, 341; in Tokyo Uni-
versity, 172.
Buenos Aires, 268; development of,
274; largest city in South
America, 274; Morris schools in,
277.
Bulgarians, receive the Gospel, 60.
Burgundy, Gospel enters, 53.
Buriats, pagans in Siberia, 347.
Burma, area and divisions of, 120;
in India, 98; Judson, missionary
to, 107; people of, 121.
Burns, Rev. Wm., 143; translated
“Pilgrim’s Progress,” 139.
Burton, African explorer, 235.
Bushmen, in South Africa, 232.
Butler, Dr. William, in India, I1o.
Byzantine Empire, Russia’s claim
to, 60.
Byzantium, made capital of Roman
Empire, 48.
Cabral, landed at Bahia, 272.
Cairo, 201, 204, 210, 356.
“Cairo of Asia” (see Bokhara).
Calabar, Mary Slessor’s work
among tribes of, 250.
Calcutta, arrival of Carey at, 101;
education center at, 111; factory
opened at, 99; Judson in, 107;
landing of Martyn at, 103; Mar-
tyn sails from, 104; trading post
formed at, 99.
Caliphate, 210.
Call of the Near East, 225.
Call to advance, 334.
Callao, main port of Peru, 275.
Calvert, Rev. James, sent to Ono,
308.
Calvin, 68, 281; his ideas about
missions, 72.
Cambodia, protectorate of French
386 THE PROGRESS OF WORL
Indo-China, 127; unoccupied field
OF 120;
Cambodians, people of French In-
do-China, 127.
Camden, mission ship, 310.
Canada, Japanese in, 154.
Canadian Baptist Mission, in Bo-
livia, 287.
Canadian Presbyterian Church, in
Formosa, 174.
Canadian Presbyterian Sbcee in
Korea,’ 185.
Canal Zone, 291; administered by
United States, 266.
Cannibalism, religious origin of, in
Africa, 233.
Canterbury Cathedral, founded, 52.
Cantine, Rev. James, 217.
Canto, Roman Catholic Fathers
sent as prisoners to, 340.
Canton, first hospital in China in,
137; sale of Arabic Bible in,
219; treaty port, 138.
Cape Colony, 238; under Dutch
rule, 77.
Cape Horn, 263.
Capetown, 238.
Cape-to-Cairo Railway, 201.
Captives, Tyrian, enter Abyssinia,
42.
Caras, of Ecuador, 270.
Carey, William, called “Wycliffe
of the East,” 102; career of, 100;
compared with Morrison, 135;
dawn of modern era with, 93;
Father of Modern Missions, 94;
influenced by Brainerd, 88;
stirred by sermon, 94; teacher at
Fort William College, 102;
treatment of, by East India
Company, 100; views regarding
condition of heathen, 364.
Cargill, David, 307.
Caribbean Coast, fruits from, 270.
Caroline Islands, 208.
Carthage, 234; a missionary cen-
ter, 43.
Caspian Sea, 204, 343.
Caste, in India, 114.
Catacombs of martyrs in Rome,
Catechumens’ School of Pantcenus,
in Alexandria, 44.
Cattle pests, 257.
Celebes, 208; lack of workers in,
325; missionary work on, 324.
D-WIDE MISSIONS
Celestial Empire, 131.
Centenary Conference of Protest-.
ant Missions, in China, 148.
Centers, strategic, 36; in Panama,
201.
Central African Ironstone Plateau,
344.
Central Asia, German Mennonites,
344; Jews in, 334.
Central Asian Mission, base at
Hoti-Mardan, 342.
Central America, 272, 290; area of,
290; divisions of: British Hon-
duras, 290; Costa Rica, 290;
Guatemala, 2900; Honduras, 290;
Nicaragua, 290; Panama, 290;
Salvador, 290; inadequate mis-
sionary forces of, 291; Moravian
missions to, 83; population of,
290; Roman Catholic Church in,
291; spiritual neglect and need
of, 290.
@entral American Mission, 29f.
Central Provinces, lack of mis-
sionaries in, 116.
Ceylon, Dr. Scudder in, 109.
Ceylon and India General Mission,
110.
Ceylon, station of General Mis-
sion, IIO.
Chalmers, James, career of, 314; in
New Guinea, 314; martyrdom of,
314; missionary in New Guinea,
313; sent to Raratonga, 314.
“Challenge to Christendom,” mes-
sage from Stanley, 243.
Challenge to Christianity,
sented by Africa, 258.
Charities, Christian, report of, by
Rev. Dr. Pettee, 160.
Chicago, Jews in, 320.
Child-widows in India, 112.
Chile, 275; cities in, 274; climate
of, 269; nicknamed “the shoe-
string republic,” 268; nitrate
fields in, 269; progressive repub-
lic, 274; size of, 268; strongly
Spanish in character, 264.
Chimborazo, peak in Ecuador, 268.
China, 130-151; aboriginal tribes-
men, 150; American pioneers in,
137; ancestral worship in, 132;
antiquity of, I3I1; area, 130;
Boxer year in, 353; Centenary
Conference, 143; changed con-
ditions in, 147; Christian prog-
pre-
INDEX
ress in, 148; climate of, 130; con-
ferences of Protestant missions
in, 148; discoveries of, 131; di-
visions of, 130; early missionary
trials in, 139; Romanist efforts
in, 134.
China Inland Mission, 143; and
spiritual life, 369; ‘growth of,
144; its principles and policies,
144; latest statistics of, 144;
martyrs in 1900, 145; on Tibetan
border, 340.
China, invasions of Korea by, 181.
Bee span War, 180, 182, 188,
— 180.
China, Japanese in, 154; Jesuits in,
134; Korean missions in, 360;
language and literature of, 131;
later Romanist activities in, 134;
Manchu dynasty in, 182; Man-
churia, province of, 130; men-
tioned in Bible, 131; minerals in,
130; Mongolia, province of, 130;
National Christian Conference
in, 148; Christian consciousness
in, 149; neglected classes in, 150;
“open door” in, 147, 353; open
mind in, 356; patriarchal gov-
ernment of, 131; physical fea-
tures of, 130; ‘population, 130;
prominent missionaries ie t4ass
Protestant martyrs in, 141; Prot-
estant missions in, 135; quali-
ties and achievements of, 131;
religions in, 132; resources of,
130; second period of work in,
138-140; South, boat people in,
150; unoccupied territory in, 150;
venerable civilization of, 131;
Yi:M. C.. As in, 140.
Chinese, 329.
Chinese Christian leaders to- day,
149.
Chinese Classics, in Japan, 157;
translated by Dr. Legge, 130.
Chinese, in Burma, 121; in For-
mosa, 174; in French Indo-
China, 128; in Hawaii, 315; in
Latin America, 264; in Malaysia,
323, 324; in Malay Peninsula,
126; in Philippine Islands, 320.
Chinese Maritime Customs, 131.
Chinese National Christian Con-
ference, 350.
Chinese Repository, published by
Bridgman, 137.
387
Chinese Republic, 130, 146.
Chinese revolution, 146;
of missions to, 146.
Chinese, third important class in
Slat y1 23;
Chinese Turkistan, 130, 343; now
called Sinkiang, 339; unoccupied
field in, 150.
Ching-yi, Dr. Cheng, 140.
Chin, tribe in Burma, 121.
Chino-Japan War, 168.
Chino-Japanese War, 144.
Chitambo’s village, Livingstone’s
death at, 240.
Cho-sen, early name for Korea,
relation
177.
Chota Nagpur, lack of missionaries
in, 116.
Christ, indispensable, 32; mission-
ary design in life and work of,
a world’s need of, emphasized,
303.
Christian and Missionary Alliance,
110, 144, 216; in Argentina, 280;
in Chile, 286 ; in Ecuador, 288,
290; in Philippine Islands, aaa
in Sierra Leone, 248; martyrs in
1900, 145; on Tibetan border,
349.
Christian College for women, in
India, 113.
Christian Inland Mission, in Chi-
nese Turkistan, 3309.
Christian Missionary Society, in
Uganda, 245.
Christian Missions in many lands,
344.
Christian VI, King of Denmark,
82.
Christianity, in Near East, 202,
215; North African, causes for
decline of, 234.
Christians, crossed Rhine to Ger-
manic tribes, 43; loyalty of, in
Japan, 168; in British Isles, 43;
in India, 98; in Tokyo Univer-
sity, 172; persecution of, in
Japan, 158; Korean, quality of,
IOl.
Chulalongkorn, King of Siam, 123.
Chuma, African convert, 252;
servant of Livingstone, 240.
Church, Abyssinian, beginning of,
42; decadence of, 237.
Church, Bechuana, first, formed at
Kuruman, 238.
388
Church, Eastern, beginning of, 48.
Church, first Japanese, in Yoko-
hama, 167.
Church, growth of, in Fiji, 308.
Church, Indian, foreign missionary
efforts of, 359.
Church, Korean, evangelistic spirit
in, .193;
Church Missionary Society, 216;
and revival, 369; at Bannu, 342;
in Abyssinia, 237, 240; in China,
1303-"m > East.(Atrica) 242% in
Near East, 216; in Egypt, 236;
in Egyptian Sudan, 236; in
Pndia)) 1003) 1 Japa wide in
Mesopotamia, 217; in Nigeria,
248; in Persia, 216; in Sierra
Leone, 248.
Church of Scotland, at Darjeeling,
340; in India, 104, 1006.
Church, Pyeng Yang, holds record
on prayermeetings, 102.
Church, Roman Catholic, in Cen-
tral America, 291; in politics in
South America, 274.
Church, Syen Chun, in Korea, 1092.
Church, Western, beginning of, 50.
Churches, English and Dutch Co-
lonial, in South Africa, 241.
Churches, native, development of,
358; growth of, 359.
Ch urches, non-missionary,
self-supporting, in Korea,
190.
Cilicia, massacres in, 222.
Civilization, early, of At rica.)(223-
in Africa, good and bad features
of, 256; influence of godless,
361; record of, in Oceania, 303.
Civilization, Western, in French
Indo-China, 128; well advanced
in Siam, 123.
Clark, Dr. Francis E., on South
America, 266.
Classes, Bible, in Korea,
neglected, in Japan, 171.
Clement, 43; in Africa, 44.
Clough, Dr. and Mrs., in India,
TIO.
Coan, Rev. Titus, in Hawaii, 317.
Cochabamba, school at, 287.
Cochin China, State of French In-
do-China, 127. .
Coffee, largest amount in Brazil,
270.
365 ;
188,
187;
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Coillard, Francois, evangelized Ba-
rotsi, 240.
Coligny, 281; Huguenot leader, 73.
College of Propaganda at Rome,
254.
College missionary, at Utrecht, 54.
Colleges in India, 112.
Columbia, 346; backwardness of,
274; missions in, 288;
strong —
Spanish characteristics in, 2064;
unoccupied fields in, 288.
Colonization, of the Americas, con-
trasted, 264; Portuguese, in
South America, 264; Spanish, in —
South America, 264.
Columba, apostle to Scotland, 52;
missionary work of, Hebrides,
52; North Scotland, 52; Orkney,
52; Shetland Islands, 52.
Columbanus, apostle to Swiss, 53.
Columbus, 271; discovered South
America, 266.
Comber, Thomas, 249.
Commission of the Federal Coun-
cil of Christian Church in Amer-
ica, on Korean situation, 195.
Committee on Codperation in Latin
America, 295; conference held in
Mexico City, 293.
Compass, Mariner’s, 131.
“Concessions,” in Japanese ports,
163.
Concubinage in Siam, 123.
Conditions, advanced, in Siam, 123.
Conditions, changed, in China, 147.
Conditions, moral, in French Indo-
China, 128; in Siam, 123.
Conferences, on Moslem Advance
in Africa, 254.
Conference on Moslem Missions in —
Lucknow, 254.
in China,
Indo-China,
Japan, 156; in Korea, 180.
Confucianism,
French 127 2 Nite
Confucianists, in Tokyo University, —
172,
Confucius, 132.
Congo, 235, 345; discovery of, 235;
Islam in, 255; sleeping sickness
a0 2 30h
Congregational Mission, in Brazil,
285; in Mexico, 203.
Conquistadores, 264.
Conrad III, Emperor of Germany,
leader of Crusade, 62.
1323; in
INDEX
Consciousness, national, increasing,
361.
Constantine, changes capital of
Roman Empire, 48; conversion
of, 48; edict of, 48; influence
upon the Church, 48; motto of,
48.
Constantinople, 203, 214; capital
of Roman Empire, transferred
to, 48; captured by Turks, 210;
first Protestant Church in, 216;
key to Bosphorus, 222; sale of
Arabic Bible in, 219.
“Continent of Opportunity,” South
America called, 266.
“Continent of To-morrow,” South
America called, 266.
“Continental” islands, 300.
Convent of St. Thomas, becomes
Lancasterian School, 282.
Converted Jews, prominent names
of, 333.
Converts, apostolic, quality of, 39;
royal, in Hawaii, 317.
Cook, Captain, discovers Hawaiian
Islands, 315; explores islands of
Pacific, 302; voyages around the
world, I0oI, 305.
Cook Islands, 208.
‘Cooke, Miss M. A., in India, 112.
Cooperation, lack of missionary,
348.
Copenhagen College, 76, 80o.
Coptic Church, 210, 215, 232, 234.
Copts, 210; as workers in mis-
sions, 236.
Cornelius, Bishop of Rome, 45.
Cortez, in Mexico, 271.
Cotopaxi, mountain peak in Ecua-
dor, 268.
Cox, Melville, in West Africa, 249.
Crisis, new, in Japan, 173.
Criticism, destructive Biblical, 362;
higher, on the mission field, 362.
Cross, Rev. William, 307.
“Cross-roads of the Pacific,” 315.
“Cross-roads of the World,” 2or.
Crowther, Samuel, African convert,
251; belonged to Yoruba tribe,
251; carried off by slave raiders,
251; sent to school in Sierra
Leone, 251.
Crusades, 61; effects of, 62.
Cuba, contrasts in, 294; educa-
tional work in, 295; forests of,
389
294; thrown open to missionary
work, 354.
Cults, modern, in India, 115.
Cuzco, Pizarro storms city of, 272.
Cyprian, letter to church in Spain,
43; teacher of Early Church Pe-
riod, in Africa, 44.
Cyprus, 211.
Cyril, apostle to Bulgarians, 50.
Cyril of Alexandria, 43.
Cyrus, founder of Medo-Persian
empire, 208.
Czecho-Slovakia, Jews in, 328.
Daimios, 155.
Dalai Lama, ruler of Tibet, 340.
Damascus, 201, 204.
Damascus-Medina railroad, 212.
Dancing-girls in India, 113.
Danish East India Company, 77.
Danish-Halle Mission, r00.
Dardanelles, 205.
Darfur, 344.
Darjeeling, 340.
Dark Continent, 239, 242, 252, 253,
258, 354.
Darwin, Charles, on Patagonian
Indians, 283.
David, Christian, 82.
Dawson, quoted on Spanish period
in South America, 273.
de Mayer, Miss Jenny, 344.
Decian persecution, 64.
Denmark, Gospel enters, 53, 58;
in Latin America, 266.
Dennis, Dr., quoted, 25.
Dera’a, ‘201.
Desima, Dutch on island of, 1509.
de) Souzae in. Brazil,’ 272.
Despotism, military, of Japan in
Korea, 104.
Dewey, Admiral, defeats Spanish
fleet, 320.
Diaz, Bartholomew, rounded Cape
of Good Hope, 234.
Diocletian, persecutions under, 46.
Disciples, in Philippine Islands,
322.
Disciples Church, in Paraguay,
287.
Diseases, in South America, 275.
Division, two-fold, 338.
Divisions, Religious, 98.
Djemal Pasha, 211.
390
Doctrine, liberalistic, effect on mis-
sions, 361.
Dodd, Dr. W. Clifton, 125.
Dominic, 66.
Dominicans, the, 66; in Africa,
235; in China, 134; in South
America, 280; Spanish, in Japan,
158.
Doshisha, founded by Neesima, 166.
Doshisha University, 165.
Drakenbergs Mountains, in Natal,
230.
Dravidians, composed of Telugus,
Tamils, Kanarese, 98; source of
Pacific Islanders, 300.
Dresden, Zinzendorf at, 82.
Druids, center at Iona, 52; in Ire-
land, 51.
Drummond, Prof. Henry, in Af-
rica, 252; on beauty of Island
World, 300.
Duff, Alexander, first Scotch mis-
sionary in India, 104; friendship
with Rammohun Roy, 105; op-
position to, by Brahmans, 105.
Duff, mission ship, 305.
Dumaguete, 322.
Dutch, captured Bahia in Brazil,
281
Dutch East India Company, 324.
Dutch East Indies, 323; Medhurst
and Milne work in, 136.
Dutch Guiana, Moravians in, 281;
Von Welz goes to, 76.
Dutch, in African exploration, 234;
in Formosa, 174; in India, 99; in
New Guinea, 314; settled near
the Cape, 235.
Dutch Societies, in Malaysia, 324.
Dutch Reformed Church, enters
India, 100.
Dutch West India Company, in
Brazil, 281.
Dwighta ric CO were
Dyaks, in Malaysia, 323.
Dynasty, Manchu, in China, 182.
Early Church Missions, Period of,
41-47.
Early European Missions, Period
of, 48-57.
Early Missionary Societies, Period
of the, 74-80.
Earthquakes, 153.
East Africa, advance inland from,
242; group of great missions in,
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
245; wniversities mission in,
245.
East and Central Africa, 241-247.
East and West, new gap between, ©
360.
East India Company, 72, 79, 93,
IOI, 103, 107; attitude to mis-—
sions, 100; British, 99; Danish,
99; French, 99; in China, 135,
136. ;
East Indians, in Burma, 121; in |
Latin America, 264.
Eastern Bengal, lack of mission-—
aries in, 116. |
Eastern Christian Sects, 215.
Ecuador, 275, 346; cacao beans
exported from, 270; exports
ivory nuts, 270; government in,
274; missions in, 288; mixed
population in, 264; mountain
peaks in, 268; panama hats ex-
ported from, 270; size of, 268;
unoccupied fields in, 288.
Ecumenical Conference, 113, 369.
Edersheim, 333.
Edessa, the modern Urfa, Chris-
tian community, middle of second
century, 42.
Edicts, anti-Christian
158, 163.
Edinburgh Conference Report, on
neglected Africa, 345.
Edwards, Jonathan, 87; sermon by,
stirred Carey, 94; spiritual ex-
perience of, 370.
Effect, cumulative, of missionary
work, 358.
Efforts, active missionary, 69;
early RKomanist, in Japan, 157;
foreign missionary, of Korean
Church, 104.
Egede, Elizabeth, 80.
in Japan,
Egede, Hans, apostle to Green-
a 80; labor in Greenland,
0.
Egypt, 190, 207, 211, 217, 233, 236;
Allied war base of Near East,
212; Bible distribution in, 224;
British Protectorate over, 210;
extension during apostolic period,
38; early church period in, 41;
early spread of Mohammedan-
ism in, 55; fertility of lower,
228; for the Egyptians, 361;
General Mission, 236; given self-
government, 223; new open door
INDEX
in, 355; spirit of enquiry in,
357; pyramids in, 210; races in,
210.
Egyptians, 210, 320.
Eighteen Provinces, 130.
Elat, Kamerun, 250.
Elgin, Lord, 160.
Eliot, John, apostle to North
American Indians, 85.
Elizabeth Isles, Mayhew, Crown
- patentee of, 87.
Ellice Islands, 2098.
Embassy, Imperial, of Japan, visits
the West, 163; Japanese, visits
America, 166.
Emir Abdullah, in Trans-Jordania,
PS
Emir Feisal, King of Irak, 223;
leader of Bedouin band, 212;
quoted on Beirut College, 218.
Emperor of China, forced to ab-
dicate, 146.
Empire, British Indian, 90.
Empress Dowager of China, 145.
England, Gospel enters, 52.
English, in African exploration,
234.
English and Foreign School So-
ciety, 281.
English Baptist, in India, 106.
English Baptist Mission, in Bel-
gian Congo, 249.
English Baptist Missionary So-
ciety, in China, 1309.
English Colonies, in Africa, 235.
English Episcopalian Society, in
Korea, 185.
English Presbyterian Church, in
Formosa, 174.
English Presbyterian Mission, in
China, 139.
English Presbyterians, in Straits
Settlements, 126.
English Wesleyan Missionary So-
ciety, in China, 1309.
English Wesleyans, in Fiji, 307.
Enver, plots extermination of
Christians, 213.
Enver, Pasha, 211.
Ephesus, a missionary center, 43.
Episcopal Church mission, in Mex-
icO, 203.
Episcopalians, in Panama, 201.
Epistles, New Testament, mission-
ary character of, 37, 39.
Equatorial Africa, products of, 231.
391
Eric the Red, colonizer of Green-
land, 50.
Erromanga, martyr island, 310;
Williams lands at, 310.
Esther, Queen, 209; as a mission-
ary, 28.
Eskimos, 82; of Greenland, 81.
“Eta,” social outcastes of Japan,
172,
Ethelbert, King of England, 52.
Ethiopia, 233.
Ethiopian eunuch, 38.
Euphrates, 200.
Eurasians, in Malaysia, 323.
Europe, Jews in, 328.
European Turkey, 190.
Europeans, in Malaysia, 323.
Eusebius, early Church historian
in Syria, 42; quoted, 45.
Evangelical Lutheran, in India,
LLG:
Evangelical missions, in Philippine
Islands, 321.
Evangelical Society of France,
takes over work in Society Is-
lands, 306.
Evangelical Union of South Amer-
ica, in Argentine, 286; in Bo-
livia, 289 3! inv Brazil, 285) in
Peru, 287.
meets newspaper, in Japan,
1609.
Evangelization of Jew, three-fold
claim for, 334.
“Ever-Victorious Army,” I41.
“Evidences of Christianity,” by
Dr. W..A.P. Martin,: 142.
Exploration, lack of, 347.
Explorers, in Africa, 235.
Extension of missionary efforts,
309.
’
Faber, Dr. Ernest, 142.
Facilities, improved material, in
missionary world to-day, 355.
Faith missions, China Inland mis-
sion a model of, 143; in Angola,
241; in Central America, 201;
in Portuguese East Africa, 241;
reach from Capetown to Nyasa-
land, 241.
Falconer, Ion Keith, 216.
Famine, Great, of China, 141.
Farther India, consists of Assam
and Burma, 120.
392
“Father of Presbyterian Missions
in the South Seas,” 311.
Features, favorable, in mission
fields to-day, 353; unfavorable,
in mission fields to-day, 360.
Federal Council of Churches in
America, protest regarding Ko-
rea, 106.
Federated Malay States, 126.
Federated Missions of Japan, pro-
test regarding Korea, 196.
Fengtien, Manchurian province,
13%,
Feng Yu-hsiang, General, 149.
Fetichism, in Africa, 232.
Field, the Northern, 124; the
Southern, 124.
Fields, mission, unfavorable fea-
tures in, to-day, 360.
Fields, unoccupied, in Christian ex-
perience, 351; in India, 116; in
Japan, 171; the crowning chal-
lenge of this age, 351.
Fifth period of missionary work,
140-151.
Fiji, 298; heathen degradation
in, 308; Indian coolies in,
320.
Fiji Islands, 306-308; cannibalism
in, 307; missionary beginnings
in, 307; people of, 306; popula-
tion of, 306.
Fiji, strongholds of Satan in, 308;
transformation in, 308.
Fijians, mixture of Polynesians
and Papuans, 301.
Filipinos, in Hawaii, 315; largest
part of population, 320.
Fiske, Pliny, in the Near East,
214.
Flowery Kingdom, 131.
Footbinding, condemnation of, in
China, 147.
Forces, missionary, inadequacy of,
349; opposing in India Missions,
114.
Formosa, 152, 154, 174-175; ceded
to Japan, 174; Channel, separates
4 Mormosa\eoirom,) China iz As
Christian’; ‘churches. in, 1743
general features of, 1743
missionary work in, 174; popu-
lation of, 174; statistical sum-
mary of missions in, 175.
Fort William College, at Calcutta,
102.
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
“Forty Years among the Zulus,”
by Josiah Tyler, 241.
Fourth period of missionary work,
144-146.
France, in Africa, 256; in Latin
America, 266; in Near East, 203;
in New Hebrides, 304; in North
Africa, 237; Jews in, 331; pro-
hibition of Protestant missionary
work by, 348.
Franciscans, the, 65; among Indians
in Canada, 88; in China, 134;
in South America, 280; Spanish,
in Japan, 158.
Franke, 360
Fratres Minores, 65.
Free Church of Scotland, field
around Lake Nyasa, 246.
French Equatorial Africa, 345.
French in African exploration, 234.
French Huguenots, in Brazil, 281.
French Indo-China, 125; area of,
127; Christian and Missionary
Alliance in, 128; climate and
products of, 127; land of, 127;
missionary results in, 129; mis-
sions in, 128; moral conditions
in, 128: opened to Protestant
work, 354; part of Southeastern
Asia, 120; people of, 127; popu-
lation of, 127; Swiss Brethren
in, 128; unoccupied fields in,
120.
French, in Madagascar, 259; on
Senegal River, 235; spoken in
Haiti, 266.
French West Africa, 345.
Frere Town, refuge for slaves at,
Friars, Gray, 65; preaching, 66;
Roman Catholic, in Philippine
Islands, 321.
Friedrich IV, King of Denmark,
70.
Friends, in Guatemala and Hon-
duras, 201.
Fuchow, treaty port, 138.
Fujiyama, 153.
Gabet, penetrates to Lhasa, 340.
Gabun; 250.
Gale, James S., quoted, on
Korean Church, 192; sent to
Korea, 185.
Gambia _ River,
English
along, 235.
settled
~*
é
‘%
INDEX
Ganges, sacrifices to, 102.
Gardiner, Captain Allen, died in
Spanish Harbor, 282; efforts of,
with Indians, 289; failure of
work in Argentina and Para-
guay, 283.
-Gataks, in Malaysia, 323.
Gaul, Gospel enters, 51.
Geddie, John, career of, 311; tablet
in memory of, 311; translates
Bible, 311.
General Assembly of the Indian
Presbyterian Church, 359.
- “General Booth of Japan,” the, 170.
- Georgia, 199; unevangelized, 221.
German East Africa, changes name
to Tanganyika Territory, 247.
- German Evangelical Missions, 216.
German missions, in South Africa,
241; in East Africa, 246.
German Pietists, 360.
Germans in Hawaii, 315.
_ Germany, first treaty with Korea,
182; Gospel enters, 53; in Near
East, 203; Jews in, 328.
Gibson, Dr. J. C., chairman of
China Centenary Conference,
143.
Gilbert Islands, 208.
Gilmour, James, 142.
“Gilmour of Mongolia,” 142.
Goa, trade center, 99; Xavier at,
70, 71.
Goaribari Island, Chalmers and
Tomkins murdered at, 314.
Goble, Rev. J., 161.
Godfrey, made King of Jerusalem,
2.
Godfrey of Bouillon, leader of
Crusade, 61.
Godt-haab, capital of Greenland,
81.
Goforth, Rev. Jonathan, visits
Korean revival, 191.
Gold Coast, 234.
Good, Adolphus C., in West Africa,
240.
Good Samaritan, parable of the,
33.
Gordon College, 236.
Gordon, Dr. A. J., on missions and
Holy Spirit, 369.
Gordon, General Charles G., 141;
in Egyptian Sudan, 236.
Gossner, spiritual experience of,
370.
393
Gossner’s Society, in India, 110.
Goths, conversion of the, 50.
Government, patriarchal, 131.
Grain Coast, 234.
Gran-Chaco, 280.
Grant, African explorer, 235.
Gray Friars, 65.
“Great Awakening,” 317.
Great Britain, first treaty with
Korea, 182; in Egypt, 203; in
Latin America, 266; in Persia,
203; Lord Elgin signs treaty for,
in Japan, 160.
“Great Heart of New Guinea,”
314.
Greece, 365; defeated by Turkish
Nationalists, 222; early Chris-
tian centers in, 42; extension
during early church period, 41;
in Near East, 203; missionary
tour of Paul in, 38.
Greek Church, 215.
Greek Orthodox Church, 205, 207.
Greeks, in Near East, 205; suf-
fering of, during war, 206.
Green, Byron, member of ‘“Hay-
stack group,” 107.
Greenland, Egede’s labors in, 80;
Gospel enters, 50.
Gregory of Utrecht, founded mis-
sionary college, 54.
Gregory Thaumaturgus, bishop to
Neo-Cesarea, 45.
Gregory the Great, introduced
Christianity into England, 52.
Grenfell, in Belgian Congo, 249.
Griffis, Dr. Wm. E., quoted, on
Dr. Brown, 162; quoted on Jap-
anese martyrs, 158.
Growth and development of mis-
sions, in Japan, 166.
Growth and influence of missions
during Early Church Period, 44.
Grubb, Rev. W. Barbrooke, 280.
Guayaquil, 275.
Guarani Indians, in Paraguay, 290.
Guatemala, Presbyterian mission
at, 291.
Guianas, the, missions in, 288.
Guinea Coast, 232, 234.
Guinness, Miss Lucy, quoted on
South America, 266.
Gunpowder, in China, 131.
Gurkhas, in Nepal, 341.
Gutzlaff, Dr. Karl, in China, 137.
394 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS _
|
Gwalior, only one mission station
at, 116.
Hadramaut, in Arabia, unevangel-
ized, 221.
Haifa, 201.
Haiphong, western civilization in,
128.
Haiti, backwardness of, 294; Bap-
tists in, 296; French, Janguage
of, 206.
Hakada, open to American trade,
160.
Hakodate, Neesima at, 165.
Hakon, apostle*to Norway, 509.
Hall, Gordon, member of “Hay-
stack group,’ 107.
Halle, University of, 76; Zinzen-
dorf educated at, 82.
Hamlin, Dr. Cyrus,
Robert College, 218.
Hangchow, church mission at, 143.
Hanjiro, Japanese convert of Xav-
ier, 70; refugee, 157.
Hankow, 141, 142; Wesleyan mis-
sion at, 143.
Hannington, Bishop, killed by King
Mwanga, 245; message to King
Mwanga, 245.
Hanoi, western civilization in, 128.
Harold, King of Jutland, 58.
Hara, Mr. T., founded Home for
Discharged Prisoners, 169.
Hardy, Hon. Alpheus, 166.
Harpoot, caravan of Armenians
start from, 213.
Harris, Mr., joins Williams, 310;
martyred on Erromanga, 310.
Harris, Townsend, 160.
Harrison, President, 113.
Hartzell, Bishop, on Africa, 227.
Harvest-time, 358.
Havana, wealthiest city in West
Indies, 204.
Hawaii, annexation to U. S. A,,
318; early conditions in, 316;
great awakening of, 317; growth
and extension in, 318; how the
Gospel entered, 316; idolatry
banished in, 316; Japanese in,
154; Kimura in, 170; Korean
missions in, 194, 360; moral deg-
radation in, 316; royal converts
In ieat7 Western vices in, 316.
Hawaiian Islands, 2098, 315-318;
discovery of, 315; physical fea-
founder of
tures of, 315; population of, 315;
size of, 315. |
“Haystack group,’ Green, Byron, —
107; Hall, Gordon, 107; Loomis,
Harvey, 107; Rice, Luther, 107;
Richards, James, 107; Robbins,
Francis, 107.
“Haystack” prayermeeting, 100.
Heathen, God’s dealing with, 23;
lost condition of, 363; moral con-
dition of, 23; Scripture testi-
mony concerning, 23, 364; spirit-
ual condition of, 23; temporal
condition of, 23; views regarding
condition of, 364.
Heber, Reginald, his hymns, 106;
in India, 100.
Hebrew, 332.
Hebrew University, on Mt. Olivet,
220.
Hegira, beginning of Mohammedan
calendar, 54.
Heilungkiang, northernmost prov-
ince of Manchuria, 150.
Hejaz, in Arabia, unevangelized,
221.
“Help for Brazil,” 284.
Hepburn, J. C., M.D., 160; career
of, 161.
Hermit Nation, the, 177; first
Protestant missionary to, 185.
Heron, Rev. J. W., M.D., in*Korea,
185.
Herrnhut, center of Moravian
Church, 82; Moravian center, 94.
Hideyoshi, 158.
Hill, Rev. David, of Wesleyan
Mission at Hankow, 142.
Hilo, revival at, 318.
Himalayan Mountains, 330.
Hinduism, 114; in Malaysia, 325;
rites of, II2.
Hindus, in India, 98; people of
Assam, 120.
“History of the Propagation of
Christianity and the Overthrow
of Heathenism,” published by
Robert Miller, 94.
Hobson, Dr., medical pioneer in
China, 130.
Hokkaido, 154;
Ainu in, 154.
Holland, Gospel enters, 53; in
Latin “America, 266; Von Welz
ordained in, 75.
Holy Land, 216.
ancient race. of
INDEX
Home for Discharged Prisoners, in
Tokyo, 169.
Honan, 141.
Hongkong, ceded to British,
Neesima in, 165.
Hooker, Thomas, the Puritan ex-
ile, 8s,
Horic, King of Denmark, 58.
Hospital in China, first, founded
by» Dr. Parker, 37.
Hoste, Mr. D. E., General Director
of China Inland Mission, 144.
Hoti-Mardan, 342.
Hottentots, 235; in South Africa,
232; under Dutch rule, 77.
Hova, tribe in Madagascar, 259.
Hsi, Pastor, of China Inland Mis-
sion, 143.
Huc, Roman Catholic Father, pene-
trates to Lhasa, 340.
Huguenots, French, 73.
Humboldt current, 260.
Hungary, 211; Jews in, 328.
Hung Sin Ch’uan, leader of Tai
Ping Rebellion, 141.
Hupeh, murder of missionaries in,
I4I.
Hurlburt, Charles E., in East Af-
Tica; 247.
Huron Indians, 88.
Huss, John, founder of Moravian
Brotherhood, 81.
Hyder Ali, native ruler in India,
79.
138;
Iceland, Gospel enters, 59.
Idea, missionary, in the Old Testa-
ment, 27; world-conversion, 366.
Idolatry, in China, 132; in Hawaii,
316.
Idols, destruction of, in China,
147; Slavic, destroyed, 50.
Ignatius Loyola, 66; martyrdom of,
46; writer and martyr in Syria,
42.
Igorrotes, of the Philippine Islands,
310.
Illyricum, missionary tour of Paul
in, 38.
Iloilo, first mission hospital at, 322.
Imperial University at Peking, 142.
Inca Empire, powerful before com-
ing of Spaniards, 271.
Incas, 272; government of, pater-
nalistic, 271; of Peru, 270.
395
India, 96-119, 341, 342; area of,
96; climate, 96; Danish-Halle
mission to, 76; earliest churches
in, 42; first Bible translation in,
77; languages and dialects of,
98; native leadership in, 3590;
native states of, 348; open to
missionary work, 354; population
of, 96; present missionary op-
portunity in, 357; racial divisions
in, 98; resources, 96; Tanjore,
Ziegenbalg preached in, 77; the
land, 96; the people, 96; Xavier’s
labors in, 70.
“India for the Indians,” 361.
Indian, the base of Latin American
people, 264.
Indian coolies, in Fiji, 326.
Indians, effect of drink on, in
Chile, 276.
Indians, in Central America, 201;
in Latin America, 264; in South
America, 288; Iroquois, Eliot
among, 85; North American,
370; of the United States, Mo-
ravian missions to, 83; Roman
Catholic missions to, 88; South
American, unoccupied fields
among, 290.
Independent Presbyterian Church,
in Brazil, 286
Indo-Chinese, tribes in India, 98.
Industrialism, in Japan, 171.
Influence, French, in French Indo-
China, 128.
Inland South American Missionary
Union, 290; in Argentina, 286;
in Paraguay, 287.
Inquisition, supported by Domin-
icans, 66
Intervention, American, in Cuba
and Santo Domingo, 2094.
Intrigue, Jesuit, in Abyssinia, 254;
in Uganda, 254.
Iona, missionary center, 52, 65.
Irak, 199; made independent state,
223.
Ireland, Druids in, 51;
ters Si
Irenzus, 43.
Ireneus and Pothinus in Gaul, 42.
Iroquois Indians, 88.
Irreverence, in use of sacred terms,
Gospel en-
278.
Ishii, Mr., opened Okayama Or-
phanage, 160.
3906 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Islam, in Near East, 215; meaning
Island World, native leaders in,
359.
Isthmus of Panama, 271.
Italy, extension during early church
period, 41; first treaty with
Korea, 182; in. Near East, 203;
in. North Africa, 237; Jews in,
331. :
Itineration, 36.
Ito, Marquis, sent to Korea, 184.
Ivory Coast, 234.
Ivory nuts, buttons made from,
270.
Tyeyasu, 158.
Jaffa, 201.
Jains, in India, 98.
Janes;) Captain P50. 164,
Japan, 152-176; aboriginal race of,
154; American Baptist Free
Missionary Society in, 161;
American Board in, 161; Ameri-
can Methodist Episcopal Church
in, 161; American Presbyterian
Board in, 160; America’s re-
sponsibility to, 174; annexes
Korea, 184; anti-Christian edicts
in, 158, 163; area of, 152; atroci-
ties of, in Korea, 195; Buddhism
in, 167; Chinese civilization in,
155; Christianity prohibited in,
159; Church Missionary Society
in, 161; climate of, 153; Com-
modore Perry in, 159; Dutch
traders in, 159; door reopened
in, 159; earthquakes in, 153;
early Romanist efforts in, 157;
Emperor worship in, 173; Evan-
gelistic Band, 171; evangelistic
need in, 170; factories in, 172;
first Bible translation in, 161;
first treaty with Korea, 182;
fisher folk in, 172; forms of
mission work in, 168; Francis
Xavier's) labors’) in, 070, 157%
growth and development of mis-
sions in, 166; historical résumé
of, 155; in Korea, 183; indus-
trialism in, 171; influence of,
over | Asia, 173;' invasions! | of
Korea by, 181; Jesuits in, 157;
location and size of, 152; miners
in, 172; missionary work in, 157;
nationalism, 167; native leader-
ship in, 359; neglected classes —
in, 171-172; new constitution of,
163; new crisis in, 173; new in-
dustrial maelstrom in, 172; noble
pioneers in, 161; open door in,
354; period of exclusion in, 158-
159; persecution of Christians
in, 158; physical features, 152;
population of, 152; ports open
to American trade, 160; Portu-
guese in, 157; Portuguese Jesu-
its in, 158; Protestant Episcopal
Church of America in, 160;
Protestant vanguard in, 160;
Reformed Church of America
in, 160; religions of, 156; re-
sources and industries of, 153;
Roman Catholicism suppressed —
in, 158; sailors in, 172; Society
for the Propagation of the Gos-
pel in, 161; Spanish Domini-
cans in, 158; Spanish Francis-
cans in, 158; statistical summary
of missions in, 175; people of,
154; tidal waves in, 153; Town-
send Harris in, 160; treaties
with, 163; unoccupied fields in,
171; Western vices in, 164.
Japanese, filial piety of, 154; in
Formosa, 174; in Hawaii, 315;
in Latin America, 264; patriot-
ism of, 154; traits of character,
154.
Java, 208.
Javanese, in Malaysia, 323.
Jerome, scholar, 42.
Jerusalem, 201, 204, 214; a mis-
sionary center, 43; captured by
Crusaders, 62; new spirit of en-
quiry in, 357; retaken by Mos-
lems, 62; taken by Allenby, 212;
taken by Turks, 210; Temple
area in, 208.
Jesuits, the, 66; Huguenots killed
by, 281; in Africa, 235; in China,
134; in French Indo-China, 354;
in Japan, 157; in South America,
280; institutions at Rome, 67;
missionary operations of, 67;
Portuguese, in Japan, 158.
Jesus, Society of, 66.
Jewish Missionary Societies, 332.
Jews, 209, 328-336, 357; future of,
334; in America, 329; in Ger-
many, 331; in India, 98; in New
York colleges and schools, 330;
INDEX
in Palestine, 207; in the Near
East, 208; number and distribu-
tion of, 328; progress and prom-
inence of, 329; prominence of,
330; Reformed, 331; religious
conditions among, 331; results
achieved, 333; task remaining,
334-
Jidda, port of Mecca, 202.
Johannesburg, called “university of
crime, . 258;'/gold,, 231; gold
mines of, 257.
John de Monte Corvino, 134.
John, Dr. Griffith, pioneer worker
at Hankow, 142.
Jonah, as a missionary, 28.
Jones, Dr. George Heber, quoted,
on Korean Christian giving, 194;
on the Koreans, 179.
Joseph, as a missionary, 28.
Juan Varetto of Argentina, 359.
Juarez, 273.
Judaism, attitude of, to Christian-
ity, 220; in Near East, 202, 215.
Judaistic Unitarians, 331.
- Judson, Adoniram, career of, 107;
in Burma, 122; influenced by
Carey, 88; joins “group,” 107.
Judson, Ann Hasseltine, 108; East
India Company treatment of,
100; Mrs. Sarah (Boardman),
112; views regarding condition
of heathen, 364.
Justin Martyr, martyrdom of, 46;
quoted, 44; Syrian philosopher,
42.
Kabul, 341.
Kachins, tribe in Burma, 121.
Kadijah, wife of Mohammed, 54.
Kaffirs, 232.
Kalahari Desert, 230.
Kalley, Dr. R. R., Scotch physician
in Brazil, 284.
Kamehameha I, chieftain of Ha-
wali, 316.
Kamerun, 230; Islam in, 255.
Kampala, largest Christian church
in Africa at, 245.
Kanamori, Paul, leader of Kuma-
moto Band, 170.
Kanamori of .Japan, 359.
Kanjundu, convert in Angola, 252.
Kansu, I3I, 150.
Kantara, supply station established
AL v2cz.
397
Kapiolani, 317.
Karakoram Pass, 330.
Karen churches, missionary efforts
of, 122; self-supporting, 122.
Karens, in Siam, 123; receive gos-
_pel, 107; tribe in Burma, 121.
Kashmir, 340, 342, 343.
Kawabe, trainer of native workers,
170.
Kellogg, Dr. S. H., quoted, 116.
Kenia, 230.
Kerbela, 202, 342.
Kerr, Dr., medical pioneer in
China, 139.
Keswick Convention, 360.
Kettering, Baptist Missionary So-
ciety formed at, 101; marks be-
ginning of organization, 93.
Khama, King of Bechuanaland,
252.
Khartum, Gordon College at, 236;
sale of Arabic Bible in, 2109.
Khiva (see Baluchistan).
Khyber Pass, 99.
Kwangsi, 150.
Kwato, Abel’s work at, 315.
Kwenlun Mountains, 339.
Kiangsu, 131.
Kidder, Rev. D. P., in Brazil, 284.
Kija, civilizer of Korea, 180.
Kilauea, volcano in Hawaii, 317.
Kilimanjara, volcanic peak in Af-
rica W230:
Kim of Korea, 359.
Kimberley, diamond fields of, 257;
diamonds, 231.
“Kingdom of Hejaz,” 212.
Kimura, “Moody of Japan,” 170.
Knox, 68.
Kondowe, Nyasaland, 250.
Korai, old name for Korea, 177.
Koran, 220; scriptures of Moham-
medans, 55, 50.
Korea, 177-198; a sample station
in, 189; area of, 177; changed
Japanese administration in, 1096;
China-Japan war in, 188, 189;
climate and physical features,
178; Emperor-king of, abdicates,
184; first three converts in,
188; first treaties with, 182;
high conception of discipleship
in, 191; historical résumé of, 180;
independence movement in, 194;
Japan’s ascendancy in, 182; Jap-
anese ancestors came from, 154;
398
Japanese in, 154; Kimura in,
170; king of, takes refuge with
Russia, 182; language of, 179;
love for God’s word in, I91;
military despotism of Japan in,
194; missionary work in, 184;
missions in, 360; names of, 177;
native leadership in, 359; North-
ern .Presbyterian Board in, 185;
open door in, 185, 354;~ people
of, 178; population of, 177; posi-
tion and size, 177; prayermeet-
ings in, 192; Protestant begin-
nings in, 184; queen of, mur-
dered, 182; relation of Chino-
Japanese war to, 144; religions
of, 179; resources of, 178; Ro-
man Catholic missions in, 184;
sacrificial giving in, 193; school
work in, 187; self-propagation
and self-support in, 192; seli-
supported schools in, 187; socie-
ties in, 185; statistical summary
of missions in, 197; Sunday
Schools in, 191; the Great Re-
vival in, 190; the Hermit Nation,
177»
Korean, in Philippine Islands, 320;
church, high conception of re-
sponsibilities of, 366; Independ-
ence movement, 197.
Koreans, in Hawaii, 315.
Kordofan, 344.
Koweit, 217.
Krapf, John Ludwig, career of,
241 ; explorer-missionary, 235; in
East Africa, 241; landed in
Mombasa, 241.
Krishna, I15.
Kuang Hsu, Emperor of China,
145.
Kublai Khan, 134; forced Ko-
reans to invade Japan, 181.
Kucheng massacre, 141.
Kueichow, 150.
Kumamoto, military school at, 164.
“Kumamoto Band,” 164, 165; Paul
Kanamori, a leader of, 170.
Kumm, Dr. Karl, on unoccupied
fields of Africa, 344, 345.
Kurdistan, 199, 217; in Eastern
Asia Minor, 206.
Kurds, 206; unevangelized, 221.
Kurile Islands, 152.
Kuruman, first station opened by
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Moffat at, 238; Livingstone at,
238.
Kyoto, 181; Christian school
opened at, 165; Doshisha founded
at, 166.
Kyushu, military school on, 164.
La Paz, institutions of learning at,
287.
La Plata River, 268.
La Salle in Quebec, 88.
Labor, enforced, in the Pacific, 313.
ERE Moravian missions to,
By
Lacquerware, 132.
Ladrone Islands, 208.
Lake Bangueolo, Livingstone diéd
at, 240.
Lake Titicaca, 289; relics near,
270.
Lakemba, Island of Fiji group, 307.
Lamaism, in Mongolia, 142; in
Tibet, 340.
Lancasterian schools, 28r.
tae of the Palm and the Pine,”
318.
Language, of China, 131.
Lao-tsze, founder of Taoism, 133.
Laos, in Siam, 123; missionary
work extended to, 129; proclama-
tion of Religious Liberty to, 124;
protectorate of French Indo-
China, 127; work in Siam among,
124.
Latham, “Pastor Pastorum,” 30.
Latin America, 263-207, 348; area
of, 263; languages in, 266;
mixed races in, 264; native lead-
ership in, 359; political divisions
in, 266; population of, 263;
whites in, 264.
“Latin Americans,” 263.
Latin West Indies, 294-205; extent
of, 294; general conditions of,
294; missionary work in, 295;
population of, 294; resources of,
294; Roman Catholicism in, 295.
Lausanne, peace conference at, 222.
Lawes, Dr., in New Guinea, 314.
Laws, Dr. Robert, leader of pio-
neer party, 246.
Laymen’s Missionary Movement of
the First Century, 35.
Leaders, Japanese Christian, 169;
native, development of, 358.
INDEX
Leaders of Crusades, Bernard of
Clairvaux, 61; Conrad III, Em-
peror of Germany, 62; Godfrey
of Bouillon, 61; Louis VII, King
of France, 62; Richard of Eng-
land, 62. .
Leaders of new Chinese Republic,
147.
Leaders, Pietist, 76.
Leadership, Chinese Christian, 350.
Legaspi, in Philippine Islands, 320.
Legge, Dr., translated Chinese clas-
sics, 139.
Legters, Rev. L. L., estimate of
Indians in Mexico, 293.
Lengua Indians, of Paraguay, 280.
Leonard; Dr. D. L., quoted on
Carey, 95; on Fijians, 3006.
Lhasa, explorers enter, 339.
Li Yuan Heng, 147.
Liang A-fa, 141.
Liberia, colony for African freed-
men, 248; Cox dies in, 249; Re-
public of, 248.
Lief the Lucky, 80;
Greenland, 50.
Liggins, Rev. J., of Protestant
Episcopal Church of America, in
Japan, 160.
Lima, Spanish Inquisition at, 277.
Lineage, spiritual, traced through
Brainerd, 88; Carey, 88; Ed-
wards, 88; Francke, 88; Huss,
88; Judson, 88; Wesley, 88;
Whitefield, 88; Wyclif, 88.
Literature and letter-writing, 37.
Literature, Christian, new demand
for, for Moslems, 357; of China,
apostle to
E31.
Little Islands (see Micronesia).
“Tittle Johnnie Geddie,’ 311.
Livingstone, David, 250; buried in
Westminster Abbey, 240; career
of, 238; discovered by Stanley at
Ujiji, 240; discovered sources of
Nile, 239; discovered Victoria
Falls, 239; missionary of London
Missionary Society, 245; opens
up Africa, 354; remains taken to
Zanzibar, 240; traces Zambesi to
source, 239; verifies courses of
Congo, 239; work as explorer,
235.
Livingstonia Mission, begun by
Free Church of Scotland, 246;
rapid growth of, 240.
399
Lockhart, Dr., medical pioneer in
China, 139.
Lone Star Mission, the, r1o.
London, 331.
London Jews’ Society, 216, 331.
London Missionary Society, in
China, 135; in East Africa, 246;
in India, 106; in Madagascar,
259; in New Guinea, 315; in
New Hebrides, 311; in Society
Islands, 305; in South Africa,
238, 240.
Loo Choo Islands, 152.
Loomis, Harvey, member of “Hay-
stack group,” 107.
Lottery, used by Roman Catholic
Church, 278.
Louis VII, King of France, leader
of Crusade, 62.
Louis the Pious, Roman Emperor,
58.
Lovedale, Cape Colony, 200.
Lower Burma, 120.
Loyalty, 208.
Lucknow, first college for women
atin TBS:
Lull, Raymond, apostle to Moslems,
63; at Tunis, 64; quoted, 26.
Luther, 68.
Liitkens, Dr., chaplain of Danish
Court, 76.
Luzon, largest of
Islands, 319.
Lyons, early churches in, 43.
Philippine
Macao, first Chinese convert in,
136; Morrison’s work at, 135.
Macedonia, 365; man of, 34; mis-
sionary tour of Paul in, 38.
Macedonian churches, missionary
giving of, 34.
MacFarlane, Dr., in New Guinea,
314.
Mackay, Alexander, career of, 243;
Dr. George L., in Formosa, 174.
Mackay of Uganda, 243.
Mackenzie, Bishop, in East Africa,
245.
Mackenzie, John, in South Africa,
240.
Mackenzie College, at Sao Paulo,
286.
Madagascar, 259-261; area of, 259;
early missions in, 259; French
subjugation of, results of, 261;
martyrs in, 259; missionary re-
400
enforcements in, 260; people of,
259; persecution in, 259; popula-
tion of, 259; turning of the tide
in, 260.
Madras, Dr. Scidder in, 109; edu-
cational center at; SDT sonEstiay ¢
M. C. A. secretary to, TI2; Jud-
son in, 107; trading post formed
at, 99.
Maelstrom, new industrial, in Ja-
pan, - 172.
Magdalena River, 268.
Magellan, discovers Philippine
Islands, 320; sails into Pacific,
302.
“Mahatma” Gandhi, 117.
Mahoganies, in Rhodesian forests,
228.
Majorica, Raymond Lull born at,
63.
“Maker of the New Orient,” Dr.
Griffis quoted on Brown, 162.
Malacca, 136.
Malagasy, 259, 261.
Malaria, 251; Anopheles mosquito
carrier of, 247 ;‘in Africa; 230.
Malay Archipelago, 208.
Malay Peninsula, 126; part of
Southeastern Asia, 120; popula-
tion of, 126; unoccupied fields
in, 120; Xavier’s labors in, 70.
Malays, in Malay Peninsula, 126;
in Malaysia, 323; in Siam, 123.
Malaysia, 154, 323-325; called also
East Indies, 298; languages in,
323; location of, 323; martyrs
in, 325; Medhurst and Milne
work in, 136; missionary occu-
pation of, 324; missionary prob-
lem in, 323; missionary results
in, 325; population and races of,
323; unevangelized territory in,
325; unoccupied fields in, 325.
eee Mass., tablet to J udson at,
10
Manchu dynasty, 141.
Manchu government, 146.
Manchuria, 191, 338; Japanese in,
154; Kimura in, 170; Korean
missions in, 360; lack of missions
in northern, 150.
Manila, center of missionary field,
322; missionary work in, 322.
Many Islands (see Polynesia).
Mapuche Indians, 280.
Mariolatry, in South America, 278.
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Marquesas, missionaries at, 305
Marquesas Islands, 2098.
Marquette in Quebec, 88.
Marshall Islands, 208.
Marshman, Mrs., 112; in India,
102.
ree Charles, defeats Moslems,
56.
Martha’s Vineyard, Mayhew, crown
patentee of, 87.
Martin, Bishop of Tours, 51.
Martin, Dr. W. A. P., educator
and writer, 142; “Evidences of
Christianity,” 142.
Martyn, Henry, career of, 103; in-
fluenced by Brainerd, 88; views
regarding condition of heathen,
364.
Martyrs, catacombs of, in Rome,
46; early Christian, Ignatius, 46;
Justin Martyr, 46; Paul, 46;
Polycarp, 46; in Korea, 195, 196;
in Madagascar, 260; in South
America, 285; in Uganda, 244,
245; Japanese, 158; Protestant,
in China, 141; Protestant mis-
sionary, in Boxer uprising, 145.
Mass. Movement (see ‘Move-
ment’’).
Matabeles, 232.
Matteo Ricci, enters China, 134.
Matto Grosso, state of, in Brazil,
290.
Mayflower, 84.
Mayhew, Thomas, Sr., 87.
Mayhew, Zechariah, 87.
McKenzie, F., A., quoted, on Ko-
rean Church, 103.
Mecca, 202, 324, 342; birthplace
of Mohammed, 54.
Medhurst, Walter, i in China, 136.
Medical work in Philippine
Islands, 322.
Medina, 201.
Mediterranean, 345.
Mediterranean Sea, 204.
Mediterranean States, products of,
aan.
Medo-Persian empire, founded by
Cyrus, 208.
Melancthon, 68.
Melanesia, 298, 312-314; growth
of) Church) in)'313:
Melanesian Society, 312.
Mennonites, German, 344; in Cen-
tral Asia, 344.
INDEX
Meshed, 221, 344.
Mesopotamia, 199, 201, 206, 207,
217, 350; early spread of Mo-
hammedanism in, 55; extension
during apostolic period, 38; ex-
tension during early church
period, 41; new open door in,
355; the war in, 212; unevan-
gelized, 221.
_Mestizos, half-castes of Philippine
Islands, 320.
Methodist Episcopal Board, in
Korea, 185; in Santo Domingo,
205.
Methodist Episcopal Church, in
' Argentina, 286; in Brazil, 284;
in Chile, 286; in Uruguay, 287.
Methodist Episcopal Mission, in
Bolivia, 287; in Mexico, 293; in
Peru, 287; in Philippine Islands,
B22)
Methodists, in Panama, 201. |
Methodius, apostle to Bulgarians,
59.
Methods, apostolic missionary, 35.
Mexico, 292-293; area of, 292;
contrasts in, 292; declares in-
dependence, 273;,evangelistic op-
portunity in, 292; ignorance of
sanitation and hygiene in, 292;
inadequate missionary occupation
of, 203; Indian population in,
293; Korean missions in, 194,
360; main features of, 292; neg-
lected Indians of, 293; new co-
‘ operative plans in, 293; perse-
cution in, 292; petroleum in, 292;
population of, 292; poverty in,
292; resources of, 292; wunoc-
cupied fields in, 293.
Mexico City, conference held in,
203.
“Mexican Problem,” 202.
Micronesia, 298; entered by Gos-
pel, 318.
Micronesians, mixed race, 301.
Middle Ages, period of the, 58-67.
Middle class, absence of, in South
America, 275.
Middle Kingdom, 131.
Mikado, restoration to power of,
160.
Mikados, I55.
Miller, Robert, “History of Propa-
gation of Christianity and the
Overthrow of Heathenism,” 94.
401
Mills, Samuel J., 106; befriends
Sia 316; in West Africa,
248.
Milne, Dr. Andrew M., in South
America, 285.
Milne, Dr. William, helped Mor-
rison translate Bible, 136; in
China, 136.
Mind, open, challenge of, 356.
Mindanao, Moros on, 320; next
largest of Philippine Islands, 319.
Minerals, of China, 130.
Ming dynasty, 134.
Ming Ti, Emperor, introduced
Buddhism into China, 133.
Mirando, Francisco, South Amer-
ican patriot, 273.
Missionaries, early difficulties of,
in Japan, 163; early policies and
methods of, t11; German, and
the war, 110; landed at Erro-
manga, 310; Moslem, in Africa,
255; prominent, in China, 142;
three great, in New Hebrides
Islands, 300.
Missionary Centers, during early
church period, Antioch, 43; Al-
exandrian/\43.0)4 Carthage tn 4a
Ephesus, 43; Jerusalem, 43.
Missionary societies, period of the
early, 74.
Mission Boards, embarrassed, 362.
Mission, Danish-Halle, to India, 76.
Mission Press, first, at Malta, 219;
in Siam, 125.
Mission to lepers, in India, 112.
Missions, aim of, 32; American,
genesis of, 106; and Holy Spirit,
Dr. Gordon on, 369; and Pente-
cost, 360; apostolic, period
of, 30; at outbreak of World
War, 355; conception of, by
Paul, 365; defined, 21; early
church, period of, 41; early Ro-
man Catholic in South America,
280; effect of Liberalistic Doc-
trine on,,361; Gentile, two stages
of, 367; German Pietists and,
369; growth and expansion in
Korea, 188; harvest-time in, 358;
in Burma, 122; in Chile, 286; in
French Indo-China, 128; in
Siam, 123; in the Acts, 33, 34,
36, 37; in the Gospels, 33, 36, 373
Jewish, 331; medical, in India,
III; modern, preparatory forces,
4:02
93; modern, Father of, 94; mod-
ern, period of, 93-95; Moravian,
83; opposing forces in India,
114; period of early European,
48; period of modern, 93; pol-
icy of, 33; Protestant, in China,
135; rapidity of results in Phil-
ippines, 322; ‘Regions beyond”
of, 337; responsibility for, 34,
365; Roman Catholic, eompared
with Protestant, 70; Roman
Catholic, in Korea, 184; Roman
Catholic opposition to, in Africa,
254; Roman Catholic to Amer-
ican Indians, 88; statistics of
Jewish, 333; to Indians in South
America, 289; to North Ameri-
can Indians, 84.
“Modernism,” in religion, 362.
Modernism, missionary support af-
fected by, 362; missionary zeal
affected by, 362.
eee Mary, marries Livingston,
238.
Moffat, Robert, career of, 237;
penetrates to Zambesi River, 238;
returns to Capetown, 238; work
as explorer, 235.
Mogul Empire, founded in six-
teenth century, 99.
Mohammed, career of, 54; charac-
ter of, 55.
Mohammed V, given title of Sul-
cans ern,
Mohammedans, 120; in Africa,
232; in China, 133; in Malay-
Sia, 324.
Mohammedanism, appraised by Sir
William Muir, 56-57; as a re-
ligion, 56; attitude of, to Chris-
tianity, 220; early spread of in,
Asia Minor, 55; Egypt, 55;
Mesopotamia, 55; North Africa,
55 sy bersiay She (vila, 5G uit
Afghanistan, 342; in Africa,
232 3°) 3 Central (Asia) 3430") in
Malaysia, 325; in Near East,
2027 71n North yAtrican 237/040
Persia, 209; in the Sudan, 255;
rise and spread of, 54.
Mois, tribe of French Indo-China,
127,
Moluccas, 298; lack of mission-
aries in, 325.
Monasticism, appraised, 64.
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Mongiardino, Jose, murdered by
cutthroats, 285.
Mongol dynasty, 134.
Mongolia, I31I, 344; invasions of
Korea by, 181; need of workers
in, 338; unoccupied field in, 150.
Monks, Benedictine, accompany
Augustine, 52. |
Monte Cassino, monastery at, 65.
Montevideo, societies in, 287.
Moody at Cambridge, 360.
“Moody of Japan,” the, 170.
Moolu, African convert, 252.
Moore, Rev. J. Z., quoted, on Ko-—
rean Church, 193.
Moravia, gospel enters, 60.
Moravian Church, 81.
Moravian Mission, in Lesser Tibet, ©
340.
Moravian Missions, and revival, —
309.
Moravianism, born from Pietism, —
370. |
Moravians, in Africa, 235; in |
Dutch Guiana, 288; in Guiana,
281; in Nicaragua, 2091.
Morgenthau, Mr. Henry, Ameri- ©
can Ambassador in Constanti- —
nople, 213, 330; quoted on Turk- ©
ish atrocities, 214. |
Moros, tribe of the
Islands, 3109.
Morrison, Robert, career of, 135;
reaches Canton, 135; translated
first Bible in China, 136.
Morris Schools, 277.
Morocco, 237.
Moslem menace, in Africa, 254. :
Moslem World, before and since ©
World War, 355.
Moslems, Christian literature for,
357; in China, 150; in India, 98.
Mosque of Omar, 208.
Mosul, 217.
Motives, missionary, classes of, 22.
Moule, Bishop (Rev. G. H.), of
church mission at Hangchow,
143; quoted on Japan, 170.
Mount Ararat, traditional resting —
place of the ark; 200.
Movement, Christian, in China,
148; mass, in India, 110; non-
cooperation, in India, 117.
Mtesa, King of Uganda, 243.
Muir, Sir William, quoted on Mo-
hammedanism, 56.
Philippine
INDEX
Mukden, 191;
184.
“Mukti,” settlement of Pandita
Ramabai, 114.
Mullahs, in Persia, 104.
“Muller, George,” Japanese, name
of Mr. Ishii, 160.
Murray, Dr. Andrew, 241; gives
key to missionary problem, 3609.
Muscat, 217; Martyn in, 104.
Mustapha Kemal, sets up govern-
ment at Angora, 222.
Mutiny, Sepoy, 100.
Mwanga, King of Uganda, 243,
245.
Rev. John Ross at,
Nagasaki, island of Desima in, 150.
Namaqualand, Moffat sets out for,
238.
Namaquas, 240.
Nantucket, crown patentee of, 87.
Natick, first “Praying Town,” 85.
National Chinese Home Mission-
.ary Society, 359.
National Christian Conference, in
China, 148.
National Christian Council, in
China, 149.
National Cult, in Japan, 173.
National Missionary Society of In-
dia, 359.
oral period, of U. S. history,
8
Nationalism, in Japan, 167.
Nationalist party in India, 117.
Nationalists, Indian, demand home
rule, 357.
Native heathen tribes, in Malaysia,
324.
Native States,
aries in, 110.
Navarre, Saint of, 71.
Neander, 333.
Near East, 199-226; ancient em-
pires of, 200; Arabic in, 207;
area of, 199; changed feeling to-
ward missionaries in, 356; differ-
ent races in, 204; extent of, 199;
General Allenby’s army in, 201;
Jews in, 331; missionary advance
and development in, 217; mis-
sionary occupation of, 216; mis-
sionary outlook in, 223; mission
presses and literature in, 219;
lack of mission-
403
mission schools and colleges in,
217; neglected areas in, 220; new
highways in, 224; opened by
World War, 355; past and pres-
ent interest of, 199; peculiar dif-
ficulties of missions in, 219; pil-
grimages to, 202; pioneer prob-
lems in, 214; political outlook in,
222; politics in, 203; population
of, 199; present situation and
outlook, 221; railroads in, 201,
224; religions of, 202; religious
situation in, 215; strategic im-
portance of, 200; strife of na-
tions in, 200; trade in, 201; un-
occupied fields in, 221; war in,
212.
Need, China’s supreme, 150; evan-
gelistic, in Japan, 170.
Neesima, Joseph Hardy, 165; ca-
reer of, 165; educated at Am-
herst College, 166; educated at
Andover Seminary, 166.
“Neglected Continent,’ South
America named, 266.
Negritos, of the Philippine
Islands, 319.
Negroes, in Africa, 231; in Latin
America, 264; in Philippine
Islands, 322.
Nehemiah, 209.
Nejd, in Arabia, unevangelized,
221.
Nepal, 341, 348.
Nero, persecutions under, 46.
Nesbit, pioneer in New "Hebrides,
312.
Nestorian Church, 215; founding
of, 43.
Nestorians, in China, 133.
Nestorius of Constantinople, 43.
Netherlands Missionary Society, in
China, 137; in Malaysia, 324.
Nevius, Dro J: Lo vr42s twasits wicca
rea, 186.
“Nevius Method,” in Korea, 186.
New Caledonia, 208.
New China, 147.
Newell, Samuel,
107.
New epoch in China, 148.
New Guinea, 348; Chalmers in,
314; missionaries at, 312.
New Hebrides, 298, 303, 300-312.
New Hebrides Islands, extent of,
309; liquor trafic in, 304; popu-
joins “group,”
404
lation of, 309; transformation of,
312; under European rule, 304.
New Plymouth, landing of Pil-
grims at, 84.
New Testament Epistles, mission-
ary character of, 37, 39.
New theology, 362.
New York Herald, sends Stanley
to Africa, 240.
New York, Jews in, 329, 334.
New York City, missionaries in,
334; place of Jews in, 330.
Ngoni tribe, 246.
Nicaragua, Moravians in, 291.
Nice, captured by Crusaders, 62.
Nicolas of Antioch, 38.
Nigeria, 344; Islam in, 255.
Nikapu, Patteson goes to, 313.
Nile, 201, 345.
Nile Mission Press, 236; at Cairo,
210.
Ningpo, treaty port, 138.
Nippon, 152.
Nitrate in Chile, 269.
Nobunaga, minister of the
kado, 157.
Non-codperation movement in In-
dia (see Movement).
Norfolk Island, center at,
schools on, 313.
North Africa, 236; early spread
of Mohammedanism in, 55; ex-
tension during early church
period, 41; spread of Moham-
medanism in, 56.
North Africa Mission, 237.
North and South America, Jews
in, 328.
North Borneo, 323.
Northern and Southern Presby-
terian Mission, in Brazil, 285.
Northern and Southern Presby-
terian Missions, in Mexico, 293.
Northern Baptists, in Burma, 122.
Northern Europe, evangelization
of, 58.
Northern Presbyterian Board, in
Chile, 286; in Korea, 185.
Northern Presbyterian Mission, in
Colombia, 288; in Kamerun, 248;
in Syria and Persia, 216; in
Venezuela, 288.
North Timor, 323.
Norway, gospel enters, 59.
Nott, Samuel, joins “group,” 107.
Nottingham, Carey at, Ior.
Mi-
312;
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Norwegian Missionary Society, in
Madagascar, 260.
Nubians, 210.
Nyasa, 228.
Obligation, moral,
world, 338.
to evangelize
Obookiah, brought to America, 316.
Occupation, missionary, of Malay-
sia, 324; of the Near East, 216.
Oceania, 298-327; cannibalism in,
301; contact with civilization,
302; divisions, 298; European
Governments in, 304; immorality
in, 301; missionary work in, 304;
physical features of, 300; popu-
lation of, 300; record of civiliza-
tion in, 303; religion in, 301; so-
cial conditions in, 301; wunoccu-
pied fields in, 326; Western vices
in, 303, 326; wide distribution of,
208.
Oceanic America, 263.
“Oceanic” islands, 300.
Odin and Thor, worship of, 59.
O’ Higgins, 273.
Okayama Orphanage, opened by
Mr. Ishii, 1609.
Olaf, King of Norway, 59.
Olaf, King of Sweden, 58.
Olafs, two, apostles to Norway, 59. |
“Old Nana,” first convert in Bu-
luland, 252.
Olga, princess of Russia, 60.
Ono, plague breaks out at, 307;
Tongan teacher brings Christi-
anity to, 308.
“Open door,” 147; a menace, 361;
in Korea, 185; world-wide, 353-
355.
Open sore of the world, 230.
Operations, missionary, of Middle
Ages, 58.
Opium, prohibition of, in China,
147.
Opium War, 138, 140.
Orders, Monastic, rise of the, 64.
Oriental Christians, Armenians and
Nestorians called, 2009.
Oriental Christian sects, 207.
Oriental churches, attitude of, to
Christianity, 220.
Oriental Missionary Society, in Ja-
pan 177)
Origen, quoted, 44; teacher of
3
INDEX
Early Church Period, in Africa,
44.
Orinoco, 268.
Orthodox Jews, 331.
Osaka, Kawabe pastor at, 170.
Ostrich-culture, in Africa, 231.
Otto, Bishop of Bamberg, 59.
Ottoman rule, its rise and wane,
4 te
Outlook, missionary, in Korea, 197;
in Near East, 223; in Turkey,.
223.
Overtoun Institution,
rica, 246.
Oxford College, in Formosa, 175.
in East Af-
Pacific Islands, 348, 361; Asiatic
labor in, 326; political aggres-
sion in, 304; Western vices in,
304.
Paganism, in Africa, 232; in Oce-
ania, 302; in West Africa, 247.
Pagans, in Africa, 232)
Palestine, 199, 212, 214, 217; Bible
distribution in, 224; British man-
date in, 199; missionary tour of
Paul in; 383. missions -in, -216;
new open door in, 355; new spirit
of enquiry in, 357; under Brit-
ish mandate, 223.
Palestine Hebrew Press, 220.
Palmacotta, college for women in
South India, 113.
Patton, Dr. Cornelius H., quoted
on Islam in Africa, 254.
Panama Canal, 2091.
Pandita Ramabai, 113.
Pantcenus, in India, 100; mission-
ary to India, 42.
Papua, 208, 313.
Papuans, one of two racial groups,
301.
Parable, missionary, feeding the
five thousand, 33.
Paraguay, 346; missions in, 287;
revolutions in, 273; temporary
triumph of Jesuits in, 281.
Parana River, 268.
Paris, early churches in, 43; Zin-
zendorf at, 82.
_ Paris Evangelical Society, 240; in
Kamerun, 248; takes over mis-
sions in Madagascar, 261.
Park, Mungo, 235.
Parker, Dr: Peter) 137.
405
Parsees, 113.
Parsons, Levi,
214.
Past, worship of, in China, 132.
“Pastor Pastorum,”’ Latham, 30.
Patagonia, not far from Antarctic,
269.
Paton; «John Gy vcareet (of, (311 ;
Memorial Mission, 312; on slave
trade in the Pacific, 303; on
traders in the Pacific, 303; sent
to Tanna, 311; work in New
Hebrides, 312.
Patrick, apostle to Ireland, 51.
Patteson, John Coleridge, career
Qruat2
He taee Bishop, cause of murder
O
Peer martyrdom of, at Nikapu,
313.
Patton, Dr., on liquor in Africa,
257; quoted on civilization in
AtriCa25se.
Paul, and man of Macedonia, 34;
apostle to the Gentiles, 33; con-
ception of missions of, 365; ex-
tent of missionary tours of, 38;
greatest missionary of Apostolic
Period, 39; martyrdom of, 46.
in the Near East,
Paul the Hermit, originator of
monasticism, 64.
Paul, “The Apostle of Bonza
Manteke,” 251.
Paumotu Islands, 208.
Peace Conference, at Lausanne,
222.
Peace, steamer, Grenfell
covers Ubangi, 240.
Peking, 134, 184; center of Boxer
Rebellion, 145; Imperial Univer-
sity of, 142.
Pele, Hawaiian goddess, 317; Kapi-
olani defies, 317.
Pelew Islands, 208.
in, dis-
pene Hall Missions, in Bolivia,
287.
Pennell, Dr., martyr on Afghan
border, 342.
Pentecost, 33, 35, 38, 39, 41, 204.
Pentecost and missions, 360.
Pentecost at Hilo, 318.
Pentecost on the Congo, 240.
Pentecostal Bands of the World,
on Tibetan border, 341.
Pentecostal Mission, in Central
America, 201.
406 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Penzotti, Francisco, work at La
Plata Agency, 285.
Peoples, Eastern, changed attitude
of, toward missionaries, 356;
Slavic, united, 60.
Period, apostolic, extension of:
Arabia, 38; Egypt, 38; Mesopo-
tamia, 38: Persia, 38; Rome, 38.
Period, early Church, extension
during : in. Arabia, 41; Asia
Minor, 41; Egypt, 41; Greece,
41; Italy, 41; Mesopotamia, 41;
North Africa, 41; Persia, 41.
Period of exclusion, in Japan, 158-
150.
Period of Popularity, in Japanese
missions, 167.
Period of Preparation, in Japanese
missions, 167.
Period of Reaction,
missions, 167.
Periods of Protestant missions in
China, 135.
Perry, Commodore, 354; in Japan,
159.
Persecutions during Early Church
Period, 45.
Persia st00, 200, 212,217, 1341, 1342,
343; Bible distribution in, 224;
different rulers of, 209; early
spread of Mohammedanism in,
55; extension during apostolic
period, 38; extension during early
church period, 41; Martyn in,
104; Mongol rulers of, 209; neg-
lected districts of, 221; spread of
Mohammedanism in, 56.
Persian Gulf, 203.
Persians, 208.
Peru, 273, 346; ancient civilization
Of 2705: Central Railroad of,
260; Indian characteristics dom-
inant in, 264; missions in, 287;
unoccupied fields in, 288.
Peshawar (see Hoti-Mardan).
Peter, at Babylon, 38; missionary
to Persia, tradition about, 42;
missionary work of, 38; sent to
Cornelius, 33.
Peter the Hermit, journey through
Northern Italy and France, 61.
Peter the Venerable, abbot of
Clugny, 63.
Petroleum, 202.
ae Rev.) Dr, 3) .3H ain Japan,
160.
in Japanese
Philadelphia, Jews in, 320.
Philip, missionary work of, 38.
Philip of Spain, Philippine Islands
named after, 320.
Philip, sent to Ethiopian eunuch,
33:
Philippine Islands, 318-323; acces-
sory methods in, 322; America’s
stewardship in, 323; area of,
318: climate of, 319; historical
résumé of, 320; location of, 318;
old and new régime in, 320; peo-
ple of, 319; physical ieatures
and resources of, 319; population
Of, 310% unoccupied fields i in,.3228
unreached sections in, 322.
Philippines, 298, 300; for the
Filipinos, the, 361; thrown open
to missionary work, 354.
Philosophy, religious, in Africa,
232,
Pheenix Islands, 208.
Pierson, Dr. Arthur T., appraisal
of Xavier, 71; on Hawaiian re-
vival, 318; quoted on Duff, 104,
105; quoted on John Williams,
310; quoted on Korean Church,
193; quoted on Schwartz, 78;
quoted on Von Welz, 75; quoted
on Ziegenbalg, 78.
Pietist movement, 74, 76, 81.
Pilgrim Fathers, the, 84.
Pilgrimages, to Near East, 202.
“Pilgrim’s Progress,” translated
into Chinese, 139.
Pilkington, quoted on Uganda, 244.
Pinto, Mendez, Portuguese navi-
gator in Japan, 157.
Pioneers, medical, in China, 139;
noble, in Japan, 161.
Pirates, Japanese, molest Korea,
181.
Pizarro, Francisco, in South Amer-
ica. 272%
Plateaux, 230.
Pliny, letter of, to Erperon Tra-
jan, 42.
Plitschau, Henry, 77, 100; connec-
tion of, with African missions,
235.
Plymouth Brethren Mission, in
Central America, 201.
Pnompenh, unoccupied field of, 129.
Polycarp,
martyrdom of, 46.
disciple of John, 42;
INDEX
Poland, Jews in, 328.
Polyandry, in Tibet, 340.
Polygamy in Siam, 123.
Policies and Methods, mission, in
Korea, 185.
Po-ling, Dr. Chang, 140.
Political conditions in China, pres-
ent, 147.
Polynesia, 208.
Polynesians, one of twe
groups, 300.
Pomare II, King of Tahiti, 305.
Pomeranians, receive the gospel,
racial
59.
Porcelain, in China, 132.
Porto Ricans, in Hawaii, 315.
Porto Rico, codperation of mis-
sions in, 295; in Latin America,
; progress in, 295; thrown
open to missionary work, 354.
Portugal, in Africa, 234; in China,
135; prohibition of Protestant
missionary work by, 348.
Portuguese, colonies in Africa,
235; in Brazil, 272; in Formosa,
174 in | awa; (315%, India,
99; lose Ceylon to Dutch, 99;
in Japan, 157; language in Latin
America, 266; in New Guinea,
314; in Philippine Islands, 320.
Post Office, Chinese, 131.
Pratt, Rev. H. B., in Colombia,
284.
Prayermeetings, in Korea, 102.
Praying Towns, 85.
Preaching Friars, 66.
Preaching, open-air, 36; oral, 35.
Presbyterian Board, in Colombia,
284; in Philippine Islands, 322;
in Santo Domingo, 295.
Presbyterian Church of America,
to enter neglected field of Meso-
potamia, 217.
Presbyterian Mission, in Siam, 125.
Presbyterians, in Central America,
201.
Presbyterians of Scotland and
Nova Scotia, in New Hebrides,
31;
Present missionary outlook, the,
353-371.
Press, Anglo-Jewish, 330.
Presses, mission, and literature, in
Near East, 210.
Priests, of South America, immo-
rality of, 279.
407
Prince Henry, Portuguese explorer
OLvAirica, 1234:
Prince Regent of China, forced to
abdicate, 146.
Principles, Apostolic missionary,
32.
Printing press, established in Ma-
UlaccaAyerso;
Problem, facing the, 349; mission-
ary, key to, 360.
Problems, Pioneer, in Near East,
214.
Program, Missionary, two views
of, 366.
Progress, apostolic missionary, 38.
Preis political and religious,
348.
Prophets, missionary outlook in
the, 28.
Protestant Episcopal Board, in
Philippine Islands, 322.
Protestant Episcopal Church of
America, in China, 138; in Ja-
pan, 160.
Protestant Episcopal Mission, in
Brazil, 285.
Pe missionary outlook in the,
28.
Puritans, reach America, 84.
Pyeng Yang, 193; station in Ko-
rea, 187, 189, 190.
Pygmies, in South,Africa, 232.
Pyramids, of Egypt, 210.
Qua Iboe, in Calabar, 248.
Quality of apostolic converts, 39.
Quebec, early laborers in, Brebceuf,
88; La Salle, 88; Marquette, 88;
missions to Indians in, 88.
Questions, 29, 40, 47, 57, 67. 73, 88-
89, 95, 118-119, 120, 151, 175-176,
197-198, 225-226, 261-262, 296-
297; 327, 335-336, 352, 371.
Quetta, 342; missionary station at,
343.
Quichuas, in Ecuador, 290; mission
centers among, 289.
Rabbis, of Jerusalem, 220.
Rabbi Wise, 331.
Rabinowitz, 333.
Race, aboriginal, of Japan, 154.
408
Races, in Central Asia, variety of,
343; in Hawaii, diversity of, 315;
the Island, 300.
Radama, King of Madagascar, 259.
Rahab, suggestive of missionary
purpose, 20.
Railroad, Cape-to-Cairo, route of,
256.
Roatvaye in Africa, 256.
Rammohun Roy, friendship™ with
Duff, 105.
Ranavalona I, of Madagascar, 259.
Ranavalona II, of Madagascar, 260.
“Rand, The,” 257.
Rangoon, Burma, colleges at, 122;
Judson in, 107.
Raratonga, 314; Bible translation
in, 310; Williams in, 310.
Ra Undreundre, Fijian chief, 307.
Reading, Lord, 330.
Rebmann, John, discovered Mts.
Kilima-njaro and Kenia, 242; in
East Africa, 241,242; work as
explorer, 235.
Red Cross, in Near East, 224.
Red Sea, deserts along, 230.
Reformed Church of America, in
Arabia,. 217; in Japan, 160; to
enter neglected field of Meso-
potamia, 217.
Reformation, and the Bible, 69;
bearing upon later missions, 74;
period*of the, 68-73; relation of,
to missions, 68.
Reformers, attitude to missions, 68.
Régime, American, in Philippine
Islands, 320; Japanese military,
in Korea, 183; Spanish, in Phil-
ippine Islands, 320.
Religion, Hindu, and morality, 115.
Religions, in Persia, 209; minor,
in India, 9
Renaissance, 93.
Report of the Edinburgh Confer-
ence, quoted on occupation of
Africa, 253.
Report of the Panama Congress on
Christian work in Latin Amer-
ica, 285.
Resources, missionary, inadequacy
of, 349.
Responsibility, for missions, 365.
pian historical, 98; of Korea,
180
Revival at Banza Manteke, 249.
Revival, in Hawaiian Islands, 215°
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
need of, 368; the Great, centered
in Pyeng. Yang, Korea, 190.
Revolution in Japan, 163; in South
America, 273.
Rhenish mission, in China, 139; in
Malaysia, 324.
Rhodes, Cecil, statesman of South
Africa, 256.
Rhodesia, 228.
Rice, Luther, member of “Hay-
stack group,” 107.
Richards, Henry, in Belgian Congo,
240.
Richards, James, member of “Hay-
stack group,” 107.
Richards, Dr. Timothy, 143.
Richard “the Lion-hearted,” of
England, leader of Crusade, 62.
Rijnhart, Petrus, martyr in Tibet,
341.
Rijnhart, Dr. Susie, attempts to
reach Lhasa, 341.
Rio de Janeiro, churches of, 286;
colony -founded at,e281; develop-
ment of, 274.
Rio Grande, 263.
Riots in China, I4I.
ae College, at Constantinople,
218.
Robbins, Francis, member of
“Haystack group,” 107.
Rodgers, Rev. and Mrs. J. B., 322.
Rohold, Rev. S. B., article on the
Jew, 330.
Roman Catholic, missionary at-
tempts in Pacific, 305.
Romar, Catholic Church, opposition
of, to Protestant missions in
Mexico, 292-293.
Roman Catholic
Africa.232.
Roman Catholicism, in French
Indo-China, 128; in Siam, 124;
in the Philippine Islands, 321;
suppressed in Japan, 158.
Roman Catholics, martyrs in
China, 141.
Roman Empire, Christianity with-
in, 45; covered by missionary
work, 30.
Roman Government in North
Africa, 234.
Romanists, in Japan, 163.
Rome, attitude toward Christian-
ity, 45; burning of, 46; exten-
sion during apostolic period, 38.
Churches, in
INDEX
“Roof of the World” The, (see
Tibet).
Ross, Rev. John, translates Bible
into Korean, 184.
Roxbury, Massachusetts, Eliot at,
85.
Royal Geographical Society, Liv-
ingstone appointed by, 239; So-
ciety Islands named for, 305.
Rubber, in South America, 270.
Rugen, famous idol of, destroyed,
9.
Russia, first treaty with Korea,
182; in Near East, 203; Jews
in, 328.
Russian, Bible in,
Asia, 343.
Russians, conversion
Hawaii, 315.
Russo-Japan War,
rea} (183!
Ruth, suggestive of missionary
purpose, 209.
Ruwenzori, 230.
344; Central
Oty OO%e7 in
168; over Ko-
Sack of Smyrna, 222.
Sadhu Sundar Singh of India,
359.
Sahara Desert, 230,
products of, 231.
Saigon, western influence in, 128.
St. Paul de Loanda, Livingstone
at .230;
St. Sebastian, catacombs of, 46.
St. Thomas, West Indies, 83.
Saito, Baron, sent to Korea, 196.
Salvation Army, in Argentina, 286;
in Paraguay, 287; of Japan, 170.
Samaj, Arya, 115; Brahmo, 115.
Samarkand, 344.
Samoa, 298, 310.
Samurai, 155, 168.
Sandwich Islands, 315.
San Francisco, 268; River, 346.
Sanitation and hygiene, ignorance
of, in Mexico, 292; in South
America, 275.
San Martin, 273; General, captures
Convent of St. Thomas, 282.
Santa Cruz, 298; missionaries at,
A12,
Santo Domingo, forests of, 294.
Santos, great coffee port of Bra-
ZilA272.
344, 345;
409
Sao Paulo, Portuguese colonization
at, 272.
Sao Vincento, first colony in Bra-
Zi aty ie 7 2.
Saphir, 333.
Saracens, plans for conversion of,
63, 66.
Savannah, 230.
Scandinavian Alliance Mission, at
Darjeeling, 340; in Venezuela,
288
Scandinavian Missions, in South
Africa, 241.
Schereschewsky, 333.
Schmit, in South Africa, 237.
Schmidt, George, missionary pio-
neer in Africa, 235.
School, training, Pietist, 76.
Schwartz, Christian Frederic, 78;
in India, 100.
eee Presbyterian, in Calabar,
248.
Scotch Presbyterian Missions, 216.
Scotland, gospel enters, 52.
Scottish Propagation Society,
Brainerd under, 87.
Scranton, Dr. W. B., in Korea, 185.
Scudder, John, M. D., in India, 109.
Selwyn, Bishop, of New Zealand,
Bie:
Seoul, capital of Korea, 178; dem-
onstrations against Japan at, 195;
Marquis Ito in, 184; revival
spread to, I90.
Serampore, settlement founded at,
99.
Serampore Triad, 102.
Serjofee, his tribute to Schwartz,
80.
Tyee Day Adventists, in Bolivia,
280.
Shah of Persia, Martyn’s gift to,
104.
Shamanism, in Korea, 180.
Shan, Eastern and Western, in
Siam, 123.
Shanghai, Neesima in, 165; treaty
port, 138.
Shan States, division of Burma,
fOr
Shan States of Burma, 125.
Shans, tribe in Burma, 121.
Shansi, I41.
Shantung, 141.
Shantung, China, Korean missions
in, 194.
410 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Sharrocks, Dr., on Korean church
figures, 193; quoted, on Korean
Church, 192.
Shaw, Barnabas, in South Africa,
240.
Sheikh-Othman, 217;
216.
Sheikhs, Arab, new friendliness of,
sitar: Dr. A. L., martyr in Tibet,
Shimoda, open to American trade,
Shs. oldest religion of Japan,
eRe 157; in Japan, 156.
Shintoists, in Tokyo University,
in Arabia,
172,
Shiré Highlands, 245.
Shwe Dagon pagoda, at Rangoon,
e203
“Shoe-string republic, the,” 268.
Shogunate, 155, 160.
Siam, advanced conditions in, 123;
American Bible Society in, 125;
area of, 122; climate and prod-
ucts of, 122; Eastern, neglected,
125; moral conditions in, 123;
part of Southeastern Asia, 120;
people of, 123; population of,
122:
Siamese, in Philippine Islands, 320.
Siam Fu, tablet discovered in, 134.
Siberia, 343; Greek Church in,
347; Korean missions in, 194,
360; unevangelized, 347.
Sierra Leone, 247, 248.
Sikhs, in India, 08.
Silks, in China, 132.
Silliman Institute, at Dumaguete,
B22;
Silver, in Mexico, 202.
Simmons, DD: B:, M.D. 160.
Simonton, Rev. A. G., Presbyterian
mission founded by, 284.
Sinai Peninsula, unevangelized, 221.
Singapore, publishing plant at, 126;
rendezvous of races, 323.
Singh, Miss Lilavati, B.A., pro-
fessor at Lucknow College, 113.
Sinim, 131.
Sinkiang, the New Dominion, need
of workers in, 330.
Situation, new ‘political, in India,
117; religious, in Near East, 215.
Slave Coast, 234.
Slave trade, in Africa, 256; in
Madagascar, 259; in the Pacific,
303; in West Africa, 247; Liv-
ingstone’s fight against, 239; Op-
posed by Britain, 242.
Slavery, still existing ip Pacific,
304.
Sleeping sickness, 251; in Africa,
230.
Slessor, Mary, career of, 250; pio-
neer of Calabar, 250.
Smallpox, 257.
Smith, Dr. A. H., 143; quoted, 139.
Smith, Dr. Eli, 215; established
Press at Malta, 219.
Smith, Dr. George, quoted on Jud-
son, 108; remarks about Refor-
mation, 74.
Smith, Mary, marries Robert Mof-
fat, 238.
Smyrna, 205.
Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge, 77.
Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel, 78; in Assam, 120; in
Burma, 122;
86; in Japan, 161; in Madagas-
car, 260; in Malaysia, 325: 12
New England, 86;
Settlements, 126.
Society Islands, 298, 305-306; early
hardships in, 305; French occu-
pation of, 306; liquor in, 306;
opposing forces in, 305; vice in,
in Straits
300.
Society of Friends, 216.
Societies, early British, in India,
106; later, in India, roo.
Solomon, 298; prayer of, quoted,
20.
Somaliland, deserts along, 230.
Sorabji, Mrs., wife of one of first
converts, II3.
South Africa, first mission sent by
Moravians, 77; Moravian mis-
sions to, 83; prodicts of, 23.
South Africa General Mission, 241.
South Africa General Missions, in
Angola, 248.
South America, 348;
middle class in, 275; agriculture
in: Argentina, 270; Brazil, 270;
Chile, 270; Colombia, 270; Uru- |
guay, 270; area of, 266; best
cities of : Lima, 274 5 Quito, 274;
Santiago, 274; Sao Paulo, 274;
in Foreign Ports, °
absence of
INDEX
Bible colporteurs persecuted in,
278; Bible distribution in, 285:
Bible societies in, 284; bull-
fighting in, 276; climate of, 269;
coal fields in, 270; countries in
temperate zone: Argentina, 269;
Chile, 269; Paraguay, 269; Uru-
guay, 260; diseases in, 275;
drunkenness in, 276; early races
of, 270; early trail blazers in,
284; European discovery and
conquest of, 271; exports of,
270; first Protestant efforts in,
281; forests of, 268; gold in,
269; grape-growing in, 276;
hardwoods in, 270; heart of, un-
evangelized, 345; Iberian rule in,
272; ignorance of sanitation and
hygiene in, 275; _ illegitimate
births in, 276; illiteracy in, 275;
Lancasterian schools in, 281;
minerals of, 269; missionary
work in, 280; moral conditions
in, 276; Moravian missions to,
83; mountains, 268; names of,
266; opened to Protestant mis-
sions, 3553 pastoral resources of,
270; patriots of, 273; physical
features of, 268; population of,
266; present missionary occupa-
tion of, 285; racial classification
of, 264; republics of, 273; re-
sources and industries of, 260;
revolt against corrupt religion,
355; rivers of, 268; Roman
Catholic Church in politics in,
274; Romanism on trial in, 277;
silver.) #)°9 260%) ‘size * Of) /8207 >
social features in, 274; statistics
of missions in, 285; unchastity
in, 276; unoccupied fields in, 346.
South American Missionary Soci-
ety, 283; in field of Indian work,
289; in Paraguay, 287.
Southeastern Asia, 120-129.
Southern Baptist, in Chile, 286; in
Uruguay, 287.
Southern Baptist Mission, in Ar-
gentina, 286; in Mexico, 293.
Southern Baptist Missions, in Ni-
geria, 248.
Southern Cross, mission ship, 313.
Southern Methodist and Baptist
Mission, in Brazil, 285.
Southern Methodist Society, in
Korea, 185.
ALI
Southern Presbyterian Society, in
Korea, 185.
Southern Russia, 211.
South Sea Islands, Kimura in, 170.
South Seas, 303.
Soviet régime, in Central Asia,
343.
Spain, early evangelization of,43;
missionary tour of Paul in, 38.
Spaniards, in Formosa, 174; in
Hawaii, 315.
Spanish Harbor, death of Gardiner
in, 283.
Spanish, in Philippine Islands, 320.
Spanish Inquisition, in South
America, 277; methods used by
Turks, 213.
Spanish language in Latin Amer-
102,0200.
Speer, Dr. Robert E., quoted, on
Korean Christians, 189; quoted
on morals in South America,
276; quoted on neglected dis-
tricts in Persia, 221.
Speke, African explorer, 235.
Spener, Philip, 76, 360.
“Spots from Paradise,” 300.
Srinagar, station at, 342.
Stanley, Henry M., African ex-
plorer, 235; continues work of
Livingstone, 242; finds Living-
stone, 240; in Africa, 227; opens
up Africa, 354; quoted on Ba-
ganda people, 244; quoted on
Thomas Comber, 249; sends
challenge to Christendom, 242.
State-Church, relations in France
severed, 354.
Statistics, of Jewish missions, 333;
oa missions in South America,
285.
Stephen, first missionary martyr,
39.
Steppes, 343.
tevenson, Robert Louis, on James
Chalmers, 314.
Stewart, James, in Gani Africa,
240.
“Stewart of Lovedale,” 240.
Stock, Iranian, Persians descend-
ants of, 200.
Stockbridge, Massachusetts, Brain-
erd at, 87.
Straits Settlements, 126.
Strategy, lack of missionary, 348.
AL2
Stuntz, Bishop, on South America,
200.
Sublime Porte, 203.
Sucre, 273.
Sudan, Anglo-Egyptian, 201.
Sudan, Egyptian, 237; efforts of
missions in, 236.
Sudan Interior, in Nigeria, 248.
Sudan United, ‘in Nigeria, 248..
Sudanese, in Malaysia, 323.
Sudanese negroes, 210.
Ser Canal) 203.0252 >
through, 201.
Sultan of Zanzibar, treaty abolish-
ing slave trade given by, 242.
Sulu Archipelago, 320.
Sulu Sea, 318.
Sumatra, 298; lack of workers in,
325; missionary work on, 324.
Summary, of African paganism,
233; statistical, of missions in
India, 118; statistical, of mis-
sions in Japan and Formosa, 175;
statistical, of missions in Korea,
traffic
107
Sun Yat Sen, leader of republic,
147.
Sunrise Kingdom, 152.
Survey, Zionist, of Palestine, 208.
Susi, African convert, 252; servant
of Livingstone, 240.
“Suttee” rite, in ‘India, 103.
Swahili tribe, Islam in, 255.
Swain, Clara, M.D., ‘in India, III.
Swatow, Dr. Gibson worker at,
143.
Sweden, Gospel enters, 58.
Swedish Mission, in Abyssinia, 237.
Swedish Missionary Society, in
Chinese Turkistan, 330.
Swiss Brethren, in French Indo-
China, 128.
Swiss, evangelized, 53.
yen “Chin 103,
Syphilis, 257.
Syria, 1990, 207, 212, 214, 217; Bible
distribution in, 224; Dr. Bliss,
called father of, 219; early spread
of Mohammedanism in, 55; fa-
mous names connected with: Eu-
sebius, 42; Ignatius, 42; Jerome,
42; Justin Martyr, 42; Trajan,
42; French mandate in, 199; mis-
sionary tour of Paul in, 38; neg-
lected districts of, 221; new open
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
door in, 355; under French man-
date, 223.
Syrian Protestant College; at
Beirut, 218; name changed in
1921, 218.
Syrians, 207, 210.
Tablet, Nestorian, in China, 134.
Tabu, in Hawaii, 316; in Oceania, .
302.
Tacitus, quoted, 46; records Chris-
tians in Rome, 42.
art Commission, to Philippine —
Islands, report of, B21.
Tahiti, 309; Duff reaches, 305; ef-
fect ‘of Gospel in, 316; Fiji chief
visits, 308; transformation in,
300; transformation of, under
John Williams, 310; turning of
the tide in, 306.
Tai Ping Rebellion, 141.
Tai Race, demon worship among,
125; extent of, 125; in” Siam
123; population of, 125.
Taiwan, Japanese name for For-
mosa, 174.
Taloat Pasha, 211; boast of, 214;
plots extermination of Chris-
tians, 213.
Talmud, 331.
Tamil language, 77; Bible trans-
lated into, 78.
Tamils, in Malay Peninsula, 126;
in Malaysia, 323.
Tanganyika, 228.
Tanjore, native prince of, 79.
Tanna, island of New Hebrides,
hes
Taoism, in China, 132; in French
Indo-China, 127.
Tashkend, 344.
Task, the unfinished, in India, 116.
Taylor, Bishop William, in India,
110.
Taylor, Rev. J. Hudson, 144, 360;
founder of China Inland Mission,
143; views regarding condition
of heathen, 364.
Tchad, Lake, in the Sudan, 228.
Tchams, tribe of French Indo-
China, ©27.
Teheran, 221.
Telugus, Baptist mission of,
in Malaysia, 323.
Temple area, in Jerusalem, 208.
Terenas, 290.
Tips
INDEX
Tertullian, quoted, 44; writer of
Early Church Period, in Africa,
44.
Testimony, of visitors on Korean
Christians, 180.
Thaddeus, missionary to Persia,
tradition about, 42.
Thais, tribe of French Indo-
China, 127.
Tranquebar, mission at, 78.
Thibaw, King of Burma, 121.
Third period of missionary work,
140-144.
Thoburn, Bishop James M., in In-
dia, I10.
Thoburn, Isabella, in India, 113.
Thomson, James, agent oi
British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety, 284; began work in Buenos
Aires, 282; in South America,
2382: returns to England, 282;
school system of, established in
Chile and Uruguay, 282.
Thor-worship, by Germanic tribes,
53-
Three-Hour Sermon, of Kanamori,
170.
Tibet, 130, 131, 342, 348, 350; mis-
Sionary attempts to enter, 340;
Moravian missions to, 83; moun-
tains of, 339; new opportunity
in, 357; unoccupied field in, 150.
Tidal waves, in Japan, 153.
Tientsin, 141.
Tierra del Fuego, Spanish harbor
at, 282.
Tihwafu (see Urumtsi).
Tingli-mei of China, 3509.
Tocat, in Armenia, Martyn’s death
at, 104.
Tokyo, Dr. Uemura, pastor of
church in, 170; Home for Dis-
charged Prisoners in, 169; Im-
perial University at, 163.
Tokyo University, Religious Cen-
Bis) iu, )172.
Tomkins, martyred in New Guinea,
314.
Tonga Islands, 298, 307.
Tonga, missionaries at, 305; mis-
sionaries sent from, 308.
Tonking, protectorate of French
Indo-China, 127.
Torii, 156.
Toronto, University of, sends Gale
to Korea, 185.
413
Torture, abolition of, in. China, 147.
Tourane, Christian and Missionary
Alliance in, 128.
Tours, battle of, 56.
Tours, missionary, of Paul, extent
of, 38.
Traders, Dutch, in Japan, 159; in
Hawaii, evil influence of, 317;
ny Pacific; 302/313.
Tradition, Karen, 121.
“Training of the Twelve,’ Bruce,
0.
Training Schools, importance of,
in Africa, 251,
eee 77; settlement founded
at,
Tene? Andean Railroad, 268.
Trans-Caspian province (see Ba-
luchistan ).
Trans-Jordania, 199; under British
mandate, 223; unevangelized, 221.
Translation, Bible, first in Japan,
161; in Madagascar, 259; in
Raratonga, 310; into Bechuana
tongue, 238; in Western Pacific,
ATT)
Travancore, Xavier at, 70.
Treaties, first, with Korea, 182;
with Japan, 163.
Treaty, Japan-Korea, 184.
Treaty of Nanking, 138.
Treaty of Sevres, 222.
Treaty of Tientsin, 138, 140.
Nae ports in China, first five,
13
Trials, early missionary, in China,
139; in Near East, 214.
Tribe, Pequot, Eliot among, 85.
Tribes, aboriginal, in Malay Penin-
sula, 126; aboriginal, of French
Indo-China, 127; hostility of
savage and uncivilized, 348.
Tripoli, 237, 345.
Triumvirate, famous, rulers of
Turkey, 211.
Troas, ancient name of Troy, 205.
Troy, 205.
Trumbull, Rev. David, D.D., in
Chile, 284.
Tsai A- -ko, first Chinese convert,
13
Tsetse fly, carries sleeping sick-
ness, 230.
Tuberculosis, 257.
Tunis, 237; Moslem center, 64.
Turk rulers of Persia, 209.
414
Turks, 210; in Near East, 204.
Turkey, career of, 210; defeat of,
effect in India, 117; missionary
outlook in, 223; Mr. Henry Mor-
genthau in, 213; revolution in,
Zui
Turkish, Bible in, 344.
Turkish dominion, affected by
World War, 355.
Turkish Empire, countries in,+2I11.
Turkish Nationalists, action of, 222.
Turkistan (see Baluchistan), 204,
344. ,
Turner, Mr., pioneer in New Heb-
rides, 311. :
“Two Masters” government, in
New Hebrides, 304.
“Tycoon,” 155.
Tyler, Josiah, story of, 241.
Uemura, Dr., pastor of church in
Tokyo, 170.
Uganda, Baganda people of, 244;
King Mwanga of, 243; martyrs
in, 245; Moslem intrigue in, 243;
persecution in, 244; rapid growth
of church in, 244; Roman Cath-
olic intrigue in. 243; sleeping
sickness in, 230: Stanley sends
message from, 242; transforma-
tion of, 245; ‘wonderful mission
in, 244.
Ukrainia, Jews in, 328.
Ulfilas, apostle to Goths, 50.
Underwood, Rev. Horace G., in
Korea, 185; on division into
periods of preparation, 188;
quoted on Koreans, 179; quoted
on mission methods in Korea,
186; records classes in north
Korea, 187.
Union Theological Seminary, 287.
Union Training School, in San-
tiago, 286.
Unitas Fratrum, joining of Wal-
denses and Moravians, 81.
United Brethren, 81; in Philippine
Islands, 322; in Sierra Leone,
248.
United Brethren Board,
Domingo, 295.
United Christian Mission, on Ti-
betan ee 341; Shelton sent
out by, 3
United Eee Garech of Scotland, in
in Santo
South Africa, 240; Mary TEN an:
THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
served under, 250; took up work
of Falconer, 216.
United Presbyterian Mission, 216;
an Abyssinia, 237; in Egyptian
Sudan, 236.
United Presbyterians,
219, 230.
United Protestant Church, boards
establish, in Santo Domingo, 296.
United Provinces, lack of mission-
aries in, I16.
United States, first treaty with
Korea, 182; forces open door in
Japan, 160; Japanese in, 154;
Jews in, 328; Korean missions
in, 104, 360.
University, Imperial at Tokyo, 163.
Universities in India, 112.
Unoccupied fields, 337-352.
Upper Burma, 121.
Uprising, passive resistance, in Ko-
rea, 195.
Urban II, Pope, influenced Cru-
sade, 61.
Urga, 339.
Uruguay, climate of, 260; Euro-
pean characteristics of people of, '
264; missions in, 286; progres-
sive republic, 274; temporary tri-
umph of Jesuits in, 281.
Urumts1, need of workers in, 3390.
Utrecht, missionary college at, 54.
in Egypt,
Valparaiso, number of saloons in,
276.
Van Dyck, Dr. C. V., in Near East,
210.
Vanguard, Protestant, in Japan,
160; the Protestant, 235.
Vasco da Gama, sails round Af-
rica234)
Venezuela, 346; missions in, 288;
size of, 268; uprisings in,. 273.
Verbeck, "Dr. Guido F260; 1615
career of, 162.
Vices, Western, in Japan, 164; in
mission lands, 320
Victoria Falls, on Zambesi River,
228.
Victoria Nyanza, 228; Mackay dies
at, 243.
Victoria, Queen, made Empress of
India, 100.
Vienne, early churches in, 43.
Villegagnon, 73; leader of Hugue-
nots, 281.
INDEX
Vision, missionary, absence of
world-wide, 349.
Viadimir, King of Russia, 60.
Von Welz, the missionary agitator,
75.
Voodooism, in Haiti, 295; relic of
fetishism, 295.
Voyages Around the World, Cook,
TOK, Ye.
Vulgate, Latin version of Scrip-
tures, 42.
Wadai, 3
Wailing rises of the Jews, 208.
Nak se early Japanese convert,
107
- Waldenses, joined Moravians, 81.
oe Italian, in Uruguay,
207.
Walton, Spencer, 241.
Waneyor. ©) T . 140.
Ward, in India, 102.
Washington Disarmament Confer-
ence, David Yui “People’s Dele-
gate” to, 149.
Watson, Dr. Charles R., on tourists
to Egypt, 202; president of
Cairo University, 210.
Welsh Calvinistic Methodists, in
Assam, 120.
Wesley, John, 370; visit to Amer-
ita, (OA
Wesleyan Mission, in Sierra Leone,
248.
Wesleyan Missions, in South Af-
rica, 240.
Wesleyan Missionary Society, on
Afghan border, 342.
Wesleyan Society, in India, 106.
Wesleyans, in New Guinea, 315.
West Africa, 247 5 Christian colo-
nizing experiments in, 247; dis-
tribution of missions in, 248; sta-
tions along rivers ‘of, 248 ;
worthy pioneers in, 248.
Westminster Abbey, Livingstone
buried in, 240.
Whalers, in Pacific, 302.
White Peril, in Africa, 255.
Whitefield, evangelistic movement
under, 94, 370.
Williams College, 107.
elo a Dr. S. Wells, in China,
Wiilfams, John, career of, 300;
cause of murder of, 303; in New
ALS
Hebrides, 310; in Raratonga,
309; martyrdom of, 310; trans-
formation of Tahiti under, 310;
work at Samoa, 310.
Williams, Rev. C. M., 160.
Williams, Roger, founder of
Rhode Island, 84.
Williamstown, Mass., birthplace of
modern American missions, 107.
Willibrord, apostle to Holland and
Denmark, 53; bishop of Utrecht,
53-
Wilson, Captain of the Duff, 305.
Witchcraft, in Oceania, 302; re-
ligious origin of, 233.
“Witness,” keynote of New Tes-
tament Church, 39, 41.
Wittenberg, University of, Zinzen-
dorf educated at, 82.
Women, special work for, in In-
dia, L112.
Work, educational, in India, 113;
methods Of, tor Jews, 332; mis-
sion, forms of, in) Jjapanwnites:
missionary, cumulative effect of,
357; missionary, in China, 133;
missionary, in Formosa, 174; mis-
sionary, in India, 100; mission-
ary, in Japan, 157; missionary,
in Korea, 184; missionary, in
Oceania, 304; missionary, in
South America, 280; missionary,
in the Near East, 214; personal,
and social intercourse, 37; spe-
cial, for women, in India, 112;
zenana, in India, 112.
Workers, native, training of, 37.
World Missionary Conference, at
Edinburgh, 254.
World Missionary Conference Re-~
port, on occupation of India, 116.
World War, 200; bad effects of,
360; effects in Persia, 209; Euro-.
pean prestige lowered by, 360;
in East Africa, 246; Jews in,
330; missions at outbreak of,
355; \Lurkey ,enterssi2uns
World-evangelization, the task of,
367.
Worship, Emperor, in Japan, 173..
Xavier, Francis, associate of Lo-
yola, 66; effort to enter China,
134; estimate of his character,
71; in India, 100; in Japan, 1573.
missionary career of, 70.
416 THE PROGRESS OF WORLD-WIDE MISSIONS
Yale College, Obookiah at, 316.
Yamamuro, Colonel, “General
Booth of Japan,” 170.
Yangtse River, 130.
Yangtse Valley, 141.
Yedo Bay, Perry at, 159.
Yedo, Neesima born at, 165.
Yiddish, 332; prevalency of, 320.
Yo Mc. CAS 140% in) Indias 112)
oes, first Japanese chureh
167.
eV enne Turks,” led by’ T alaat and
Enver, 213.
Young Turks Party, 211.
Yuan Shih Kai, 147.
Yui, David, General Secretary of
National Executive, Ye NEA
149.
Yunnan, 150; field opened in, 359.
Zambesi, 257.
Zanzibar, universities mission at,
245.
Ziegenbalg, Bartholomew, 77; con-
nection of, with African mis-
sions, 235; in India, 100.
Zinzendorf, Count von, 82, 360;
oe with Wesley, 94; quoted,
2
Zionism, attitude of, to Christian-
ity, 220.
Zionist Movement, 208.
Zionists, in Palestine, 202.
Zoroastrians, in India, 98; in Per-
sia, 200.
Zulus, 232.
Zwemer, Rev. S. M., D.D., in
field of Moslem missions, 217; on
neglected areas in Malaysia, 325;
population of Arabia, 206;
quoted, appeal for Near East,
225; quoted, on Near East sit-
uation, 224; quoted, on pilgrim-
ages to Mecca, 202; quoted, on
unoccupied fields, 337.
Zwingli, 68
eae y ‘ é
Le Ee eatin ep
Bingen
Se techitiet Sect)
Anita
Sr i eens ae
pistes EA I RIA ET
ene oe epee
nigh $47yab lhe 1S AEE
god Sip rgndn ea vioon
eee cash ees
ancigaphu se antvee
Sed Kaye eee ene
pins Robaina ys ky meer a Lae
Sates. eatgogiues
Ce eT . aenfiehaateante
eat whet ied tea nent percent
Creede: ates
peue en ree
eee ve Me pce
QR BOSS a AO A
Dee a ed
ae ese Pepin 2
aa brace
Sag Serene SSS te ies
port ete
ay te =
eavicnsvapeucat eishecrrcesvee eee oe
FES EDR R ES ee =
8 PVC Kieth Ih RENT! paseo
sousnncue see
BS mie ah Be
Pt SEER OE LEME IEE
Fino ei aL VR EECA A YE EEA SA PF
ae eee err alse WE ites ARP GES “